

LIBRARY OF 


fflfmjt. Co|im iriW I in 

Shelf 'S3 ; 


UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 


vvvvwvy^yw^vvvy^yy vv vy^Nv 

'"X - ; r :! - * 

^v : J : J ;*y 
v • • *:- j •.•*■ 

/ v wwwy Y uMW^aa^ - , ■>/juwVVYWgW wWw ^ 

v * vv - 

- ■• ■ vwv ^ vv ' v ^v^wu ^ 


^Vy^*VyVwJv^v^ 

















GERMAN, 

LITTLE “BOOK OF GERMAN” 

THAT IS 

HIGH SCHOOL PRIMER, 

RECORD OF PROF. C. C. SCHAEFFER’S, LATE PROF. OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE 

IK THE 

UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, 

PHILADA. BOYS’ CENTRAL HIGH SCHOOL INSTRUCTION 

TEST COURSE, 

(THROUGH IN FOUR HOURS AND A HALF), 

WITH 

CHILD’S STORY BOOK, STORY OF THE LITTLE DROP, AND 
OTHER STORIES, ADDED; 

ALSO, 

UNIVERSITY TEST AND PRACTISING COURSES, FOR ADULTS. 

A FIRST, OR A B C, YET, WITH ITS “KEYS,” 

A CENTURY BOOK. 

SECOND ACTUAL, OR FIRST REGULAR/ REVISED EDITION. 


American and English readers will open (commence 
examination of) the book, page 249, Chapter on English . 
that part of it, which directly treats of English (pages 
249-251.) 


General distribution of subjects through the book , “ High School 
Primer ” : 

A. High School Primer , proper , Record of High School Test Course, I. 
“ Theory ” (Principles), the German sentence, in its structure, as a whole, 
pages 21—37 ; then, the same in its parts, words, Inflection : Declension , Con- 
jugation, with Diagrams , pages 50-63, proceeded, these latter chapters, by 
“ Analogy ,” a treatise showing in what English and German agree , and in 
what they differ, pages 37-49; then, “ Questions ,” for review of these rules 
of inflection, pages 64-74, then, practice, of these rules, as “ Analysis” pages 
75-94. II. part of High School Course, Texts: Letters, Pronunciation; 
Conversational and Reading matter, collections of words, interspersed with 
incidental items and supplemental pieces, and parts, of grammar (“ Umlaut,” 
page 135, Plural of Nouns, etc.), also, High School Documents, showing 
Time Table of High School Course (page 134) ; closing with beginning of 
Schiller’s “ Tell.” pages 95-138. 

HEsT" The parts, as seen, are arranged here not according to some external rule or 
order, but according to their own inherent fitness and connection as parts of a whole 
designed to instruct, and this in the quickest and at the same time, the most thorough 
way? aided in this hy discoveries of new principles and an explanation and condensa- 
tion of facts. 

Continued on Fourth page of Cover. 


V 



High School Test Course. 
Child’s Story Book and Dictionary. 
(Appendix :) 

University Test and Practising Courses. 


Author’s Advertisement : Abstract of Lecture on the 
Philosophy of the English Language. 


SQUARE INCH, CHECK. 



THE AMERICAN SYSTEM. 

German. 


THE 



THAT IS, 

High School Primer; 

~\ 

Child’s Story Book and Dictionary, 

AND 

APPENDIX, 

University Test and Practising Courses. 

« 

BY 

Prof. C. C. SCHAEFFER, 

LATE PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA. 



CHARLES, BROTHER & CO. 

t 8 7 5. 

See Publishers’ Notice, next page. 

7t 


.S3 

OV^' 


Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1875, 

By C. J. C. SCHAEFFER, 

In the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 


FRIENDS OF THE SYSTEM 

Will please report any errors in point of 
type or composition of text, 

And oblige, 

Very respectfully, 

The Publishers. 


TO 

CLASS H 2 , 

WINTER SESSION, 1874-75, 

Boys’ Central High School, 

PHILADELPHIA, 

IN TESTIMONY OF THEIR OWN GOOD WILL, AND THE GOOD WILL 
OF THEIR PROFESSOR, AND THE PRESIDENT OF 
THE SCHOOL, 

gn % late tot Course, 

FOUR HOURS AND A HALF THROUGH, THIS BOOK IN ITS 
GRAMMAR PART, AS A 

RECORD OF THE COURSE, 

WITH HIS THANKS TO THE COMMITTEE, IS INSCRIBED BY 


fire Jtotftjor. 




PREFACE 


The origin of this little book or work is as follows: While the 
author was engaged with the composition of a larger work on the 
study of German, the thought occurred to him to try the system (see 
title) on a larger scale with a class of new boys at the Philadelphia 
High School, during the time of a vacancy then existing at that 
institution in the department of German. Although in the mean- 
time the place had been filled, the permission was most readily and, 
we must say, most generously given by the authorities and most 
heartily concurred in bv the present incumbent. The result is this 
little book. 

How to use it : With small children, begin with the u Little 
Drop,” Child’s Story Book. With larger children, school-boys or 
girls, commence with the beginning and go straight through the 
book, except u Themes ” (collection of words), Idioms, and con- 
tents- of similar chapters, which ought to be distributed through 
the book according to the requirements of the class. 

We can only say at the beginning what we say at the end: May 
it please the children. 

Chestnut Hi el, ThE AUTHOR. 

Philadelphia, 

July, 1875. 



CONTENTS 


(Index, as to pages, see below.) 


Publishers’ Notice. 

Inscription. 

Preface. 

Contents. 

A. 

Philadelphia Boys’ Central High School Test Course , Four 
Hours and a Half Through. High School Primer, proper ; a copy of 
the course. 

I. 

“ Course.” 

a. INTRODUCTION ; side notes. 

Division of study. 

Style. Principle: t o u build.” 

Application of principle. 

Separable prefixes. 

Separate words used as such prefixes. 

Cases, meaning of words, Nouns as such. 

' Place of Pronouns. 

“ Complements oe Action.” 

Synonyms of style (sentences) explained. 

Range of the action of this principle with words, as complements of the 
Verb. 

Objective Pole or part, of a sentence. 

Subjective Pole or part. 

Principles of changes in the subjective part, illustrated. 

“ Positions of the Verb ” explained and analyzed. 

Positions of the Verb, in the order of their numbers as positions. 

1st pos., straight; 2d pos., emphatic; 3d pos., dependent; 4th pos., 
question. 

Supplemental Note: 

Place of Adverbs, Infin. and Past Part. 


9 


10 


Review, of the Rules, that is, 

Reprint of the Examples ; 

Reading lessons : 

German text in English type. 

German text in German type. 

German text in German script. 

Transit, main line : Letters of Inflection. 

Analogy, between English and German. 

Proportion : explained. 

Detail : agreement. [ment. 

System of changes, or special modifications of form, under general agree- 
German words of text repeated in English type. 

German words of text repeated in German type. 

German words of text repeated in German script. 

Difference : 

“Grammar.” 

Principle of “ Style.” 

Pronunciation. 

Gender. 

Principle: force, form. 

Application and illustration : 

Chair , bench , sofa. 

Analogy (agreement and difference) between these. 
Instruments. 

Sun and moon. 

Other words. 

End of side notes. 

6. INFLECTION. The DIAGRAMS. 

a. Declension. Diagram of “ Declension.” Cases. 

Declension of Common Nouns, Singular. 

Effect of liquid letters. 

“ Quality Nouns,” Sing, and Plur. 

Adjectives. 

Definite Article. 

Words declined like Definite Article. 

Declension of rest of words. 

Appendix. 

Personal Pronouns. 

Suffixes of Nouns, Adjectives, Adverbs. 

Prepositions. 

Adverbs. 

Conjunctions. 

Interjections. 

“ Review.” 

b. Conjugation. Diagram 1 , Verbs. 

Classes of Verbs: 1. Regular. 2. Irregular. 8. Having “ Both Changes. 
Endings, general and special. 


— 11 — 

Subjunctive, formation of, general. 

Example and illustration : 

Construction, on principle of one simple form of Verb. 

Other changes : 

Subjunctive, special. 

Exchange. 

Second change. » 

Local changes. 

Illustrated in one Verb. 

Euphonic changes. 

Section of chart of Irregular V erbs. 

List of Verbs having “ Both Changes,” in full. 

2. Auxiliary Verbs. Diagram. 

The Auxiliaries first in their simple forms as Verbs. 

Use of “Werde.” 

The Auxiliaries in their offices as Verbs' among themselves. 

The Auxiliaries as seen in action with other Verbs. 

Construction of Compound Forms of Verbs ; process : 

1. Exchange of Verb (Auxiliary Verb or Verbs), and: 

2. Change of place of Verb. 

Illustrated. 

The Diagrams reviewed : 

Common School Questions , on contents of diagrams ; given with the diagrams 
to facilitate the study and acquisition of their contents. 

High School Examination Questions, on Inflection ; given here for in- 
struction, and copied from that part of the examination held at the High 
School Building after the course. 

Supplemental Note, referring to “ Positions of Verb.” 


C . MODE AND METHOD of Analysis ; copy of Course. 

“ Der Staar,” “ carving ” of Staar commenced ; English type. 

Analysis of Staar, as “carved.” 

Dialogue on Staar. 

First part of Staar repeated, German type. a. carved, b. not carved. 
First part of Staar, German script. 

Mode and Method of Instruction as seen here from the Staar, Remark. 
Rest of Staar, Analysis, English type. 

Rest of Staar, in German type. a. carved, b. not carved. 

Rest of Staar in German script. 

Another piece: “Riddle,” The “Eye” (Schiller); English type, 
translated. 

“ Music : ” Lorelei , German type, translated. 

The “ Riddle,” 1st Strophe, analyzed , German type. 

Record of Analysis. ■ 


12 


First Strophe of “ Riddle ” presented for practice, large letters (Eng- 
lish type). 

First Strophe of “ Riddle,” German script 

Second Strophe of “ Riddle ” German type, “ marked.” 

“Music:” Erlkonig, German type, translated. 

Tables: Collection of the words of the Riddle and the Staar; specimen 
collection, for pupils. 

Note, touching the collection and acquisition of words. 

Morgenlied, of Schiller , analyzed, translated and marked, German type. 
Music: “Station,” Bell, “ Little Evening Bell,” Abendglocklein. 


II. 


High School Readings. * 

Reading, Pronunciation, Letters. 

Collection of Phrases and Words, Idioms, Themes, Dialogues. 

Sketches : 

“ Umlaut,” “ Plural of Nouns,” Items of “Style,” Chart of the “ Irregular 
Verbs,” etc. 

Tell. 

High School Documents: 

Time Table (Course). 


A. Texts (from Course). I. Reading, Letters. 

II. “ Pronunciation:” The “ Little Drop.” 


“ Umlaut .” 

Centennial Sketch; new. 


B. Pieces, a. Storehouse of words, phrases, idioms ; Dialogues. 

1. Leichte Gesprache (easy dialogues). 

a. Text, Lessing, from course. 

1. Reading, pronunciation, accent. 

2. Analysis, first part; specimen, from course. 

3. “ Verb,” construction of one full verb of the text, on prin- 
ciple ; first part. From course. 

as such (Dialogues). “Lessing,” “The Servant,” etc. 

b. Minor Points, or Grammatical idioms, illustrated and explained ; 
from course. 

2. Common Idioms, selected and arranged as to subject, kind and 
alphabetically. 

3. Practice, numbered and to be in writing. Fixed rate of progress. 
Promiscuous. 


13 

4. Themes, for conversation. 

A. Facts, of Man; 

1. Central; a. personal, b. social, 2. Parts; a. body; b. soul, 
3. Portions, facts and features external. 

B. Forms of Actions, and incidents of life of man. 

a. Individual, mental, powers of man. b. Incidents, ma- 
terial and mental. 

The “Walk ” (Schiller).. 

C. Transactions of Man. Forms of Life of Man. “ Dialogue,” 
from Schott’s. 

b. High School Pieces. 

A. Texts. 1. Last Pieces, as such. 

a. “Analysis” (from Course), b. Classic Pieces: The Maid of 
Orleans; “Friendship;” Pflicht fur Jeden; Freund und Feind. 

2. Idioms of Style (from Course). 

B. “ Sketches ” (in “ part from ” Course). 

1. Plural of Nouns. 

2. “ Style," Recapitulation. 

3. Items of “ Chart of Irregular Verbs ” (from Course). 

4. Note as Text: “Complements of Impulse.” 

5. High School Documents. 

Time Tables of Course, and of Examination after the Course. 
.C. Close of “High School Course “Schiller’s Tell,” opening 
of (in full from Course). 

End of “A,” High School Test-Course, “ High School Primer.” 


B. 

CHILD’S STORY BOOK AND DICTIONARY. 

I. CHILD’S OWN, or THE STORY OF THE LITTLE DROP; 
a little drop itself, this story, as story. 

1. “TROEPFLEIN”. A. What the “Little Drop” must do and can do. The 

little drop falls : baS ©rityflein fattt. ®te ©cfcfyidjte be8 ©rityfleinS faQt, tote 
etn ©rityfletn, (the story of the little drop falls, like a drop). Text of Tropf- 
lein, a. taught: 

I. SEropflcin (little drop); 

•II. 58Iumd)Cit (little flower); 

III. Chicttctt (springs); 

IY. $ifcf)lctn (little fish); 

Y. SBacb (brook); 

YI. $Iug (river); 

VII. 9Jlccr (sea). 

2. ( “BLTJEMCHEN”, little flower. A little flower of practice blooms up, from 

the “Little Drop”.) Canon. 

• 

3. (“QUELLEN”, springs; springs of sound flow from the sound of the words 

of the little “drop”.) Text of Tropflein, b. teaching: 

a. “Echo” (sounds); -JXhle, Muhle. 

b. Words. 

c. Sentences. 

B. WHAT we CAN DO AND MAY DO. 

4. (“FISCHLEIN”, little fishes of work, at play in the “Little Drop”.) a. sen- 

tences. b. letters. 

5. (“BACH”, brook. The brook of labour drives the mill of speech. Sacks of 

grain, as words, waiting outside, for the work of the mill.) Conversation. 

6. “FLUSZ”, river. River of Speech ; 

supplies the mill, as: 

II. “LIVE STRINGS OF WORDS”, 

that is: Text of German Readings, offered and translated as words*, 
a collection of words: 

1. ®er ©ffenfefyrer (the chimney sweeper). 

2. giircfyte nid)t8 (fear not). 

8. ©ultcm mit bent ft'orbe (Sultan with the basket). 

4. ®er blinbe SBntg (the blind king). Uljlanb. 

5. 8tatf>fel (riddle), ©fitter. 

6. ®te ©t$e unb bie SBeibe (the oak tree and the willow). 

7. ®a8 jerbrodjene §ufeifen (the broken horseshoe). • 

8. ©a8 ©antenlorn (the seed grain). 

9. Statljfel (riddle). Day and night 

10. ®ie 3al)reS$etten (the seasons). 

7. j 0ee, Sfteer* 

puzzles the child, as: 


15 


• III. CHILD’S READER, and DICTIONARY (Compass). 

a. Reader. 

1. ®ie $tnber ltnb ber $D?onb (the children and the moon). Curtmann. 

2. Stbenbruf; (evening rest). 

3. 2aQ (Snlenfpieget (Till Eulenspiegel). 

4. 2>er 2Jlamt nut ber ©age (the man with the saw). 

5. 2)e6 SirtbeS SBunjcfy (the child’s wish). 

6. 2)ie $irtenfI8te (the herdsman’s flute). Ahn’s Method. 

7. 2Iefo£ (Esop). 

8. Sanjltebc^en (little dance song). 

9. ®ie 2Iugen (the eyes). 

10. @orge (care). 

11. Ueber alien ©ipfeln — (over all tops — ). ©oetf;e. 

12. Slnefbote (anecdote). §ebel. 

13. 2Baf)rer Sftutl) (True courage). 9tid;ter. 

14. 2Bdd;terruf (watchman’s cry). 

b. Practice. 

1. One way, German into English ; Translate. 

2. Practice, the other way, English into German ; translate. 

3. Practice working two ways, at one and the same time : 

A. Proverbs. 

B. Idioms : 1. as such ; 2. applied in translation ; A. German 

into English ; B. English into German. 

c. Reading. 

Tropflein, Little Drop. 

®aS Srityflein erfldrt al8 jteei Sropflctn. (The Little Drop explained, 
as two drops.) 

DICTIONARY, 

(Child’s, for Reader; covering also former pieces where the English is not 
given with the piece.) 

German-English and English-German. 

C. 

UNIVERSITY TEST AND PRACTISING COURSES. 

Address. 

Appendix : Courses. 

1. The Desert Island (Ahn’s). — 2. Destiny of Man (Fichte). — 3. The 
Southern Cross, A. v. Humboldt. — 4. Beginning of Goethe’s Faust ; 
with Notes. 

5. University Test Course. 

6. Long Words. 

7. Transpositions, a. Parts transposed, b. Words transposed. 

8. Reconstruction of the Fire Scene, “Song of the Bell” (Schiller). 
Closing Remarks : The Five Students. . 

END OF BOOK. 

Fly leaves: 

Author’s Advertisement of the “American System of Teaching”: The “ Wrought 
Language.” English explained on Principle and reduced to Law. Abstract 
of a Lecture. 

Square Inch: Check. 


Publishers’ Advertisements ; see as to these, also back of main title of book. 


INDEX. 


(PAGES.) 


/ 


The pages are numbered twice : at the foot as pages of the section, and at the top as pages 
of the book. The numbers as given here are the pages of the book. 




A. — Test Course, 

I. 

Introduction (Style, Gender), 

Inflection, Declension and Conjugation, . . 

Declension, .... 

Conjugation, .... 

High School Examination Questions, . . . 

Mode and Method of Analysis, . ... 

II. 

High School Readings, 

Reading, Pronunciation, 

Easy Dialogues, 

Idioms, 

Practice, 

Themes, ... 

Pieces, Sketches, High School Documents, 

B — Child’s Story Book and Dictionary, 

1. The Story of the Little Drop, 

2. Live Strings of Words, 

3. Child’s Reader, 

Dictionary, 

C — Appendix: University Courses, .... 


PAGES 

17 to 138 


17 “ 49 
60 “ 65 
60 “ 55 
56 “ 65 
67 “ 74 
75 “ 94 


. . 95 “ 138 

. . 95 “ 98 

. . 99 “ 107 

. . 108 “ 110 

. . Ill “ 113 

. 113 “ 128 

. . 129 “ 138 

. . 139 “ 220 

. . 139 « 164 

. . 165 “ 181 

. . 183 “ 199 

. . 200 “ 220 

. . 221 “ 241 


Author’s Advertisement : The 

“ Wrought Language ,” 243 “ 251 

Square Inch, Check, 253 

Publishers’ Advertisements. 

16 


HIGH SCHOOL PRIMER. 

{TEST COURSE .) 

ALSO, 

CHILD’S STORY BOOK AND DICTIONARY. 


A. 

Boys’ Central High School 

PHILADELPHIA, 

Xcft <£ourfe, German; 

NEW CLASS; INSTRUCTION COURSE: 

Four Hours and 
a half Through. 

Record of Course. 


I. Course. II. Readings. 


CHARGE TO THE CLASS: 


“ STEAM.” 


































































21 



“THE COURSE.” 

a. INTRODUCTION. 

Students have to learn three things : words , forms , 
idioms. 

Of these, words and idioms being more or less a 
matter of memory, we at first proceed with the forms. 

These again are of three kinds : 

First . Forms of words, singly, or the infection of 
words. 

Second. Selection of forms as forms governed, or 
the government of words. 

This, where it differs from English, is again, more 
or less, a matter of memory ; and 

Third. The place, or the placing of words. In 
English, this is covered by the principle “ to run 
in German by the principle, “ to build.” 

You, in English arrange a sentence as you would 
a train of cars : the heaviest, weightiest, as momen- 
tum, at the beginning, the lightest (“ caboose”) at the 
end; we in German divide the heavy parts, a3 in 
building a house : the heaviest, as foundation , from two 


Division of 

study. 


Forms. 


“ Style," 
here as place 
of words. 
Principle in 
German to 
build. 


22 


The prin- 
ciple illus- 
trated. 


The princi- 
ple applied. 

Separable 

prefixes, 

emphatic. 


Separate 
words, used 
as such pre- 
fixes em- 
phatic. 


Emphatic 
case, accu- 
sative. 


sides, beginning and end, the lightest (“ top”) in the 
middle. The English sentence: I shall reconsider 
the matter after having read the letters which I re- 
ceived ; would, therefore, read in German : “ I shall 
the matter, after I the letters, which I received, have 
read (read have), once more consider.” 

This relative weight and proportion in point of 
place of the parts, expressed in print (type) would 
therefore look: English: I shall reconsider 
the matter after having read the letters which 
I received ; in German : “I shall the matter, 
after I the letters, which I received , read have, 
once more consider.” 


Agreeably to this principle, in German, 

a. Separable prefixes, as emphatic words or parts, go 
to the end: 

Sclmeide das gefalligst ab — cut that off if you please ; 
the verb being in full, ab schneiden, to cut off (schneiden 
to cut, imperf. schnitt, p. p. geschnitten, accent here on 
“ ab”) 

b . Separate words , when used as such prefixes, that is 
with the force and meaning of a prefix, go to the end. 
“ Ich esse um zwolf Uhr zu Mittag” lit : I eat at twelve 
o’clock for midday, noon ; the verb being in full, “ zu 
Mittag essen ,” to eat for noon ; and the idea of the verb 
being, not simply to eat (“ essen ”), but to eat for noon, for 
dinner, to dine. 

So the “ prefix,” that is here the words , “ zu Mittag ,” 
in their force and meaning as a prefix go to the end. 

Agreeably to this principle, 

c. Of the two cases, the dative which is the case of the 
indirect object, and the accusative which in German is the 
case of the direct object, where they meet inj>ne sentence, 
as a case, the accusative goes to the end, not the dative. 
So the words : to the brother, and the book, would in 
German have the natural order as cases: 


23 


“ I gave to the brother the book ” — Ich gab dem Bruder 
das Buck , although, if we wanted to emphasize the idea 
“ brother,” then we might put the dative to the end, and 
say : Ich gab das Buch dem Bruder — I gave the book to 
the brother; an accent, stress of voice, additional to the 
accent inherent in the place would rest then, as a rising 
inflection, on the word “ brother.” 

That is, we can do this with cases, as cases or emphatic 
words, when both are nouns. But if one is a personal 
pronoun, and the other a noun, then, as far as the ques- 
tion is a question of place between noun and pronoun, of 
course the noun goes to the end, as the heavier word, not 
the pronoun — a noun expressed being naturally heavier 
than a noun merely understood, in the pronoun : “ I gave 
it to the brother, Ich gab es dem Bruder ” (so that we see a 
noun may be emphatic on three counts: first, as a case ; 
second, by its meaning ; and third, as a noun), although, 
as far as the question is a question simply of the place of 
the pronoun as such, it is decided by the place of pro- 
nouns when governed by a verb, which is close to their 
governing verb — to the verb itself, or its normal place as 
a verb — and this in proportion as they are governed, that 
is as a rule, where both cases occur, the accusative keep- 
ing closer to the verb : “ Ich gab es ihm — I gave it to 
him.” 

This order and place of the pronouns is maintained in- 
dependent of other words, and irrespective of the number 
of other words that may be in the sentence, for instance 
(order of words as in German) : “ I gave it to him last 
night in the theatre:” “Ich gab es ihm gestern Abend 
im Theater” — where in no case, that is under no form of 
change of meaning, w r e could place the es ihm — it to him — 
anywhere else than where they now are, close to the 
verb. 

Personal pronouns in German, when governed by a 
verb, are in fact treated and considered as mere “ peb- 
bles,” not as building stones, and are used to fill up the 
only open place or hole in a German sentence, viz., the 
place near or after the verb,* and when once there, are 
ruled directly, or are subject in direct order, to the gov- 


Meaning 

emphatic 


Nouns as 
nouns, em- 
phatic. 


Nouns may 
be emphatic 
on three 
counts. 


Place and 
order of pro. 
nouns when 
governed by 
a verb. 

When 

alone. 


When 
standing 
with other 
words, gov- 
erned by 
the verb : 
place and 
order the 
same. 


Pronouns 
are “ peb- 
bles." 


24 


la English 
“dry 
leaves ”, 
drawn into 
the wake of 
the verb. 


ernment of the verb, this as in English, where they, like 
dry leaves, are whirled into and then bound to follow in 
the wake, that is the current of thought created by the 
energy of the passing verb. 


Their place, 
as the same 
place in 
both lan- 
guages, ex- 
plained. 


So that for once, in the case of these pronouns, the two lan- 
guages agree , though from opposite reasons, the pronouns having, 
in their weakness, assigned to them in each language a place near 
the centre of the sentence after the verb ; in the language of 
“motion,” they are drawn, and held fast, there, as the place of 
highest motion, in the language of “rest,” they are thrown and 
left there, as the place of more perfect rest. 


Comple- 
ments of the 
idea of the 
verb, •* com- 
plements of 
action.” 


Effects of 
these com- 
plements 
when ob- 
served ; act- 
ing as a key 
to the mean- 
ing of the 
verb. 

Examples. 


The mean- 
ing of the 
sentences 
differs as 
much as the 
meaning of 
the verbs. 


These emphatic pieces or parts of a sentence completing 
as such the idea of the verb, we call 

“Complements of Action,” 

(the sep. pref. or words used as such, completing the 
element of impulse , see “ Note,” Text , end of second 
part ; and governed cases, emphatic meaning of nouns 
as such, completing the element of effect, in the verb) 
and it is by watching them, that we arrive at the true 
meaning or intent of an action as expressed in the verb. 

For instance, in the sentence in German : I gave to my 
brother the hook ( Ich gab meinem Bruder das Buck — 
repeat it) the main idea is to give the book ; secondary, to 
whom ? to the brother. 

In the sentence, as in German : “ I gave . the hook . 
to my brother” lch gab das Buch meinem Bruder , the 
main idea is, to give to the brother ; secondary, what ? 
object, the book. 

In the sentence: “I brought that with me from Paris,” 
as in German, the main idea is, to bring /rom Paris ; 

In the sentence : “ I brought that from Paris with me,” 
the main idea is, to bring with me ; so that the two sen- 
tences in the substance of their meaning;, not as dead 
words hut as words alive , differ as much as sentences, as 
do the two verbs, and the actions represented by them 
which are in the one case to bring from Paris, and in the 
other, to bring with me. 


25 


The first might be used, to explain the presence in my 
possession of a fine piece of art ; the other, to explain how 
I got it cheap, having brought it in as personal property, 
without tariff or duty; although the idea of the verb 
might be even both, to bring from Paris, and to bring 
with ine. This, accent in speaking, or interpunctuation, 
would show. 


These sentences, in German : 

1. Ich brachte das mit von Paris (bringen, brachte, ge- 
bracht, to bring, brought, brought) — repeat the seutence. 

2. Ich brachte es von Paris mit (“ with,” absolute, in- 
stead of mit mir — with me) — repeat the sentence. 

3. Both : Ich brachte das mit, von Paris ; then we 
have actually two verbs, both verbs, to bring from Paris, 
and to briuo; with me. 

This power, and office, to complete the idea of a verb, belongs how- 
ever not solely to one word, the word, or words, at the end, but to all 
words belonging to that part of the sentence, the verb part and this in 
proportion as they keep close to and stand near the end. 

For instance, in the sentence, order of words as in German : I gave 
the book . to my brother last night . in the theatre ; the main idea is, to 
give in the theatre , answer to the question : where ? secondary : when ? 
last night ; tertiary : to whom ? to the brother, and fourth, almost as 
a matter of course or understood here from its place, what ? the book. 
This their relative value as complements expressed by the value of frac- 
tions being applied to the words singly in print, we get : 

I gave the book (£) to my brother (f) last night, (f) in the theatre (£). 

Or, shorter, and then transposed, order of words as in German : 

“ I gave the book to my brother last night (lit. in German ‘‘ yester- 
day evening”) main idea : to give last evening , time; secondary, 
person, to whom? to the. brother; tertiary, what? the book; and 
again transposed : “I gave last night the book to my brother; main 
idea : to give to the brother, person ; secondary, what ? the book, 
thing; tertiary, when ? time, last evening; and, again, ‘‘I gave the 
book last night to my brother ; main idea, again, brother , person ; sec- 
ondary, time, when? last evening; tertiary, what? the book, thing. 

These transpositions have of course their limit, in logic, that is, how. 
ever, nowhere else ; place for instance, in this, is considered as more 
specific , and so weightier, than general time. So in the case of the for- 
mer, longer sentence, we cannot well put the theatre before time (last 


Differences, 
in their use, 
explained. 


The one ex- 
ample, 
here, re- 
peated, in 
German. 


Extent of 
this power 
to act as 
complement 
of the idea 
of the verb. 
Shared as 
such by 
other 

words, be- 
longing to 
the "end." 

Example. 

Force, of 
complement 
shown in 
transposi- 
tions. 


Limit of 
such trans- 
positions, as 
comple- 
ments, in 
logic. 


26 


This ex- 
plained and 
applied. 
Defended. 


Hints to 
students ; 
given to act 
as a guide. 


“ Objective 
port ” of 
the sen- 
tence. 


“ Subjective 
part ; ” ex- 
plained, as 
such. 
Immunity 
of the sub- 
jective part, 
from effect 
of changes 
occurring In 
the objective 
part. 

Conditions 
of changes 
occurring in 
this, the 

subjec- 
tive part. 
Such 

changes oc- 
cur by a 
change of 
relation ; 
show in 
movements 
of the verb. 


night), that is, farther from the end, than this time because the “thea- 
tre” as “theatre” is more specific than the time here as time, general 
time: yesterday, last night,” though we might do so, that is make the 
notation of time as time weightier, and so put it nearer to the end, if 
the notation as of time was evidently in a given case meant to be weigh- 
tier, more specific, than place, for iustauce in the sentence, order as in 
German : I received the dispatch . in the theatre . at a quarter to 5 
o’clock . by my brother, the specific character of the time as such out- 
weighs here evidently the w r eight of place, which otherwise, as specific 
place must generally be more specific and so heavier, and in a sentence 
closer to the end, than one of those general notations of time, “to-day,” 
“yesterday,” “to-morrow,” and so forth. 

I give this detail here, first for its own sake, as detail, in a question 
of logic, as between here, in Grammar, space and time, and so, the 
place of notations of either in German, but at the same time and once 
for all to impress upon students, also upon others, when dealing -with 
facts, be these a sentence or a system, the necessity of weighing 
“ space and time." 


These changes, transpositions, as we had them, affect 
however only one part of the sentence, that part which 
contains the words completing the idea of the verb. This 
part I offer and designate here as the objective part or 

Pole, 

ot the sentence. The subjective part or pole of the sen- 
tence is that part which contains the subject and the 
verb, verb form showing or able to show the person end- 
ings, that is able to conform as verb to the changes in the # 
form of the subject ; or this subject and this verb taken 
as a unit themselves. This subjective part or pole of 
the sentence is never affected by any internal changes, that 
is changes which only occur in the objective part or 
among the words belonging to that part, as changes of 
one or another word, for precedence at the end. It can 
only be disturbed by changes external, that is by a change 
of the relation of the whole sentence to some other sen- 
tence or assertion, expressed or understood. The effect 
of such changes show themselves then in the movements 
of the verb, and these we will illustrate, and then give in 
their order, under the head : 


DISTURBANCES IN THE SUBJECTIVE PART OR AT THE 
SUBJECTIVE POLE OF THE SENTENCE: 


Positions of the Verb. 

First, to illustrate. such 

changes 

For instance, the sentence as we had it repeatedly : “ I gave enumerated 
nay brother the book,” is an assertion; the subjective part treted!” 8 * 
here, evidently is: I gave. Now, it makes no difference change of 
whether I say : I gave || to my brother the book, or (order as in c t ^ racter of 
German ; the vertical dashes show the end of or afterwards tence ; the 
enclose, the subjective part): I gave || the book to my brother, verb t0 the 
or, I gave || the book to my brother . last night . in the theatre, 
or, I gave || last night in the theatre the new beautiful book 
which had been presented to me — the sentence remains in 
point of character what it is, an assertion, the : “ I gave ” in 
all of them, stands undisturbed. The changes all, in the 
above words, are internal, affecting only the number, relative 
place, precedence or order as words, in the objective part , as 
complements, each, of the verb “ gave.” But if I say, or com- 
mence to say : “ I tell you that I gave the book ” — whether 
there are no more words to follow, or a dozen more words in 
the objective part, then the case stands no more for the “ gave ” 
as it stood before. “ I gave ” is now no longer an assertion ; 
the assertion in form is now: “ I tell you v and what before 
was a master , this “ I • gave ” now, is a servant, that is a 
complement by its verb gave, of the assertion “ I tell you,” 
and so, this verb, “ gave ” true as a verb to its instinct as 
servant and complement, goes to the end : “2 tell you that I 

the book gave,” indicating, by this its place, that now the two 
parts are in form as they are in fact, one assertion. There it 
stands, the “ gave ” like a shepherd’s dog, to watch the flock, 
that is, each single piece, or part as part of the whole. 

And it makes no difference for that dog, whether there are iw sen- 

more or less sheep in the flock ; it watches the “flock,” that is, p ar c t g 8 ’ made 

them all (order as in German) : (I tell you) that I . the new into and 

beautiful book which I. as a present received - and which I so shown 

1 sis Ono* 

highly valued, to my brother gave. There it stands, boys, Tt h 

though when the flock is large as here, it may take an eye-glass herd’s 

for the boys to see it, especially as it does keep meekly down “ dog ” 

and does not come out for itself as dog in life, that is, in speech. “ Eye 

as it does here for you , in “ Grammar,” in bold print. (needed). 


Emphasis 
directed out- 
ward, posi- 
tion of de- 
fence ; the 
subjective 
part re- 
volves in its 
place. 

A “bishop" 
(“ runner, ’» 
the “verb”) 
both pro- 
tecting its 
“ King ” 
(“I”,) and 
supporting 
one of his 
“men" 
(chess). 


The invisi- 
ble element 
in an asser- 
tion ; accent 
and position 
the means to 
note it. 

The action 
of the rule 
independent 
of the num- 
ber of words 
that go to 
the front. 


Example, 
a word with 
its train. 


This position of “ gave,” the verb, at the end, is the third po- 
sition, or “ dependent ” position. 

The first position : “ I gave ” we will find under the list of 
positions, although of course it belongs not under this present 
head, as a form of “ disturbance in the subjective part;” as it 
is the natural form and position of that part. 

Likewise, when the sentence, as such, changes front, making 
front against another assertion, expressed or understood ; for 
instance, when I mean to emphasize “ book,” so as to say it 
was the book , not the pen, then the book goes to the front , 
there to fight, where it is in mind, the idea pen , followed in 
German by its verb, here, gave. That is, the subjective part 
then revolves in its place, so that the verb, gave , still stands 
in direct support of its complement, “ book,” as an assertion 
of the book, and by this assertion, as an assertion of the book , 
defends and protects the subject nominative “I,” against the 
supposed assertion, here, of the giving of the pen. In Ger- 
man, then (order as in German ; the vertical dashes here enclose 
the subjective part) : the book || gave 1 1| to the brother , mean- 
ing as such, the book I gave ; not, perhaps, the pen. 

The book, as book, would have been safe enough in any 
place of the sentence, as an assertion of the book, but not to 
deny at the same time by its place as the visible book, the 
here invisible pen. 

The invisible in an assertion, the motive, the surroundings of 
an assertion, is what we note or aim at by accent and position. 
They are force as mind, additional to the meaning of the 
letters ; an invisible soul, as relation, in the visible body of 
the a b c. 

This inverted or emphatic position, we call the second posi- 
tion. It makes, here, in the case of this position, no difference 
how many words or parts are taken up to the front from the 
objective part of the sentence, whether one word, a sentence 
(phrase), or a lot of phrases, the subject in point of form is 
preceded by its verb, though in point of fact as “ process,” the 
word or the words and phrases put in front of the assertion, are 
followed by their governing verb , which then and thus is 
placed before its subject. Example , order as in German : the 
new beautiful book || gave 1 1| to the brother ; or, the new beau- 
tiful book which I as a present got , and which I so highly 
valued , || gave I || to the brother ; the “ gave I” remains the 
same, instead of the “ I gave.” Here the complement “ book” 
with its train, is thrown ahead. So may a sentence be, that 


29 


is, a part, phrase, with a verb, acting as complement to an as- 
sertion (order as in German) : “ That I to my brother the book 
gave || wrote I || to you already (or), have I to you already 
written) ; the part “ that 1 to my brother gave” is complement 
of “ I wrote you,” and third position, and so gave is at the 
end ; the “ I wrote you,” is the assertion, but being preceded 
by the complement “ that I gave” is brought into the second 
position, “ wrote I.” 

These second and third positions are very frequent in Ger- 
man, because, though in a longer sentence there may be fairly 
onty one first position, the position of the main clause, or the 
assertion as such, there may be more modifications of that 
assertion, which, as such, move not in the form of the first 
position. And even this main clause, when preceded by its 
complement, the whole of it, or a part, will then not be found 
in the first, but is second position. For instance, in the above 
sentence (order as in German) : The new book which I as a 
present received , and which I so highly valued , || gave I || 
to the brother , there is no first position at all. The two first 
parts, that is, the words as parts having each a verb (modify, 
ing here directly the book) are each third position — the verbs 
“ received ” and “ valued ” at the end in each — and the main 
clause being preceded by these parts, and directly, the book, is 
second position, “ gave I” In figures the positions in this 
sentence read . 3. 3. 2. 

In this case, where a complement, that is a phrase with its 
verb, is thrown in front of the assertion , the verbs ot the two 
parts face, or rather meet, then, each other : “ The book which 
I so highly valued || gave I || ;” or, “ that I to my brother the 
book gave , || wrote I ||.” In each of these, the complement is 
3d pos. ; the assertion preceded by the complement, is 2d pos. 

If a word is emphasized belonging not to the objective part, 
the order of the subjective part is then, of course, not dis- 
turbed. Whether I say (in German), the brother of the king 
stole the crown, or the king's brother stole the crown — the 
order as to the verb remains the same — the place ot the verb 
is not disturbed, because the word which is now emphasized, 
as the “ king’s,” does not belong to the verb as a complement ; 
it belongs to the subjective part or pole of the sentence. 
But if the complement, “ crown,” should become emphatic as 
a stealing of the crown , against a supposed stealing perhaps 
of a penny or a pair of slippers, then the verb with its com- 
plement, would go to the front (order as in German) : the 


A phrase 
emphatic, as 
complement. 


Frequency 
of occur- 
rence of 
the second, 
also of the 
third posi- 
tions. 


A sentence 
wanting 
first position 
a common 
occurrence. 


Aspect of 
place of 
verbs in 
certain 
cases. 


A change of 
emphasis 
concerning 
the subj. 
nom.as snch 
does not 
concern the * 
verb or 
affect the 
place of the 
verb. 
Example. 


30 


“ Chal- 
lenge,” 
‘‘ques- 
tions ; ’’ the 
verb to the 
front, with- 
out “ do.” 


Practice, 

analyze. 


crown || stole the king's brother ||, or, the brother of the king; 
that is, the subjective part would revolve in its place. 

Then in questions where we try to elicit an assertion 
which as answer concerns the fact expressed in the verb, then 
the verb, as in English, goes to the front, only without the use 
of the auxiliary “do”: gave I the book? Yes, or no, the 
answer to be elicited concerns the “ gave,” the verb. So the 
verb is at the front, and the order of the subjective part is 
again disturbed by a change of relation of the sentence to 
without. 

Analyze now, the following: What is the true meaning in 
German of the following sentence, English words as in Ger- 
man : “ The book . gave I . last night . in the theatre . to my 
brother.” 

We will answer by applying figures and signs. 


The book || gave I 


Outward asser- 
tion, meaning 
the “book,” 
not the “pen." 


Subjective part or pole, 
disturbed by the 
change in the relation 
of the whole sentence, 
here the denial, by one 
specific word, of an- 
other assertion, un- 
derstood. 


last night (J), in the thea- 
tre (|), to my brother (§). 


Complements to the value 
of the fractions, of the 
verb “gave.” 


Here we have a double form of assertion. An assertion 
directed inwards, the idea of the verb “ gave,” completed 
first, by “the brother,” then by “in the theatre,” then, 
third and last, by the “ last night ; ” and an assertion directed 
outwards, that is, an assertion meant at the same time as a 
denial : the book, (perhaps) not the “ pen.” 


Synopsis of 
positions ; 
the posi- 
tions given 
. in the order 
of the num- 
bers of their 
names as 
positions. 

1st pos. 

“ straight.” 


"We now will give simply and in their order of num- 
bers, the 

Positions 

of the verb, that is, changes occurring in the subjective 
part of the sentence, including as a matter of fact or 
point of start, of course, the 

1st Position, straight, as in English : I gave || the book 
to the brother (the vertical dashes indicate the end of or 
as in the next lines they enclose, the subjective part). 


2d Position, emphatic, to without: “ The book || gave 
I |j to the brother ; the beautiful book which I . as a present . 
got, || gave I || to the brother (not some worthless other 
thing). 

3d Position, “ Dependent,” verb at the end (words as 
in German) : I tell you that I the book to my brother 
gave (verb completing here the “ I tell you two parts 
incomplete each by itself, made into one). 

4th Position, or question , verb in front, as in English, 
without “ do ” — | Gave I || the book to my brother ? 

The 'position of the verb, in any German sentence, is one 
of these “ positions they cover all forms of disturb- 
ances or changes that can occur in or affect the “ sub- 
jective part 

The explanation given before, of the transpositions in 
the objective part covers in principle the meaning of all 
such forms or transpositions that may occur in that part, 
and all fixed forms of position, or forms of position possi- 
ble in that part, if we have added the 

SUPPLEMENTAL NOTES 

As to positions, viz. : 

1. ) That also adverbs may take their place — and anywhere — accord- 
ing to their meaning and bearing upon the meaning of the verb — in 
that part, and 

2. ) That when the simple verb form breaks up and changes into a 
compound a.) the auxiliary takes absolutely the place which the verb 
would hold if there was no auxiliary or which the verb did hold, and 

b.) Past participles and infinitives , as the objective part and pole of 
the form of the verb itself, go to the end. 

Examples 1.) (Adverb.) : “ Ich sah deinen Bruder im Theater nicht 
lit: I saw your brother in the theatre not; main meaning not to see; 
secondary, where ? in the theatre ; tertiary, whom ? thy brother ; or, 

“ Ich sah nicht deinen Bruder im Theater" — lit : I saw not your 
brother in the theatre ; main meaning, to see in the theatre, secondary, 
whom ? the brother ; tertiary, “ not" to have seen the brother in the 
theatre, though I saw there many others ; and, 

“Ich sah deinen Bruder nicht im Theater” ; here the brother is “al- 
most as understood” and the force of the nicht (not) directed as against 
the main idea : to see in the theatre ; (perhaps I saw him somewhere 
else.) 

2. Infin. (and aux.) Ich kann das Buch deinem Bruder geben (I can 
the book to thy brother give) ; and 

3. Past part, (and aux.) ; Ich habe das Buch deinem Bruder gegeben 
(I have, the book, to thy brother, given — Inf. geben, Imperf. gab, 
Past part, gegeben). 


2d pos. (in- 
verted, em- 
phatic to 
the out- 
wards.) 

3d. pos. (de- 
pendent ; 
verb at 
end). 


4th pos. 
(question). 

Summary 
as to the 
number of 
positions, 
and the 
range of 
these posi- 
tions, in 
point of ac- 
tual forms, 
or principle. 


Supple 
mental 
pieces as to 
position. 

1. Adverbs. 

2. Place of 
infin., and 
past part as 
such. Aux- 
iliary : its 
place , 
always the 
place of the 
acting (in- 
flected) part 
(form) of the 
verb. 

Theseitems, 
illustrated, 
1. Adverb. 


2. Infin. 


3. Past part. 


32 


TO 

Review: The illustra- n r U | r *■» 

tions (examples) re- V I & W 

peaced. German ru ] es now> reprinting the examples, first German text 

type. ° n ° 18 English type, translation or explanation of the words in 

English added : we get 

Reading Lesson, Pronunciation, and Accent. 

(order of the text.) 

A. COMPLEMENTS OF ACTION, 

or changes occurring in the objective part of a sentence as changes in 
the place of words as complements of the idea of the verb . 
Principle, “to build : 99 

impulse. a. Impulse, complements of the idea of the impulse in the 
verb : 

1. Separable prefixes go to the end. 

“ Schneide das gefalligst ab (cut that off, if you please; verb in full 
being: abschneiden, to cut off; irreg. verb: schneiden, Imperf. schnitt, 
Past Part, geschnitten. 

2. Separate words, used as such Prefixes, go to the end. 

Ich esse um zwolf Uhr zu Mittug ( I dine at twelve o'clock ; idea of 
verb in full : zu Mittag essen, to dine). 

Effect. b. Completing the Effect: 

3. Emphatic case at the end, Accusative : 

“ Ich gab deinem Bruder das Each" (I gave . to thy brother, the 
book). 

4. Emphasis on meaning of noun, “brother,” brother, Dative , then at 
the end: 

“ Ich gab das Buck deinem Bruder ” (I gave the book to thy 
brother • 

5. “Brother” emphatic as noun, vers, “pronoun,” noun at the end : 
“Ich.gab es dem Bruder ” (I gave it to the brother). 

Place of Pronoun, c. 6. Place of Personal Pronouns when governed by a 
verb, first when seen alone as pronouns near the verb, 
tnen with other words, belonging to the verb : 

“Ich gab es ilim (I gave it to him),” Accus. keeping closer to the verb ; 
“Ich gab es ihni gestern Abend im Theater ” (I gave it to him last 
night in the theatre), same order and place. - 

synonyms. d. 7. Synonyms, here sentences as synonyms : 

“ Ich gab meinem Bruder das Bucll 99 (main idea: to give 
the booh) ; but 


— 33 — 

11 Ich gab das Buck meinem Bruder " — main idea, to give to the 
brother. 

“ Ich brachte das mit von Baris , 99 — main idea to bring from Paris ; 
but 

"Ich brachte esvon Paris mit (with, with me)” — main idea, to bring 
with you ; also : 

“ Ich brachte das mit , von Baris,” — main idea, both, to bring from 
Paris , and at the same time, to have brought it with you. 

e. 8. Complements of action, as words other than the word Ran-eofpowerof 
at the end only ; completing in proportion as their place is a P lace of words, 
place near the end : tocompiete the 

"Ich gab das Buch meinem Bruder gestern Abend im 
Theater” (I gave the book to my brother . last night . in the theatre). — See 
scale, as “complements,” in text) ; and, shorter: 

“Ich gab das Buch meinem Bruder (FESTERIN' ABEND” 
(I gave the book . to my brother . last night) ; and 

“ Ich gab gestern Abend das Buch MEINEM BRUDER,” — 
and 

“Ich gab das Buch gestern Abend MEINEM BRUDER.” 


B. DISTURBANCES, 

that is changes, affecting the order of the SUBJEC TIVE PAR T. 

Position of the Verb. 

a. Illustrations. 


9. Basis : 

“ Ich gab das Buch ” (assertion simple or “ First Position”). 

This as “ Complement,” by its verb "gave,” 

“ Ich sage dir , dasz ich das Buch gab,” (I tell you 
that I . the book . gave.) The position as “ gave” here at the 
end, is then called the “ Third Position” (Dependent Position). 

Second Position, Emphasis as intent of Denial (under- Second Position 

Stood) : illustrated. 


Third position 
illustrated. 


“Das Buch ||gab ich |[ dem Bruder;” also: simple. 

“ Das neue schoene Buch \\qdb ich\\ dem Bruder,” also : 

_ , , ... ’ , Complex. 

“Das neue schoene Buch das ich als ein Geschenk 

erhielt, und das ich so hoch schaetzte || gab ich\\ dem Bruder.” (See text.) 

Even an entire objective part swung to the front : 

“Dasz ich meinem Bruder das Buch gab, \\schrieb ich\\ Ihnen schon , 
or: \\habe ich\\ Ihnen schon geschrieben.” 

Fourth Position, Question, Assertion sought or elicited, Fourth Position, 
(verb to the front) : question. 

“Gab ich das Buch ? ” 

1 o 
O 


34 


Analysis. 6. 10. Analysis. Form of double assertion, directed, at 

the same time, to within and without : 

“Das Bach \\gab icli^ gestern Abend im Theater meinem Bruder” 
(See Diagram, text.) 

Review of Posi- c - 11. Review of Positions, in the order of their number 
tions. as positions : 

First Position, straight : 

“Ich gab || das Buch dem Bruder” 

Second Position, emphatic ; intent of denial, .inclosed or understood : 

“ Das Buch — 

Das schoene Buch , das ich als ein Geschenk erhielt, 

||gra6 ich \ | dem Bruder” (see text)* 

Third Position, Dependent : 

“Ich sage dir , dasz ich das Buch meinem Bruder gab/* 

Fourth Position, Question: 

“ Gab ich das Buch?” 


Supplemental C. SUPPLEMENTAL NOTICE, 

Notice. AS TO 

Position of complements of the verb, 

Adve,rb. 12. Adverb, as complement in objective part; 

“ Ich sah deinen Bruder im Theater nicht,” and 
“ Ich sah nicht deinen Bruder im Theater ,” and 
“ Ich sah deinen Bruder nicht im Theater” 

13. Infinitive and Past Part., as part of the body and complement direct 
of the idea of the verb, at the end ; the Auxiliary, then is in the former place, 
as such, of the verb : 

Infinitive. Infin. 

" Ich kann das Buch deinem Bruder geben 

Past Part. b. Past Part. 

11 Ich habe das Buch deinem Bruder gegeben," 


14 


35 


1} e § a m c. 

GERMAN TEXT IX GERMAN TYPE, 

without the English. . German type. 

(The numbers here correspond with the numbers in the former part.) 

READING LESSON, LETTERS, PRONUNCIATION and ACCENT. 

Head and Translate. 

A. COMPLEMENTS OF ACTION. 

( Changes occurring in the objective part of the sentence .) 

a. “Impulse." 1. Sep. Prefix. ©chneibe bag gefalligft ab. 2. Se- 
parate Words used as such Prefixes : 3$ ejfe um jroblf Uf)r ju Ptittag. 

b. ^Effect.-” 3. Emphatic case, Accusative : 3$ gab beinem Sruber 
bag Sud). 4. Emphasis as meaning: 3$ gab bag Such beinent Sruber. 
5. “Brother,” emphatic as noun , versus pronoun : 3$ gab eg bem Sruber. 

c. Place of Personal Pronoun , when governed by a verb; near the verb; 
Accus. keeping close to the verb. 6. When seen “ alone 3$ gab eg iljm ; 
with other words belonging to the verb : 34) gab es il) m gejtern 21benb im 
Sweater. 

d. “Synonyms, w as Sentences: 3$ gab nteinem Sruber bag Such — 
main meaning, to give the book, bag Sud) geben — 34) gab bag Such meinem 
33ruber — main meaning, to give to the brother, bem Sruber geben — 34) 
brad)te bag mit son Parig — main meaning, to bring from Paris, bon IJJariS 
briltgen — 34) brac^te bag oon Parig mit — main meaning, to bring with you, 
mitbringen ; and, 34) bradjte bag mit, »on Parig, meaning both : to have it 
brought with you, mitbringen, and this, from Paris, eon Parig. 

e. 8. “Complement of Action,” other words than the word or words at 
the end : 

3d) gab bag Sudj meinem Sruber gejtern Slbenb im Dbeater (see text) ; and, 
3<h gab bag Such meinem Sruber gejtern 2lbenb; and, 34) gab bag Si:d) gejtern 
2lbenb meinem Sruber. 


B. CHANGES IN THE SUBJECTIVE PART. 

( Position of the Verb.') 

a. Illustrations. 

9. Basis : 3d) gab bag Such ; as complement by its verb, “gave” : 34) fage 
Dir, ba§ id) meinem Sruber bag Sud) gab. Third or Dependent Position. 
Second Position. Dag Such ||gab i<h|| bem Sruber; or, bag neue, fchone 

15 


36 


23udj, tag id) alg ©efd)enf erbielt unb bag id) fo bo& fcbafjte, ||gab id)|| bem 33ru* 
ber, (see text); or, an entire “objective” part brought to the front: Da§ id) 
meinem Gruber bag 33ud) gab, fd)rieb id) 3^nen fd)on (or, babe id) 3bnen I’d) on 
gefd)rieben.) 

6. 10. Analysis: Dag 93ud) ||gab id)|| geftern 2Jbeno im Sweater meinem 
33ruber (see text). 

c. 11. “Review of Positions.” 

First Position : 3d) gab|| bag Q3ud) bem 33ruber. 

Second Position : Dag 33ud) — 

Dag fd)one 33ud), bag icb atg etn ©efd)cnf erbielt ||gab {dj|[ bem 33ruber 
(see text). 

Third Position: “Dependent:” 3d) fage Dir, ba(j id) bag 23ud) meinem 
23ruber gab. 

Fourth Position: “Question :” ©ab id) bag 23ud)? 


C. SUPPLEMENTAL NOTICE. 


12. “ Adverb 3d) fab Deinen 93ruber im il^eater nid)t ; id) fab nid)t beinen 
23ruber im $b eater 5 id) fab ®einen SBruber niebt im Jb ca t er * 

13. Infin. and Past Part, as such, at the end ; Auxiliary, then in the 
(former) place of the verb : 

a. Infin. 3d) famt bag 23ud) beinern 33ruber geben. 

b. Past Part. 3<b bag 53ud) beinern 33ruber gegeben. 


I) e § a m c. 


FIRST SENTENCE OF EACH NUMBER, IN GERMAN 


SCRIPT, viz: 

Reading Lesson, Script ‘(compare with Text). 


German Script. 



16 



Government, as we had it above, being also more or less, a Mnin Lint) . 
matter of memory, there remain of the “ Forms” now only the 


FORMS OF WORDS, SINGLY, 

OR THE 


Infliction, adverted 
to as being now in 
line. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


This Inflection is of two kinds, either Inflection of Nouns, Adjectives, 
Pronouns, etc., called Declension, or Inflection as of Verbs, called Conjuga- 
tion. All Inflection however, whether of Declension or Conjugation, moves 
within the sphere of the letters : r, s, m, n ; the five lnflectional Letters 
vowels, simple or modified, and in the case of the verb also 
the letters t and d , and the prefix “ge- ” These then, or 
rather the instances and principles of their application, 
together with “words,” and “idioms,” we have now to learn. 

Yet, before we do this, and then, when doing it, to do it so much better, 
we will, first, take up 


in German, that 
is Letters or Syl» 
lables occuriing 
in Forms as In- 
flection. 


Analogy , 


Analogy. 


that is, see, in a general way, in what German and English agree, 
and in what they differ. They 


17 


38 


agree , 

Grammar. First, to a great extent, as to Grammar , and, ^ 

Wordg Second, as to “words;” in this, to the extent of 40. 

That is, of every forty simple English words, or such 
words as occur in Shakespeare or the English version of the Bible, twenty- 
three are of German origin. These words, however, have undergone, when 
changing from German words into English, a certain change, in both 


Directions of 
change in words 
under general 
agreement. 


spelling and meaning, 
into the principle of which change we will briefly examine. 


° revfewed^nd^f ^- s to change in spelling, the English word is usually 
lustrated. a. shorter than the corresponding German word, and 

b. softer. To illustrate this, we will as to both these kinds of 
The principle iiiu- changes, compare the English article “</ie”with the German 
“ der .” The German word has in English first been short- 
ened; the characteristic termination has been cut off; and then, it has 
been softened, the comparatively harder d has been changed into the softer 
til. This as shown to the eye, is or appears as : 


German de\r 
English the, 


the English being both, shortened and softened. 

The Principle ap- This ^ ere °f softening the harder German sound 

plied, and shown in English, now applies to a great many other words, or 
as applying. rather letters, and we will proceed by giving some of the 
most noteworthy instances of such change. First, keeping in the line of the 
above kind of letters, but starting with the hardest of that kind, t, in 
German ; 


t into d. 


d into th. 


Where in German is a t, you in English may have a d 
(nouns in German are spelled with a capital), Ex. : 

We say: B ett, you say: b ed. 

“ har t, “ har<7. 

“ gu£, “ goo d. 

“ Go tt, “ Go d. 

11 Garfen, " garden. 

Where in German there is already a d, there in English 
may appear a th : 

We say : J)ank, you say: < 7 #ank. 

“ jDorn, “ thorn. 

“ Distel, “ f/iistle. 

“ der, “ the. 


18 


Where in German there is an sell, you in English may 
make use of sh or s: 

We say : Schub, you say : shoe. 

“ Fi sch, “ fi sh. 

li sc/iwimmen, “ swim. 

Or the sell may disappear entirely, as in 
German, schmelzen, English to melt. What has become 
of the z in “ schmelzen ?” z has become a t, so it is often 


We say: 

schmelzen, 

you say : mel£. 

it 

Sab, 

“ saU. 

a 

zn, 

" to. 

it 

zehn, 

“ ten. 

it 

Zw olf, 

“ twelve. 

a 

gwan^ig, 

“ fwenfy. 

a 

Nete, 

“ net. 


And S or sz 9 sounding like soft s, may become a t : 

We say : Wasser, you say : wafer. 

“ was ? “ whaf ? 

“ dnsz, “ that. 

And 1) in German, may in English become v .* 

We say: Sil&er, you say; silver. 

“ le&en, " live. 

" ge&en, “ give. 

“ ha&en, " have. 


sch into sh, a , 

or dropped. 


z or tz , into fc 


8 into t. 


b into v, 


And ell in German, may 
We say 

it 

it 

it 

it 

or ch may become li : 

We say 

it 


in English become gh: 


Nac/<t, 

you say : night. 

Ma cht, 

“ might 

recht, 

" right. 

Lic/tt. 

“ \ight. 

Sic7it, 

" sight. 

Buell 9 

you say : booft. 

Koch, 

“ cook. 


cli into gh. 


ch into Jc. 


Or ch after a liquid letter, may become ow. (Liquid let- ch f nto or its place 
ters in German, by the way, are the letters l 9 n. r), so filled b y> <*»• 
We say : Fur che, you say furrotv. 


The OW being then however nothing but the sound of the first liquid 
being thrown violently and successfully against the guttural , so as to bill it, 
and the second liquid, the rush of the first, to place itself, in record of its 
victory, as a tombstone over its victim's grave. 

19 


a so into ©10. Or, in the same case, that is, under the same conditions and 
with the same effect as to the liquid, g may become ow f for 
instance: We say: moreen, you say : morrow. 

“ borz/en “ borrow. 

“ folz/en, “ follow. 

“ sorjyen, “ (sorrow.) 

This last word, though, in point of meaning, “ sorgen,” is, to take care, 
a»so to be troubled, anxious. 


We say : Tal g, you say: tallow. 

Also, h , under the same condition and with the same effect, 
may become O W : 

We say : Mar&, you say: marrow. 

Or g may become y : 

We say : Tag f you say : day. 

11 ma g 9 “ ma y. 

“ sa g 9 11 sa y. 

Or g, may become i : 

We say : Haryel, you say : hail. 

“ Nar/el, “ nail. 

“ Segrel, “ sail. 

As in English, you say: fragile, and say frail ; when it is body in 
meaning, material, you use the “ body,” that is the word in its material full- 
ness : fragile ; when it is spiritual, mental, soul, in its meaning, then you 
use as a word the “ soul,” of that body, that is frail . 
f into p And /'may become p : 

We say: Scliiff, you say : sli\p. 

“ Schaf, “ sheep. 

“ Schlaf, “ s\eep. 

“ sch&rff “ sharp. 

« dropped Letters, like n may be dropped even in the middle of the 

word, for instance : 

We say: uw-s, you say : us. 

“ wuwsc/ien, “ wish. 

" Mu nd, “ moui/i. 


fc so into ©I©. 


g into y. 


g into i. 


Change as to mean- In all these cases the sound is softened in English and in 
in s- many, the words shortened. The other change, of German 

Kind of change, words, when becoming English words is that the English 
word is usually more circumscribed, limited in its meaning, 
than the corresponding German word. So in German, Hut is hat, in English 
hood, only a certain kind of hat; Ofen in German, is stove ; oven in English 
20 


41 


is only a certain kind of stove. Hund, in German is dog , hound in English, 
is only a certain kind of dog. Futter in German is food for all kind of 
domesticated animals, fodder in English is food only for a certain kind. 

Sometimes, however, the effect of this kind of change is Kind of change the 
in the opposite direction, for instance : Kind in German other w- 
is child ; kind in English notes “ bloodrelationship” in general. 

end op Analogy : 

Agreement. 


These German words, that is, the words which occurred in 
the '‘Analogy,” now all together, and in the order in which 
they occurred, First, as German Reading-Text in English 
type : Read and translate. 


These words, the 
German words, 
co.leeted and re- 
printed, first, in 
English type. 


Bett, hart, gut, Gott, Garten. 

Dank, Dorn, Distel, der. 

Schuh, Fisch, schwimmen ; schmelzen , Salz, zu, zehn, zw&lf, zwanzig, Netz ; 
Wasser, was? dasz. 

Silber, leben, geben, haben. 

Nacht, Macht, recht, Licht, Sicht; Buch, Koch; Furche; morgen, bor- 
gen, folgen, sorgen; Talg, Mark, Tag, mag, sag; Hagel, Nagel, Segel. 
Schiff, Schaf, Schlaf, sharf. 
uns, wiinschen, Mund. 


Hut, Ofen, Hund, Futter; Kind. 


Second, German Text, these words, in German Type ; These words, re- 

notation of Gender added to each noun. Order as above : printed in Ger- 

man type. 

1. 23ett, n., fyart, gut, ©ott, m., ©arten, m. 

2. ©anf, m., ©orn, m., ©ijtel, f., tier, m. 

3. 6d)uf), m., gifd), m. fdjwtmmen, (irreg., Inf. fd&wtmmen, Imperf. fdjroamm, 
Past Part, gefthrcommen); fdjmelgen (Inf. fcfymeljen, Imperf. fcfymolj, Past Part, 
gefcfymoljen) ; n„ gu, gefyn, gmangig, 9tefc, n.; Staffer, n.; mao? bafj. 

4. ©ilber, n., leben, geben (irreg. Inf. geben, Imperf. gab, Past Part, gegeben), 
fyaben (Aux.) 

5. *Ra$t, f., 9J?a$t, f., rec&t, 8t$t, n., f.; 23u<$, n., flocb, m.j gurrf>e,f.; 

morgen, borgen, folgen, forgen; $alg, m. ; SJlarf, n.; lag, m., mag, fag’; £agel, 
m., 9lagel, m., ©egel, n. 

6. n., ©djaf, n., ©djlaf, m., fdjarf. 

7. un$, nmnfdjen, 9Jtunb, m. 

8. £ut, m., ©fen, m., £unt>, m., gutter, n. — 9. tftnb, n. 


21 


— 42 — 

These words in Third, these German words in German Script. Read and 
German script, study, compare, thereby to learn script; afterwards copy or 
•transcribe, from text: 




2. 
s. 


4. 

y 


•ft's ^ 

“~f' S~' 













J 




., <2L4 y <2L, 


/ %LS 

<7 <7 ' V ' 




s. ^^LJ; o£s//~~.. 


22 


43 


This it is in what the two languages agree , their grammar, and 
to the extent as stated, the words. They 

differ 

however, in this, that, 

1. German has a more frequent use of inflectional forms. 

2. In style, as we had it in the “ run,” and the “build;” the 
vital differences between the two peoples, energetic, active, the one 
which uses the “ run,” contemplative, constructive, the other 
which uses the “ build,” extending even as far. as the order of their 
words which as a form of influence of character upon style, is how- 
ever the case with all people and peoples. 

3. In pronunciation, and in this very essentially, though from the 
action of very simple principles, in the case of each language. 
German is a language cast ; that is, the letters of a word are pro- 
nounced singly as letters, and so the letters s. i. r., as letters of a 
German word would sound as they do singly as letters : s. i. (ee) r. 
But English is a language wrought, or, the wrought language; that 
is, under the grasp of energy, as mind, peculiar to the English race, 
the letters are not sounded singly as letters, but the word is pro- 
nounced as a unit, so that, for instance, here in the case of the 
letters s i. r., in English, the strong, liquid r is bodily driven, 
and so sounded, through the transparent feeble i, so that the word 
then sounds as if spelled s’r. So you say, evenly as to sound, 
bird , burn , her , work , the same cause producing the same effect. 
Much depends now in English, for the sound of a word also upon 
the single letters, their presence as letters ; but in this, not so much 
upon their individual qualities, but their social qualities ; that is, 
how they may get along with their neighbors, each ; how they may 
mingle or combine, crush or have to suffer to be crushed one by 
another, so that the number of sounds possible in English words is 
almost as great as the number of combinations possible between let- 
ters, whilst in German the number of sounds of words can be nearly 
reduced to the number of the sounds of the letters of the alphabet. 
In English, a letter at the end of a word, may be affected even 
by a letter at the beginning, as in a piece of wrought iron every 
particle of the iron affects any other particle, whilst in German, 
every letter does, like a particle of iron, in a piece of cast iron, 
spend its force in its place as a letter. See “ The W rought Lan- 
guage,” at the end of this book ; and, 


44 


4. In Gender , in this, that whilst in English all things are neu- 
ter, “ it’s,” as being void of will, in German, what is force, is mas- 
culine ; what is form, is feminine; and what is neither of these, is 
neuter. So chair, Stuhl , is masculine, force , as support ; so hat, 
iloak, shoe, boot, are masculine, force, as protection ; so will is mas- 
culine, force, as direction ; so looking-glass is masculine, force, as 
reflection. “ Bench,” however, the original element in the idea of 
which is not force of support, but form as hold, plurality of chairs 
or supports, is feminine. And sofa, the idea of which as sofa, is 
neither force as support, nor form as hold, but the modification of 
the action of either, in the cushions , passive, is : neuter, sofa, das Sofa. 

Here they are : the arrows mean force. 

1. Der Stuhl masc .force, the chair: 



force as gravitation ; force, as chair: force against force, der Stuhl, 
masculine, the chair. 

2. The bench, feminine : 



form as hold, a plurality of chairs, of supports, the bench die Bank , 
feminine ; and, 

3. The sofa : 



As cushions , being passive, as rest, comfort, neuter . 
Der Stuhl, die Bank, das Sofa. 




Questions to prove and apply the rules , abridged from the course : 

Amending : . 

Question. Is strength as seat, as support as chair, essential in the idea of the 
chair f 

Answer. Yes. 

Question. Is length , as seat, a long seat essential in the idea of the chair ? 
Answer. No. 

Question. Is length as seat, that is a long seat, essential in the idea of the bench ? 
Answer. Yes. 

Question. Is kind of seat, as a covered seat, essential in the idea of the bench ? 
Answer. No. 

Question. Is kind of seat, as a covered seat, essential in the idea of the sofa ? 
Answer. Yes. 

Teacher. What is essential in each case, here, is, in mind the sofa, the bench , 
the chair. 

Questions descending : 

Question. These cushions as seat, as kind of seat, are they active or passive as 
seat? 

Answer. Passive. 

Teacher. What is “passive,” is neuter; so cushions are neuter. So sofa is 
neuter. So, in English, all things are neuter ; their gender being referred to the 
actor, will. So bed and pillow are neuter in German. 

Question. This length of seat, as length, in the case of the bench as seat, is this 
force or form ? 

Answer. Form. 

Question. But this length, as a long seat , boys, is this force or form 
Answer. Some boys, force, some boys, form. 

Question. This seat as length, as hold, boys, is this force or form ? 

Answer. Form. 

Teacher. This length as seat, as support, boys, is this force or form ? 

Answer. Force. 

Teacher. So you see, here, force and form combined. But that which is both 
essential and original in the idea of the bench, not borrowed from, the chair , is this 
force or form ? 

Answer. Form. 

Question. And the gender of form, under the distribution of the idea of gender 
as sex among men, is this masculine or feminine ? 

Answer. Feminine. 

Teacher. So you see, bench is feminine. But now for the chair : 

Question. This strength as seat, as support as chair, is this force or form ? 
Answer. Force. 

Question. And the gender of force , under the distribution of the idea of gender 
as sex among men, is this masculine or feminine ? 

Answer. Masculine. 

Teacher. So j r ou see, chair is masculine : force. 

So we say in German : 

Chair, force, masculine, der Stuhl, the chair, force. 

Bench, form , feminine, die Bank, the bench, form ; and 
Sofa, neither of these, as “sofa,” passive, neuter. 

Der Stuhl, die Bank , das Sofa. 


We define by the genders. 

Not the wood of the diair, as wood, is masculine ; the gender 
of wood is neuter. But the footprint of mind left in the wood, and 
traced in the idea of the chair, is what fixes as force here, the 
masculine gender. So we say : der Stuhl , masculine, the chair. 
Hat , cloak , coot, shoe , boot , are masculine. Leather is neuter , and 
cloth is neuter, but leather and cloth, as protection, as shoe and boot, 
and cloak and coat, are masculine. So mirror is masculine, though 
mercury and glass are neuter, yet the “glass ” as reflection is mas- 
culine. So the metals are neuter, das Eisen , das Gold, the iron, the 
gold; but when iron <rets active, a force, as hammer, as nail, as 
steel, to cut, as steel, then it is masculine. So trunk, as trunk, as 
protection, as trunk, or a strong box, Kasten, are masculine, and 
chest, Kiste, as hold, is feminine, though wood, iron and leather are 
neuter. 

"What you say in English, by the use in each case of the sofa, 
the bench, the chair, we say by the gender: 

Sofa : rest. 

Bench : form, hold. 

Chair : strength as support. 

We define the motive of your using, and seeking, in each case 
the sofa, the bench, or the chair, and are therefore as conscious as 
you are of the use of each, in each case, of its gender . 


Syllabus of Contexts of Preceding Chapter. 

(Syllabus A.) — Difference between English and German : use of grammatical forms ; 
Style (run, build); pronunciation (German, a language “cast,’’ English, the 
“ wrought ” language ; effects of this difference in character, shown in the mode 
of pronouncing words, the words in English pronounced as a unit each : the 
sound of the word not the sum of the sounds of the letters, but the product of 
their contact as letters) ; Gender (principle in German, force and form; explained 
and illustrated, Diagrams: chair, bench, sofa; proved: 1. Elaboration of what 
is essential in each ; 2. Gender of that which is essential : Defence : meaning or 
notation of masculine and feminine gender when applied to “things.” Definition 
in English, by the act of using either 6ofa, bench or chair.) 


— 47 — 


From this combination or association of force and form, in the idea of 
the feminine, it follows that 

Instruments 


are feminine. What is an instrument? A combination for mechanical 
ends, of force and form; a force to be modified in its action by form. 
A clock is an instrument. Where is the force ? The weight or the 
springs. Where is the form ? The wheels. Where are the ends ? The 
regulated motion of the hands. That they move at all is due to force, 
in the clock; that they move regulated is due to form . We see, here, 
force and form combined, form modifying force by regulating it. A clock, 
therefore, is an instrument made to modify action by regulating it. 

Here is the saw, an instrument made to modify action, how ? By 
multiplying it. Where is the force ? The blade, the stroke. Where is 
the form ? The teeth of the saw. Where are the ends ? The cuts ; that 
is, the one stroke multiplied into the number of the teeth of the saw. 
Instead of making one cut, by one stroke, the saw makes as many single 
cuts as there are teeth. A saw is an instrument made to modify action 
by multiplying it. 

Here is a staircase, an instrument, here, of ascent. Where is the 
force? The ascent. Where is the form? The single wooden steps, 
dividing force, as ascent. A staircase is an instrument of ascent, made 
to modify action by dividing it. Instead of one long step oi leap, 
we make many small steps, one at a time. So it divides the force. 

And what is the difference in kind , that is, “ genus” between these : 
clock, saw, staircase ? None, except the difference in the verbs defin- 
ing their action : to regulate , to multiply , to divide. Here they are : 


1. Clock , “ instrument, ” 
made to modify ac- 
tion by “ regulating ” 

it. 



2. Saw, “ instrument,” 
made to modify ac- 
tion by “ multiply - 
ing'' it. 



Sage, saw, 
“die Sag e," fem. 


3. Staircase , “instrument,” 
made to modify action by 
“ dividing ” it. 



Treppe, staircase, 
“ die Treppe, fem. 


48 


So a (giant’s) “club ” is feminine, as an instrument made to modify 
action, force, by concentrating it, in the heavy bulky head of the club. 
So a fork is feminine, as an instrument made to modify action by fixing 
it by the prongs, as a division of the place of contact, so as to prevent 
the slipping off or revolving of things around a single “ spear ” in the 
act of lifting ; “ spear,” as such, as force, would be masculine. 

A mere means , however, of action , to receive and pass on impulse as received, 
without modifying its action, in language as well as in life, is a tool. If A. acts upon 
B., and B. in his own way, under an intern of A., acts upon C., then B., is an 
instrument in the hands of A., in his (A.’s) action upon C. ; the impulse is modified 
in the action, by the independent action of B. But if A. acts directly on C. 
through B. setting aside his individuality, then B. is a tool in the hands of A. It 
is never in itself disgraceful for man to be an instrument, but it is always disgrace- 
ful in itself to be a “tool.” 

So hammer , now, is a tpol. It simply passes your action, hardened by its metal. 
It only changes the mode of the application of the stroke, the hand to metal ; but 
the stroke with the hammer is your stroke. You do not act upon the hammer, 
and then the hammer acts upon the object, as in the case of an axe or “club.” 
You act directly with the hammer yourself upon the nail. So axe is an instrument , 
feminine, concentrating action, force, in its heavy parts, by the swinging of the axe. 
The stroke of the axe, in point of effect, is not your stroke, but the stroke of the axe. 
But the stroke with the hatchet , is your stroke, only sharpened and changed in 
its mode of application as action by the metal of the hatchet. You do not act 
upon the hatchet, and the hatchet on the wood, but you act with and by means of 
the hatchet, directly on the wood ; whilst in the case of the axe, the club, the whip, 
you act on the axe, the club, the whip, and the stroke in each case, as delivered, 
dealt, and felt, is the stroke of the swinging of the axe, of the whip, and the 
raising or lifting of the club. You strike when you raise the club, and the rest as 
stroke is the club. So the gender of hatchet is neuter. The hammer as a tool of 
force is masculine , the knife, hatchet, as tools of form, and knife also from the 
complexity of its parts, are neuter. 

So then, in German, “ intellect ” is masculine, as a dividing force, 
a power to penetrate things, whilst reason , the power of reception, 
power to receive ideas, is feminine ; the words power, as such , force, 
as such, themselves are feminine, they being an abstract, holding, 
like a cloud, the flash and the strokes, not yet delivered. But 
this power, as sent and seen as the fash, and delivered as the indi- 
vidual dart, as clasp, as push, as thrust, as stroke, are masculine; 
the idea of individuality being essential in the idea of action as 
force, and so in the masculine. 

So sun is feminine : the feeding, nursing, star, the mother of 
stars, not as in English, with poets, the ruling star; to feed is 
more primitive than to rule. But moon is masculine, as the 
divider of time; “the dividing star,” as its name implies, in its 
origin as a name, dividing the times as a star, an office held by the 
moon with men from the first shepherds until to our months. 


49 


So thunder is masculine, so lightning, storm, hail and rain are 
masculine. So the wind is masculine. Air is feminine, but drafts 
or layers, of air, the plural, is masculine. So gases, as kinds of 
gas, and so mind , not matter, are masculine, though gas, as gas, is 
neuter. So salts, glass, as kinds, each, of salt or glass, are mascu- 
line, though salt and glass each as such is neuter. So the heavenly 
vault, as a fixed arch, is masculine. So the horizon, as a divider, 
delineator, is masculine. So eyes and ears, though singly each, as 
the physical eye and ear, passive , neuter, in the plural, as instru- 
ments of mind, are feminine. Yet nose, in the singular already, as 
instrument, is feminine. So mouth as mouth of man, as an actor 
in speech, is masculine ; yet mouth of animals, the hole as a mouth, 
is neuter. 

So arts, as single arts, in the plural, as actors, as forces, are mas- 
culine, though art , as idea, an abstract, in the singular, is feminine. 

So God, as God, in the singular, is masculine; but gods, as a 
plural, as a neutralization by the presence of all of the idea of “ god ” 
in each, is neuter. So mind, spirit, as acting force of life, in the 
singular, is masculine ; in the plural, ghosts, spirits, are neuter. 

So ray, as dart, as force, is masculine ; so state, as force, is mas- 
culine. But rays, and states, as form, are feminine. So city, as 
form, or idea, is feminine ; but cities, as forces, as single things, 
showing each the character of the idea city, are masculine. — 

So in German, it thunders, in the masculine, it blooms and blos- 
soms, in the feminine. The heaven and the earth are full of forces. 
We feel them, we note them. In English, you have simply 
absorbed these forces into the idea of “ will,” and so dropped also 
iu language, except in the case of the notation of that will in the 
capital letter of the “ I,” the notation, by any sign additional to 
the name, of forces. 

Syllabus B. — Instruments are feminine; clock, saw, staircase. Diagrams: showing 
the transit and change of force into form. Other instruments : club, fork. 

“ Tools,” are not “instruments;” they modify only the mode of applying action 
not the mode of action itself. Tools of force : hammer. Tools of form : hatchet, 
knife, contrasted with axe, club and whip. In the case of tools, direct action ; in 
the case of instruments, indirect (modified) action. 

Some words, in general ; sun and moon ; change by certain words of gender, in the 
plural (art, gas, eye, ear ; God, spirit, ray, State, city). Argument, close ; change 
of principle of notation in English. 

The rest of Grammar, Inflection, is covered by High School “Examination 

Questions.” 




— 50 — 


Now, taking up: 

b. INFLECTION, 

DECLENSION & CONJUGATION, 

WE HAVE AS TEXT THE 

DIAGRAM S 


AND THE “TEXT,” AS “NOTES.” 


A. DECLENSION. 


TEXT: 



Declension of (Common) 
Noun (Sing.) 



(Endings of) 
Definite Article. 

CASES. 



gPE 

S- s s. 


g ^ 




fern. 

§ H 

S'* S’ 

Cb 

£ 

111. 

dne, 

n. 

l. I Plural, 

f.l for all. 

1 

Nom. -who? 

Gen. whose ? 

wi 

e 

no 

.... 


. . e . . 

il 

r 

9 

s 

I 

. .r . 

Dat. [to] whom? 
Acc. whom ? 

decl. 




m 
n | 8 

r | n [ universal ] 


Plur., extra. 

II 

Stem, de-; Spec, change: 
before — e, die-, before 
neuter a (Nom. and Acc.) 
das. 


DECLINED 
like Def. Art., as to 
the endings: 

1) JRelat. & Dem. 
Pron., dies-er, e, 

es, etc. 

2) Indef. & Possess, 
Pron., ein (f.— e), 
kein, mein, dein. 
etc. 

{Absolute: ein-er, e, 

es, etc.) 

3) Adjective, in the 
place of the Def, 
Article. 

Acc., fern. & n., by 
rule, like Nom. 


EXPLANATION NOTES: 


Four Oases, on the left; read them; their equivalent in forms of : who ? 

What case is “Atm” in, I gave him the hook, in German? Answer: 
Dative. Why? I can say “ to him." What case is “him” in “I saw him,’’ 
in German ? Answer: Accusative; why? I can not say, “to him,” it stands 
on the Question “ whom ? 

Rule of Declension, Common Nouns, Singular (the Plural of these kinds 
of Nouns is to be learned extra). Gen. s or es, Dat. e. Decline, Fisch, fish. 

Feminine Nouns, no declension. 

Liquid letters, being half vowels, when closing an unaccented syllable, drop 
in Dative the e of the “rule,” but, of course they keep the s. Decline Garten , 
garden. 

“Quality Nouns,” that is nouns where a Quality stands instead of a name, 
a person, for instance: Praesident (president), and Adjectives as such, 
that is Adjectives when they are in their own pThce as Adjectives, that is, 
qualify the noun, pointed at already by the Defin. Article or an other 

1 


governing word, having a form of the Defin. Article, take in all cases and 
forms, Sing, and Plur., n (here printed N) ; with this difference between the 
two that the Adject, in the Nom. Sing, has e and so consequently, also in the 
Acc., sing. fern, and neuter, e, as, whatever the form of the Nom. is in these 
genders, this is also the form in the Acc. fern, and neut. ; this from general 
rule, applying to all words that show different endings for the different 
genders. The Nom. Sins:, of Quality Nouns, remains as it is. 

If the Adjective is not in its own place, but in the place of the Defin. Art., * 
doing the duty and performing the functions of that article, then it is 
declined like the Def. Art . 

Note 1. All masc. words, ending in e, are such quality nouns; they 
showing even in this their ending, their origin in the idea of the Adjective. 

Note 2. Explanation of the ending of the Defin. Art., as a form eventually 
of the Adjective. When I say: “ the good man," the Adjective is in its 
own place, qualifying the noun understood, as special noun, in the Definit. 
Art : the ; but when I say : good man, the man is understood by the 
“good/’ and in that case, the good, Adjective, being in the place and doing 
the duty of the Definit. Article, takes with the office the means to do that 
duty, that is, the ending of the Definit. Article in the single individual case 
for which it does the duty of the Article. 

Now, what are the endings of the Definit. Article? First: our 
inflectional letters : r, s, m, n, in their order as letters for the cases of the 
mane, singular ; neuter singular, nearly like masc., only it has in Nominative 
(and consequently in Accusative) s. The forms of Feminine Singular and 
the forms for the Plural for all Genders agree, except Dat. Plural, n, which 
is emphasized in print, because all declinable words have in the Dat. Plural 
that n, if they had not already an n as ending in the Nom. Plur. 

These endings we add to the stem de — in the case of the Defin. Art. ; 
observing in this the changes noted below the endings : that is, before the 
special neuter ending, s, the stem is da, form in full das ; and wherever the 
ending ise, the form of the stem is di— , form in full, die (pronounced, English 
dee). Adj’s., in the case of these endings, prefer Gen. n, instead of s (euph.). 

Declined like the Defin. Article are the rest of words, with the exception 
of the Personal Pronouns, “1 " and “thou," which have Stem Declension, 
that is, they change their stems as the form of their declension, and yon will 
find them therefore properly under the head “ Rest of words,” given as words 
below. 

Some words, declined like the Def. Art., are defective in some forms, as to 
these endings, for instance, the Indef. and Possessive Pronouns, viz. : ein, a, 
kein, no, mein, my, etc., they have not the r, and the s, of the Defin. Article 
in the Nom. Sing. But they complete this deficiency when they are used 
absolute, that is, without a noun, and so have to sound all that belongs to 
2 


52 




the noun for which they stand, as gender, case and number ; for instance : 
my good hat, is, “mein guter Hut; but mine, meaning hat, masc. in German, 
is “meiner.” 

The list of the kinds of words declined like the Defin. Article, you see on 
the Diagram. 

Practise , with the Diagram, and these rules as given, before you, very 
slowly and deliberately, and answer, the following: 

‘ In the form “mein guter Hut,” my good hat, is the Adjective “gut” 
(good) here, in its own place or in the place of the Defin. Art ? Give 
the Genitives: Gen. of Hut, is Hutes; Gen. of mein, is meines ; this s being 
the ending of the Def. Art., the “good” is here no longer in place of the 
Def. Art., but in its own place, and so its ending is n, (era), guten. 

So all three words, Genitive: “meines guten Hutes.” Parse and explain 
them. again. What is Norn, of “meines ?” of “guten ?” of “ Hutes ?” Give 
and explain the Norn, of “my” and “good” in this their connection (with 
“Hut”). Explain the reason of their manner of change in the Genitive. 

Some words decline like the masc. gender of the Def. Art., for instance : 
Jemand, some one, Niemand, nobody ; others make additions, to the ending 
of the Defin. Article, for instance : wer ? who ? Gen. : wessen ? (you see the 
s, of the Def. Art., but an — en is added and the s is doubled). This form, 
as an increase, makes the word, or rather the form, more emphatic. So the 
Defin. Art. itself, when standing for Pronouns, seeks such increase of em- 
phasis in form by accent, and additions of the same or similar kinds. 

For instance : the next four words give forms of the Defin. Article for four 
different kinds of words, here the Genitive Plural of those words : 


Definite 
Article, 
(“of the”) 

Gen. Plur. der 


Demonstrative Relative Determinative 

Pronoun. Pronoun. absolute Pronoun, 
(“of those” (“of whom”) (“of those,” “ who”) 

der deren der6r 


Notice the progress of emphasis in the forms of the word, with the 
increase in its duty. Some other cases have an increase in form, though as 
a general thing in most cases, it must be seen from the accent (stress of 
voice in speaking) and the connection, for which kind of word the Definit. 
Article each time stands. The second r in the above form in the last 
column is the repetition of the r, as ending of the Defin. Article in the case 
of that form, the Gen. Plur. 

Some words have double form of declension, a declension so to say inside 
and outside, though they are written as one word, for instance : derjenige, 
the one who, and derselbe, “the same.” The der in each is declined like 
Defin. Article, and so takes all its changes, the — jenige, or — selbe, as 
Adjectives. 


3 


53 


Supplemental Notice. 

Feminine Proper Nouns, like Marie, may inflect by taking -ens and • en , so 
may names that end in an s sound, in general; or these latter may take an 
Apostrophe. Otherwise, Proper Nonna follow in the Genitive Sing, the 
rule : Schiller’s ; Schiller’s Poems, Schiller’s Gedichte. They use Apostr. 
Relative und Demonst. Pion. : dieser, diese, dieses, this ; so : jen — 
(that), jed — (each), welcli — (which); 

Indef. and Poss. Pron’s. ( defective , in masc. Norn., and n.), ein, f. eine, a; 
so : kein, no ; mein, my ; dein, thy ; sein , his, its, ihr, her ; — unser, our, 
euer, your, ihr, their (Ihr, your, pol.). 

tvT The Plural form of Nouns, does not vary with the cases, only the Dat. 
takes an “n” as above. ( Forms of plural, end of 2d part of “Course.) 

REST OF WORDS , 

WORDS HAYING STEM DECLENSION, PERS. PRONOUNS; 
SOME SUFFIXES OF NOUNS, ADJECTIVES OR ADVERBS; 

Also : Parts of Speech which are not declined; some words of each. 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS, words in the order of the Cases ;— 

“I,” ich, meiner, mir , riich. 

“Thou,” du, deiner , dir, dich. 

“We,” wir, unser, uns, uns. 

“You,” ihr, euer, eucli, euch. 

The pronouns “he,” “she,” “it,” have both, stem-declension and take as a 
rule, the endings of the Defiuit. Article. Forms ; 

“He,” er, seiner, ihm, ihn . 

“It,” es, seiner, ihm, es. 

“She,” sie, ihrer, ihr, sie. 

“They,” sie, ihrer, ihnen, sie. 

Where is the deflection here from the “rule” that is, the ending of the Definite 
Article ? * 

These forms, the forms of “they,” when spelled with a capital letter, are the 
forms of polite address in German; “Sie siugen,” you sing; but “sie singen,” 
they sing. 

SUFFIXES OF NOUNS ; 

1. Suffixes, commonly MASC. (where the dots are added, the word with 

them, takes the Umlaut, modified sound) ; give the Definite Article 
before each Suffix ; 

der —el, der —en, der — (”)er, der — (”»<?, der — (”)Zmy. Ex.; Der 
Engel, the angel ; der Holding, the courtier. 

2. FEM. ; die --(”) e , die — (”) in $ die — d, -t, ~st ; die — ei, die — heit, 

die — keit , die — schuft, die — ung, die — ath, die — uth. 

3. NEUTER ; das — sal, das — thum, das — nisz; das — (”) s el, das — (”) 

chen, das — (”) lein. 

4. ADJECTIVES & ADVERBS; — (”) lich, — (”) isch; — bar, — en, 

— haft, — ig, this also — (”)&, — icht, — sam. 


PARTS OF SPEECH, 
which are not declined, some words of each: 

A. GOVERNING WORDS. 
a. Governing as to case : 

PREPOSITIONS: 1. Prepositions governing one of two cases; 

Dat. or Acc. : Dative when meaning rest; Accusative, when meaning motion*, 
in (in), auf (upon), uber (over}, unier, (under), an, (at), vor (before), etc. 

2. Prepositions governing only one case, Acc. : durch , through ; fur, for ; 
um, around, b. Dat. aus, out ; von, from ; zu, to ; nadi, to, after, etc. 
c. Gen. : innerhalb, inside of ; auszerhalb, outside of ; diesseit, this side ; 
jenseit, other side ; wegen, on account of, etc. 

b. Governing as to “ Position of Verb : 

Subordin ative Conjunctions,: als, as, when; da, as, because; nachdem, 
after ; dasz, that ; well, because. They cause or rather are the sign and 
means of, 3d Position, Verb at end. 


B. CONNECTING WORDS, Coordinative Conjunctions. 

Vnd, and; Oder , or; aber, but; so, allein, sondern (this after a preceding 
negation) ; denn, for. 

C. SOME ADVERBS. 

(“Complements” of words, Verbs): wie, how; auch, also; ehemals, formerly, 
gestern, yesterday, heute, to day, morgen, to morrow, oft, often, ziemlich , tolerably, 
nur, only ; nock, yet, still ; ja, yes ; nein, no ; gefalligst, if you please. 

D. SUBSTITUTES OF WORDS # 

OR SENTENCES. 

Interjections: ach ! 0! ah! oh ! he! he da! hey! I say! pfui! fie! si! hush! 
Jim ! humph ! heil ! hail ! 


REVIEW , 

(WORDS.) 

Read repeatedly the words of this list, of words belonging to parts of 
speech that have no inflection. Learn them by heart ; afterwards write them in 
German Script. 



56 


B. CONJUGATION. 

TEXT: 


(THE DIAGRAM): 


1. “VERBS”. 


Tense 


a. Classes of V erbs : 


b. Endings : 


forms : 

1- REGULAR. 

2 • IRREGULAR. 

(Conson. outside.) 

(Vocal change, inside.) 

Pres. Inf. 

live: 

leb-<?n 

sing : sing-m 

Imperf. 

— d: 

— te 

sang: sang 

Past Part. 

— d: ge — t 

sung: ge-sung-en 


3. Both Changes: 


Pres. Tnd. 
Imperf. 
Past Part. 


can kann 

could. konn-ie 

ge-konn-t 


1. GENERAL. 

2. SPECIAL 

Sing. 1 — • 

2~St [exc. Imper’t-e] 

Pres. Ind. 

3 

— t Tentd.: — s] 

Plur. 1 — en 

Pres. Inf.-cn 

2 — et 

Pres.Part.-enc£ 

3 — en 

1. S. Pres.-g 


| c. Subjunctive, takes e immediately 
jailer the stem if there was not one there , 
jin the Indicative ; Irreg. verbs in Imperf. 
also change (modify) vowel, of Indicative. 
(Verbs of Both changes, that share in the 
latter, refuse the former (the-e-) (konn-te, 
;Subj. kpnn-te). 


Special changes additional, to those noted in the “Subjunctive”: “ Second 

change,” of Irreg. Verbs [sprech-e, sprich-s/, etc.] ; “Local change”, or the 
dropping of the “ge-” of Past Part., in all kinds of Verbs under certain circum- 
stances ; Euphonic change, depending for its kind, upon the kind of the verb ; 
mostly, use of euphonic e between d and t. 


EXPLANATION, NOTES: 

. a. Classes of Verbs. 

You see, first, the Tenses on the margin, left side; then, three classes 
of Verbs, differing as to the formation of Imperf. and Past Part. : 1. Class, 
adds Conson.; 2. Class changes vowel; 3. Class has both Changes; these, in 
English as well as in German. 

Learn the Examples given in each class, and trace the characteristics of 
each class in the examples, in both, the English and the German. 

Every Verb in point of Class, belongs to one of these Classes. The 
Vocal change of the Irreg. Verbs, we call the Tune of those verbs 


b. Endings. 

Then to the right, you see the Endings, 1. the general (this, meaning: 
“general”, that is absolute, as to the forms for which they are noted, neither 
more, nor less), and 2. the “special”, for instance, 3. Sing. Pres. Ind., t 
where in English is s (sings, singt); Pres. Inf -en, etc. 

Every form of Inflection of a Verb, in point of endings, is one of these 
endings. 

Subjunctive mood. 

Add to this the next line in small print, as to the Subjunctive: that the 
Subjunctive mood takes e immediately after the stem, if there was not one 
there already in the Indicative, and we have all the means to construct any 


57 


simple form of a veib that does not require additional rules, as special form 
or verb. Ex. : 

Required: 2. Pers. Sing. Imperf. Subj. of the reg. verb: leben — thou 


shouldst live. 

ANSWER, process: 

2d Pers. Sing., general ending, requires -st 

Imperf. tense, regular verbs, requires -te- 

Subjunctive, as such, requires —e— 

Stem of verb is leb — , leb 

Answer, sum: leb-e-te-st 


Question : what is the -st for ? Answer: 2d Pers. Sing, general ending. 
Question : what is the —te— for ? Answer: Imperf. reg. verbs. Question: 
what is the -e— for? Answer: Subjunctive mood. Question: what is the 
leb—? Answer: the stem. 

So any other simple form of any verb, requiring not additional know- 
ledge, as knowledge of “Tune”, or “special changes”, or changes of spelling 
as a verb. 

SPECIAL CHANGES. 

1. Irreg. Verbs in the Subj. mood, Imperf. tense (besides taking the 
— e) modify the stem Indicative v^wel. Ind. sang, Subj. sdnge. Verbs having 
both changes, that share in this latter, the modification, reject, as in their 
case too cumbrous, the e. 

2. If, in that case of modification of the Ind. vowel in the Subj. as 
above, instead of the Ind. vowel, an other vowel is put in and modified, we 
call this exchange. Ex.: warf (Imperf. Ind.); Subj., normal : wdrfe; but 
also wdrfe; this u then is exchange. 

3. If Irreg. verbs, additional to the first or Tune change, change in the 
Pres, the stem vowel, in the 2d and 3d Sing. Ind., also in the Imperat., we 
call this the “ Second change” . Ex. : werfe (1. Sing. Pres.); 2d Sing. : wirfs?, 
3d Sing, wfrft; Imperat. 2d Sing, wtrf (no final e then, as a rule in the 
case of this second change). This i in these forms of werfen, which is not 
in the first change or Tune, is here second change. 

4. Local change : In the case of any verb, if there is a separable prefix 
in the verb, the “ge— ” of the Past Part, goes between the verb and the 
prefix. Ex. : vor— ge— sungen, from vorsingen, to lead in singing; this vor 
being a separable prefix, as such it has the accent. 

In the case of any verb, if the prefix is inseparable, the “ge”— of Past 
Part, is dropped. Ex. : besingen, to praise in song, P. P. besungen (no 
“ge”—). Inseparable prefixes are: be—, ent-, er— , ver— , ge— , emp— , misz— , 
zer— ; the meaning of these as prefixes is, about: be- , to apply; ent—, to take 
away; er— , to gain, ver—, to lose; ge—, and emp— intensify; misz— is like the 
English mis in misunderstand; zer-, into pieces. These Inseparable pre- 


58 


fixes never have the accent. The u ge”- of Past Part, is dropped also in the 
case of Verbs, that end in —iren, or — ieren , all regular verbs; for instance: 
studiren, to study; Past Part, studirt. The accent in these verbs is on 
the —i(e)ren. If a word is used as an inseparable prefix, its effect in the 
case of the “ge” is like that of these latter prefixes; such a word then like- 
wise has not the accent. Ex.: iibersetzen, reg., to translate; Past Part, 
fiber setzt. 

These changes all shown in one verb : Werfen, to throw. 

SPECIAL CHANGES EXPLAINED 
in the form of one Verb, including here, or starting with the first change, 
or tune of the verb, “werfen”. 

1. Werfen, Irreg. Verb, Tune e, a o, that is, Inf. werfen, Imperf. warf, 
Past Part, geworfen (Tune of the Verb). 

2d and 3d Pres. Ind. Sing, and Imperat. wirfst, wirft; wirf, respect- 
ively. (This i is here the Second change of the Verb.) 

Imperf. Subj., normal : wdrfe; exchange of the vowel a before it is 
modified, change into u, then Imperf. Subj. as wurfe. (This is the Ex* 
change in this Verb.) 

Vorwerfen, to reproach, Sep. Prefix, vory Past Part, vor-ge-worfen 
(ge- of Past Part, between. Prefix and Verb; Accent on vor\ case of Sep- 
arable Prefix in the case of this Verb). 

Bewerfen, to pelt, rough cast a wall, throw upon, be- being Insep. Pref., 
the ge of Past Part, is dropped (Past Part: be— worfen; Accent not on be — ; 
case of Insep. Prefix in this Verb). 


All these changes 

and notations as far as they refer to irregular verbs, as such, when shown 
condensed with one, the above verb, might appear and when explained, be 
understood, as follows : 

C W 

Tune: e, a, o j werfen. , 


Explained : 

“werfen” is the name of the Verb; 

e, a, o, is the Tune of the Verb; 

The i under the Verb is the Second change ; 

The fi above it, is the Exchange in the case of this Verb; 

The parenthesis used with the (fi), shows that this Exchange here is 
optional. 

And a chart made up of notations of this kind of all the Irreg. Verbs., 
is here the Chart of the Irregular Verbs, as a part of the System : showing 
also special stem changes where they occur in a verb, the verbs themselves 
arranged as to both Tune and meaning, and showing, in the mode of nota- 
tion, not alone all that refers to each verb, but also whether it can be used 


regular or not, whole or in part and then in what part; also, in the mode of 
notation, which verbs, each time', in a special item of change agree atnd 
differ and so in about possibly sixteen different directions, effected a survey 
of all the verbs, translation each time added, the verbs themselves printed in 
German type. 

Section 

of Irregular Verb Chart (from Course); here showing the verbs arranged 
only and noted as to Tune. The Verbs, printed in the line with a Tune, 
have that -Tune. 

I. Div. 

1. i a U — binden (to bind) ringen (to wring) sinken (to sink) 

winden (to wind) springen (to spring) singen (to sing) etc. 

2. i a O — spinnen (to spin) schwimmen (to swim) etc. 

3. € a O — dreschen (to thrash) werfen (to throw) sprechen (to speak) 

4. e o O — -fechten (to fight) heben (to heave) 

Jlechten (to plait) weben (to weave), etc. 

II. Div. 

ei, ie, ie — reiben (to rub) steigen (to ascend) 

treiben (to drive) schweigen (to be silent) etc. 

Read these Verbs in full each, in its Tune. Ex.: Tune i, a, u. 
binden, to bind, binden, band, gebunden; winden, to wind, 
winden, wand, gewunden, etc. etc., and learn them by heart. 

On the Verb Chart however, we do not print the vowel (Tune vowel in 
the verb), but supply its place by a dot, as the place where the tune vowels 
successively come in; so likewise we leave the en of ending, Inf., away, as all 
verbs have that ending and supply its place by an apostrophe, so that the 
binden (to bind) and winden (to wind) in their place, in the first tune, look, 
on the Chart, in German, here Gothic type, as : 

x, a, u, b • n ir’; tu * tt D’, 

these meaning here easily, and 'plainly enough: binden, and so: binden, 
band, gebunden; winden, and so: winden , wand, gewunden. 

By this mode of notation the Analogy too, between the English and 
German where it exists as it does here, in the case of the verbs, is brought 
out more distinct. 

The above werfen, with all its forms of notation, when seen on the 
Chart, appears then, as follows : 

( (fl) 

Tune 3. e, a, o j tU’l'f , 

(translated) : “to throw”. 

Explain and form : Tune, Second Change and Exchange of this verb. 
Conjugate, inflect this verb, in all its simple forms. 

See “Square Inch, Check” at end of book. 


LIST OF VERBS, 

HAYING BOTH CHANGES, IN FULL; 

FROM COURSE. 

a. Auxiliaries of mood and manner — six Verbs. 

Note. — Explanation of the list given below. The first word is the verb, 
Pres. Ind. 1. Pers. Sing. The Singular is irregular, taking only st, in the 
second Person, in the third Sing, having no t, as in English these same 
verbs have no s (“he can”); in German they also have not the e of 1st Pers. 

The first vowel is the tune vowel, vowel of Imperf. and Past Part; the 
2d vowel is the vowel of In fin., and so of Pres. Ind. Plur., and the 
rest of forms not noted as irreg.; it is also Subjunctive Imperf. vowel 
showing where the vowel is modified in these verbs. “Soil”, the last of 
these six verbs, has no change of vowel at all, yet it agrees otherwise with 
these verbs so fully and belongs in its kind, use and meaning so entirely to 
these verbs, that we can not detach it from the rest. 

1. kann, o, 6, can. 

2. mag, o, 5, may (Imperf and Past Part, ch , instead of g). 

3. darf, u, ii, dare, am permitted. 

4. muSZ, u, ii, must (2d Sing. Pres, muszt). 

5. will, o. am willing (Inf. and so Pres. PI. o'). 

6. Soil, ought, am obliged. 

The verbs in this their order show progress, from the idea of natural 
possibility to moral duty; the first two “revolving” in their forms around 
the o, the second two around the u, the last again have o. Form their 
parts; but read first again the heading: Verbs having “both changes”, 
changes as to vowel, and adding “Consonants”. 

b. Other verbs, having “both changes” : rennen, to run, brennen , to 
burn, kennen, to know, be acquainted with, nennen, to name, senden, to send, 
wenden, to turn: Vocal change, Imperf. Ind. and Past Part. “a”. Bead 
these verbs, in these their changes, Ex.: rennen , to run, rennen , rannte f 
gerannt ; brennen, to burn, brennen, brannte, gebrannt, etc. 

c. Verbs complex irreg., and which have also both changes : denhen , 
to think, Imperf. dachte, P. P. gedacht; bringen, to bring, Imperf. brachte, 
P. P. gebracht. Four kinds of changes, in these their forms of change, from 
denhen to dachte, and bringen to brachte; where are they ? The same as to 
these changes in English; where are they in English ? 

d. Like the first “six”, “Auxiliaries of mood and manner”, goes also : 

weisz, ich weisz, I know (mental knowledge), vocal change, u, Inf. and 

Pres. Plur. i (wissen); 2d Sing, weiszt (like muszt). 

Ich kann, I can, external control; ich weisz, I know, mental knowledge; 
ich kenne (see above kennen), I know, I am acquainted with. Ich kann 
— schreiben (I know how to write); ich weisz es, I know it; ich kenne den 
Mann, I know, am acquainted with that man. 


61 


Appendix to this chapter: Some important irregular verbs, of common 
occurence, having special stem changes, yet except one, not 'both changes’’ 
as such; given here simply as "words”— the parts in their order mean Inf., 
Imperf., P. P. for each verb — gehen, to go, gehen, ging, gegangen ; sitzen , 
to sit, sitzen, sasz, gesessen ; stehen, to stand, stehen, stand, gestanden; ihun, 
to do, thun, that, gethan. 

THE "WHOLE OE THE VERB; 

Simple form of the verb. 

Note. — Every regular Verb, goes like leben (lebte, gelebt); Ex.: danken, 
to thank, danken, dankte, gedankt; lachen, to laugh, lachen, lachte, gelacht. 

Every irreg. Verb goes in substance like singen, only as to tune or 
special vocal change, there may be a difference. Read again the above 
verbs. 

The verbs having both changes, we have had here in full. 

So that every verb, in point of class, is one of those three classes of verbs; 
in point of ending, every form is one of those two kinds of endings. 

Every form of special change in a verb, except special stem changes of 
spelling, is one of those special changes, given above. 

To which we now will add the following 

"EUPHONIC CHANGES”. 

1. Adding a letter, an e, to separate d and t, or such similar sounds one 
from the other. Ex.: deuten, to signify; 3d Sing. Pres. Ind. deu tet; this 
last e here, in deutet, is euphonic, to keep the t of the ending, from the t of 
the stem. 

2. Propping a letter, a) a final t in stem in the case of a second change, 
of a verb closing in a t. Ex. : fichi, (he) fights; the stem fechten has a t and 
the 3d Sing. Pres. Ind. has a t; here one t is gone. 

b) Propping of an e, the e of the Inf. ending -en in the case of the 
liquids, as ending of stem, if the syllable, closing in that liquid, has not the 
Accent. Ex.: donnern (to thunder); ending here n, not en. 

3. Both, either dropping, or doubling, a letter in the Past forms 
irreg. verbs. Propping : of one of two consonants if the stem by the change 
of tune vowel gets long: fallen, to fall, Imperf. fiel, one l; on the other side, 
doubling of a consonant if a syllable which was long before from a change in 
the tune vowel gets short: reiten, to ride, Imperf. ritt, two t' s; a d, before 
being doubled would in that case change into a t; schneic?en, to cut, Imperf. 
schnitf. 

If we now add the Auxiliaries, first their forms, and then their uses 
among themselves, and their uses with other verbs, then we have covered in 
principle and in many cases (all cases of reg. verbs) in form, every possible 
form, that may occur in any possible verb. 



2. THE AUXILIARY "VERBS. 

• TEXT, DIAGRAM. 

First read the heading : “ Forms Irregular" . What is regular is not given. 
THE AUXILIARY VERBS (Forms irregular) 



hab-en 

sein 

werd-eh 

Use of “werde”. 


(to have) 

(to be) 

(to become) 

7 become, am going to be 

Pres. Ind. Sing. 1. 

. 

bin 


to strike struck, or, hav- 

(Act.)= ing been struck 

2. 

ha-st 

bist 

wirst 

3. 

ha-t 

ist 

wird 

(P.P., passive) 

PI. 1. 

# 9 

sind 


Future Act. Pres. Pass. 

2. 

, # 

seid 


I shall strike. I am (Imp. was) 

3. 

, # 

sind 


being struck, 

3$ werbe fdjlo- 3$ werbe (tnarb 

Imperf. Ind. . 

*• Subj. . . 

hatte 

war 

ward, wurde 

hatte 

ware 

wiirde 

gen. or tcurbe) ge- 

Past Part . . 

. . 

gewesen 

worden(wbc»- S b.) 

fdjtagen. 

Pres. Jnf. 

• • 

sein 

“I should have been loved” 

Imperat. & Pres. Subj. 
Perf. Pluperf , etc. . 

• • 

sei 


I should |j loved become be. 





Auxiliary: to be. 

3d) nrtirbe geliebt toorbeu feitu 


a. or first: learn the verbs as they stand here, as simple forms, without 
the “Use of werde”, for instance, the four forms as given here, of “haben”. 

b. Use of “werde”. “Werde” means (I) become (this as much as: 
I am going to . .). It now depends upon the voice of the verb form used 
with the “become” what character the whole form will have. If this “werde”, 
“become”, is used with a Past Part. (Passive) of another verb, for instance 
“struck or having been struck”, then we have the Passive of that verb: 
“I become having been struck”, that is: I am struck, Pres. Passive; or 
“I became having been struck”, then Imperf. Passive, meaning: “7 was 
struck” and so all forms of “werde”, simple or compound, can be used with 
the Past Part, of other verbs, for the Passive. But if werde is used with an 
infinitive, Active, of a verb, then the form is active: “I become — to 
strike” meaning: I shall strike, Future active of “to strike”; or “I should 
become (Imperf. Subj. or conditional of werde) — to strike”, then we have 
Imperf. Subj. or Conditional active, of “to strike”, as : I should strike. In 
the active voice, only these forms, werde and wiirde are used, or with an In- 
finitive of a verb, as its Auxiliary; although the Past Part, “struck” may 
make its appearance in an active form, and a form in which we see as a part 
the “werde”, as in “7 shall (I become to) have struck ”; but here “struck” 
has for its Auxiliary not the werde (become), but the have, and this have , 
as here a Future, employes the werde, as its Auxiliary. 

Rule, as to the use of “werde”: “Werden” in all its forms can be used 
with the Past Part, of any other verb, to make the Passive voice of that 
verb; and the Present and Conditional (Imperf. Subj.) of “werde” can be 
used with the Infin. of any verb, including its own Inf., as a verb, to make 
the Future Act. and the Conditional Active of that verb, for instance : ich 
werde haben , ich werde sein, ich werde werden, ich werde lieben (I shall love). 


The Auxiliaries among themselves : The Auxiliary to “werden” is 
“■warden”, or sein, to be; the Auxiliary to sein, to be, is either “werden”, 
orsein; the Auxiliary to “haben”, to have, is “werden” or “haben”, this 
latter as in English : I have had — Ich habe gehabt. 

The Auxiliaries with other verbs. Construction of one compound 
full form of a verb on principle : 

Rule. First, Exchange the Auxiliaries; then reverse the order of the 
objective part as it is in English, and translate. 

Example. What is : 

“I should have been loved” 

in G-erman ? 

Process: First, exchange of Auxiliaries. Instead of been loved — Pas*- 
sive voice, we say : become loved; instead of have become, we say: be be- 
come (and, as “have” is here Infin., so, in its place, is “be”'). 

These changes as exchange of the Auxiliaries read together, are: 
(Auxiliaries as in German, but order of the words as in English) 

I should . be , become . loved. Now, reverse the order of the objective 
part— which is it? Answer: [| be . become . loved — loved . become . be, and 
translate literally : 

“I should |[ loved . become . be” — 

mtrbe gcfieBt taorbett fcin. , 

“become” must in German be rendered here by “worden”, Past Part., 
because it stands for “been”, Past Part.; become when seen alone may seem 
to belong to or stand for many forms. Continue : 

Sing. 1. “Ich wiirde geliebt worden sein”, 

Sing. 2. Du wiirdest geliebt worden sein, 

Sing. 3. Er, sie, es wiirde geliebt worden sein. 

“ Du wiirde|sf ge|lieb|t worden. sein”. 

/ Explain : 1) parse each word separately ; 2) Analyze and explain the 
whole as form, that is : Repeat or give orally the explanation of the whole 
process of changing the English form into German. “Worden” is here an 
Aux., so its form is not “geworden” — see Diagram. 

Now, read on the margin right side of Diagram of Auxiliary Verbs : 
“ Use of werde”, going down in that column first on the left, then on the 
right, then read and repeat by heart, and explain the closing lines of that 
column. 

Then parse, Analyze 0 r form — provided, in case of an irregular verb, 
you know its tune or a special change if it occurs in the verb, also whether 
it takes “haben” or “sein” as its auxiliary— any form, of any verb, 
simple or compound, in the German Language. 


Close of “Inflection”. Review, the Diagrams, repeated: next page, with 
the “ Common School Questions”, printed opposite to them. 


G4 


THE DIAGRAMS 

combined: 

A. DECLENSION. 



Declension of (Common) 
Noun (Sing.) 

Co 

CASES. 


fem. 

Liquids 

(1, n, r, 

iGartea.) 

Quality 

Nouns. 

g a 

Nom. who? 

Gen. whose ? 

[ejs 

e 

no 

— 


. . e . . 

L 1 

Dat. [to] whom? 
Acc. whom? 

decl. 


:::I 

^ f.& n. 

1 

Y 

Plur., extra. 

Plur.: — N 


(Endings of) 

Definite Article. 


Sina. 
m. n. f. 


r s 
s 
m 
n I s 


Plural, 

for all. 


.e 

.r 


r | n [universal] 
. .e 


Stem, de-; Spec, change: 
before — e. die ; before 
neuter s (Nom. and Acc.) 
das. 


DECLINED 
like Def. Art., as to 
the endings: 

1) Petal. & Dem. 
Pron., dies-er, e, 

es, etc. 

2) Indef. & Possess, 
Pron., ein (f. — e), 
kein, mein, dein. 
etc. 

(Absolute: ein-er, e, 
es, etc.) 

3) Adjective, in the 
place of the Def. 
Article. 

Acc., fem. & n., by 
rule, like Nom. 


* B. CONJUGATION. 

1. “VERBS”. 


Tense 
/orros : 


Pres. Inf. 
Imperf. 
Past Part. 


Pres. Tnd. 
Imperf. 
Past Part. 


a. Classes of Verbs : 


1. EEGULAR. 
(Conson. outside.) 

2. IRREGULAR. 
(Vocal change, inside.) 

live : leb-<?n 

— d: — te 

— d: ge — t 

sing : sing-era 

sang: sang 

sung: ge-sung-en 


3. Both Changes: 

. can kann 

. could konn-te 

ge-konn-i 


b. Endings: 

1. GENERAL. 

2. SPECIAL 

Sing. 1 — 

2-St [ e *c. Imper’t-e] 
Q 

Pres. Ind. 

— t [engl.: — s] 

Plur. 1 — en 

2 — et 

3 — en 

Pres. Inf.-era 
Pres.Part.-md 
1. S. Pres.-e 


c. Subjunctive, takes e immediately 
after the stem if there was not one there, 
in the Indicative ; Irreg. verbs in Imperf. 
also change (modify) vowel, of Indicative. 
(Verbs of Both changes, that share in the 
jlatter, refuse the former (the-e-) (.konn-te, 
(Subj. kpnn-te). 


Special changes additional, to those noted in the “ Subjunctive “Second 

change,” of Irreg. Verbs [spreeli-e, sprich-.si, etc-] ; “Local change”, or the 
dropping of the “ge-” of Past Part., in all kinds of Verbs under certain circum- 
stances ; Euphonic change, depending for its kind, upon the kind of the verb ; 
mostly, use of euphonic e between d and t. 


2. THE AUXILIARY VERBS (Forms irregular). 



hah-en 

(to have) 

sein 
(to be) 

werd-eh 

(to become) 

Use of “werde”. 

I become, am going to be 

Pres. Ind. Sing. 1. 

2. 

3. 

PI. 1. 

2. 

3. 

Imperf. Tnd. . 

“ Subj. . 

Past Part . . 

Pres. Inf. . 

Imperat. & Pres. Subj. 
Perf. Pluperf, etc. . 

ha-st 

ha-t 

• • 

• • 

• • 

hatt.e 

hatte 

• • 

• • 

• • 

• • 

bin 

bist 

ist 

sind 

seid 

sind 

war 

ware 

gewesen 

sein 

sei 

wirst 

wird 

ward, wurdo 
wiirde 

worden( wben a verb, 

^ go wo/ den ) 

to strike struck, or, hav- 

( Act. ) = ing been struck 

(P.P., passive) 
Future Act. Pres. Pass. 

I shall strike. I am (Imp. was) 
being struck, 

3d) werbe fd)l«- 3d) iverbe (marb 
gen, or Jrurbe) ge- 

f^lagen. 

“I should have been loved” 
I should || loved become be. 
3<h nhirbe geliebt irorben jetn. 

Auxiliary : to be. 


65 


UT 1 1 IF 1 T 3T 

COMMON SCHOOL QUESTIONS, 

on Contents of Diagrams ; given to facilitate the Study of these contents 
from the Diagrams and Text. 


A. Declension. Cases: 1. How 

many cases in German ? 2. Their 

names? 3. Give their equivalents 
in forms of “who” ? 

Declension of Nouns, Common Nouns. 
4. Give Rule of Declension, Sing. 
(masc. and neuter). 5. How with 
fern. Nouns? 6. How in the case 
of Liquid letters ? 7 What are the 
liquid letters in German? 8. What 
in said of the Plural in these in- 
stances of Declension? 9. How 
with Quality NounS? 10. What 
are Quality Nouns ? 

Declension of Adject. 11. How are 
Adjectives declined, first when in 
their otfn place as Adjectives? — 
then, 12 when in the place of the 
Def. Art? 

Declension of Def. Art. 13. Give 
endings of Def. Art. Sing masc.; 
14. neuter; 15. fern.; 16. Give end- 
ings Plural. 17. Give stem; 18. 
Changes in stem; 19. what parts of 
speech are declined like Def. Art ? 
20. What is the form of cin etc., 
m., “absolute”, that is in the place 
of a noun ? 

General rules. 21. What is said of 
Acc. fern, and neuter in ccse of 
Declension as compared with Nom.? 
22. What is the ending of Dat 
Plur. in all Declension? 

B. Conjugation. 1. Verbs, a. 

Classes of Verbs. 23. How many 
classes of Verbs are there in Eng- 
lish, and German ? 24. What are 

they? 25. Give an example in 
each, English, and German. 

Endings. 26. How many kinds of 
endings? 27. Give the general 
endings. 28. Give the special 

endings. 


Subjunctive. 29. What is said of 
the formation of the Subjunctive, 
in all verbs ? 

Special. 30. What is said of the 
formation of the Subj. Imperf in 
Irreg. verbs? 31. What other 
change occurs, or may occur, in 
Irreg. Verbs called, here, the “2d 
Change”? 32. Give an e sample. 

Local chqnges. 33. What are the 
local changes, touching the “ge— ” 
of Past Part? 34. When is it 
dropped? 35. When the prefix is 
separable, where is the “ge— ” put? 

Euphonic Changes. 36. What kinds 
of Euphonic Changes are noted ? 

2. Auxiliary verbs,. 37. How many 
Auxiliary verbs are there in Ger- 
man? 38. Give their name, Inf. 
39. • Give forms irregular of “Aa- 
beri n , 40. of ‘W, 41. of °wer- 
den ”. 42. What is said of the use 
of “werden” ? 43. Which Auxil- 

iary besides “werden”, is the auxil- 
iary for “werde\” and “sein” ? 44. 
According to these rules and what 

is said of “style”, how do 

you proceed to 

Render, that is, change: “I should 
have been loved ” into German ; 
what are first the Auxiliaries in 
German, as new words (express 
the German in English words), and 
45. then, when changed, what is 
the order of the words? 46. Give 
the rule that causes the change of 
the order of the words in German. 

Give 47. Personal Pronouns , Nomin- 
ative, Sing, and Plur. 48. What 
is “s7ie” and u they ” in German? 
49. What is “you” ? 50. How 

spelled ? 






/ 


— 67 — 


HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION QUESTIONS 

ON 

INFLECTION : DECLENSION, CONJUGATION. 

REVIEW 

OF RULES OF GRAMMAR, CONTENTS OF DIAGRAMS, 

TO BE MADE 

ORALLY, AND WITHOUT EITHER TEXT, DIAGRAMS OR PAPERS. 

SUPPLEMENTAL PIECES AND REMARKS. 

A. DECLENSION. 1. How many cases are there in German? 
2. Give their names ? 3. The equivalent of each in forms of “ who ? ” 

t. What is the rule for the declension of common nouns, singular? 
5. In which of its forms does this declension agree with English ? 6. 

In which form does it differ? 7. What is said of feminine nouns ? 

8. What occurs when a liquid letter closes an unaccented syllable? 

9. What are the liquid letters in German ? 10. Give, from oral explana- 

tion, the reason for such action in the case of liquid letters? 10. How 
with “ quality nouns?” 11. What are quality nouns? 12. State the 
reason for this their action, or their form of declension ? 13. How many 
main features of declension of common nouns in the sing, have we then? 
14. What is said of the “ plural ” of nouns ? 15. What is the declension 

of adjectives, as such? 16. What means adjectives “as such?” 17. 
How are adjectives declined when in the place of the def. article? 
18. Give the reason for this, their form of declens. in such a case? 19. 
How many kinds of endings or forms of deck as to gender has the defin. 
article in the sing.? 20. Give its endings in the singular masc.? ?1. 
Give its endings in the singul. neuter ? 22. Give its endings in the 

sing, feminine? 23. How many kinds of endings has the def. art. in 
the plural? 24. With what of its forms in the singular, does the form 
of the plural nearly agree, in the def. art. ? 25. Can you state the reason 

for this likeness or agreement (see “ Gender”) ? 26. What is the reg. form 
of the stem of the def. art. ? 27. What kinds of change may occur in 

the stem? 28. Where or when do they occur? 29. Give def. art. 


sing, in full, masc. ? 30. Give clef. art. sing, in full , neuter? 31. Give 
def. art. sing, in full, femin. ? 32. Give form of plural of def. art., for 
all genders , in full ? 33. Wliat kinds of words are declined like the 

def. art. ? 34. What is the form of ein , eine, ein, and the kinds of words 

like it, when used absolute? 35. What is the meaning here, of the 
word “absolute?” 36. What is said of the form of the acc. femin. 
and neuter gender sing., as when compared with the nom. ending sing, 
in the same gender, in general ? 31. What are the forms of declension 

sing, of a. words like “ Marie” and b. of words ending in z, tz or sz ? 
38. How many and what parts of speech are covered as to their form of 
declension by the rules as we have had them ? 39. Which main forms 

or parts of speech have not been touched by them ? ( Answer . The per- 

sonal pronouns, mainly those of the 1st and 2d person, and the plural 
of nouns (quality nouns excepted). 30. Why not these pronouns ? 
(Answer. The}' have stem declension , that is, the} 7 change the form of 
their stems, as the form of their declension). 41. What is the common 
ending of all words declinable by ending in the dat. plur. ? 42. De- 

cline sing, the large garden, der grosze Garten ; (Garten plur. Garten ), 
give the reason for each form of declension in the case of each word ; 
give also the plural, nom.; so: the green grass, das grixne Gras; pi. 
Graser ; so, 43. The good pen, die gute Feder , pi. Federn ; so, 44. 
My good pen, meine gate Feder ; so, 45. My good light, mein gutes 
Licht , pi. Lichter ? 46. Translate, acc. “ the large (grosz) dog (Hund) 
of the old (alt) wan, (Mann.)” 

b. CONJUGATION. ' 1. Verbs, a. Classes of verbs. 4 7. How 
many classes of verbs in English and German ? 48. Give their names? 

49. What is the characteristic of the “ regular verbs ?” 50. Give an 

example of this class in English ? 51. Point out the characteristics of 

the class in the form of the example given ? 52. What are the charac- 

teristics of the so called irreg. verbs? 53. Give an example in English 
of this class ? 54. Point out the characteristics of the class in the ex- 
ample ? 55. Explain the third class, “ both changes ,” why are they 

called so ? 56. Give an example of this class in English ? 57. Point 

out the characteristics of this class in the example ? 58. How give an 

example of each of the three classes in German , first “ regular ?” 59. 

Point out the characteristics of the class in the verb? 60. Now, irreg. 
m German ? 61. Point out the characteristics of that class as before in 

that example in German? 62. Now, “both changes ?” 63. Point out 

the characteristics of that class as before, as shown by that example in 
German ? 64. Repeat in succession, the verbs given as examples of 

each of the three classes in English ? 65. Repeat in the same manner, 

the German verbs given as examples ? 66. What prefix in German do 


69 


the verbs of all three classes show in the P P. ? 67. What do you 
notice as the ending of the pres, inf., where this is given ? 68. What do 
we call here the vocal change in the irreg. verb ? A. The “ tune” 
of the verb. To give the “tune of an irreg. verb, give with 

the vocal change, that is the tune vowels as such, always the verb 
itself. So the “ tune” of “ singen” is szngen, sang, gesnngen. 69. 
Form according to this scheme, or the features of these classes, the 
class forms of the verbs danJcen (to thank), regular ; springen (to jump), 
irreg. ; tune vowels i, a, u ; and darf (I dare), verb of both changes, 
vocal change u? TO. What then is needed to be known of a verb in 
the different classes, in order to make the leading forms, first in regul. 
verbs? A. Simply the name, the prest. inf. of the verb. 71. In irreg. 
verbs in the main? A. The tune, that is the name, and the tune 
vowels of the verb. 72. In verbs of both changes ? The name in- 
cluding here prest. ind. sing, and the vocal change of the verb. 73. 
Which then are the leading tenses or forms of the verb besides the infin., 
or the name of the verb, in which show forth the characteristic features 
or forms of change belonging to the class of the verb ? A. In all -verbs 
the imperf. and past participle in some verbs of both changes , also, 
pres, ind — b. Endings. 74. How many kinds of endings ? 75. Give the 
general endings? 76. What is said of ending of second pers. imperat. 
sing. ? 77. Where, in what number and persons do you note general 

endings? 78. Where occur special endings, that is endings confined to 
one special tense, mood or form of the verb? 79. Give these special 
endings? 80. Is the “ te” of the imperf. reg. verbs, and verbs of both 
changes, a general or special ending ? A. Special, as to tense and 
class of the verb. How as to the t , third pers. sing. pres. ind. ? 
A. It is special as to tense and mood, though general in point of class. 
A few verbs do not have it, the same that drop the e in first pres, 
ind., like kann , see below (these, as in English). 

81. How with the ending in the past partic. of these verbs? 
A. The same as the “ te.” 82. How with the “ en ” in past part, 
of irreg. vbs. ? A. Special as to form and class ; given like “ te ” 
and “ t ,” each time with the class. 83. How as to the “ e ” of first 
pers.. sing. pres. ? A. Special as to tense ; it is missing, however, 
in “ kann ” (verb of both changes). Note. And in half a dt)zen more 
verbs of same kind and class. 

Digression. Questions on “ perspective ” of endings. 

Q. 1. Which are absolute general ? 

A. en , et (or Q, en, plural. 

Q. 2. Which is nearly absolute general ? 

A. Second pers. sing, st ; exception only imperat. second sing. 


— 70 — 

Q. 3. Which is less general ? 

A. e, first sing. pres. 

Q. 4. Which still less ? 

A. t , third sing. ind. pres., because it is confined to ind. 

Q. 5. Which ending next is confined nearly evenly with the 
preceding one ? 

A. te, imperf. reg. verbs and verbs having both changes. So, 
that if we would express “ tj^pically ” (in the kind of tj^pe chosen 
each time), their relative weight and import as endings, com- 
mencing with the most general, how should we have to print ? 
en, — et , — en. 
st. 
e. 

l.—t ; 2 .—te. 

The same repeated and explained : 

en, — et, — en. Plur. In all classes, tenses, moods. 

st. 2d Sing. In all classes, tenses, not in the 

imperat. mood. 

e. Sing. Pres. In all classes (except some verbs 

having both changes), and in both moods. 


1 . — t; 2. — te. 1 . In one tense, pres.; in one mood, ind. 

(also not in some verbs having both' 
changes). 2. In one tense imperf., in ind. 
and subj. mood, but only in two classes. 

84. What is said of subjunctive; how is it formed by rule? 85. 
Give example; if the ind. is sing-st , what is the subjunctive? A. 
Sing-e-st. 86. Analyze leb-e-te-st (second sing. imp. subj. reg. verb leb-en , 
to live). A. “ st,” for second sing., general ending second sing. ; te, 
imperf. reg. verb, special ending imperf. of that class of verbg ; “ e,” 
for subj., immediately after stem etc.; “ leb,” is the root or here, stem 
of the verb. In full, again, leb (stem) — e (subj.) — te (imperf. reg. vb.) — st 
(second Sing, genei'al ending). 

Analyze and translate schriebest (irreg. v., schreiben, to write ; tune, 
ei, ie , ie). 

Notes. — “ Special changes,” irreg. verbs. 87. What, besides 
taking the above “ e,” in subj. do irreg. verbs in sub. imperf. ? 
A. They modify the indicative stem vowel. Supplemental 
Note. — If, instead of the ind. .vowel, another vowel is used and 
modified, we call this “ exchange for instance, werfen, imperf. 
ind. warf, sub. warfe, and wurfe. The vowel u, in this latter form 
is “ exchange.” 88. What is meant by “ second change ? A. 
A new vocal change, or a change of the present vowel, in the 


present. 89. In what forms, persons or mood oi tne present, 
does or may this “ second change ” occur ? 90. Give an ex- 

ample. Local changes. When is the “ge” of the past part, to 
be dropped? A. When verbs have an inseparable prefix. 
92. Give the inseparable prefixes. 93. Explain the meaning of 
some of them. 94. If a word is used as an inseparable prefix, 
what happens ? 95. On what part of the whole word in the case 

of an insepar. pref. is the accent in speech ? 96. In verbs ot 

what endings is likewise the“pe” dropped? 97. What is the 
place of the “ ge ” in the case of separable prefixes ? Supple- 
mental Note. — The accent, in speech, is then on the prefix. 

Euphonic changes. 98. What two kinds of euphonic changes 
are there ? A. The insertion of a new letter, and the dropping 
of a letter. 99. Q. If a letter is inserted, which is it ? Give 
an example of each form (kind) of change. 

Q. Auxiliary verbs. 100. How many aux. verbs are there in Ger- 
man? 101. Give their names (inf.), and the English of each. 102. 
How many forms of “ haben ” to have, have y<*u to learn as showing 
irregularities? 103. Give them. 104. What is the pres. ind. of “sein,” 
to be? 105. Give pres. ind. in full. 106. Give imperf. ind. and subj. 
107. Inflect these. 108. What is p. p. of “ sein,” been? 109. Give 
imperat. and pres. subj. of sein. 110. Inflect pres. subj. 111. Give 
the forms irregular of “ werden ,” to become, that is, say where they 
occur? 112. Inflect imperf. ind. — two forms. 113. Inflect imperf. 
subj. 114. Give the two forms of p. p., and state the conditions of 
the use of each. 115. What voices and tenses are formed by the use of 
the aux. “ werden,” to become ? 116. When is it one voice and tense, 

and when the other? 117. Explain how, whilst the aux. remains the 
^ same, the voice changes. 118. Give the facts by transcribing “to 
become ” with “ I am going to be,” and using the forms “ to strike,” 
and “ having been struck,” for explanation. 119. If an auxiliary other 
than “werden” is required for “werden ” and “ sein,” which auxiliary 
is used ? 120. How do we, therefore, say in German, instead of “ I 

have been,” giving the German idiom or expression in English words? 

Principle of “ style,” as affecting the structure or formation of com- 
pound verbal forms in German. 121. Besides the change of words 
(exchange of auxiliaries, in a verbal form, when rendered from Eng- 
lish into German), what other change, occurring as to these words, is to 
be observed? A. The change of the order of these words. 122. What 
principle of style covers the order of words in English ? (A. “ to run ”). 
123. Explain this principle, and the form of its action. 124. In the 


72 


sentence or phrase, “7 should have been loved,” which is the general, 
and which is the special ; and can it be that, as it. is the case here, 
the special 11 precedes ” the general? A. The auxiliaries are here the 
“ special ;” and the special, in all language, precedes that is in import, or, 
outweighs in emphasis, the general. Compare, in point of accent, house- 
dog, and dog-house. 125. Which, in each of these two cases, is the 
general, and which the special ? 126. What principle governs in Ger- 

man the order of words ? A. “ To build.” 127. Explain this. 128. To 
change, in the case of a given verbal phrase, the English order into the 
German, how do we proceed? A. We leave the “ subjective ” part of 
the sentence or phrase, as it is, as the one side of the “ building,” and 
reverse the order of the objective. 129. Which is the “ subjective ” part 
of a sentence. A. The subject, and that form of the verb which shows, 
or is able to show,' the person endings. 130. Which is the objective 
part? 131. The rest of the sentence. In the sentence, I should have 
been Zoned, which is the subj., and which the objective part? 132. In 
rendering this phrase by direct changes into German, what is first to be 
changed? A. The words as such, that is here, the auxiliaries. 133. 
Show, or effect the process of this change ? A. Instead of “ been loved ” 
(pass, voice), we say in German, become loved ; instead of have become 
— “ have,” here, inf. — we say, be become. So that the words, used in 
the English idiom, changed into the German, in English words, read : 
7 should . be . become . loved. 134. Now, reverse the objective part, 
and which is it here ? A. “ Be become loved ;” — reversed, loved become 
be. 135. And translate, direct and literally. A. I should (ich wurde) || 
loved (geliebt), become (worden) be (sein) : ich wiirde geliebt worden 
sein. 136. What would be second person sing., Thou wouldst have been 
loved ? A. Du wurdest geliebt worden sein. 137. Why, wiirdest ? 
138. What would be, we should have been loved ? 139. Why, 

wtirden? 140. What would be, I had been loved? Show the process. 
A. Instead of, I had been loved, pass, voice, it is said in German, I had 
become loved ; instead of had become (auxiliary to “ become,” is “ to 
be ”), it is, was become ; literally, the words as such : I was become 
loved. Separating, between subjective and objective part, we get: I 
was || become loved ; reversing order of the objective part : I was || 
loved, become ; and translated : Ich war geliebt worden. 

141. Conjugate, that is inflect this, ich war geliebt worden , in full 
sing., and plur. Ind. adding the pronouns ; First. What are the 
personal pronouns sing, and plur., nom. of each? 142. How is “you” 
in polite form or address translated? 143. What may “ sie,” with small 
initial letter mean? 144. Now, inflect Ind. of the above ? 145. Give 

now subjunct. of the above first pers. sing ? 146. Now, explain this subj. 


first pers. sing. “ ich ware geliebt worden” first, or a., as to the form of 
each word ; then, b., the presence of each auxiliary ; then third, or c., the 
order of the words, that is, taking up “ a,” First. What is “ ich ?” 147. 

What is “ware”? 148. Why “ ware” as subjunctive from war ? 149. 

Inflect “ w&re,” sing, and plur. alone, showing the reason for every form ? 
150. What is and why, “ geliebt ,” from lieben, to love, reg. verb. ? 151 
What is worden ? 152. Why “ worden' 1 and not geworden ? Then taking 
up “ b.” 153. Why is here aux. werden ( worden ) used to render the 

English “ been ?” 154. Why the aux. war (was) and icare, were, with 

“ werden ,” in place of the English “ had ?” Then “ c.” 155. Why that 

order of words here in German ? Which words are reversed in their 
order in German when we compare their order in German with the order 
of the same words in English ? Explain again the general principle act- 
ing in this reversion ? Explain the necessity of this reversion ? Hei'e, 
now, inflect the whole of that subjunctive ? 

I H 

Position of verb in German. Abstract ; facts. Three main positions, 

1. As in English , The dog barks loud ; Der Hund bellt laut. 2 Inverted , 
emphasis here on loud, “ Loud barks the dog” (the adverb “ loud,” em- 
phasized and taken ahead) followed by its verb barks, laut bellt der 
Hund. 3. When a sentence by its verb modifies an assertion (another 
verb) then the verb of the modifying sentence is at the end of what is 
thereby rendered one phrase or assertion ; I hear ( Ich here ), this is now 
the assertion, that the dog loud barks, dasz der Hund laut bellt , the 
“ barks,” bellt modifying the assertion “ I hear.” If an auxiliary is 
used, then the aux. stands in the place which the verb would hold if 
there was no auxiliary used, as its lieutenant, whilst this verb itself 
then as an inf. or past part, goes to the end. Example, giving German 
order in English words : 

1. Pos.’ The dog has loud barked. 

2. Pos. Loud has the dog barked. 

3. Pos. I hear (understand) that the dog loud barked has. 

There is also the “ question,” this as in English, only that we do not 

use “ do.” 

Simple form of verb. Barks the dog loud ? 

Compound, or with auxiliary. Has the dog loud barked ? 

These four positions expressed in German : 

1. Simple form of verb. 

1. Der Hund bellt laut. 

2. Laut bellt der Hund. 

3. Ich htfre, dasz der Hund laut bellt. 

4. Bellt der Hund laut? 


2. Compound form of verb. 

1. Der Hund hat laut gebellt . 

2. Laut hat der Hund gebellt. 

3. Icli bore dasz der Hund laut aebellt hat. 

(4. Hat der Hund laut gebellt ?) 

The position of the verb in any and every German sentence, is one of 
these “ positions.” 

In the sentence (English words rendered in the mode and order of the 
German) : “ When I you ask, know you your lesson ? then hear I never 
the answer, I know it;” German, “ Wenn ich dich frage , Kannst du 
deine Lection f so hare ich nie die Antwort : ich kann sie ,” there we 
have all the four positions. 

End of High School Examination Questions. 


75 






C. 

/ MODE and METHOD 

OF 

ANALYSIS (“Carving”). 


Text: The starling, “Der Staar”. 


A. Oral. Teacher: “The starling — der Staar”. Class, repeating : der Staar. 
Teacher: The old hunter Maurice — der alte Jager Moritz, — Class: Der alte Jagei 
Moritz, — etc. (first sentence) ; 

B. Reading - . Teacher: The starling, der Staar. Class, reading : der Staar. 
Teacher: The old hunter Maurice — der alte Jager Moritz. Class, reading: der alte 
Jager Moritz, etc. 

C. “Carving”. (Blackboard teaching, or from prepared, printed text, as it 
is here:) Teacner ; “The starling”, 


Der Staar. 

the starling 

(Words in parenthesis, are indeclinable. Feminine Nouns are marked as such; 

so are Quality Nouns.) 

D e'r alt|£ Jaeger Moritz ha i\te (in) seinjer Stube (fem.) 

the old hunter Maurice had in his room 

einjeft ab!ge|ricfofj^jew Staar, de[r einigjt? Worte sprech [ en 

a trained starling which a few words speak 

• konnte. 

i 

could 


D. Questions on “Star” as analyzed ("carved”). 

1* the, why is the x cut off and marked? 

Answ.: It is the ending of the Def. Art. masc., Nom. Sing , ter* 

2. att!C, old, why the e? 

Answ.: The word is an Adj. in its own place, the ending of the 
Nom. Sing, is x* 

3. 3a0Cr, hunter, why the x marked? 

Answ.: As a liquid letter, closing unaccented Syllable, it would 
drop the ending in the Dative. 

4. SRort^, Maurice. Supplemental note : this and similar Nouns ending in sz 

or tz, would in Genit. use Apostrophe, or add — en3 (owing to the 
kind of sound, here closing the stem). 

5. Ijatlte, had, why the and why is the other ft \f* marked? 

Answ : „te" is the ending Imperf. rcg. Verbs; the first „t" is here 
in the place of the letter „b" in stem, Ijafilen, to have. In pro- 
nunciation the b goes with the — cn, f)a-ben. 

6. itt, in, Prepos. governing here the Dat., Sing. 

7. fetn'Cr, his, why the t? It is Dat. fern., governed by ©tube, fern.; feiit, 

.is declined like Def. Art 

8. ©tube, room, fern., not declined. 

9. citt Ctt, It ending of Acc. Def. Art. masc.; „ein" declined like Def. Art. 

10. ab gC rtdjtleltlCit, trained; why all these signs of notation? 

Answ.: ab, is a prefix, a separable prefix; 

is the sign of Past. Part.; put here between the sep. 
prefix and the verb, ab|ge|rtd)4|e|4; rid)t- is the stem 
of the reg. Verb abridjten, to train. Last 
„4", sign of Past Part., reg. Verbs. 

„C", before the last 4, is the euphonic c, put in to sepa- 
rate this t, of the Past. Part., from the other 
„4", the last letter of the stem riefyt — ; Form of Past 
Part, in full : obgeridjtet. The last letter, 

II, is the ending of Adjectives, in their own place, used 
here with the Past Participle abgericbtet, because : 

Note. — Participles may be used and then are treated, 
as Adjectives. The ending of abgcrid)tct, after the 
ending of the Definit Article, in the e i n|e it, is, there- 
fore, here, tt. Both words together: ein ell ablqel* 

ri^4lc;4icn — 

11. ©taar, starling, m. Why is the r, although a liquid letter, here not 

marked ? 

Answ.: The word is monosyllable; the syllable which closes in the 
liquid X having, therefore, the accent, the word does not reject 
the C, in the Dat. Sing. 


77 


Translate: a trained starling, Nom. What is “a”, masc.? 
Answer : £ t n ; a trained, masc., Nom ? £in abgcricfytctct — 
the X not being with the e i it, it shows itself with the Adjec- 
tive, this being, then, not in its own place, but in the place 
of the Def. Art., therefore : eitt af>geri(f)tcter — starling, m., 
©taar. 

Decline: £itt abgerid) teller ©taar. 

Nom. (Sin afcgcricfitet'er ©taar 
Gen. (Sin|c§ a&gcricfytet ctt ®taar|c§* 

From here, and here after the §,intheein|e§, the Adjective, 
being in its own place, takes the ending N (n) ; so, 

Dat. (Stn|cm at>gerid^tet|ett ®taarje 
Acc. (Sin|eit af>geri$tet|ett ®taar. 

Decline , in the Sing? The old hunter, be|t alt|C 3^9^* 
Answer : 

Nom. j)c|t alt|e 3agc* 

Gen. Dejd alt|ctt 3agerj$ 

Dat. 2)e|m altjett Sager (no e) 

Acc. £)e|n alt|ctt Sager* 

12. be v, who, which, Def. Art. used here as relative pronoun. 

13. ctntg C, a few; ending of Def. Art.; Adj., declined like Def. Art.; Plur. 

14. SBorte, words; Sing. 2Bort, n.; Plural of Nouns, given extra. 

15. fprct§ Ctt, (to) speak. Irreg. Verb, Tune e, a, o, fpred^eit, fpMdj, ge=> 

[proven. This verb has a Second change, in i, Pres. Ind; 2nd 
and 3d Sing.: fprid)|fi, fpri<f)|t; Imperat., shortened: fprid). 

16. fotttt it, Imperf., Verb of both Changes, (Pres. Ind. 1st Sing.: fa tut), 

3d Sing, (in Imperf. like the 1st). 

Position of the Verb fottlttc: 3d Pos., modifying the assertion „fjatte 
etnett ©taar') “had a starling”. He could speak would be an assertion : 
cr fotttttc fpreefyen, and 1st Position; and so: he could tpeak a fow words: er 
fotttttc etttige SBorte fprecf)ett (fpre^ett is as Inf. at the end). But here, the: 
who could speak a fews words — modifying the assertion “had a starling”, is 3d 
Position : ter etntge SSorte fpredjen fotttttc, the Auxiliary holding, in a given 
“position”, always the place which the inflected form of the verb would hold 
in that position and which here, in the third position, is the place at the end, 
and in which case or instance of position here, the Auxiliary appears after 
the Infinitive , „fpred>en". 


E. Dialogue on “Staar”. 


Wer (who) hatte einen Staar? 


when used as a predicate, take 
no ending). 


Dcr alte Jager hatte einen Staar. 
Was (what) hatte der alte Jager? 


Was konnte der Staar? 


Der alte Jager hatte einen Staar. 
Wo (where) hatte er ihn ? 


Der Staar konnte einige Worte 
sprechen. 


Der Jager hatte ihn in seiner 


Was konnte er sprechen? 


Stube. 


Wie (how) hiesz (was called) der alte 


Jager ? 


Einige Worte. 
Wie war der Staar? 


Der alte Jager hiesz Moritz. 
Wie war der Jager? 


Der Jager war alt (Adjectives 


Der Staar war abgerichtet (Ad- 
jectives when used as predicate, 
take no ending; see above). 


Learn “Staar” as far as we had it, by heart. 

Decline each Noun, Sing., of “Staar” as far as we had it. 

Conjugate (inflect) each Verb; giving every voice, mood, tense, number and 
person, of each. 

Explain the “ Position of the Verbs”. 

I 

F. First paragraph of “Staar” in German Type, a) carved: 

!£>er ©taar. — £>e|r altle 35ger 9Jiorijj Ijatite (tn) feiit|er ©tube einleit 
ablgelridjtleltlcn ©taar, heir eittigle SBorte fpreefyiett fomtlte. 

b) ordinary, as ‘‘Staar”: 

£»cr ©taar. — £cr alte 3dgcr SJtorifc butte in fetner ©tube ciiten 
abgcricbtctcn ©taar, ber einige 2Bortc fprcd)cit fonntc* 

c) in German Script: 



Say this paragraph by heart. 

Write from memory, this paragraph of the Staar, in English Letters. 


(Mode and Method of Instruction, as seen from the above, all : one continuous, 
unbroken line of practice, and understanding ; the student proceeding, always on 
that line, that is, from what he knows, to what he does not know.) 


79 


Rest of “Staar”. 

(Explain the items of Grammar, marked in print; words in parenthesis 
are indeclinable; words in square brackets are Adjectives, used here as Ad- 
verbs; italics, when applied to stems, note stem changes in the word.) 

(Wenn) zu|m Bei|spie^ dejr Jaeger raf: 

(When) to the example (for instance) the hunter cried (Tune u, ie, u) 

Staarmatz, (wo) list du? (so) schm dejr Staar 

starling where art thou so cried (Tune ei, ie, ie) the starling 

(alle|mal) : (Da) bin ich ! 

always here am I 

Dejs Nachbarjs kleinjer Karl h&t\te (an) de|m Vogel 

(of) the neighbour’s little Charles had (took) (at) with, in. the bird 

ein|e (ganz) besonder|<? Freude (fem.) (und) machjfe ihm 

a quite particular delight and made (to) him 

(oefters) ein|ew Be|such. (Als) Karl (wieder) (ein|mal) 

often a visit when Charles again once 

kam, war dejr Jaeger (eben) (nicht) in dejr 

came (kommen, o, a, o) was the hunter just not in the 

Stube (fem.). Karl fing [geschwind] de|w Voge£ 

room Charles caught (Tune a, i, a) quickly the bird 

(und) steck|ife ihn (in) d*|e Tasche (fem.) (und) wolljte 

and put him in the pocket and would, Pres. will. 

(sich) (da|mit) fort|schWch|en. 

himself therewith sneak away (Tune ei, i, i) 

(Allein) (in) (eben) de|m Augenjblickje kam de|r Jaeger 

But in just the (that) moment came the hunter 

(zu) de|r Thuere (fem.) (her|ein). Er dwchjte dej?» 

to the door in he thought (both Changes) to the 

Knabejw (Qual. Noun) ein|e Freude (fem.) (zu) maehen (und) 

boy a joy to make and 

nef (wie) [ge|woehn|lich]: Staarmatz, (wo) list du? 

called (Tune u, ie, u) as usual starling where art thou 

(Und) dejr Vogel (in) dejr Tasche (fem.) dejs Knabe|w 

and the bird in the pocket - of the boy 

schne (so) [laut] er konn'/e : (Da) tin ich! 

cried (Tune ei, ie, ie) as loud he could (both Changes) here am I 

What position is: da bin ich ? 

Answer: 2d; inverted, emphasis on “da” . 

Form the three Positions : 

1. Ich bin da — “straight”, 1st Pos. 

2. Da bin ich — “inverted”, 2d Pos , emphasis on “da”. 

3. Thou seest, dasz (that) ich da bin — “dependent”, 3d Pos., verb 

“bin” completing the assertion: thou seest. 

4. Question: Bin ich da? 


80 


Eow many words are here, in this little sentence? Three. And yet, 
how many positions or forms of position, represented? Four. Take this 
next, it contains all four positions, at once : 

“Als der Jaeger rief : hist du da? so schrie der Vogel: ich bin da!’ 9 
viz: 

“ich bin da!” first position; 

“bist du da?” fourth position, question; 

“als der Jaeger rief,” third position, the verb: rief, mo- 
difying the assertion “schrie der Yogel”; the verb “rief”, 
therefore, is at the end, although this end is so near the 
beginning that it looks more like beginning than end, 
from the shortness of the sentence, although it can easily 
be seen and ascertained that it is the end from this, that 
the phrase of which “cried” is a part, viz : “when the 
hunter cried,” from its form, is not an assertion. The 
assertion, 

“so schrie der Vogel,” is second position, inverted, be- 
cause the modification or complement: “when the hunter 
cried”, precedes the assertion. 

Learn “Staar” by heart. 

Decline the Nouns of the “Staar’’, in the Singular, and inflect each verb in the 
tense in which you find it, and this in both, the Indicative and Subjunctive Modes. 

The whole of the “Staar” in German type; a) carved: 

©e! r (Staar* 

De'r alt|e 3ager SJlorifc M,tc (in) fein|er 0tube eittjen ab]* 
gejric&t|e|t|e# 0taar, be’r ctmgje 2Borte fpredj|en ftmnjte. 

(2Benn) gu;m 23et]fpiel be'r 3dger Heft 0taarma£, (too) Lift 
bu? (fo) ferric ber 0taar (afte|mal) : (£)a) bin id) ! 

9kdBbarj$ fleinjer ^arl l;attc (an) be nt 2>ogel cine 
(gang) bcfonber|c $reube (unb) maeffte ijnt (bfter$) eitt|en 33e]=* 
fud). (211$) ^arl (roieber) (ein|mal) fam, inar ber Sager (eben) 
(nid)t) (in) bejr 0tube* $arl ftng [gefd)toinb] bejlt 23ogeI (unb) 
ftetf|tc ifjit (in) bi]e £afd)e (unb) toofl|te (fid;) (bajmit) fort|* 
fd)Icid)!en» 

(Sldein) (in) (eben) be'nt 21ugen|blicf|c fam be|r Sager (gu) 
ber £l;ure (§cr]ein). Grr bad)te bent ^nabe]n cin|e $reube (ju) 
madden (unb) rief (trie) [gejtooljnjlid;] : 0taarma£, (too) bift bn? 
Unb be|r SSogel (tn) be x £afd)e be$ ^nabe|U fd;rie (fo) [laut] er 
fonnte: (X)a) Bin id)! 


81 


b) As “Staar”, that is not carved: 

$ct 

£)er alte Sager Sftorijj tyatte in feiner ©tube einen abgericfyteten ©taar, ber 
etnige SQBorte fprecfyen fonnte. 

$3enn jurn 23eifpiel ber Sager rief : ©taarma£, mo bift bu ? fo fc^rie ber 
©taar aflemal: £>a bin idj! 

£)e$ 9tad)bar$ fleiner .Start tjatte an bent SSoget eine ganj befonbere ^reube 
nnb macfyte i$m bfterS einen 33efuc£). 2lt$ .Start mieber einmal fam, mar ber 
Sager eben nidjt in ber ©tube, .Start ftng gefdjmtnb ben 23oget unb ftedte itjn 
in bie £afcfye unb monte fttfy bamit fortfdjteidjen. 

Slttein in eben bent Stugenbticfe fam ber Sager ju ber $fjure herein. (Sr 
bad)te bem .Stnaben eine greube ju ma$en unb rief mie gemobntidj : ©taarma|$, 
mo bift bu? Unb ber SBoget in ber £afdje be$ .Stnaben fd)rie fo laut er fonnte: 
SDa bin i ! 

V I * ' .9 

c) In German Script (read, and where you can not read off, study) : 




a2L 












82 




^ jl 






Another piece : (Riddle), the “eye (the eyes)”. 

See next page. 


83 


(riddle) 

(The eye). 

Teacher, giving the whole, first in English, and explaining the meaning where 
it is needed. Then, reading the lines in English and German, the class repeating 
the German, of each line, or part of line, reading. 

(Teacher: Didtfyfd, riddle. The eye, ba8 2lucje. Class repeating : 9fatf)fel, ba§ 
2lugc, the eye — etc.) 


Stated (riddle) 

(The eye). 

Kennst du das Bild auf zartem Grunde ? 
knowest thou the picture, image upon delicate ground 
Es giebt sich selber Licbt und Glanz. 
it gives to itself self light and splendor, hue 
Ein andres ist’s zu jeder Stunde 
an other is it at each hour, moment 
Und immer ist es frisch und ganz. 
and always is it fresh and entire 
Im engsten Rauni ist’s ausgefiihret, 
in the smallest space is it executed 

Dor kleinste Rahrnen fasst es ein; 
the smallest frame holds it (in) 

Doch alle Grosse, die dich riihret, 

yet all grandeur, greatness which thee moves 
Kennst du durcb dieses Bild allein. 
knowest thou through, by. this picture alone 


Und kannst du den Krystall mir nennen ? 
and canst thou the crystal to me name 

Ihm gleicht an Werth kein Edelstein. 

to him, it. equals (at) in worth, value, no precious stone 
Er leucbtet, obne je zu brennen, 
he (it) shines, radiates without ever to burn 

Das ganze Weltall saugt er ein. 

the entire universe absorbs, sucks he (it) in 

Der Himmel selbst ist abgemalet 
the heaven, sky itself is depicted 
In seinem wundervollen Ring 
in his (its) wonderful ring, circle 

Und dock ist, was er von sicb straklet, 
and yet is what he (it) from himself, itself beams 
Nock sckoner, als was er empfing. 
yet more beautiful than what he (it) received* 

(@d)Uler.) 


* The impressions on the eye are, mostly: “matter” ; the expression, is, “mind". 


84 


(MUSI C.) 


Lorelei. 


3d) Weif) nidjt, mag foil eg ftebeuten, 

I know not what shall it signify 

Sap idj fo traurig bin ; 

that I so sad am 

Sin Sftafjrdjen aug alien 3 e i ten / 

a fairy tale (out) of ancient times 

Sag fommt ntir nid^t aug hem ©inn. 
that comes to me not out of the mind 

Sie Sufi ip fit^I, unb eg bunfelt, 

the air is cool and it darkens 

Unb rutjig flie^t her 9tijetn ; 

and quietly flows the Khine 

Ser ©ipfet beg 23ergeg funfelt 

the top of the mountain sparkles 

3m 2Iftenbfonneufd)ein. 

in the evening-sun-shine 

Sie fdjonfie Sungfrau ft^et 

the fairest maiden sitteth 

Sort "often munberftar, 

there on high wonderfully 

3ftr golb’neg ©efdjmeibe ftlipet, 
her golden jewelry flashes 

©te fammt iftr golb’neg £aar. 
she combs her golden hair 


©ie fammt eg mtt golb’nem $amme, 
she combs it with golden comb 

Unb ftngt ein Sieb baftei; 

and sings a song thereto 

Sag fjat eine munberfame, 
that has a strange 

©emaltige SSMobei. 
powerful melody 

Sen ©djiffer im fleinen ©c^iffe 

the sailor in the small boat 

Srgreift eg mit milbem SBeft’, 
seizes it with wild woe 

Sr fdjaut nidjt bie gelfenriffe, 
he beholds not the rock-cliffs 

Sr fd)aut nur tjinauf in bie £oft\ 
he looks only up into the hight 

3d) glaufte bie SBetlen berfdjltngen 
I believe the waves (will) devour 

21m Snbe ©djiffer nnb J^afjn; 

at the end sailor and boat 

Unb bag tyat mit Ujrern ©ingen 

and that has with her singing 

Sie S o r e I e-i getftan. 
the Lorelei done. 


* Get, procure, the music. 


85 


The Riddle, “Raethsel”, continued: 

Known points, of Grammar, marked. 

1* ^ettnifi bu ba|3 23tlb (auf) gart|em @runb|e? 

2. ®|<5 gib |t (ftclj) (fclber) Sid)t (unb) @Ian$. 

3. Sin anbr|c§ i ft ’ d (ju) jeblcr ©tunbc (fem.), 

4. (Unb) (tntmcr) iff e|$ frifcf> (unb) gan$. 

5. 3lm encjftlen 3taum ift’3 au$|ge|fubrlet, 

6. £>e|r fletnftle tttabmen fafjlt cl 3 (cm); 

7. (2)od)) at(|c ©rope (fem.), biie b i d) ntfjr|et, 

8. jtennljl bu (burdj) biefleS 23tlb (attein). 


RECORD, AND READING, OF “MARKS”, 

Analysis, First Strophe. 

The “Riddle”, as “cut”, and “marked” : 

1. $?cUU|ft (2d Sing, fl), Verb of ‘‘both Changes”, e, a, a, ftitnen, fann’te, ge|- 
fflnn|t; to know, be acquainted with; |gblt, Pron. irreg., Stem Declension, “thou”; 
||ba|3 (8, neuter, Def. Art.; change in stem, of e into a; Acc. neuter, like Nom.) ; 
IlSilb, n., picture, image; |Q (flllf), prep.; indeclinable; governing Dative and Acc., 
here Dat.; g jattlCnt, tender, delicate, Adj., here in the place of Def, Art.: ending 
of Def. Art., Dat. m, nt, jartent ; |g ©Mttb c, ground, masc., Dat. e; on the delicate 
ground would be : auf bent jarteit ©runbe. 

2. e|S, neuter, pron., pers., stem Declension, yet showing, in general, end- 
ing of Def. Art.; |GfliO|t, 3d Sing. Pres. Ind. of geb|eit, to give; Tune e, a, e, geben, 
gflb, gegeben; gib jt, the t, “second change”, in Pres. Ind. Sing.; 1. Sing. geb|e, 2. 
Sing. gtb|fl, 3. Sing. gib|t; Imperat. second Sing, gib (instead of gcb|c); ||(ftdj), self, 
and selves, reflexive, for Dat. and Acc. as fixed form of pronoun of 3d Pers. Sing, 
and Plur., used with pronouns of that person, Sing, and Plur. (er fid), fie ftd), eg 
ftd;, fie (Plur.) ftd), @ie (polite) fid;); |3(fclbtr) indecl., also self or selves, used with 
nouns and pronouns of all persons, in all cases, as parties acting or parties acted 
upon; „ftdj fclbcr", ftd;, Dat. “to itself”; || n., light ; (unb), and, |g©laU5, 
(m., splendor, hue) ; 

3. etlt, a, neuter, eiu, eine, citt, declined like Def. Art.; |5anbr|CeS, Adj., neuter, 
here in place of Def. Art., not shown in the eiu; |gifjt’g, contracted from „i fl eg", 
is it; ifl, from bin, am; eg, n. pron., 3d Pers. Sing.; |1 (Sit), at, also to; j| jcb| Cr, 
each, Pron., Dat. Sing., declined like Def. Art., here fern.; ||8tlinbe, hour, fem. 

4. (Ultb) and; ||(imntcr) always, ever; || ifjfr, is; |c|$, it; Hfrifd;, fresh ; 
(UUb) and; ||pU5, entire, whole. 


5. 3|m, contracted from tn bem, in the, Dat. Def. Art., m. and n., with pre- 

pos. in, govern. Dat. and Acc., here Dat., in bent ; 19 CHg ft Ctt, most narrow, limited; 
„ff", sign of Superlative, as in English; ejt, ending, engften, Adj. here in its own 
place after the m in bent; |§9?aitnt, no. room, space; Dat. Sing.; omission for bre- 
vity’s sake as measure, of e; contracted from ifl e§, is it; ||aU$!f|Cjfiif|t|et, 

done, executed; au8, sep. pref.; ge- and t at end, past Part., of reg. Yerb „fiil)ren", 
to lead, to carry, au$gcful;ret, carried out, here instead of, auSgefiiljirt; 

6. be r, masc., Def. Art., Nom. Sing., the; peinlftlc, Superl. of Hein, small ; 
Hein[fl[e, Adj., here in its own place after bejt, ending Nom. Sing, in all genders, e, 
ber Heinfle; otherwise it would he, without ber, or with ein, m. or n., Heinfler, or ein 
Heinfler, or ein HctnfleS; ||9ial)ntCtt, frame, liquid n at end; would drop e in Dat. 
Sing.; |fa§|t, 3d Sing. Pres. Ind. of faffen, reg. Verb, to seize, hold; ||c|3, it, Acc. 
neuter, pron. 3d Pers., Sing.; ||(ein), belongs to faffen, fajjt; the Yerb being in full, 
eiitfaffen, to encircle, to hold. 

7. (bodj), yet; Jail C, all, ending of Def. Art., Nom. Sing., fem.; ||@riijic, 
greatness, grandeur, here grandeur as to seize, fem.; |jjbt|c, Def. Art. fem. Nom. 
Sing., here as pronoun, which; ending c, and change in stem, be, into bt; Jbid), 
irreg. pronoun, stem declension, thee, Acc. of thou, bu; IBrii^tlCt, 3d Sing, Pres. Ind.; 
moves, touches; reg. Yerb, riiliren; ordinarily ritlpr|t; 

8. fcnnlft, knowest. 2d Sing. Pres. Ind., of fenn'en, to know, he acquainted 
with; verb of both changes (Yocal change, a): !cnn|en, fann|tc, ge|!annf; |lbu, 
thou, as above, Nom. pers. pron. 2d Pers. Sing., stem declension as form of cases; 
IJiburd)), through, by, prepos. govern. Acc.; ||btcf]c$, Nom. biefer, biefe, biefeS; 
Acc. n. like Nom.; ||'-J3ilb, n. picture, Sing. Acc., like Nom.; ||(aHcttt), alone, 
only; Adv. 


Write out copy of “Staar” and first strophe of “Riddle”, and cut and mark 
copy, or the print itself here, in the book, and explain, whilst marking : 


a { h & e l. 

Kennst du das Bild auf zartem Grunde ? 

Es gibt sich selber Licht und Glanz. 
Ein andres ist’s zu jeder Stunde, 

Und immer ist es frisch und ganz. 
Im engsten Raum ist’s ausgefuehret, 

Der kleinste Rahmen faszt es ein; 
Doch alle Groesze, die dich ruehret, 
Kennst du durch dieses Bild allein. 


Same, first Strophe, in German Script: 


87 



Read, parse, explain (analyze) second Strophe as marked and cut, 

yourself : 

Unb fttmtlfl bu be[n mir ncmtien? 

and canst thou the crystal to me name 

3$lm gleidjlt (art) 2Berti> fetrt (5bel|ftein; 

to him (it) equals, ei, i, i, in worth, value, m. no precious stone 

<£!r leudjtlct, (otjne) Qe) (ju) brennlert 

he (it) shines without ever to burn (B. C.) 

Da\$ garble SBeltlatt fanglt cr etrt* 

the whole universe, n. sucks he (it) in 

5De|tr £tmmel (jelbft) ifi ablge|mal|et 

the heaven itself is depicted, pictured 

(3n) fetnletn rr«nber|»oU|en 

in his (its) wonderful ring, m. 

(Unb) (bod)) ifi, trc|5 e!r (»on) (ftd)) firatjllct, 

and yet is what he(it) from itself beams, (radiates) 

(9todj) fcfyoner, (al$) ivals cr emp|[iitg. 

yet more beautiful than what he (it) received, a, i, a. 

(©(tiller.) 


Learn the whole piece by heart. 

Say it, by heart. 

Write it out, by heart, in English letters. 

Write the whole of the “Staar” and the “Riddle” repeatedly, in English letters 
from memory ; and commence, as soon as you had writing “German Script” and 
you commence writing it and in it, with writing these or similar pieces which you 
know, also the German “Pieces” (phrases), and the German words, occurring in the 
“Introduction”. 




[ U S I C. 

<§• r I f d it t <$♦ 


Erlking. 


SBer reitet fo fpat turd) 9lactyt unb $?inb? 

Who rides so late through night and wind 

So ifl bet ©ater mit feinemjtinb; 

It is the father with his child 

Sr fiat ben $naben in bent 2lrnt, 

He has the boy well in the arm 

Sr fafjt ityn fictyer, er tyalt ityn maruu 

He grasp him securely he holds him warm 

„SD?ein <Sotyn, tvao birgft Du fo bang’ Dein ©efictyt?" 

My son what hidest thou so anxiously thy face 

„0ietyft, ©ater, Du ben Srlfbnig nictyt? 

Seest father thou the erlking not 

Den Srlentbnig mit $ron’ unb @ctymeif?" 

The erlking with crown and train 

„?0?ein 0otyn, eO ift ciit Sftebelflreif." 

My son it is a miststripe 

„Du liebeO $tnb, fomm’, gety mit mir! 

Thou dear child come go with me 

©ar [(tybtte 0piete fp'ieP i(ty mit Dir; 

quite beautiful plays play I with thee 

SUiancty’ bunte ©lumen jtnb an bem (Stranb; 

many variegated flowers are on • the shore 

SOWne Gutter tyat mancty’ gulben ©emanb !" 

my mother has many a golden garment 

„9Jfein ©ater, mein ©ater! unb tybreft Du nictyt, 

my father my father and hearest thou not 

©3a0 Srlenfbnig mir leife oerfprictyt ?" — 

what erlking me lowly promises 


* Get (procure) the Music. 


89 


„<5ei rufytg, BteiBe ruf)ig, mein jltnb; 

be quiet remain quiet my child 

3n burren Slattern fdufett her 2Btnb!" 

in withered leaves rustles the wind 


fetner jfnaBe, Du mit mtr gefy’u? 

wilt fine boy thou with me go 

Sfteine Softer fotXen Did) marten fd)on; 

my daughters shall thee wait upon beautifully 

Sfteine Softer fu^ren ben ndcljtltdjen 9teU)’n 

my daughters lead the nightly dance 

Uttb mtegen unb tanjen unb ftngen Did) cm." 

and rock and dance and sing you in (sleep) 

„9flein, Sater, mein Sater! unb (let) ft Du nidjt bort 

my father my father and seest thou not yonder 

(Srlfonigs $od)ter am btiftern Drt?" 

erlkings daughters at the gloomy spot 

„9J?ein @ot)n, mein @ofjn, id) fet)’ e3 genau ! 

my son my son I see it exactly 

(Ed fcBeinen bie alten SBeibett fo grau." 
it appear the old willows so grey 


„3d> IteBe Did), mid) reijt Deine fd)one ©ejtalt, 

I love thee me charmes they beautiful form 

Unb Bift Du nid)t millig, fo Braud)’ id) ©emalt!" 

and art thou not willing so use I force 

„'?0?ein Sater, mein Sater! jeijt fapt er mid) an! 

my father my father now seizes he me upon 

Srlfonig fyat mtr ein SeibeS getljan!" 

erlking has to me a harm done 


Dem Sater graufet’S; er reitct gefdjminb, 

to the father (it) shudders he rides fast 

Grr ijalt in ben 2frmen bad ad)jenbe Jlinb, 

he holds in the arms the aching child 

@rreid)t ben #of mit 5J?ut)e unb 9toti). 

reaches the farm* with pains and difficulty 

3n fetnen Slrmen bad j?inb mar tobt. 

in his arms the child was dead. 


(© o etfj e.) 


* “Manor”. This word comes nearer than any other single word in English to the force 
of the meaning of the word “Hof’, which in this connection means a gentleman’s secluded and 
lonesome farming place or place of rural retreat and agriculture. The effect of the associations 
of such a place upon the sensibility, early habits and education of a child of tender years who 
has grown up surrounded by them, alone but fully explains the character of the child in the 
poem. 


90 


Gather, and Collect 

words from your own Readings hereafter, and arrange them in columns, 

like those here of the 
“STAAR” and the “RIDDLE”. 

(Add the Plural, from your texts, when you found it given there, or look for it in 

your own Dictionaries.) 

LIST OP WORDS, 

coming, from their mode of Inflection, under the head of 

a. Declension: 


NOUNS* 

mark liquid letter where it would 
drop the e in the Dative. 


m. 

„frcr"t 

Staar 

starling 

Jager 

hunter 

Moritz 

Mam-ice 

Staarmatz 

“starling” 

Nachbar 

neighbour 

Karl 

Charles 

Yog el 
bird 


n. 

//bag": 


fern. 

*bic": 


Wort 

word 


Stube 


Beispiel Freude 
example joy 


Bild 

picture 

Licht 

light 


Tasche 

pocket 

Thiire 

door 


Weltall Stunde 
universe hour 


Besueh 

visit 

Augenblick 
moment 
Knabe, _ 
Qual. N. 

Grund 

ground 

Glanz 

splendor 

Raum 

space 

Rahmen 

frame 

Krystall 

crystal 

Werth 

worth 


Grosze 

size 

greatness 


Edelstein 

precious 

stone 

HimmeZ 

heaven 

Ring 

ring 


Forms of 

Adject, or Verb 

PRONOUNS 

Forms, 

Personal 

other 

used as such. 

seiner, 

alte, 

his 

old 

der, 

abgerichtet, 

who 

trained 

which 
du, thou 

einige, 
a few 

ich, I 

kleiner, 

ihm, to him 

little 

ihn, him 

besondere, 

particular 

sich, himself 

laut, 

er, he 

loud 

du, 

zartem 

thou 

tender 

es, 

andres, 

it 

other. 

(selber) 

self 

voll, 

full 

jeder, 

each 

ganz, 

entire 

die, 

engste, 

which 

narrowest 

dich, 

kleinste, 

thee 

smallest 

dieses 

alle, 

this 

all • 

mir, 

ganze, 

to me 

whole 


wundervollen 


wonderful 

(selbst) 

self 

seinem, 

(to)his,its 

schoner, 
more beauti- 
ful 

was, 

what 


(sich) 


self 



Forms of 

Defin. and Indef. Article. 
Defin. Indef. 


der N. S. m. the 

einen, Acc. S. m. a 
der, N. S. m., the 

der, N. S. m., the 

des, G. S. m. & n., of the 

dem, D. S. m. & n., to the 

eine, Acc. S. f„ a 
der, N. S, m., the 
der, D. S. f., to the , in the 

den, Acc. S..m., the 
die, Acc. S. f., the 

dem, D.S.m.&n., to the, in 
the 

der, N. S. m., the 
der, D. S. f., to the 
dem, D. S. m. & n., ito the 
eine, Acc. S. f., a 
der, N. S. m., the 

der, D. S. f„ to the, in the 

des, G. S. m. & n., of the 


das, Acc. S. n„ the 

ein, N. S. m. &n„ a 
der, N. S. m„ the 
den, Acc. S. m., the 
das, Acc. S. n., the 
der, N. S. m., the 


Notations of forms of 
the Def. Art., like these, 
may be reduced, or omit- 
ted altogether, after a 
while. 


* The Plural of these Nouns and of other Nouns, that may yet occur in this part, will be 
found with the “ Plural ” in next part. 


91 


LIST OF WORDS continued: 


Words coming from their kind of Inflection 
under the head of 

b. Conjugation, (Verbs). 

Forms of Verbs : 


Reg. 


Irreg., 

Vocal Changes, 
“Tune”, added. 


■5 ■iT'd 

Sifi 

G ® 

>.C °g> 

rtO-g § 


X 

3 

< 


'O 

o> 

c3 

G 

tg 

£ 


Directing words, 
directing as to 


REST OF WORDS, 
or 

Words not inflected. 


03 

O 


w 

o 

a 

u 

u 

(U 


C5 
° 
co — • 

£3 

£ 3 

O •»-i 

3 5 

5 ! 3 ,0 

^ w<-> 


CO 

o 

Oh 

•3 

-§ 




b4 

o o u 

£ ft> 
k „ W)*J 
00 r. 03 
fig G 

’■§ g’g 

§|S 

o o'"' 
O 3 


8 

o 

3 

a 

V 

p. 

p. 


■ 3 

> t 

o 


► -e 

s s 


• • in 
? ■£ 


- " -a 

B 


ce C 

go 

f-* O 

’•rZ « 

AX* 

t, u 

S ** 


machte, 

made 

steckte, 

put 

machen, 

make 


ausgefiihret 

executed 

faszt, 

holds 

rtihret, 

touches, 

mouves 

leuchtet, 

shines 

ahgemalet, 

depicted 

strahlet, 

beams, 

radiates 


sprechen, 

(to) speak 

, e, a, o 

rief, 

called 
u, ie, u 

schrie, 
cried 
ei, ie, ie 

kam, 
came 
o, a, o 

o form with 2 m 

fing, 

caught 
a, i, a 

fortschleichen 
sneak away 
ei, i, i 

kam, 

came 


gibt, 
gives 
e, a, e 
(i, “second 
change”) 

gleicht, 

resembles 
ei, i, i 

saugt, 
sucks 
au, o, o 

empfing, 
received 
a, i, a 


konnte, 
(a, Pres. 
Inf. 6) 
could 
wollte, 

(i) 

would 

dachte, 

thought 

(Infin. 

denken) 


kennst, 

(a) 

knowcst 

kannst, 

(o) 

canst 

nennen, 

(a) 

to name 
brennen 

(a) 

to burn 


hatte, 

had 

( haben ) 

bist, 

art 

( sein ) 
bin, 
am 
(sein) 
war, 
was 
(sein) 

ist, 

is 

(sein) 


in, 

in 

zu|m 
to the 
an, 
at, in 
zu, 
to 

auf, 

on 

upon 

durch, 

through 

ohne, 

without 

von, 

from 


wenn, 

if 

als, 

when 


und 

and 

allein, 

but 


wo ! 

where? 
so, 
then 
allemal, 
each time 
da, 

here, there 
ganz, 
quite 
ofters, 
often 
als, 
when 
wieder, 
again 
einmal, 
once 
eben, 
just 
nicht, 
not 

geschwind, 

quickly 

damit, 

therewith 

herein, 

in 

wie, 

as 

gewohnlicli, 
usual 
immer 
always 
ein — , 
in 

doch, 

yet 

allein, 

only 

je, 

ever 

noch, 

yet 

als, 

than 


gggf 5 Write out these words, hereafter, in German Script, adding in the case of 
Nouns, each time the Def. Article. 


Learn these words by heart; in the case of the Irreg. verbs learn (observe) the 
Tune of the verbs as given. 


Note ; given as a part of the Instruction. 

Shakespeare wrote all that he wrote, with about TEN THOUSAND 
different words. The Old Testament says all which it has to say, with about 
EIGHT THOUSAND. 

Now, if you learn the words of about a dozen of such pairs of pieces as 
we have had, one in prose and the other in poetry , then you will have al- 
ready over A THOUSAND USEFUL words: more than enough for any 
ordinary purposes of speech or conversation. 

The knowledge of the Irreg. Verbs whether acquired gradually, or 
as here, at a later stage, with the Chart, will introduce you to about TWO 
HUNDRED more, of the most useful and necessary words, heads of fam- 
ilies, as “roots”, representing as such or by possible combinations .and deriva- 
tions, from about TWO to FIVE THOUSAND important words. 

But when you learn words, learn them as powers, that is here first, in 
all their forms , so that you can use them again as words when the form or 
condition of their use changes. 


Practice, and Application, 

at large, 

of the rules of Inflection, text and Diagrams: 

S0£i?r$cu|licb* 

morning song, lay. 

Read, parse, practise and apply Rules of Grammar and Diagrams at large. 

Explain “Positions of Verb”. 

The gender of Nouns where it is not seen from the text, is given. 

Irreg. Verbs, and Verbs having both Changes, are marked, and their Vocal Changes given 

$er|fd)ftunb|en tf|t bt|e ftnflr|e Sftacfjt, 

disappeared (is) has the gloomy night 
i, a, « for : ftnjlerle 

£>i|e £erd)e fdjldg|t, ber £ag er|t»adfj|t| 

the lark warbles the day awakes 
a, U, a; a 2d change 

Di|e 0onne fomm|t (mil) $rang|ett 

the sun comes with splendor 

o, a, o, Impf. one ttt neuter ; Inf. as noun 

2I|m Jptmmcl ctuf|ge|gartg|em 

at the heaven up(gone) going 
an bera maso. getyen, ging, gegangen 


93 


©te fdjein|t (tit) $runf[gcmad), 

(she) it shines in king’s splendor-room 

et, ie, ie masc. neuter (9)runf, masc.) 

©t|e fcbcitt]ct (burcfy) be|$ 23ettlcr|$ Dctcf), 

(she) it shines through the beggar’s roof 

ei, ie, ie masc. neuter 

(Unb) (in) 9?ad)t Der|bprg]cn U>ar r 

and what in night concealed was 

• fem. e, a, 0 

Dajs mad)|t jtle [futtb] (unb) [offeitbar]* 

that makes (she) it known and manifest 


Cob f ei be|m £crr|u, (uttb) Dattf, ge|bracb!t, 

praise be to the Lord and thank (brought) given 

masc. (Qual. Noun) Verb of both Changes: brirtgcrt 

Der (uber) btefjcm .SpctuS gejrcad)t; 

■who over this house watched (has, §at, understood) 

neuter 

(SWit) fetrt|en tyetfg|eit ©d)aar|ctt 

with his holy hosts 

^eiligcit" fem. 

ttit$ fgttabtg] bejmaf)r|ett! 

us graciously would protect 
both Changes, Will 

(2Bct)I) 2ftaitd)|er fcbtojj bt|e 2Iuge|u fctytucr 

well many a one closed the eyes heavy 

ie, 0, 0 in Sing, neuter 

(Hub) bffnjet ft|e bejnt gtcfyt (ntcfyt) (me()r) + 

and opens them to the light (not) no more 

neuter 


Drum freu | e (jtd)) mer, 

therefore let rejoice himself who 

„barum" 


[ucu] bejfebt, 

newly revivec . 


Dc|u frifd^| cit 23Hcf 

the fresh glance, (glance anew) look 


gu|r ©omt’ er|f)ebjt* 

to the sun raises 

gu bet e, o, o 




Read, practise, apply — review — repeatedly, both, the rules and the pieces, and 
learn the pieces, all, by heart, as practical illustrations of the rules. 


94 


Depot, 

(Station.) 

BELL. 

3Xbenb$lotf lettn 

evening little bell. 

©Ictflein, 2lbenbgI6<fIein, lautc 

little bell, little evening bell, sound 

griebe, greube 

peace, joy 

2ICfett Sftenfdjen ju! 

to all men to 

£etfe Ia§ beitt £teb erfd^atfett, 

clearly let thy song (voice) resound 

Uttb gieb Slllett 

and give to all 

gine fattftc 9iulj; 

a soft repose 

Stufye bem, ber forgt «nb meint, 

rest to him who cares and weeps 

9iu^’ bent greunb unb audj bem getnb; 

rest to the friend and also to the foe 

2l£(en Sftuben ft^enfe £>u 

to all wearied ones give thou 

Stulje, unb aud) mtr baju! 

rest and also to me (thereto, in addition). 


End of Texts of “Teaching”. Next Chapter: Teaching of Texts. 


(High School Readings.) 

READING, PRONUNCIATION, 
LETTERS. 


Collection of Phrases and Words, Idioms, Themes, 
Dialogues. 

SKETCHES: 

“ Umlaut,” “ Plural of Nouns,” “ Items of Style,” “Chart 
of the Irregular Verbs.” “Tell.” 


High School Documents. 

TIME TABLE (“COURSE”). 












































































































97 


A. TEXTS. 

I. READING LESSON. LETTERS. 


Read: German letters, English Text in German letters: 

SJanf of Common @cnfe, (SiM'tifbeb eighteen 
bunbreb feoento lu\ to tt>e Drbcr of 5)ir. 
2)oubtfut SEen £f)oufanb 3DoffarO— aitb again : 

23anf of dommort @enfe, (Efkbltff)cb eighteen fyunbrcb feoentt) 
fur. $ai) to tl)e £)rber of Toubtful £cn £t)oufanb !LoUarO. — 

Do you think you know at least gome of the German letters? 

Letters and their use, each, where it materially differs from English : 
a, e, i, o, u, a, o, it, see “Umlaut”; b, like English f.; »?, like soft v. 

b, h, f, Q> §r h t I, nt, n, p, q, r, f (at the end of a word or syllable g), 
t (tfj like simple t ), 9 , 3 . — d), as in the Scotch : loch (not k, here). 

T)ag ijt bag M . 53 . (X, bag Heine afic — that is the A . B . C, the little abc. 

Sernet bag 31 . 23 . (X — learn the A . B . C— bag grope unb bag Heine, the 
large and the small. 

You will find it in “ Child's Own", an other part of the book — ilfr ftnbet 
eg in “Child’s Own”, einern anbcrn SfyeU beg Sud)eg. 

Accent. 

The accent is on the root, stem, or a word modifying as a word the 
meaning of the stem, either as a word spelled and written separately, or as 
one word with the “stem”. Ex.: $ u ttbel)ang (dog house), Jpaug^unbe 
(house dogs); 3 U SJlittag effort, to dine; 2H)CC trinlen, to drink tea. 

Division of Syllables: 

English: gen-er-al; 

German: Q)e-ne-ral. 

Special remark. Word accent. The accent is on the last syllable in 
words ending in -ei (33raueret, brewery), and in many words from foreign 
languages, ^raftbent, ©eneral, ©enat, (Xongrep (president, general, senate, 
congress). 

Divide: SCR e n I f d) e n (men). As a rule : don’t try to do what you can- 
not, viz : to commence or open a syllable, as one syllable, with consonants 
which, if “sounded” with that one syllable, would make two of it. So you 
divide fairly : !!J?cn|fd)cn. 

Divide , and read : 

Mttafcanberltd) 

(unalterable) 
un- prefix. 

ttnabbangig (ng go here together) 

(independent) 

Unabfyangigfett 

(independence) 

llnaBI)artgtglett3ctf(avunc( ber SSeretmqten ©taaten 

(Declaration of Independence of the United States) 

(recollect in the »er-, your grammar) 

©tebensdjnfyunbert fcdigunbftebenjtg 

six. 

1776. 

Copy in English letters, and cut, on blackboard or on slate 


98 


II. PRONUNCIATION. 



BLACKBOAKD 

( Cut) : 

The Little Drop. 


First, oral, from 
picture, in Eng- 
lish; 

Then, oral Ger- 
man; 

Then, read. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


Teacher. 


f Little drop . must . to the . earth .fall 
| Tropflein - musz - zur - Erde - fallen, 

£rbpftettt ntuj} gur (1) (E r b e fatten, 

Must the delicate little flower moisten; 

Musz das zarte Bliimchen netzen; 

Bliimchen - netzen 

Sftup b jarte (2) 58 1 u nt cf) e n ne^en ;• 

Must with springs further flow, 

Musz mit Quellen weiter wallen, 
weiter . wallen, 

Sftuf mit Quetten (3) meitcr ratten. 

Must the little fish also delight , 

Musz das Fischlcin auch ergotzen, 
auch - ergotzen, 

Musz - das - Fischlein - auch - ergotzen, 

bao $ t f it) t e t it (4) and) ergb^en, 

Must in the brook the mill beat , 

Musz im Bach die Miihle schlagen, 

Miihle - schlagen, 

Miih-le schla-gen, 

Sftub tm 58acb bte (5) 5)Jtuf)le fc^Iagert, 

Must in the river the ships carry ; 

Musz im Flusz die Schiffe tragen 
die Schiffe tragen; 

9D?u§ tm $tufi bte (6) ©djiffe tragen; 

And where remained then the seas, 

Und wo blieben denn die Meere 

denn — die - Meere, 

Urtb mo blieben bettit bte (7) 2)?eere, 

If not first the little drop were. 

Wenn nicht erst das Tropflein ware. 

583emt ntcfyt erft ba$ 1. Strbpfletn mare* 


Read: ttdre, Srnbflein, SftitMe, S8him<ben. — Sound: «, 6, li; dn 
Read: £rBf>flein, fatten, (Srbe, iBIiimcben, $Dhit)le, tnnjj, SD?eere, fd)Iagen, SBadb, 
Dnette, glnjj, tragen, blieben, bie (ie = ee); gifd&lcin, tociter (ei = i), tcallen, too, 
ergofcen. 

Say the r ,£r8bfletn" by heart, first with the picture, then without. 

Srofsfen (drop), £rbpf lein; spacing letters, German mode of italicizing. 


“UMLAUT.” 

CEITTEITITIAL SKE TO EE. 



B. PIECES. 

a. Storehouse of Words, Phrases, Idioms; Dialogues. 


1 * £cid)te©ef>rdc^ 

easy dialogues 


a. Text (“Lessing”). 

1 . Reading, Pronunciation, ACCENT. 

Practise, and learn by heart. 

Sefftng fam na$ Jpaufe (Lessing came home); nadj £aufe, na$ 
£>Cttfc, — complement of Verb to come, fommen, fam, gefommcn. Jcfftitg fam 
nad) fpaufe unb ffopfte an hie Sfjur, Xlfut, 2Ijur, an hie 2f)ur, feine 
Xl)iir, feine X f) u r — and knocked at the door, his door. 

Sefftng fant eine$ 21£>enb$ (one evening) fpcit (late) nadj gaufe unb 
ffopfte an feine Sfji’tr. Der Sebiente — the servant — fat> (looked, e, a, e, sec. 
change ie) and bent genfier — out . the . window, aus bent gen jter, fafj and 
bent 5‘Cnfkb, Ilerfannte feinen #errn int £)unfefn nidjt, recognized his master 
in the . dark. not, erfennen, both changes, I! unb rief, and cried (u, ie, u) : ||ber 
5>rofeffor ifi nidjt ju £aufe — nic^t $u £ a w fe, gaufe, nidjt 3U fwufc (not at 
home). [|Scpat>et nidjtO (it hurts . nothing, never mind, no matter), anttoor- 
tete £e|‘ftnij — replied Lessing, ||icp roerbe etn anbermat tmcber oorfommen 
(I shall call another time, oorfommen, fommen, fern, gefommen), llunb ging 
ruljig fort, and went quietly away; fort, away, belongs to, gefjen, gefjen, ging, 
gegangen. ©ing fort, is an impulse, changed into effect, fort is therefore 
at the end; in fortgefjen, the fort (away) is an idea, as gefjen (to go), no effect; 
so the fort is before the Verb. 


100 


2. ANALYSIS, 

first part. Specimen; from Course. 

Write out the rest in the same way. 

1. kam Nom. Haus 

2. kam-si Nom. ein Abend Gen. Ilaus-es 

Lessing 3. kam Gen. ein-ES Abend-, S' nach Dat. Haus- A 

Gen. Lessing-s PI. 1. kam-en Dat. ein-m Abend-e Acc. Haus 

2. kam-ef Acc. ein -en Abend 

3. kam-en 

Nom. sein-e Thiir 
S. 1. klopf-TE Gen. sein-er Thiir 

2. klopf-'TE-sf Dat. sein-er Thiir 

und 3. klopf-TE (Imp’f. reg.) an Acc. sein-A Thiir (fern.) 

3. “ VERB.” 

Construction in full of a Verb, of the text, on principles. First part, specimen, from Course. 
(“rufen”, to call, irreg. Yerb; Tune u, ie, u.) 

EVERY 

Voice, Mood, Tense, Number, Person of: ruf-en required. 

Pres. Ind. (Act.) : Sing. 1. ruf-e [why?] Subj. ruf-e [why?] 

2. ruf-si [why?] ruf-c-st [why?] 

3. ruf-t [why?] ruf-e [why?] 

Plur. 1. ruf-en, etc. [why?] Plur. ruf-en, etc. [why?] 

Imperf. Ind. { Act.): rief [why?] Subj. ri'ef-e [why?] 

rief-s< [why?] rief-e-s< [why?] 

rief [why?] rief-e [why?] 

Plur. rief-en, etc. [why?] rief-en [why?] 

Fut. Ind. (Act.) I shall call, Sing. 1. (Ich) werde ruf-en [why?] 

Perf. Ind. (I have called) : Ich habe gerui-en, du hast geruf-en, etc* 
Subj. Ich habe geruf-en, du hab-e-st geruf-en, etc. [why ?] 

Pluperf. Ind. Ich hatte geruf-en, etc. Subj. Ich hatte geruf-en, etc. 
Fut. Perf. Ind. 1. (I shall have called — I shall . called . have) Ich werde 
gerufen haben. 

Same, in Passive: Pres. Ind. Sing. 1. Ich werde ge-ruf-en [why? — I be- 
come . called] ; 2. du wirst gerufen, etc. Subj. 1. Ich werde gerufen ; 2. du 
werdest gerufen, etc. 

why ? why? why? 

Write out the rest. 


b. As such. 

l* w 8efftog".\ 

Ccfftng fam eines Slbenbd (pat nad) Jpaufe. 

2£er (who?) fam nad) £>aufe? Sefftng. 

SBof)in (where?) fam cr? (Sr fam nad) #aufe» 
SBann (when?) fam cr nad) £>aufe? ©pat. 
2Bamt fam cr (pat nad) £aufe? (Sines Slknbs. 


(kind of time, Genitive, eine3 21benb3, bc3 21benb3 ; point, or duration 
of time, Acc., einen 2tbenb, ben 2lbenb). 

Ex. : Y ou will find me at home in the evening, at an evening hour, 
©ie ftnben mid) be3 SlbenbsS .ipaufe (not at day time). 

I shall be at home this evening, id) mcrbe biefen 21benb, ben 2lbenb, 
ju £aufe fein (not at 12 o’clock noon). 

23efud)en ©ie ntic^ be3 2lbenb3 (call at night time). 

Sr war ben 2lbenb bei mir, he was with me a certain evening, the 
evening (more as point of time than as kind of time). 

21m 2lbenb(e) (Dat., am, contracted from an bent; e of Dat. in 2lbenb, 
here optional, 2Ibenb here being used as a measure; the use of 
the e makes it more stately, emphatic) denotes both, point of time 
and kind of time). 

• 2lm 21benb merben bie Sarnpen angejimbet, at nightfall the lamps are lit. 

— 

Position of Verb: 

£effing fam fpat nadj £aufe, 1st Pos. 

©pat fam Cefftng nad) £aufe, 2d Pos. 

2113 Cefflng eine3 21bcnb3 fpat nadj #aufe fam, 3d Pos. 

$ant Sefftng [pat nadj #aufe? 4th Pos. or Question. 


2. (2Ijur, an hie $fjur flafjfctt.) 

Sr flopfte an bte $pr. 

S3 flopft 3emanb, somebody; 9tiemanb, no one. 

2Ber ijt ba, there? 2Ber fommt, comes? (fontmen, fam, gefommen) 

©tel)’, see, mer ba ijt (fel)en, fab, gefefjen ; sec. ch. te). 

3cb bin ba (1st Pos.); ba bin id) (2d Pos.); bu ftel)jt, bap idj ba bin (3d Pos.); 

bin id) ba? (4th Pos., Question) 

3d) bin e3 (it s I, lit: I . am . it). 

2Ber ift e3 ? Scffing ift e3. S3 ijt Seffhtg. 


3. ($cr Scbtcntc.) 

£er Scbtente erfannte feinen £errn nid)t. 

(main idea, not to recognize; secondary, whom? his master; ber 23e* 
biente erfannte nidjt feinen £errn, main idea: not to recognize his 
master .) 

SBarunt (why?) erfannte ber Sebiente ibn nic^t? (erfennen, erfannte, crfannt, 
no g C — i n p. P., owing to the insep. pref. er — ) 

S3 mar bunfel, dark; meil e3 bunfel mar. 

S3 mar 9tad)t, meil e-3 9tadjt mar. 

S3 ijt bunfel (1st Pos ) ; bunfel ijt e3 (2d Pos.); meil e3 bunfel ijt (3d Pos.); 

ift e3 bunfel? (Question, 4th Pos.) S3 ijt bell. 

Set 9? a dj t ijt e3 bunfel (9?acbt, night, fern., pi. 9tatbte). 

91m Sage ijt e3 belt (Sag, masc., pi. Sage). 


V 


102 


SBarurn ijt eg feunfet, feci 9^ad>t ? 

or fcei t>er SRacfyt, as a point of time, individualized in its kind, in 
contrast with other kinds of time; fcci 9tad)t, simply notation of 
kind, without contrast to “day”. 

Die (Sonne fd^eint nicfyt; marum fdjeint fcie Sonne uid)t? (fdjeiueu, fd)ien, ge* 
fdjienen, ei, ie, ie) 

Die Sonne ijl untergegangen (untergefyen, unter, under, down, and gefjen ; 
gcfjcn, ging, gegangcn, to go; spec, irreg., consonant changes in stem). 

Die Sonne geljt auf (up) — aufgefjen. 

Die Sonne gct)t unter — untergeljen. 

Die Sonne gef)t am Sftorgen auf, 

Die Sonne gef>t am SIknb unter: 

separable prefixes, are at the end. 

333o (where?) fcfyeint bie Sonne, ioenn fte untergegangen ift? (3d Posit.) 

Let us reach this from the 1st position. 

1st pos. simple verb, separable prefix, at end: bie Sonne gefyt unter; 

1st pos. compound form of verb, P. P. at end; Auxiliary in the place of the 
verb, at the beginning: bie Sonne ift untergegangen. 

3d pos. “Verb”, here Auxiliary, at the end: unter gegangen ijl,so that 
these words, when seen from the beginning, stand at the “end” in the order in 
which they went there : that which as the lighter, went first, the sep. pref., 
standing first ; that which when the verbal form divided, as the P. P., went second, 
standing second; and that which as the heaviest of these three, the verb as such 
itself, here the Auxiliary, from a change in the character and relation of the 
sentence, went last, standing last: each word showing in this its new place, its 
old former rank and the force of the logical process which brought it in that 
position. The numbers used in connection with the next line, denote, by their 
value, as numbers, the rank of the words, the rank of their position, the rank 
of the logical processes which brought them in that position (the higher numbers 
denoting the higher rank), and, in their succession as numbers, the succession 
in time of the processes which gradually brought them into these positions. 


denoting a change 
affecting 


unter — 
1. 


separable prefix, 
simple or comp’d 
form of the verb. 


part of verb 


gegangen 

2. 

i * \ 

part of verb as 
compound form 
of verb, place of 
Past Part. 


verb itself 


ift- 

3. 


part of sentence, a 
main part, main verb 
itself, here Aux. ; its 
place, here, sign of 
3d posit., caused by 
change affecting the 
whole sentence, 
change of relation of 
the sentence. 

sentence. 


These several ranks and values of places expressed in type: 

unter — gcgaugcit ift* 


3tuf (on, upon) ter anbern (other) Seite (side, f., pi. -n) ber &rbe (earth, f., 
pi. -n). 


©as (that) ifl eine anbere ©adje. 

(that is another thing, that puts another aspect on the matter. 
Scrdje, thing, f., pi. -n). 

©as ifl anbcrS (is not so). 

©as ifl fo ; fo ift bas ; ifl bas fo? ©ie fetjen (see), bafj'es fo ifl (fet)en, a, e, ' 
second change ie, to see). 


4. (SEBaS fagte her Schtentc ?) 

©er Sebiente fagte, was fagte er? 

SBaS (what?) tyaben ©ie gefagt, was wodten ©ie fagen? (what were you 
about to say?) 

SOBotlert ©ie gefddigfl (if you please) wiebert)oten (repeat, reg.), was ©ie ge- 
fagt baben? (3d Pos.) 

2Bcmt ©ie fo fdjned fpredjen (3d Pos.), (fo) famt idj ©ie nid)t oerflefyen (2d 
Pos.) 

fpredjen, e, a, o, to speak, 2d ch. in i; »erflet)en, to understand, spec., 
oerfletjen, oerflattb, oerflanben. £aben ©ie midj oerftanben? 

2Bas t)abe id) gefagt? 2BaS idj fagen wodte. (I was about to say.) 

wid, am willing, wodte, gewodt, both changes. 

2BaS wodte idj fagen? (what was it that I wanted to say?) 

2Ber t;at bas gefagt ? 

9ftan (one, they, people, somebody) tjat eS gefagt. 

3d) tjabe eS gefyort (heard, reg.). S3o tjajl ©u eS getjort? 3nt heater 
(theater, n.). 

3dj bin irn heater (rest; Dat.). 

3$ get)e in’S Sweater (motion, Acc.). 

3$ bin in’s Sweater gegangen. 


5. (©cr gJrofcffor.) 

©er £err $rofeffor ifl nidjt ju £aufe; er ifl ausgegangen (gone out, auSget)en, 
auSging, ausgegangen). 

2Bot)in (“whither”) ifl er gegangen? (simple idea of verb: getjen, to go.) 

S53o ifl er tjingegangen (fam.), compound idea of verb, to intend to go to a 
place, away, along, $inget)en. 

Answer to first phrase : er ifl in ben Stub (club) gegangen, simply as 
end of going. 

Answer to second phrase : er ifl in ben Stub, unb barunt (therefore): bie 
adjte ©trafje (eighth street) t)inauf (up) gegangen, intent of going to, and 
away, and direction of going. 

SBaitn wirb er wieber tjeimtommen ? come home, return from a walk, a call, 
fam., nadj #aufe tommen. 

SSann wirb er wiebertcljrcn, jurudfefjren ? return from a journey : turn -fet)= 
ren, reg., wieber, again, juriicf, back; suggestive of a line of going, a longer 
line, a line of travel. 


SSanit toirb er 3 U Jpaufe feiit? when can he be seen at home, for receiving 
a call, as a call at his house. 

SSamt famt idfj ifytt treffcit? “hit” (fam.), find him in, with a touch of the 
idea of difficulty in the finding, expressed in the “hit”. 

3$ feeijj (know, Inf. tpijfen, Imperf. and P. P. u) ti nid)t, t$ fann e3 nidjt 
fagcn. 

©djabct (reg. to hurt) nidjtS, ba3 fann itidjU fdjabeit (that will do not harm). 
£urdj ©cfyabett (n.) tt)irb ntan fiug (experience teaches wisdom). 

6. (furtgcljctt, gtttg fort.) 

Gr ging fort (away) — fortgefjen. 

SBotten ©ie fd)on fortgefyen — tneggefyen ? to leave, to go away; 

fortgefien, fortgittg, fortgegangen; tneggefjen, pegging, toeggegangen. 
SBoflcn ©ie ni$t (not) nodfj (yet) bleiben? (to stay, ct, ie, ie). 

^onnen (Pres. Ind. fann) ©ie nicf)t nod) ein ©timbd>en (a “little hour”, n.) 
bfeiben ? 

H?arunt (why?) eilen (to hurry, reg.) ©ie fo ? 

3 c) babe ©efdjafte (business, ©efdjaft, n.), idj ^abe bringenbe ©efd^afte (brin* 
gen, to press ; i, a, u). 

Qie gel)‘n (to go, getyen) bie ©efdjafte? ©ut, fdbfedjt (bad), mittelmajjig 
(middling). 

3 eberntann (everybody) tjofft (hopes, reg.), bafj int gruf)jaf)r (spring, n.) 
bie ©efdjafte beffer get)en tverben. 

c. Minor points. 

Grammatical Idioms, illustrated and explained. 

3 dj Ijabe it)n ffogett Tjutcn. — 

I heard him singing — not „get)ort". The Auxiliaries of mode or man- 
ner, fann, tnag, etc., when completing a predicate expressed in part by an 
infinitive, which has the main force of the meaning, take, as the other 
part of the predicate, the form of the Infin., also; so do the verbs: to hear, 
to see, *to teach, to let, I) 6 ren, reg., fetjen, c, a, c, sec. ch. ie; lefyren, reg., 
taffen, a, ie, a, sec. ch. a: as in the above : idj tyabe i()n finge:t (i, a, u) fjbren, 
instead of geljort. The main meaning being here, that he sang; the second- 
ary, that I heard it. Gr bat nidjt fornmen ttmllen — he has not been willing 
to come — , not: geipotit. 

2 Bemt id) nteinen Stdcr T)afccu lt*crfce — when I shall have 

plowed my “acre”, — or: -tpenn idj ntcincn Slcfer tncrbe gepfliigt Ijaben. “When 
there are several verb forms in the predicate, one of them a form of jperbe, 
this Werbe, in the 3d pos. may be set down before these forms instead of be- 
ing carried over them, to the end. It must be dropped, that is set down, 
before them if it would have to be carried over its own form as a verb : I 
told him, that he would get sick, idj fagte tf)m, bafj er tnerbe franf tnerben. 


105 


So, if there are two infinitives besides the merbet if he could love me, menu 
er midj miirbe Iieben fonnen ; although we may say : if he should have loved 
me, menn er mid) geliebt fjaben miirbe, and : menu er mil % witrbe geliebt Ijaben, 
these latter according to whether the emphasis is more on the idea (con- 
ditional) ftmrbe, or, on the geliebt, gefiebt fjaben. 


3$ fat) tfm fpitttttClt — I saw him coming (Pres. Part., in English; 
in German Infin.). 


23udj iff ju fdjretfcett (Act ) — the book is to be written (Pass.), 
in English, the act of writing is referred to the book, in German to the per- 
son writing. 


He told me, that he had (Pluperf.) received the money — er fagte mir, 
bap er b as ©elb empfangen fja&e (Perf.), empfangen, a, i, a; sec. ch. a. 

In English the act of receiving is referred to the party spoken to, “me”, 
in German to the party speaking, he. From “my” point of view, the act of 
receiving is seen a Pluperfect, more past than his saying to me; from his 
point of view, as a Perfect. 

If in German we should adopt the same form or mode of expression, 
Pluperfect (then Subj.), referring to the “money” expressly through his say- 
ing, then we make the saying only, a fact, leaving the “money” doubtful : 
he told me so, but I do not know whether it is so or not: er fagte mir, bap er 
bag ©elb empfangen f) (itte, meaning: all I know of it is that he said so. 

Translate : If the little (Heine) boy (^nabe, m., Qual. N.) had been 
willing (tootten, Pluperf. Subjunct) to come to me, I should have been able 
(fonnen, Plup. Subj. with „merben”) to present (f^enfen, reg.) him a new 
(neu) book (Sudj, n.). 

PROCESS. 

lsi Part: If the little boy had been willing to come to me — 

Process: I am willing, id) mitt; I have been willing, id) fjabe gemottt; 
I had been willing, Plup. Subj., without merbe, id) tyatte gemottt; I had been 
willing to come, id) fyatte fommen motten (not gemottt, see above „ftngen fjo* 
ren”; fommcn, to come, fommett, fam, gefomtttett); the little boy had been 
willing to come, ber Heine $na 6 e fjiitte fommett wottett; the little boy had been 
willing to come to me, ber Heine $na&e Ijatte ju mir fommcn tootten; 3d pos., 
“if”, „menn” — now, the verb, that is here the Aux. ought to go to the 
end; but there being too many verb forms over which it would have to pass 
we, first, as a fact, do not pass it over these verb forms, and second, either 
pass it over the „ju mir”, if the conditional appears to us stronger than the 
„ 3 U mir”, and „drop it”, set it down, before those verbs : toenn ber Heine 
^ttabe?? 3 U mir fyatte fommen motten (the two signs of interrogation denote 
the former place of the §atte), or, if the „ 3 U mir” appears to us stronger than 


the fyatte, bring the 3 u m i r closer to the end by, in appearance, leaving 
the tyatte where it is : menu her Heine ^nahe fyatte ju mir iommett moflen — yet, 
in fact, the gu ntir is put nearer to the end than the Ijatte which, here, in the 
3d pos., if not kept or pushed back on purpose, would have passed over the 
„JU mir", as far to the end at least here as the verb forms; whilst when in 
the 1st pos. it stands before the „ 3 U mtr", at the beginning, her Heine $nabe 
^atte gu mir . ♦ ,, it stands there, not because being kept back from its place 
at the end, but by being there in its place, at the beginning. 

Thus we have, 1st part of sentence : 

253enn her Heine $naf>e tyatte gu mir lornmen moflett — or : 

SBeun her Heine $nafte gu mir Ijatte fornmen motten — 

2 d Part : then I should have been able to present him a new book. 
Process: 

I am able, id) fattttj 

I have been able, id) tjabe gefortnt; 

I should have been able (with the Aux. merhett), id) ttrnrhe gef onnt fyafcen ; 

I should have been able to present — the coming in of this Infinitive, 
fd)enfen, to present, reg., 1 ) changes the „gefonnt", into „fonnen" (see ftngcn 
|orcn), and then 2) the Auxiliary fatten is not carried over these two Infin- 
itives as a third, to the end (its place as Infinitive, here in the Fut. Condit., 
with „t»urhe'', should), but put before them, that is nearer to mtirbe so as to 
save the euphony of the sentence (that is harmony of sound and harmony 
of meaning, each singly and harmony as agreement between sound and mean- 
ing) and so its distinctiveness as a whole under the accumulation of monot- 
onous — that is similarly structured — parts, viz : (I should have been able to 
present him a newbo'ok) id) mittbe U)m ein tteucS 33udj tyafcen fd)cn!eit fonttenj 
instead of : fdjenten — gefonnt — fyabett. 

And now “position”, of this 2d Part as a new item: this latter, 2d Part, 
being the main phrase, the assertion, yet preceded by the modification, “if” 
etc., its “position”, that is that of its verb, or here Auxiliary, is the second 
(here with the Adverb then), viz., then I should have been able etc , 
fo ttrnrhe id) tfym etc., Verb before Subj.; so that the whole of this sentence 
in German, is : 

„$Scnn bet Heine ^nafce l)dtte ju mir (or, mir Imtte) 
fommen tnoHcn, fs> murbe tcf> i£m ein neueS £3ud> Haben 
f&enfeit fomtem" 

Decline, each declinable word of the sentence. 

Conjugate, each verb, in all its leading forms, modes or tenses, first 
persons Sing. only. 

Explain each form, first as such, and then, in its use and the reasons 
for its use here as a form. 


(Sr tfjdt e3, o!)ne beniett (he did it without thinking), Inf. gov- 
erned as such by Prepos., Inf. at end; we call it a kind of 3d position. 


51 ttf gCpafit ! Attention 1 (fam., P. P. of aufpafjen, reg.); P. P. as 
(strong) form of command. 

Draufgefd)Iagert! Strike! (fam., fd)Iagen, a, u, a; sec. ch. a; barauf, 
brauf, down, on, upon.) 

9Zac£>get>ac^t ! Think ! (bertfen, badjte, gebad)t.) 


3$ bin gefaljren (I have been driven, in a carriage, a, u, a ; sec. ch. 
(i), state ; 

3$ I)abc (jefaljren, I have been driving , act or action. 


„T>u bift Dir itur emeu £riebg bettUtflt/' thou art conscious only 
of the one instinct, impulse (£rieb, m., pi. -e); Adj. gov. Genit. 

„T)od) ijl eg 3^beni flttjjeboteit," yet it is innate to -each, Adj. gov. 
Dative. 


®r mitlfaUt llttr, he displeases me, Verb gov. Dat. (ttttfjfaUen, like 
fallen, a, ie, a; second change a). 

Dod) fount tf)r mid) be$ ©ratng enfbtltbcn? yet can you release me 
of grief, Verb gov. Genit. (entbittben, t, a, u). 


2BiUji Du bag fiberfebcu ? will you translate that ? Accent on fejjen, 
fiber here insep. prefix. 

iSBtfifl Du mid) ubetfejpen ? will you set me over (the river) ? Accent 
on fiber, sep. prefix. 

fiberfebeu, mental, 
ubetfe^en, physical, natural. 


Compound inseparable prefix : 

3d) beanfprud)e (reg.) bag nicfjt, I make no claim to that; Accent on 
a n , but the whole V erb form treated as if it were a compound of simple 
verb with simple inseparable prefix. 


3# fjore, bafi ber $bntg angefontmen ift, I am told, that the king has 
arrived; meaning : the king has arrived, and they tell me so. 

3d) fjore, bap ber $onig angefommen fei, I hear, that the king had 
arrived — referring to a fact, here arrival solely again through the party telling 
so; therefore here again Pluperf. in English ; in German Subjunctive. 


108 


2. "IDIOMS 55 , 

Selected, and arranged from their first and general aspect, first as to Subject 
(whether thought, feeling; time; measure and mode); second, as to their 
kind, whether simple or more complex ; third, alphabetically , as idioms each 
time of one kind under the special head. Tune’s (forms of inflection 
in general), also literal meaning of words frequently, given. 


Thought, feeling. 

jTimo. • 

| Measure, mode. 

1. “Straight”. 

all in all, atteS jufammengenommen, 
(nebmen, nabm, genommen, sec. ch. 
i, nimmft, nimmt, Imperat. nitnm) 
directly, jefct, gletcf). 
to have done, fertig fein. 
not by/ar, Bet tneitem nicfyt. 
inopportunely, jur Unjeit (f.) 
at the latest, fpStcflenS. 

at the most, bocbflenS. 
presently, fogleid). 

as quickly as possible, fo fc^rtell trie 
mbglid). 

as soon as possible, auf8 ebefle. 
Thanks be to God! ©ott fei Sanf ! (m.) 

2. Change of -word, 
what are you about? 2Ba8 ^aBeit @ie tor? 
to spread abroad, Befannt madjen (reg.) 
of one’s own accord, au8 freiett ©tiiden, 
(©titcf, “piece”, n., pi. -e). 
what ails you? 23a8 fe^It (reg.) Sblten? 
come along! Sornrn mit! (fommen, Jam, 
getommen) 

it may not be amiss, e8 biivfte (Pres. Ind. 
barf) am ipiafce (plafj, “place”, m., pi. 
ifjlalje) fein. 

it is of no avail, e8 niifct (reg.) nid)t8. 
to feelieve him, rnenn matt ibm glau* 
ben (reg.) foil. 

to be so, ftcb toerljalten (a, te, a; sec. 
ch. in 5)„ 

who can blame me for ? SBer fann (Impf. 
o, “both changes”) mir’S berbenlen? 
(like ben ten, to think, bad)te, gebadjt) 
to make a clean breast of it, ba8 §erj (pi. 
-en) au8f<biitten (pour out, reg.) 
that is not my business, bag gebt (geben, 
fling, gegangen, to go) micb nid^ts an. 


Thought, feeling. 

| Time. 

|Measure, mode. 

you have but to speak, ©te biirfen nur 
reben (reg.). 

all but two Dollars, bi8 anf J»et 
Staler (m„ pi. Staler), 
to speak candidly, offender jig ge» 
fagt (reg.). 

the motion was carried, ber Stntrag 
ging (geben, to go, see above) burd;. 
in the cold of winter, int pdrtefteit 
SBinter (m.), 

nothing of consequence, nicbt8 bon 
33ebeutnng (f.). 

in broad daylight, am fyUtn Sage 
(Sag, day, m., pi. -e). 
it will not do, e8 mirb nicbt angeben (like 
geben, to go). 

that will not do, ba8 gebt nid)t. 

at the end of a year, nad) SSerlauf (m.) 
eine8 3abre8 (3abr, n., pi. -e). 
as /ar, as I know, fo biel id) toeifj (Impf. 
u. both changes). 

God/orbid! SBetnabre (reg.) ©ott! 

. he is a friend of flowers, er ifi ein 
g-rcunb (m„ pi. -e) bon Sflumen 
(SBlurne, f., pi. -n). 
never to be/orgotten, unbergefilicb. 

I am very grlad of it, ba8 if! mir fe^r lieb. 
in the he at of summer, mitten im @om* 
mer (m.). 

I cannot he lp it, id) !ann ni<bt8 bafiir. 
he tinted at it, er fpielte (reg. “to play”) 
barauf an. 

against my inclination, ttnber 3Bt U 
ten (m.). 

to £ill some one, 3emanben umbringen 
(fam.), ^emanben ,.um’8 Seben (n.) Brin- 
gen" (bringen, braebte, gebraebt). 

the windows Zook into the garden, 
bie genfter geben in ben ©arten. 


109 


Thought, feeling. 

| Time. 

| Measure, mode. 

what does it matter? 2Bag fd)abet (reg. 
“to hurt”) eg ? 

what is the matter there? 2Bag gibt (ge= 
ben, e, a, e, sec. change i, to give) eg ba? 
what is the matter? Sffiag gibt’g? 2 Bag 
gebt (gel;en, to go, see above) bor? 
in the mean time, unterbeffen, 
methinks, nad; meinent 58 ebitnfen (n.) 
that is too much, bag gel)t 311 tueit. 
this minute, ben Stugenblicf (m., pi. -e, 
moment, twinkling of kn eye), 
nor I neither, id) aud; nicbt. 

to be well off, tuoljlbabenb fein. 
in the open air, in ber freien 2uft 
(f., pi. Silfte, draughts of air), 
the other day, neulid). 

I owe it to you, id; berbanfe (reg.) eg bir. 
it is a pity, eg ift < 3 d)abe (@d>abeu, dam- 
age, m.) 

if you please, fein @ie fo gut. 
what is your pleasure? 2 Bd 3 beliebt? (reg.) 
to be on the point of, im 23 egriffe 
( 23 egriff, m., “conception”, pi. -e) 
fein. 

now, to the point, nun 3ur @ad;e (f., 
thing, pi. -n). 
pray! 3d; bitte! 

purposely, mitgldfj (m. “diligence”, 
“industry”) abftd;tlid). 
the book is readable, bag 33 ud; (pi. 33 ii= 
(ber) idfjt (laffen, a ’ te, a, 2d change in 
a, to leave, to let) fid; lefeit (e, a, e, 2d 
change in ie, to read). 

you have no reason, @ie fjaben nid)t 
Urfad>e (f., pi. -en). 

I can not recollect it, id) fann mid; nid;t 
baraitf beftunen (i, a, 0). 

in return, bagegen, 311m (frfafje (m.) 
to get rid of something, etlbag log 
tberben. 

the ship rode at anchor, bag ©cfyiff 
(pi. -e) lag (ie, a, e, to lie) bor 
Pilfer (m„ pi. Sinfer). 
by one’s self, fiir fid; allein. 

I am sick (of the stomach), mir ift libel, 
it serves you right, eg gefd;iel)t 3bnen red;t. 

it strikes the eye, bag fallt in bie 
1 Slugen. 


Thought, feeling. 

| Time. 

| Measure, mode. 

what are you talking about? SBobon ift 
bie Siebe? (f., pi. -n) 

thoroughly, gritnblid;. 
just in time, gur red;ten 3eit (f., pi. -en) 
it will be of no t<se, eg tbirb nid;tg belfen 
(e, a, 0, 2d change in i, fjelfen, to help), 
to be up to a thing, einer @ad)e ge« 
lbad)fen (a, U, a, 2d change in 8, 
“to grow”) fein 

to warrant, gnt ftef)en (fiir ettbag), 
fiir etmag ftel)en (fteljen, ftanb, ge* 
ftanben), fam. 

a weight on the heart (mind), ein @tein 
(m., pi. -e) auf bem ^eqen (§er3, n., 
pi. -en). 

in my tv ay, nad) mciner 21rt (f., pi. 
-en). 

in some way, einiger Sltafjen (Sflafj, 
measure, n.) 

why, he did not know him, er fannte (fen * 
nen, both changes) ibn ja nid;t. 
would to God! SBottte (trill, both chang- 
es) ©ott I 

3. Exchange of words, 

or change inform as change of words. 
anew, bon ffteuem. 
cheap, tboblfeil. 
confusedly, burd)einanber. 
delightful, 3unt (gntjiicfcn (n.). 
you may depend upon it, @ie fonnen (Pr. 
Ind. fann, both changes) fief; barauf ter« 
laffen (a, ie, a, 2d change in a). 

here enclosed, beifolgcnb (fclgen, to 
follow, reg.), beigefd;loffen (ie, o, 
0, to close), inliegenb (liegen, ie, 
a, e, to lie). 

excessively, iiber aEe fJJtafjen (see 
above). 

to /aint, obnmddbtig (“void of power”) 
tberben. 

not by/ar, bei tbeitent nicbt. 
in the/irst place, 3nm (Srften. 
with all my he art, bon gai^ent ^erjen 
(©erj, n., pi. -en). 

in good /tumor, guter 2aune (f., pi. -n). 
indeed? SEBirflid)? 3 nt Grnfte? 
((Srnff, m., earnest.) 


Thought, feeling. 

| Time. 

| Measure, mode. 

joking apart, ©djerjj (m., pi. -e) bet 
@ette (f., pi. -tt). 

by name, bem Sftamen (9?ame and 
Stamen, m., pi. Stamen) nad). 
in case of need, irn S^ot^faUe (m., 
pi. -falle). 

all at once, auf einntat. 
among ourselves, unter un8. 
to fly into a passion, tn (m.) ge* 

ratben. 

pitiful, jum ©rbarmen (n.) 
on purpose, abftcf^tlid^. 
repeatedly, ju toieberbotten SDtalen. 
to the right, to the left, red)t8, ItnfS. 
by sight, toon Stnfeben (n.) 

I am sorry for it, e8 t£)Ut (tbun, tljat, ge* 
than, to do) mtr letb. 

straight along, gerabeju. 
a stumbling block, etn ©tetn (see 
above) be8 2lnfloge8 (Stnftog, m., 
offence). 

to my taste, nad) metnem ©efdbmacf (m.) 
by turns, toedjfelStoeife, nad) ber 
9teibe (f., pi. -n). 
it is my turn, bte SRetbe tjl an mtr. 
unheard of, unerbort. 
unwillingly, ungern. 
as usual, tote getoobntid). 
to wait upon (to visit), feme Stuftoartung 
(f., pi. -en) ntacben. 

on the way, untertoeg8. 
willingly, gem. 

4. Change of thought. 

what are you about? SSa8 fangen (a, te, 
a; 2d change in fi; fangen, to catch; an* 
fangen, to begin) @ie an ? 
to change one’s mind, ftd) etneS anbern 
beftnnen (t, a, o, to meditate). 

I am much concerned about it, e8 Itegt 
(te, a, e, to lie) mtr am §er$en (§er$, 
see above). 

to put out of countenance, auger gaffung 
(f.) tringen (bringeit, brad)te, gebracbt, 
to bring). 

he cut me short, er ftel mtr tn’8 SBort (n., 
pi. SBorte, also SBcrter). 


Thought, feeling. 

| Time. 

|Measure, mode. 

have done with it! §8re (reg. fjcren, to 
hear; aufbbren, to stop) auf bamit! 
there the matter ended, babei batte e8 feirt 
SBetoenben (n.). 

he /ell out with him, er b<*t fid) mtt ibttt 
itbertoorfen (e, a, o; second change in t; 
toerfen, to throw). 

that is a matter of course, ba8 toer* 
flebt fid) bon felbfl. 

no matter, e8 bat nid)t8 ju fagen (reg. “to 
say”). 

for my part, toa8 midb betrifft (be* 
treffen, betraf, betroffen, to concern; 
second change in i). 

that remains to be seen, ba8 fragt 
(fragen, to ask, reg.; Imperf. also 

fn*9) ftcb. 

it is not all right about it, ba8 gebt 
(geben, see above) nidbtmit redbten 
$>tngen jn. 

that is to say, ba8 beigt (et, te, et, 
to be called, to mean), nantltd). 
does this suit you ? ©tebt (flcben, flanb, 
geflanben, to stand) 3b ncn tas an? 

topsy-turvy, unterfl ju oberft. 

by write, by rote, fdbriftlidb, au8* 

toenbig. 

5. Change of kind of thought 
and phrase. 

to be, to do, fid) beftnben (i, a, u; 
flnben, to find). 

by the by, ba fSttt (a, te, a; 2d change in 
8, fatten, to fall) mtr etn. 
to be elated at something, „fid) toiel ltm 
ettoaS totffeit" (to know, both ch.), fam. 
never mind, ba8 tbut (tbun, that, getban, 
to do) nid)t8. 

he left it to my option, er jleHte (reg. flel* 
Ien, to put, to place) e8 mir fret. 

pay the postage, mac^e (reg.) ben 
33rtef (m., pi. -e) fret. 

at random, auf’8 ©eratbetoobl (n.) 
we have to make shift, toir miiffen (Pres. 
Ind. mug, must, both changes) un8 be* 
belfen (e, a, o; second change in i; bet* 
fen, to help). 

what’s the use of that? SBoju ba8? 


Ill 


3. PRACTICE OF GRAMMAR. 

First oral, then in writing. 

FIXED RATE OF PROGRESS. 

A. Declension , decline. 

1. Noun. 

'#unb (dog, m.) pi. £unbe: sing, and pi.; so: 2 ©arten (garden, m.) pi. 
©4rten; so: 3 Gutter (mother, f.) pi. Gutter; so: 4 gurjl (prince, in., “Qual- 
ity Noun”); so: 5 £aug, house (n. pi., £aufer). 

2. Noun, with the Def. Art. 

1-5 Decline each of the above nouns, sing, and pi., giving in each case, the 
form of the Def. Art. 

3. Noun, Adj., and Def. Art. 

Decline: 1 ber gute £unb, the good dog, sing, and pi.; 2 ber grofe ©arten, 
the large garden, sing, and pi. ; 3 bie gute flutter, the good mother, sing, and 
pi. ; 4 ber reicbe gurfl, the rich prince, sing, and pi. ; 5 bag fdjone £aug, the 
fine house, sing, and pi. 

4. Noun, Adj., and Indef. Art. 

1-5 Decline each of the above Nouns, with Adjective, Singular, giving the 
form of the Indef. Art. a, m. fin, f. eine, n. ein. 

5. Noun and Adj., without Art. 

1-6 Decline, each of the above Nouns with Adj., without Article, sing, 
and pi. 

6. Noun, Adj. and Relat. or Demonstr. Pronoun. 

1 Give in German, and decline, sing, and pi. : this rich, good prince; 2 my 
rich, good prince ; 3 this large, good house; 4 our rich, good mother; 5 that 
(berjenigc) rich good prince ; 6 the same (berfelbe) large, black (fctytuarj) dog ; 
7 the same (baffetbe) fine house; 8 each large, rich garden. 

B. Conjugation , verb. 

Render, in German : 1 he loves (to love, lieben, reg.) ; 2 he is (being) 
loved ; 3 he will love ; 4 he will be loved ; 6 he has been loved. 

7. Noun, Adj., Def. Art. (or Relat. or Dem. Pronoun), and Verb. 

a. Simple form of Verb. 

Translate : 1 our large, black dog bites the rich good prince (to bite, bei* 
fen, Tune ei, i, i); 2 their large, black dogs bit the rich, good princes; 3 good 
mother, thou lovest a good child ($inb, n. pi. ^Inber); 4 good mothers loved 
good children; 5 a good mother may love (Pres. Subj.) a good child. 

1 


112 


b. Compound form of Verb. 

Translate : 1 the good mother has loved the good child ; * the good mother 
will love the good child ; 3 good children are loved by (non, gov. Dat.) their 
mothers ; 4 good children have always (fteto) been loved by their mothers. 

c. Auxiliaries, again . 

Translate : 1 the dog has been in the garden ; 2 the black dogs nave bitten 
the rich prince ; 8 a child has been bitten by a dog. 

C. Position of Verb, 
a. Simple form of Verb . 

Translate : 1 the black dog is in (in, gov. here Dat.) the large garden ; 
2 in the garden is the dog; 8 is the dog in the garden ? 4 1 see (fetje), that the 
dog is in the garden. 

b. Compound form of the Verb . 

Translate: 1 the dog has been in our large garden; 2 in our large garden 
the dog has been ; 3 in my fine house the black dog has been; 4 has the same 
dog been in their fine house ? 5 1 tell (fage) you that the same black dogs 
have been in our fine houses ; 6 those large, black dogs of the rich princes 
have been chased (jagen, reg. v.) out of (from, out, auO, gov Dat.) his fine 
gardens; 7 1 have read (lefen, Tune e, a, e), that her black dogs have been 
chased out of the fine houses of the good mothers. 

MIXED OR PROMISCUOUS. 

8. Noun, Adj., Def. or Inclef. Art., Relat. or Demonstr. Pronoun, 
Verb, (Auxiliary and Ordinary) and Position of Verb. 

Translate : 1 the mother loves the child ; 2 good children love their mothers ; 
3 has the large dog been in my garden ? 4 have those large dogs been in my 
garden ? 5 1 do not know (in German “ I know not“ mei§ nid)t), which man 
has sold (to sell, oerfaufen, reg. v.) the large dogs to the tailor (©djneibet, 
m., pi. <S$nett>er) ; 6 the dogs which the mother “has seen,” have been bought 
by (non, gov. Dat.) the rich prince; ’they tell me (man fagt mir), that the 
black dogs which bit the children, have been sold by the good mothers. To 
whom (an men) have they been sold ? They tell me that they have been sold 
to (an gov. here Acc.) the rich prince. 

9. Same with Personal Pronoun. 

Translate : 1 1 love the good mother ; 2 my young (ping) brothers (Srubcr, 
m., pi. SBriiter) love me; 8 he saw (feben e, a, e) him; 4 they saw us; 6 you 
saw us; ®you saw them; 7 you saw her; 8 she saw you; 9 God (®ott, m.) 
sees (fel)en has Second Change in ie) “thee” when (mann) nobody (91iemant)) 
can see “thee”; 10 he saw him before (efye, requiring 3d pos.) he was seen by 
him ; 11 they saw them with (bei gov. Dat.) us at the time (jur 3^it, al$, 3 Pos.) 

2 


113 


she was with us ; 12 tell (to) him that he has seen the large black dogs of our 
rich prince in the fine gardens of our beautiful house. 


These exercises are sufficient for all purposes of understanding, in prac- 
tice, of Declension and Conjugation, when done intelligently ; the rest, viz. 
readiness in practice, only regularly repeated practice, in reading and con- 
versation, will give. To insure here this intelligent kind of practice : give 
and show cause and reason in your translation for every individual form, of 
each word, sentence or part of a sentence, in each of these exercises. Then, 
practise, practise, that is read and speak, and apply, in reading, and speak- 
ing, what you know. 


4. THEMES FOR CONYERS ATI OH, 

Selected and arranged systematically. 

(The second form given in the cases of the nouns is the plural ; “Quality Nouns” 
are marked as such.) 

A. FACTS OF MAN. 

1. CENTRAL. 

(a. Personal.) 

2)ie ©pradje, language, ©pradjett; fpredjett, to speak, e, a, o, Sec. Change in i; 
bag 2Bort, word, 233orte and SBorter; wortlid), literal ; SBorterbud), diction- 
ary, =fcud)er. 2)er 53ud)ftabe, letter, =en; budjjiablid), literal; tie ©plbe, 
syllable, *en; bie ©eite, page, *en; ber Struct, print; ber Slbbrud, impres- 
sion, copy, Slbbructe; bag papier, paper (pi. ^apiere, documents, writings); 
ein 23ogen papier, a sheet of paper; SBogen, m. pi. 23ogen); eine 3^ a 
line, *en; fcftreiben, ei, ie, ie, to write; SIbfcferift, copy, *en; bie £eilige 
©cfyrift, the Holy Bible ; fdjriftlid), in writing ; lefen, e, a, e, sec. ch. in ie, 
to read; bktircn, to dictate, reg., drops „ge" in P. P.; bag 58udj, book, 
23tid)er; bie UeberfeJjuitg, translation, =en. 

£>er SEftenfd), man, human being (Qual. N.). 

£)er Sftann, man, banner, bie grau, woman, *ett, bag $inb, child, *er; ber 
3ungling, youth, m. *e; bie 3«ngfrau, maiden, <=en ; ber ©reig, old man, 
(Gen. ©reifen & ©reifeg). £>er Dbeint, uncle, *e, also : Dnfel, pi. Onfel; 
ber 9ieffe, nephew, *en ; bie 9ftd)te, niece, *en ; bie Sante, aunt, *ett ; ber 
©rofjsater, grand-father, »i>ater; bie ©ro&mutter, grand-mother, *miitter; 
ber Snfei, grand-child, m., pi. (Snfel; bie Gsttfelin, grand-child, f., *en; ber 
S3ruber, brother, 23riiber; bie ©djroefkr, sister, *it; ©ef^ttufler, (pi.), brothers 
and sisters. 

3 


114 


(b. Social .) 

©ag 23otf, people, 2361fer; bie Nation, nation, *ett; ber .ftottig, king 1 , *e; ber 
^aifer, emperor, pi. jbaifer; ber ^raftbent, president, *en, (Qual. K); ber 
^er^og, duke, *6ge; ber ©raf, count, =en (Qual. N.). 

©ag $onigreicb, kingdom, *e; bie SJtcpublif, republic, *en; ber (£ongre§, =e; ber 
©enat, *e; ber Jlrieg^fefretair, secretary of war, *e (.ftrieggnunifter, pi. 
the same.) 

2. PARTS. 

(a. Body.) 

©er 2eib, body, »er; also, ber Jtorper, jlorper; Unterleib, abdomen. 

©er $opf, head, ^opfc'; bie ©tirn, forehead, *en ; ber ©djdbel, ^irnfcbabel, scull, ©djd’bel ; 
bag ©e^int, brain; bag 2 luge, eye, =en; bag Dbr, ear, *en; ber Skunb, mouth 
(mouth of animals, bag 9D?auI, SDWiuler) ; bie 3«nge, tongue, -ett ; bte ?ippe, lip, 
*en; ber 3 abu, tooth, 3 ^ne; ber ©aumen, palate; bag £inn, chin; ber ©art, 
beard, 33arte ; ber ©cfmurrbart, moustaches ; ber 23acfenbart, whisker; bte 9lafe, 
nose, =en ; bag $aar, hair, -e. 

©er £>alg, neck, fvilfe ; ber^aefett, nape ; bte defile, throat, *ett; bte ©cfiulter, shoulder, 
-n; ber Slrttt, arm, -e; ber Rutger, finger, ginger; bie £anb, hand, £dnbe; ber 
bogen, elbow ; bag ©elenf, joint, =e; ber 9?agel, nail, 9fdgel; ber ©aumen, thumb, 
©ie 23rujl, breast ; bte Sunge, lungs, =en ; bag #erj, heart, *en ; bte Slber, vein, -n ; bte 
Suftrbbre, wind-pipe, =n ; atbnten, to breath, 1 eg. 

©er -Dfagen, stomach ; bie 33erbauung, digestion ; bag Sffen, eating, meal ; bag ©rinfen, 
drinking ; bie ilJiabljeit, meal, dinner, =en ; bag 3lbenbej]en, supper ; 9D?ittaggejfen, 
dinner ; bag grui)ftiicf, breakfast ; ber hunger, hunger ; ber ©urjl, thirst ; ber Stppe- 
tit, appetite ; fatt, satiate, enough ; niicbtern, jejune, (sober). 

©er ©tbenfel, thigh, ©d^cnfel ; bag Jinie, knee, =e; bie ^niefctyle, knee-hollow ; bie Snie- 
fc&eibe, knee-pan ; ber Shtodjel, ankle, $nocbel. 

©er gu§, foot, gitfje (as means of measure, gu§e, as measure, gu§); bie ©oble, sole, 
=en ; bie 3*b e / toe, *en ; gefyen, ging, gegangen, to go ; fleben, jtanb, gejlanben, to stand, 
©er ©tbub, shoe, =e ; ber ©tiefel, boot, ©tiefel; bie ©tiefel fmb ju eng, the boots are too 
tight ; bag Seber, leather. 

©er SRocf, coat, SRbcfe; ber 3tod pafjt mtr, the coat fits, reg. ; $ut, hat, #iite; ber Man- 
tel, cloak, ©Idntet; bie SBcfte, waistcoat; SBeinfleiber, breeches (£ofen, trowsers) ; 
ber $nopf, button, $nopfe ; ber jlragen, collar, cape, jiragen ; bag £>emb, shirt, »en; 
bie SBritte, spectac.es, =en; ber ©teef, cane, stick, ©tbefe 5 ©pajierflod, walking-cane. 

(b. Soul.) 

©ie ©eele, soul, *ett; ber ©eifl, mind, spirit, *er; ber ©ittit, sense, *e. ©ie 
ftinf ©inne, the five senses: boten, to hear, reg.; febeit, to see, e, a, e, 
sec. ch., in ie; fiiblen, to feel, reg.; riedjen, to smell, ie, 0 , 0 ; febmeefen, 
to taste, reg. 

©er 33er|knb, intellect ; bie SSernunft, reason ; ber SJiHe, will (*en). 

©ag ©ebacbtni§, memory; bie ©infiebt, insight ; bag 23erjlanbni§, understand- 
ing ; berfleben, oerflanb, berfianben, to understand ; nti§»erfleben (like 
jlebcn) to misunderstand ; (bag) SBiflTeit, knowledge ; bag ^ornten (ability, 
being able) ; bag ©bun (act of doing). 

4 


115 


©efitfjl, feeling, sentiment, *e; btc Smpftnbung, perception, *cit; bag ©mp* 
ftnbungg»ermogen, sensation ; cmpftnblic^, irritable, peevish. 

3)te 23orfMuitg, imagination, conception, *en; bte 3bee, idea, *ctt. 

£)te 2BaI)r^eit, truth; bie Stige, lie, falsehood, =en; Unma^rt)eit, untruth; bie 
$aufd)ung, deception, =en; bie 23erfid)erung, assurance, *en. 

£>fe Dugenb, virtue, -en; 9ted)tfcf)affenbett, honesty, probity; bie ©Ijrlidjleit, 
honesty; ebrlicf) iualjrt (to last, reg.) am langjfen, longest, proverb: 
honesty is the best policy; bie Sefc^eibep^eit, modesty. 

Sledd, right, justice; bag diecfyt, law; Unrest, wrong, injustice, injury; bie 
©iinbe, sin, *en. 

3. PORTIONS ( Facts and Features External )„ 

SDte Grbe, earth, =en; ber £tntmel, heaven, £tmntel; ©oft, God (pi. ©otter, n.) ; (bag) 
£eben, life ; bte Qctoigfeit, eternity ; (bag) SDafeirt, existence, being ; (bie) Unfierb* 
Itcbleif, immortality. 

Dag 3D?eer, sea, =e; bag Sanb, land, Sanber; ber 33 erg, mountain, «e; ber gtu§, river, 
Stiiffe; bte 33rucfe, bridge, =en ; bag ©c^iff, ship, =e; ber iDfafi, mast, =en; bag 
©egel, sail, ©egel; bag Stuber, oar, 9tuber; bag ©teuerruber, helm, rudder. 

Die SBinbe toeben (blow, reg.), bag 3tuber fnarrt (creaks, reg.) ; bte ©egel bld'ben (fcb 
bidden, to swell, puff up, reg.), ftct) fcbon (already) jur [Satjrt (for the journey, 
drive, sail). 

2luf ! (up) 9Jfatrofen (sailors), bie Slttfer (anchors, m.) geltcbfef (to weigh, reg. ; P. P. 
here used as Imperat .), ©egel gefpartrtt (to stretch, span, here to set, reg.), unb 
ben Sontpafj gericbtet (to arrange, to point, reg.), auf ! unb abe ! (adieu 1 farewell !) 
beute (to-day) nocb (still) gebt’g (goes it, we go) in bte toogenbe (to wave, heave 
up, reg.) ©ee (sea, =en; ber ©ee, lake, =en). ©tbetben (departure, taking leave ; 
as verb : et, it, te) atb ! (alas 1 ah ! oh !) ©c^etbett tb«t web’ (does, causes pain ; 
tbun, that, getban, to do). 

Die (Sifenbabn, railroad, -en; bte Damjjfntafcbine, steam-engine, =en ; bte Socomottse, 
locomotive, »en ; bag ©eletfe, track, ©eleife ; bte ©fatten, station, =en ; anbalten, to 
stop, a, te, a, sec. ch. in a ; ber SBagen, the wagon, car, SBagen, (also, ord. 
vehicles, SQdgen). 

Dag Dontpfit^tff, steamboat, =e; bag Slab, wheel, 3?aber; ber Sapttatn, captain, =e; bag 
Ufer, shore, lifer; bte ©trbmung, current, =en ; ber ©olf (front, gulf stream; ber 
Sompaf), compass ; ber 2£tnb, wind, =e. 

Der ©turm, storm, ©turrne ; SBtrfbntHe, calm ; ber Sffitrbeltotnb, whirl wind, tornado. 

231au, blue ; gelb, yellow ; rotb, red ; gritn, green ; 'weifj, white ; febtoarj, black ; btefeg 
ftnb garben, (colours, bte Ornrbe.) 

gfjotbr orange, gelb, grim, blau, 3nbigo and stolef, ftnb bie ifarben beg Siegenbogeng (rain- 
bow) ; fie aHe (toenn toir garben ntit SDbnett uerglettfie t, if we refer colours to 
sounds), ftnben jttb alg folcbe (as such) in bem beutfcfjcn iBoFalfyjiem (vowel system) 
bag beift (that is to say) alg garben, unb tn btefer Drbnung (order, pi. rows; 
divisions); toetfe, 2Betgbetf, wise, wisdom, f. ; £bw> £botb«t/ (fool, m- pi. 6, Qual. 
N. ; folly, f. ph 6). 

Der^rteg, war, -e; ber grtebeor grteben, peace ; bte ©$Ia<H battle, -en; bag 33iinb* 
nt§, alliance, league, »e ; ber ©eneral, general, *dle ; ber ©olbat, soldier, -en, 6, 
Qual. Noun. 

Die ©ctmle, school, -=en ; ber f>of, court- yard, £ofe; bag £aug, house, £>aufer; bte £>ei* 
ntafb), home; bie 2el)rff«nbe, lesson, lecture, *en; bte Slufgabe, lesson, task, *en; 
5 


116 


ber fleeter, teacher, ^efjrer ; ber ©filler, pupil, ©filter; bcr fProfeffor, professor, 
=ert ; bie Uniserfitat, university, =en ; £of)e ©ct?ule, high school, »en. (£od)fcf)ule in 
Germany, means the same as “university”) ; lernen, to learn, reg. ; »erge(feit, 
forget, e, d, e, sec. ch. in i. gerien, holidays in school. 

©olb, gold, ©fiber, silver, ©ifett, iron, finb SDietafle, are metals (bab detail), unb ftnb 
flUe jacf>li($ (neuter), aber bab ©ifen, menn eb tjart mirb (when it is made hart) unb 
fcfmeibet (cuts,- fcfmeiben, fd)ititt, gefc^nttten), ber ©taf)l, steel, ifl mannltcb (mas- 
culine). 

©ab ©rab, grave, =aber; ber Job, death ; tobt, dead; tbbten, to kill, reg.; flerben, to 
die, e, a, o ; sec. ch. in t ; „mer an mid) glaubt, ber toirb leben, ob er gleid) 
(though) ftiirbe, — ftiirbe here is a form and instance of “Exchange.” Explain 
it as such, from fterben, to die, e, a, o ; sec. ch. in t. Show also what that form 
would be ordinarily and why in your judgment, the form of the Exchange is 
maintained in the language. 

©er ©tern, star, *e ; bab Seltgebaube, universe, system of the universe ; bab SeltaC, 
universe ; ber girfiern, fixed star ; bie 3}?itd)ftrafse, milky way. ©er jftorbpol, ber 
©itbpol, north pole, south pole ; ber fPol, -e; bie ©rbadjfi', axis of the earth ; brefycn, 
to turn, revolve, reg. ; ber Slequator, equator; ber Settbefreib, tropic, *e; ber £f)ier» 
fretb, zodiac. ©ab Seltgericbt, day of judgment. 

©ab ©emitter, thunderstorm, ©emitter; ber 23lt{), lightning, »e; ber £>agel, hail, ber 
groft, frost, ber 3legen, rain. 

grilling, ber grilling, spring, grueling fommt, ber 2?ogel jmitfdiert, Salb belaubt ftdf), 
©onne Iad)t: spring comes (fommen, fam, gefontmett), the bird (33ogel, 33ogel) 
warbles, reg., wood, forest (Salb, ber 2Balb, Sdlber), covers itself with leaves, 
reg., sun smiles (reg., lit. laughs) ; l)in (on, thither) $um SGfeere (to the sea) 
tanjet (dances, reg.) fingenb (ftngen, i, a, u, to sing) ber geloften ©triirne 5D?ac^t (the 
power, force of the freed, liberated streams, rivers ; lofen, to free, to loose, 
reg. ; ber ©trom, stream, strong river, ©trbme; bie ’Diacbt, might, force ; powers, 
centres or representatives of power : SCftadfie ; (write out these two lines of 
.poetry in English letters, afterwards in German Script). 

grueling, spring ; ©ommer, sommer ; £>crbjt, autumn, Sinter, winter, all masc. 

©omttag, Sunday, Sontag, Monday, ©icnftag, Tuesday, 9)Jittmo<$, Wednesday, ©on- 
nerfiag, Thursday, grettag, Friday, ©amftag, Saturday ; Dftern, Easter, fPfingften, 
Whitsuntide ; Settjnadhen, Christmas. 

Religion (bie), religion, =en ; ©iaube (ber), faith, creed; bie $ird)e, church, *eit; bie 
©emeinbe, community, congregation, =en; ber ©taat, state, =en; bie ©tabt, city, 
©tdbte ; bab ©orf, village, ©brfcr; bab gelb, field, =er ; ber Sttfer, acre, Sledcr; bie 
gurdje, furrow, =n; ber Dt^fe, ox, =n; bab Q.>ferb, horse, *e; bte Jtufy, cow, Hufye ; 
ber $uttD, dog, =e ; bab £ut)n, chicken, £mfmer ; bab ©i, egg, =cr ; bab ©i beb ©olurn* 
bub, the egg of Columbus ; fennft bu bac- ? doest thou know it? Senn’b ©iner 
gctban t>at, bamt (then) benft 3eber er f)dtte eb tfyun fbnnen — parse, explain gram- 
matically, and translate this; marum (why) bab: fbnnen, ftatt (instead of) 
„ gefonnt?" 

Slepfel, 9?iiffe, 23irnen, $irfcf>ett, plur. of: ber Slpfel, apple, bie jJiufj, nut, bie 23irne, pear, 
bie $irfd)e, cherry. 

©er $u$en, cake, ftueben ; ber £)bftfuc|en, fruit-cake ; bab Sef)I, flower; ber £eig, dow ; 
eb gtbt aucb ein Sort IXeicb, pond, *e ; „gibt" con (from) geben, e, a, e ; sec. ch. in t, 
“it gives,” meaning : there is ; aud), also ; ein Sort, word, Sorte, alive in their 
meaning as words, but: Sorter, dead as mere forms of words; barunt fagen 
mir (therefore we say) Sbrterbudj, dictionary ; but : „$feine Sorte ftnb £eben," 
my words are life. 

6 


117 


£>ie Sitrone, lemon, *ett; bie Orange, orange, «it. 2)te (Jitroncn unb Orangen ftnb ©iib» 
friic^te (tropical fruit, or fruits growing in a southern latitude). £)ie Sitronen 
unb Drangen wacjjfcn (grow, a, u, a, sec. ch. in a), im ©uben, (south). 

£cr ©iiben, ber 91orben, ber Dften, ber SBeften (south, north, east, west) ; fiiblic$, norb* 
liefi, ojtlicf), wc(Hic^ (southern, northern, eastern, western). 1)ie ©iibjtaaten, bie 
fteftlidjen ©taaten, bie 9Ieu»Snglanb ©taaten, the southern states, western states, 
New Eugland States; ©taat, ber, state, *en; bie $)(ittel»©taaten, middle states. 
©4>lufj*(tein*jtaat, Key-stone-state. (Key, lit. ©cfclujfel, ber ©ctfiiifjel, ©djliijjel ; Key- 
stone, ©cblufjftein ; ber ©tein, stone, =e ; ber ©4)lu{j, close, conclusion ; conclu- 
sions : ©djlufje). 

^ciertag, ber, holiday in church, festive day, festival, *e; Seierabenb, ber, evening time 
when work ceases, cessation of work, *e ; 0eie*abenb matron, tech, or fam., to 
cease from working ; maefyen, to make, reg. 

„2Br rcollen geicrabenb ntacben," we will cease working, fiir fyeute, for the day. 
©eburtetag, birth-day, ©eburt^tagSfeier, birthday celebration, ©cburtifiagSgcfcfyenf, 
®c - burl » $ * tag * $ » ge » fd&enf, birthday present (Jag, day, *e). 

©lode, bic, bell, »en; Stbenbglccflein, little evening bell, n. 


RECITE „2H>ctib|jlotflcin." 

See first part of book : 

©ISdlein, SlbenbgtBcfleut, laute 
griebe, greubc, 

Slflen SDtenfdjen ;u. 

£etle lag bcin 2icb crfcbcllen, 

Hub gib Men 

Sine fanfte SRui) l 


7 


118 


B. FORMS OF ACTIONS 

AND INCIDENTS OF LIFE OF MAN. 

a. INDIVIDUAL, MENTAL, POWERS OF MAN. 

Able, to be able, fijnnen, foitnte, gefonnt. Potmen ©ie 3(>re Section ? Do you know 
your lesson? 

Acquainted, to be acquainted with, fcitnen, fannte, gefannt. 5lcnncn ©i c btefen 
£>crrn ? Do you know this gentleman ? 3$ fenne t|n oon 2tnfebeu, I know him 
by sight. 

Address, to address one, anreben. ©uten Jag, $crr 23., good morning, Mr. B.; 
c3 freut ©ie gu fef>en, I am happy to see you; rote beftnbett ©ie fid)? how do 
you do? toie get)t ti ? how are you? 

Admiration, 23e»unberuug, f. £>.r3 ijl berrlid), it is superb ! ba3 ijl gum Sntgitden ! 
It is enchanting I 

Affection, 3uneigung, f. Sr ijl cin gutcr greunb oon mir, he is a friend of mine. 

Affirm, to affirm, bejaben. 3d; fage, ja, I s iy, it is. ©ie baben 9iedd, you are right. 

An ger, 3orn, m. Sr fotlte fid) fcj)amen, he ought to be ashamed. ©ie tour fejjr 
ergurnt, „bbfe/ / fam., she was very angry. 

Answer, to answer, anttoorten (reg.). SBarurn anttoorten ©ie mir nidd ? Why don’t 
you answer me? 

Anxious, beforgt. ©ie ijl fe|r beforgt um i|n, she is very anxious about him. 

Approbation, 33ctfall, m. 2)a0 |at ntcinen 33etfatl, that meets with my approba- 
tion (pleases me.) 

Ask, to ask, Bitten (bitten, bat. gebeten), frageit. 3)arf id) ©ie bemiiben? May I trouble 
you, to — Darf td) ©ie bitten? May I ask you? £)arf id) ©ie um eine ©efdflig* 
fett bitten? May I ask you a favour? Srlauben ©ie mir cine grage an ©ie gu 
rtc(>tett? permit me to ask you a question. 

Astonishment, Srjlauncn (n.), 23crwunberung, f. Sr mar crflaunt itjn gu fef>en, he 
was astonished to see him. 3fl e$ mbgiicb ? Is it possible ? ift gang. gum 
Srjlaunen, that is quite astonishing. 

Aversion, SIbjcbcu, m. 3d) fann i{>n nid)t auSjiebett, I can not bear him. 

Bring, to bring, bringeit, brad;te, gebradd- 33ringen ©ie mir cine £ajye $affee, bring me 
a cup of coffee. 

Believe, to believe, glaubcn. ©lauben ©ie ba3 ? do you believe it ? 3d; fann ed 
faum glauben, I can hardly believe it. 3$ glaube niebt, I suppose not. 

Blame, to blame, tabeln, reg. ©ie ijl fcf)r bariiber gu tabelit, she is much to be 
blamed fur it. 

Buy, to buy, faufeit. 5Bo I;abcn ©ie ba3 gcfaitft? where did you buy that? SBie 
nicl baben ©ie bafiir begablf ? IIow much did you pay for it ? 

Come, to come, fommen, fam, gefommen. SBann toirb cr guriidfommen? When will 
he return ? 

8 


119 




Consent, to consent, eintoi'Higen. ©erne, non £>erjett genre, willingly, with all my 
heart, gr mag ed tgun, let him do it; icg totHige etn, I conseut; mil otel SSergnu- 
gen, with great pleasure. 3d) gabe mdgtd bagegen, I liave no objection to it. 

Consult, to consult, beratgen, beriett), beratgen. 2Bad fotlen toir tgun ? What shall 
we do ? 3d) nicgt trad tt^ tgun foil, I know not what to do. Saffen ©ie mid) 
ntacgen, leave that to me. 

Deny, to deny, oerneinett. 3$ gcbe bad nid;t ju, I do not admit that; id) mug 3gnett 
toiberfprcd;en, I must contradict you. 

Dislike, Slbneigung, f. Sr migfdllt mir, he displeases me. 34) toiinfd;e, er ginge, I 
wished, he would go. 

Displeasure, Untotllcn, m., 9D?tgfaf(en, n. $fui ! fcganten (red.) ©ie fid;! Ofye! for 
shame ! SBelcge ©dganbe, what a shame ! (f.) Sajfen ©ie fid) bad jur SBarnung 
bienen, (reg.) let this be a warning to you. 

Doubt, to doubt, jtoetfeln. 34) bejtocifle bad fel;r, I doubt it very much ; ed tfl jtoct* 
fclgaft, it is doubtful. 

Entreat, to entreat, bitten, bat, gebetcn. Darf teg ©ie urn eine ©efdKigfeit bitten, may 
I ask you a favour (f . ; barf, Inf. biirfen) ? SBolleu ©ie fo gut fern — , will you be 
so kind as to — ? ©ie fbitnen mir einen grogen Dtenfi ertoefeit (=ei. At, Ae), you can 
render me a great service (m. pi. =e). 3)iit Srlaubnig, allow me ! 3d; bitte um 23cr= 
jeigung, treitn icg ©ie unterbrecge, I beg pardon (f.), if I interrupt (e, a, o. sec. ch. 
in i) you. 

Fear, to fear, furdgtcn, to be afraid, fid) fiirdgten, reg. flurd;tcn ©ie fid) ? are you 
afraid? 3d) fnrdjtete, er mbd)te ben 3 U 3 rerfdumen, I feared, he might miss the 
train (3ug, m. pi. 3uge.) 

Forg-et, to forget, oergejfen, a, e, sec. ch. i. 3d) gabe bad ganj o rgeffeit, I forgot it 
altogether. 

Frightened, to be ; erfcgreden, erfcgraf, erfdgroden. SBoritber erfcgreden ©ie ? by what 
are you frightened? 34) bin fo erid)rocfen, I was so frightened. 

Go, to go, gegen, ging, gegangen. SBogitt gei;en ©ie? where are you going? 3d) 
toollte ju 3gnen, I was going to your house. 

Go for, golen. £olen ©ie ben Slrjt, go for the physician. SBillft bit mcincn ©tod 
golen? will you fetch my cane? 

Grief, ©dgrnerj, m. 23etruben ©ie ftd^ nid^t baruber, do not grieve about it. 3d) fann 
ben Qoerluft ntdgt oerfcgmcrjen, I can not get over the loss. 

Hear, to hear, gbren. 3d> gabe ed fagen gbren, I have been told; id) gore ©ie ntdgt 
an, I don’t listen to you. 

Inquire, to inquire, fid) erf'unbigen. SBenn ©ie ngd; fp. fontntcn, muffen ©ie gcg nadg 
$errn ©. crfunoigen, when you come to P., you must inquire for Mr. G. fbitnen 
©ie mir fagen, mo £crr ©. toognt? can you tell me, where Mr. G. lives? 

Joy, Sreube, f. 3 d) bin erfreut Dariiber, I am glad of it. 

Know, to know, toiffctt, tougte, getougt. Dad gabe id) ntcgt getougt, I have not known 
that, fo otel id) toeig, for aught I know. 

Let, to let, laffen; lieg, laffen, gclaffen. ©idg einen ncucn fRod madgen laffen, to have a 
new coat made. 3emanbcit golcn laffen, to send for some one. Safjen ©iebad! 
Let that be. 3dg tocrbe ©ie bad toiffen laffen (toiffen, tougte, getougt. Pres. Ind. toeig), 
I shall let you know. 

Listen, to listen, gordgctt (reg.) $ordg! hark ! listen ! 

9 


120 


News, 9feueg, [Jfeuigfeilen. 23ag gibt eg ffteueg? what is the news? £abeit ©ie bie 
lenten 9tad)rid)ten get)brt ? Have you heard the latest news. 3d) Ie[e feine 3 e * tun 3 
I do not read the papers. £aben ©ie son 31)rcnt 23ruber gc^ort ? Did you hear 
from your brother ? 

Offer, to offer, anbieten, (ie, o, o). 9J?a$en ©ie mir bag iCergniigcn, biefe ^fetnigfett an* 
gunelmten, do me the favour to accept (aitnefjmen, mtna&m, angenommen, sec. ch. in 
i, nimmjt, nimrnt, Imperat. ntmm), this trifle (f., pi. =en), 23ergniigen, pleasure, n. 

Pity, SSetauern, n. to pity, bebauent, reg. SBte fd)abe! what a pity! Gg ijl fef>r un« 
dttgenefjm, it is very disagreable. 

Probability, SBa^rfc^einlic^fett, f. Gg if! teaftrfdjeinltd), it is likely. Gg fann fein, it 
can be. Stein SBunber, no wonder. 

Refuse, to refuse, ab[d)Iageit, a, u, a ; sec. ch. in a. Gg ijl itnmbglid), it is impossible. 
Sag fann nicfyt fein, that can’t be done ; bag geld nid)t, that will not do ; fyabett 
©te etteag bagegen einguteenben? have you any objection to it? 

Regret, to regret, bebauent, r eg. 3d) bcbaure, bap id; ntd;t ba tear, I regret, that I 
was not there. 

Remember, to remember, fid) ertnnern, reg. Grtitnern [ie fid) bcjfen? Do you 
remember that? Gg fdtlt ntir nic^t bet, I don’t recollect it. 

Satisfaction, 3ufriebenl)eit, f. 3d) bin jufriebett barnit, I am satisfied with it. Out l 
23rato! Good! Bravo! ©ef)r teof)!, very well. 2Uleg gel)t nad) SBunfd) (m. pi. 
2Bltnfd)e), everything happens as I wish (gcpen, gtng, gcgangcn, to go). 

Say, to say, fageit, reg. 2Bag fagen ©ie? What do you say? ©o ju fagen, as it 
were ; son ^brenfageit, from hearsay. 

Seek, to seek, fudjen, reg. 3d) babe eg liberal! gefudjt, I was looking for it every- 
where. 

Sell, to sell, serfaufcn, reg. 2Bie uerfaufen ©ie bag? How do you sell that? 

Sorrow, Summer, in. Gg tf)ut mir leib, I am sorry for it. 

Speak, to speak, fprecfyen (e, a, o ; sec. ch. in i.) ©pre^cn ©ie lauter, speak louder. 
3d> babe ntit tf)tn gefprodben, I have spoken to him. 

Surprise, Ueberrafdmng, f. ©ie itberrafdjett, reg., mid), you surprise me. 

Take, to take, nepnten, nabm, genommeit. Ulefjmcn ©ie bag mit, take that with you, 
tragen, a, u, a, sec. ch. in d. Stage ben 33rief auf bie fPoji, take that letter to the 
post office. 

Thank, to thank, banfen. 3d> banfe 3btten, thank you ; ©ie ftnb fef)r giitig, you are 
very kind. 3d) bin 3fynen febv oerbuitcen (i, a, u), I am obliged to you. 

Think, to think, benfen, battle, gebaefd. IDettfen ©ie ftcb ! Imagine! £)ag fyabe id) mir 
gebai^t, I have thought as much. 

Way (to ask the way), 2Bcg, m. pi. Sffiege; nad) bem ffiege gu fragen, fragen, reg., or 
fragen, frug, gefragt. fragen, nac[) bem SBege, ask the way. (S5eben ©ie gcrabeaug, 
teenben ©ie ftcb rcd)tg, littfg ; go straight on, turn to your right, left ; gcf)cn, ging, 
gegangen ; teenben, teanbte, geteanbt. 2Be!d)cg if! ber fiirgejlc 3Beg nad) . . ., which is 
the shortest way to . . . 2Bie teeit ijl eg son bier ? How far is it from here? 

10 


121 


6. INCIDENTS, MATERIAL AND MENTAL. 


Weather, ^Better, n. 

2Bie ijl bag ^Better? ttag fur SBetter ijl eg? 

What kind of weather is it? 

©g ift fcfjb'neg — ft^fed^teg — SBetter, it is fine 
— bad — weather. 

Dag SBetter tjl beflanbtg — unbejlanbtg, the 
weather is settled — unsettled. 

©g ijl triibe, it is cloudy. 

Die Sonne f$eint,the sun shines (ei, it, te). 
Der $tmmel umjiebt jtef), the sky becomes 
very cloudy (umjteben, untjeg, umjogen). 
©g ijl abjdjculicfieg SBetter, it is dreadful 
weather. 

©g tjl tpinbtg, it is windy; ber 2Btnb legt 
fit the wind falls. 

©g tfl nebelig (foggy), gelinbe (mild), toarnt 
(warm), fait (cold), fdjwul (sultry). 

©g regnet (rains, reg.)> feftneit (snows, 
reg.), fjagelt (hails, reg), friert (freezes, 
te, o, o), tgaut (thaws, reg.). 

©g blijjt (lightens, reg.), bonnert (thun- 
ders, reg.), fcglagt tin (the lightning 
strikes, a, U, a, sec. ch. a). 

©g ijl fefjr fdjmutjig (muddy), jlaubtg 
(dusty), glatt (slippery). 

©g tjl Jag (day, m. pi. *e) jftucljt, (night, 
f. pi. jJlcidjte), jKitterna^t (midnight), 
5)lorgen (morning, m. pi. same), Slbettb 
(evening, m. pi. «e), ©g ijl bunfel, totrb 
bunfel (is dark, is getting dark). Die 
Jage net) m en ab, — ju, the days are 
growing shorter, — lengthen; 5)?onb=. 
fcftetn, moonlight, m. 

Dag SBetter flart jteg auf (is clearing up). 

Age, 2Uter, 

2Bie alt finb ©te, how old are you? 3$ bin 
jegn 3agre alt, I am ten years old. 3D?in- 
berja^rtg, under age ; munbtg, of age, 
alt, old (Comp, alter. Sup. altefl), jung, 
young (Com. & Sup. Umlaut); in ber 
Sliitlje ber 3al>re, in her bloom ; in ben 
bejlett 3ul)rett, in the prime of life. 

O’clock, time, Itbr, f., 3eit, f- 

SBie Piel Ugr ijl eg ? What o’clock is it ? 
©g tjl etit Ugr, — one o’clock; fjalb ein 
Ugr — ha'f past twelve; bret Ptertel auf 

10 


etn Ubr or etttg, a quarter to one ; etn 
Ptertel auf eittg, qnarter past twelve; 
fitnf jDlinuten big (to) fjalb eing, twenty- 
five minutes past twelve. 

Necessaries of Life, SScburftttffc 
t>e$ CcbcttS. 

3$ bin gungrig, burflig, rnube, fcfjlafrig — I 
am hungry, thirsty, tired, sleepy. 

3d) bin erfebopft por Wubtgfeit, I am ex- 
hausted (reg.) with fatigue (f.). 

3$ fonnte nic^t etnfcj)lafen, I could not get 
to sleep (a, te, a, sec. ch. in a), 
©efunbgeit, health, f. 

Salutation, @rufL m. pi. ©ruffe. 
3$ toimfdfje 31>nen guten 5D?orgen, I wish 
(reg.) you good morning, m. 

©uten 2lbcnb! Good evening! (m. pi. »e). 
©inb ©ie trotyl? Are you well? 3$ bin 
jiemltdjj tx>of)l, I am tolerably well. 

©o jiemlief), tolerable, 
jfticgt ganj tPof)l, not quite well. 

©g tjl mtr leib ju bmren, bafj ©te nit^t trotyl 
jinb, I am sorry to hear (reg.), that 
you are not well. 

To take leave, 3lbfcbict> nebtnen. 
(netymen natynt, geuommen, sec. ch. in i, 
ntmmjl.) 

Bebett ©ie trotyl ! Farewell ! 

3cty empfetyle rnicty, good bye! (empfetylen) 
a, o ; sec. ch. in te). 

3cty mug mitty 3tynen empfetylen, I must take 
my leave of you. 

To buy, to sell, faufett, t>crfau= 

fen (reg). 

Sfriibftiicf, n., 3Ktttageffen, n., 
Sbec, m., Slbettbeffcn, break- 
fast, dinner, tea (supper). 

toffee, coffee, m., Styocolate, f. 

Sjfen (to, eat e, a, P. P. gegeffen ; sec. ch. 
t), trinfen (to drink, t, a, u); rorjtetyen, 
to prefer, rorjog, porgejogen. 

3ucfcr, fOTildty, 23rob, Sutter, sugar, m., 
milk, f., bread, n., butter, f. 


122 


©ii§, sweet; flarf, strong Comp. & Superl. 
Umlaut) ; anbieten (te, o, o), to offer ; 
baufen, to thank (reg.); 3$ baitfe 3bnen, 
(here usually meaning: I thank you, 
no). 

Somplimeute m/icbcit, to make (reg.) any 
ceremony. 

St, Sier, gletfcb, failed gleijdj — egg, n. 
eggs; meat, n., cold meat. 

Haffe, cup, f. =eu ; also : cup and saucer ; 
Untertafje, saucer. 

SBollctt ©te mit und friibftucfen? Will you 
breakfast with us? 


©uppc, ©cpjfel, teller, Sbffel, ©abel, We f= 
fer (soup, f. -eu, dish, f. *u, plate, m. 
spoon, m. fork, f. =n, knife, n. 

23r«tett, roast, m. ; fett, fatt, mager, lean, 
©emit |’c, vegetables, n., ©eilitgel, fowl, n. 
^itnbfletfcb, beef, n. ©alj, salt, n. Sfftg, 
vinegar, m., ^fejfer, pepper, m. 
gtf<b, fish, m. =e, Jlartoffel, potatoe, f. 
Slbtragcu, auftragcu, to clear the table, set, 
serve up (a, u, a; sec. ch. in d). 

Wetue £erren, menu ed gefdlltg tjl, cd tfl an= 
gertc^tet. Gentlemen, if you please, 
dinner is ready, on the table (anricljtcu, 
reg.) 

£l)Ce,tea, m., S^atym, m., cream; 23uttcr= 
brob, ettt, m. bread and butter. 2td)t, 
light, n., =er ; Stutter, candlestick, m., 
©adlic^t, gas. 

23arfett, to bake, a, u, a (sec. ch. a); foctyen, 
to cook, to boil, reg.; bratcit, to roast, 
a, te, a ; sec. ch. iu a ; faljctt, to salt ; 
tcrfaljeit, oversalt, reg.; P. P. uerfaljeu. 


Sftorgcn (3lufffcl)ctt), morning, m.; 
to rise, rising, getting up, n. 

2Camt flefjeit ©te auf? When do you get 
up? 

©ut fdilafcn, to sleep well (a, te, a, sec. 
ch. d); teamen, to wake, reg. fcfjldfrtg, 
sleepy. 

3d) babe uocb ntt^jt audgefcblafen, I have not 
had sufficient sleep yet. 

Slbctth, 91acbt (ju SBcttc gcbtt), 

evening, m. =e; night, f. 9lci$te; to 
retire, go to bed — geben, gtng, gegangctt. 

Safjt und ju SBette geben, let us go to bed. 

stiffen, pillow, n. pi. ftiffen; SDecfe, cover, 
blanket, f., *n. 

2Battn fotl teb ©ie rufen, when shall I waken 
you, awake you — u, te, u; toeden, reg. 

Utn jeebd Ubh at six o’clock. 

©d)lafcn ©te tuobl/ sleep well; 3$ trunfd)e 
3bnen angentbme 3^ufje, I wish you a 
good night’s rest, f. tounfd)cn, reg. 

Soften ©te bad £tcbl aud, put out the 
candle; Hrebeit ©ie bad ©ad ju, turn 
off the gas, — Ibfc^cit, brebjen, reg. 

©pajtcrgattg, walk, m. pi. walks, 
ways, -gauge; tm ©arlett, in the garden, 
m. pi. ©drten; SBalb, wood, m. pi. 
2Bdlber; SBtefe, meadow, f.=n; gujjpfab, 
path, m. n ; gabrjtrafje (iu the country), 
turnpike, f., =e; gabrweg, road, m., =e. 
©pajterflotf, walking stick, m. pi. =jtbcfe; 
fleittig, stony; fepattig, shady; ojfen, 
open; tm greien, in the open air. 

Untfebren, to turn, b>cimfet)ren, return; 
Sfrbett, work, labor, f. p. =cn ; ©efcbdft, 
business, n. pi, =e. 


®cr @pa$ierflang. — The Walk. 

SCHILLER. 

Translate ; learn this piece by heart. 

<©ety (meaning : fet, be thou) mir (to me, for me, for my part, from me) 
gegriijjt (gtufjen, reg. to salute, to hail; hail to thee!), metn 53erg (mountain, 
m., =e), mlt hem rot()Iid) (reddish, burning) flral)lent>en (beaming, reg.) ©ipfel ! 
(top, m.) ©ei rntr, ©omte, gegrtifit, hte U)n fo lieblid) (lovely) 6efd)etnt ! 
(to shine upon, *ei, =ie, =te, — it). Did) aud) (also) griip td), belebte (enlivened) 
glut (field, plain, under cultivation, f., *en), eud) faufelnbe (to breathe, reg.) 

12 


123 


Stnben (linden, f., sing. 2lnt>e)unb ben froljtidjen (joyous) Sfyor (chorus, host, 
m., pi. (£t»ore), tier auf ben Sleflen (bough, m. sing. 2Ifl) fid) miegt (to rock,reg.); 
ruljige (quiet, calm) S3Idue (blue colour, blue sky, f.), bid) aud), bie unermeplid) 
(immeasurable) ftc^ auggiefjt (outpour, ie, o, o) urn (around) bag braune (brown) 
©ebtrg (mountain, chain of mountains, n., *en), fiber ben grfinenben (to green, 
reg.) 2Ba(b, aud) um mid), ber enblid) (finally) entflofyn (to escape, ie, o, o) beg 
3immer’g (room, n.) ©efangnifj (prison, n., *e) unb bent engen (narrow) ©e* 
fprad) (conversation, f., *e), freubig (with a sense of joy, relief) fid) rettet (to 
save, reg., with ju : to seek and find safety by flight to) ju bir. 


O. TRANSACTIONS OF MAN. 

FORMS OF LIFE OF MAN. 

Bank, 23anf, f. =en ; SBct&fel, bill of exchange, m. ; Slntoeifung, f. auf bte 23anf, bank 
check. 9Jlorgen (to morrow), ijl ber SSierte 3u!p ; bag ijl etn gefefclicber geiertag 
(legal holiday). SBenn ©ie eine 9tote ju jafylen baben, ober eiiten SBedfiel ober einen 
23anfcf)ecf einfaffiren (to have cashed, reg.; no — ge in P. P.) tooUen, fo miiffen ©ie 
bag brute beforgen (attend to, reg.). SWorgcn (tub bie 23anfen unb aHe offentiidjen 
©cfdjaftghcale (public offices) gcf^Iofen (jcbliejjen, to close, ie, o, o). ©parfaffe, 
saving fund, f. «n ; jitter, juoerldfjtg, safe, secure, reliable ; bepontren, to deposit 
(reg. no — ge in P. P.) 

Barker, 23arbtcr, m. ; raftren, to shave, reg., — no ge — in P. P. ^iaprmcffer, razor, 
n. fcfiarf, sharp, Comp. & Superl. Umlaut; ftumpf, dull, Comp. & Supeil. no 
Umlaut. Samm, comb, m. pi. $dmme. 

Bookseller, 23utbbanb(er, m. SBuif), book, n. pi. 23udf>er ; format, size, n. ; in Sranj 
gcbunben, bound in calf, i, a, u; 9Jfagajin, magazin, n. *e; 91 ouette, novel, f. *n; 
Jbfoterftuc!, play, n. =e; 23rofcpre, pamphlet, f. =n; 23erfafjer, author, m. ; 
Csjemplar, copy, n., *e. 

Cliess, (play at), ©djacbfpiel, n. ©djadjbrett, chessboard, n. gtguren, men, pieces ; 
$bnfgin, queen, *en; 3 U 0' move, m. »uge; ©pringer, knight, m. ; roquiren, to 
castle^ reg., no ge — P. P. <&$a$ unb matt, check mate. £t)urm, castle, m., 
STtjurme ; becfen, to cover, reg.; sBorttyeil, advantage, odds, m. *e; $artl)ie, 
game, f. *n; ffonig, king, m. »e; jiebeit, to draw, jieljen, jog, gejogen. Sdufer, 
(“runner”), bishop, m. ; taufdjen, to exchange, reg., Sauer (peasant), man. 

City and Country, ©tabt, (f. ©tabte), unb Sanb, (n. -dnber; also poet., range of 
single districts, Sanbe). ©ott macbte bag Sanb, ber 9)?enfd) bie ©tabt, God made 
(reg.) the country, man made the town ; auf bag 2anb getjctt, to go to the 
country ; in ber ©tabt toofmen, to live (reg.) in the city ; t)in unb t)er reifen, to be 
going and coming, reifen, r eg. ; ben ©omnter jubriugen, to spend the summer, 
brtngen, bracfjte, gebrac&t; Slumengarten, 5tud)engarten, flower garden, kitchen 
garden, m. *drten; 91ofe, rose, f. =n; 9ielfe, pinks, f. =n ; Dbjlbaum, fruit tree, 
m., »aume ; ©trajjenpjlafier, pavement, n. ; 23adjtein, brick, m. =e. SBeinftotf, vine, 
m. *ftbcfe ; £rauben, bunch of grapes, f. =n ; SBein, vine, m. ; SBier, beer, n. ; 
2lepfeItocin, cider, m. ClueKtoafjer, springwater ; 9J?i(d), milk, f. ; $uf>, cow, f., 
$iii)e; ©<$eune, barn, f. -n; Sanbgut, farm, n. ; Sanbbau, Slcferbau, agriculture, m. 
©paten, spade, m. ; Sicken, rake, m. ; pflanjen, to plant, reg ; fden, to sow, reg. ; 
ernbten, to harvest, reg. 

13 


124 


Court, ©eridfi, n; ©cricbt3brtu3, n., ©eridtjt^^of, in., court-house, court of justice, 
4)bfe ; S'Ucbter, judge, m. ; ©extent fatten, to hold court (a, te, a, sec. cli. in a) ; eirt 
©ericbtbbcamter, an officer of court ; Sib, oath, m. =e ; 3 eiI 9 f / witness, m. =rt ; 
fdjmbicn, o, o, to swear. „©ie fcbwbrett, ba§ bad 3 eu 9 ni ^/ ©ie »or bem ©eric^t 

unb ben ©efcbnwettett abgebeit (gebcit, gab, gegeben), bte ©albeit iff, bte gattje ©abr* 
bett, unb mdjjta aD (but) bte ©abrbeit. ©o belfe 3bn«t ©oh !" (£clfcit, a, o, ch. t, 
sec. ch. to help). 

Drawing, 3ci(bnen, n. : Water, painting, n. 2teblingbbcfcf)dfttgung, favourite occu- 
pation, f., *en; Canbfc^aft, landscape, f. =en; tn tPaftel, in crayons; ©enre, style, 
n. ; colortren, to colour, reg., no ge« in P. P. ^orte=feutfle, portfolio, n. — ©af* 
ferfarben, water- coulours ; Ihflortfcbe Waleret, historical painting, f. ; Delmaleret, 
(f.), Oeigentdlbe, (n.), oil-painting ; 33IetjlifD©ftjjc, pencil sketch, f., =n; itupfer* 
fttcb, engraving, m. =e; JKnfel, brush, m.; Water, painter, m. 

Dressmaker, Stleibermacber, f. ftleib, dress, n., =er; 91abet, pin, f., -it ; fallen, 
plaits, (f.) ; Xaide, waist, f. ; 23efa^, trimming, m. Worgenaitjug, morning gown, 

m. , -juge; Stbenbanjug, evening dress, ilunbfdtaft, custom, f. 

Invitation, Sinlabuttg, f. pi. =ett; etnlaben, to invite, a, u, a; sec. ch. in a. Sine 
Sintabung amtebmen, to accept an invitation, aitnebnten, annabm, aitgenontmen, sec. 
ch. in t, titmmjl, nimrnt, Imperat. ntmin. Sr bat mid) ju Jifcbe gclaben, lie invited 
me to dinner (table, %i\$, m. pi. *e). ©often ©te ntettt ©a(l feut? Will you be 
my guest (m. pi. ©afte). ©aftfreunbfebaft, hospitality, f. 

Jeweller, 3utoelter, m. QJerle, pearl, f. -n ; (Preid, price, m. =e; Siting, ring, m. »e; 
©tent, stone, m. =e ; 2)tamant, diamond, m. *en ; Sbelftein, precious stone ; faffen, 
to mount, reg. ; $etfd>aft, seal, n. =e ; Slrmbanb, bracelet, n. »dnber; 5tabet, pin, 
f. »-n ; ©cbtiiffel, key, m., ilctte, chain, f. *n. 

Laundress, ©dfdiertn, f. *on ; ©dfebe, “linen,” washing, f . ; ©tiicf, piece, n. =e; 
©afcbjetlcl, bill of . . ., m. ; 3cid)en, mark, n. ; ftragett, collar, m. ; iDujjenb, dozen, 

n. *e; ^emb, shirt, n. =en; $leib, gown, n. -er ; Unterrocf, petticoat, m. -rbefe ; 
©trumbf, stocking, m. -iimpfe ; Xafcbentudb, pocket handkerchief, n. -iit^jer ; ©er» 
biette, napkin, f. =n ; iXifcbtucb, table cloth ; £anbtud), towel. 

Letter (write a letter), 23rief febreibett, et, te, te. 53rtef, letter, m. .e; SBricfpaptcr^ 
note paper, letter paper, n. ^oflfarte, postal card, f. =n; abbrejjirett, to address, 
(reg., no ge= in P. P.); franfirett, to pay the postage, reg., no ge= in P. P. ; $eft, 
post office, f. ; SBrteffaflett, letter-box, m. ; codectiren, etnfammeln, to collect, reg., 
codcctircn, no ge= in P. P. ; einfadbc 23riefe, single letter ; $orto, postage, n. ; cinen 
- 23rief mil umgebenber $oft beanttoorten, to answer (reg.) a letter by return of mail. 

Milliner, ^ubbanblertit, f. *e. £>ut, hat, m. -iitc ; ©dfletfc, bow, f. «n ; aumutbig, 
graceful; 23attb, ribbon, n. =a'ttber; ©cblcicr, veil, m. ; gacbcr, fan, m. ; £anbfcbub, 
glove ; m. =e ; 331uitte, flower, f. »n. ©dicerc, pair of scissors, f. =en ; ©ptegel, 
mirror, m. ; ©urtcl, sash, m. Slttfletbejimmer, dressing room, n. #aar, hair, n. 
«e; Dbntnge, ear-rings. Wuff, muff, m ; ^albbanb, necklace, n. *d'nber. 

Money, ©elb, n. *er. Witttje, coin, f., -it ; Q3aptergelb, paper-money ; Dbligationcn, 
©cbulbfcbeine, bonds. Staler, dollar, m. ; 93ierteltbaler, quarter Dollar ; ftletngclb, 
(n.) ©ecbfet (m.), change. $abett ©ie etluad ©edjfel bet ftcb? Have you any 
change about you? 3$ mufj ettrad ©cd)fel babett, I want some change. Bennett 
©te ntir fiinf Staler toccbfeln ? Can you change five dollars. Sabett, store, m. 
3cb benfe ©ie fbmtett fte itt btejern Sabett gewetbfelt baben, I think they will change 
it for you in this store. 

14 


125 


Newspaper, 3tftu*tfb £ Sd'glidl, daily ; tvoc^entltc^, weekly ; moitatlid), monthly. 
Slu^gabe, edition, f. -it. ; Sefejimmer, reading-room, n. £crau$geber, 9?erleger, 
publisher. Stcbaftcur, editor. Slnjeige, advertisement, f. pi. -cn ; Sefcfteff, read- 
ing matter, m. pi. «e. 

Party, ©efedfdiaft, f. -em 33ergniigen, pleasure, n. ; Unterfjaltung, conversation ; 
(Sine (SinlabungSfarte, card of invitation, f. «en ; eiite grefje ©ei’ftlfdjaft, a large party ; 
ein fleiner SlreiS, a small circle, m. -e; tanjen, to dance, reg.; fptelen, to play, 
r eg., (Stainer (pianoforte), piano, n. =er ©rajie, grace, f. ; (Effect, effect, m. »e; 
SBiirbe, dignity, f. (pi. offices, =en); Slnmuttt, gracefulness, f. Sebenbe 23iltcr, 
living pictures, images, n. (“tableaux”). 

Payment, f- pi- *en. 2lbfddag£jablung, money paid on account. 23otl}ab» 

lung, payment in full. SKecfifel, bill of exchange, m. ; ©idjt, sight, f. ; Quittung 
receipt, f. *cn. 

Physician, Slrjt, m. pl.2Icr,;te. ©djtvad), weak, Franf, ill (have Umlaut in Comp. 
& Sup.) ; Sfppetit, appetite ; 3 un 9 c / tongue, f. -it ; jeigen, to show, reg. ; ilopf- 
fcfymerjcn, head-ache; ©cfymerj in ber ©eite, pain (m. »en), in my side (f. -n); 
£>ujlen, cough, m. ; fd;wcr Sltfjent f)clen, to breathe with difficulty, 2ltf)cm, m. ; 
beflagnt,to complain, reg. ; £)urji, thirst, m. ; grofl, here shivering, m. Pul3, pulse, 
m. -e; ftieber, fever, n. ; fRejcpt, prescription, n. -e; pufoer, powder, n.; '-8rcd)» 
mittel, emetic, n. ; jur 2Iber laffcn, to bleed (a, te, a, sec. cli. in a). Ptfle, pill, f., -it; 
ncbnteit, to take, nefymeit, nafym, genommen, sec. cli. t, ntntmfl, m'mmt; Imper. ntmm, 
pol. nebmen ©ic; inarm fatten, to keep warm, a, ie, a, sec. ch. in d; ericidjterit, 
relieve, reg; mdfjige 33ercegung, moderate exercise, f., =en ; ein bbfer .£>al3, a sore 
throat, m. (£>dlfe). 2)a3 Sett fjiiten, to keep (reg.) your bed, n. -cit. 

School, ©djuTe, f., institution, academy, ©i$ulf)ait3, school-house, n., -dufer; (Slaffe, 
class, f., «n; 23attf, bench, f., -ante; Putt, desk, m., -e; ©diretbbudj, copybook, 
-er; Sattbcfiarte, map, f., »eit; fdJtnarje STafel, blackboard, f., *n; 5lreibe, chalk, f. ; 
lefmn, to teach, reg., leriun, to learn, reg.; Selim, teacher, m.; Scfjrertrt, lady- 
teaclier; Qlufgabe, lesson, f., -n (Section, f., -en) ; fjeber (©tatjlfeber), Jinte, Papier, 
©riffel, Sleiftift, pen (steel pen),f., -n ; ink, f. ; paper, n. ; pencil, m. ; lead- 
pencil, m. & n., =e; fitjcn bleibcn, to be kept in (fijjrn, fafj, gefeffen ; bleiben, et, ie, 
te) ; fierfagen, recite, reg. ; (Stamen, examination, n. ; ab — fdjreibeit, to copy, et, 
ie, ie; „3lctud," commencement, m. 

Servant, 23ebienter, m. ; maid servant, £)ienfhndbd)cit, n. ; mietfjen, to hire, reg. ; 
bieiten, to serve, reg. ; engagiren, to engage, reg. (no ge= in P. P.) ; auft)alten, to 
stay, to stop (a, ie, a, sec. ch. in d); reifcn, to travel; reiten, to ride on horse- 
back, reiten, ritt, gcritten. SBeiblidje Slrbeiten, needle work; 2cl;n, wages, m. (pi. 
.Soijne), toafdjm, to wash (a, u, a, sec. ch. in d); ndtjen, to sew, reg. ; bitgeln, to 
iron, reg. ; 23ugcletfcn, smoothing iron, n. 

Shoemaker, ©cfiulnnacfier, m. ©cjmb, m. -e; ein Paar (-e) ©d)uf)e, a pair (n.) of 
shoes; ©tiefel, boot, m.; Sober, leather, n. ; 2J?aaff, measure, n. (pi. «e); $u eng, 
too tight; ju treit, too large ; ju t)od), too high ; pi niebrig, too low. gu§, foot, m. 
pi. gufje; 3ebe, toe, f. -n; gcrfe, heel, f. -eit. ©ttefeljietjer, boot-jack, m. ; pan- 
toffel, slippers, f. 

Trade, traffic, £>anbcl, Industry, ©emerbe, n. £anbel treiben, to trade, ei, te, te ; ©e- 
fdjdfte betreibcn, to do business ; 3 a blung/ payment, f. -en ; 23aarjaf)Iung, cash ; 
©rebit, credit, m.; ©kconfo, discount. (Stnbeimtfd), domestic; fremb, aucldnbtfdj, 
foreign; einfitfjren, au^fiibren, to import, to export, reg.; (SingangSjott, tariff, m., 
-bile; Sournal, journal, n., -e; £auptbu<$, ledger, n., biidjcr; 23u4»f>altung, book- 

15 


126 


keeping, f. ; $aufmantt, merchant, m. pi. 5taufleute; En gros, Detail ©efcbdft, 
wholesale, retail business, n., *e; juf^icfcn, fortfcbtden, to ship, send of , reg. ; 
terfenbcn, to send away, abfenben, to send off, fenbert, faitbte, gefanbt. 9 -'robe, 
sample, f. =n; faufen, to buy, ijerfaufeit, to sell, reg. Sinfauf, purchase, m. *aufe ; 
Unfoften, expenses. 

Travelling-, g^eifen, n. ; abreifen, to set out, reg. ; ©epdd, luggage, n. ; Coffer, trunk, 

m. ; ffiageit, carriage, m. ; $ferbe ttecbfeln, to change horses, reg. ; bergauf, berg* 
ab, up hill, down hill 5 ©te baben $ebn OTtnutcn |t$ S u erfrtfdjtert, you are 
allowed ten minutes to take some refreshments, (reg.) ; 3 oHamt, custom-house, 

n. =amter 5 ©aitbof, hotel, m., *bfe. ©ifenbabn, rail road, f. =ett; StBartejimmcr, 
waiting room, n. ; 23tUeb23ureau, ticket office, n. ; Uebergettucbt, over weight, n. ; 
©tljug, express train, m., *itge; yerfimenjug, passenger train 5 ffrarbtjug, freight 
train; ©ijj, seat, m., -e; £)ampfboot, steamboat, n., *e; ©afiite, cabin, f. -it; 
fPferbefraft, horse-power, f. ; ©djlafjteKe, here sleeping berth, f. -n ; $(utb, tide, 
f. =en; ©bbe, ebb-tide, f . 5 feefranf, seasick, ©afibof, inn, hotel, m. *ijfe; etnfebjrert, 
to turn in, to stop, reg. 5 Sett, bed, n. *en ; Kellner, waiter, m. ; ©tubenmdbcben, 
chamber-maid, n. ; $ltngel, bell. f. ; auSbitrflcn, to brush, reg.: pitmen, too clean, 
reg.; 9fedmung, bill, f. *ett; $afj, passport, m., -a ffe ; Scbnfutfcber, hackney- coach- 
man, cabman, m ; umberfabren, to drive about, n, u, a, ; sec. ch. in a ; 2 Beb nun fb 
lodgings, f. *en ; mbblirte 3 ‘ mmer ' furnished rooms (sing, n.) ; erjte ©ted, first 
floor, m. (pi. ©todrccrfe); ^lacpbarfcbaft, neighbourhood, f. =en; SBobnjtmmer, 
sitting-room, n. ; ©mpfangjtmmer, patdour; ©tblafjtmmer, sleeping-room, $itcbe, 
kitchen, f. *cn. £)te 2 lu£jt(bt tjl fc^bri, the prospect is beautiful. ©cbdube, build- 
ing, edifice, n. fDfcrfttntrbtgfeiten, curiosities; ©ebenSttmrbtgfeifen, “things worth 
seeing;" engltjcbc, amertfantfebe ©ottful, English, American consul, m. ; Sanguier* 
£aud, banker, n., *b^ u f er » ©rebitbrief, letter of credit, m., *e ; SCBecbfel, bill of 
exchange, m. 

Tailor, ©dumber, m. 9Jod, coat, m. 3ibde; £ofe, pants, f. # *it; SBefle, waistcoat, f. 
*n; anmeffen, take the measure, e, a, e, sec. ch. t; neucjle Webe, latest fashion, f. 
*n; Wufter, pattern, n. ; pajYert, to fit, reg.-; SJerntel, sleeves, m. ; fdmeiben, fcbnttt, 
gefebnitten 5 dnbern, to make an alteration, reg. 3ht(b, cloth, n. pi. Sucher; faufen, 
to buy, reg. ; Stubbanbler, wollen-drapper, m. ; Setmranbbdnbler, linen-draper, m. 

Theater, ^beater, n. 3n’d Jbc^ter gebtn, to go to the theater, geben, ging, gegangeit ; 
5Ib c «l cr S cttclf /- play bill, m. ; 23erfaj|er, author, m. ; ©cbaufptel, drama, n., =e; Su|f» 
fptel, comedy; £rauerfptel, tragedy, ©tbaufiueler, actor, m. 9tof(e, part, f. -n; 
Sluftritt, scene, m. *e; 2 lct, act, m. *e; ©elbflgefprdtb, soliloquy, n; 2 ?orbang, 
curtain, m. *dnge ; Drcbefler, orchestra, n. ; itouliffen, scenes, f. ; •Dtrcffer, here 
manager, m. =en; $robe, here rehearsal, f. *en. ^enjert, concert, n. *e ; ttortragen, 
to perform, a, u, a, sec. ch. in d. £)pcr, opera, f. *n ; SOJuftf, music, f. ; ©efang, 
song, singing, m. *ange; Overture, overture, f. *n. 

Visit, Sefutb, m. pi. *e. ©inert 33efittb ntacben, to pay (make, reg.), a visit, ©inert 
23efu<b erttnebern, to return a visit, ©r bat nteinett 23efud) nidtt emiebert, he has not 
returned (reg.) my visit. ©3 ffopft, it knocks, (reg.) ©3 flopft Semattb, somebody 
knocks, ©tb fDfabame cincn ©tubl, give (e, a, c; sec. ch. i), a chair to the lady. 
3 cb bin nur gefommen (fommeit, fam, gefemnten), ju bbven, trie ©te ftcb befinben (i, 
a, u), I only came in to see (feben, a, e; sec. ch. in te), (hear, reg.) how you are. 
©inen Sefttcb annebmen, to receive a visit (aitncbmcn, annabnt, angeitommen; sec. 
ch. in i, nimmjl, nimmt an; ntmrn an), ©3 freut mtcb ©te ju feben, I am happy to 
see you. 

16 


127 


Walk, ®{m$tergang, m. 

(Parse, explain, read and learn by heart.) 
(Scliott’s Dialogues.) 


a. Out doors , tilt ^rcicit. 

S£>oflen toir einen ©pajtergang madden? Shall 
we go and take a little walk ? 

9)?it gropem SJergniigen, with great 
pleasure, 

3$ pabe nid)t3 bagegert (against), I have 
no objection. 

©ef)r gcrne, very willingly. 

3>on ganjern $er$en, with all my heart. 

3d) bin bereit, ©ie ju begletten (accompany, 
reg.), I am ready to go with you. 

3$ petye ju 3f>rett ®ienjlcit (X)ienP, m. 
service), I am at your command. 

53ir fbnnen geben, tocnn ©ie tooUen, we can 
go, when you please. 

2Beld>en 2Dcg gefjen ©ie ? Which wayshall 
we go? 

SSobtn (whither) eg 3b nf K beltebt (to 
please, reg.), we will go where you 
like. 

2Die tear e3, trcnn wtr einen ©pajierritt 
macpten ? Suppose we take a ride on 
horseback ? 

3Ba6 meinen ©ie baju? What do you think 
about it? 

2Benn tie £)amcn (Dame, lady) son ber 
piatite fein woflen, fo nefjmen wir einen 
SSagcit (fo fapren mir). If the ladies will 
be of the party, we will take the 
carriage. 

Dit ©trafjett (tnb ju Paubig, the roads are 
too dusty. 

2Bir woden nac$ 33. gcpen unb ju SBaffer ju= 
riicf fommen. Let us walk as far as B. 
and we will return by water. 

Da3 ip ein oortrefpfcper ©tnfad, this is an 
excellent idea. 

9fid)ti3 ip angenepmer al3 et'ne ffiafferpartlne, 
Nothing is more agreeable than a row 
on the water. 

Da3 tP gerabe ber Slugenbltcf, frtfdje Cuft ju 
fc$bpfen (to draw, reg.) This is just the 
moment to take an airing. [ 

17 


t'P etn fepr anmutbtger ©pajiergang. 
This is a very pleasant walk. 

©r tp fepr befudjt (to visit, reg.) It is 
much resorted to. 

91un Iajfeit ©ie un3 btefen Oiupweg tyerunter 
gefjen. Now let us go (spec.) down 
that lane. 

SBoden ©ie Iieber burdb (through) ba3 fjelb 
gepen ? Had you rather cross this field ? 

2Btr tooden im ©fatten gepen. Let us walk 
in the shade. 

©ie gefjen ju fdpned. You walk too fast. 

3d) fann 3i)nen nid)t folgen. I cannot fol- 
low (ieg.) you. 

3luf)en toir ein bi3c$en cm3. Let us rest 
(reg.) a little. 

Saffen toir un$ auf ba3 ©raS rtiebcr. Let us 
(sit) down upon the grass. 

33etoat)re (befyute) ! Beware (reg.) of that. 

Da3 ip fepr ungefunb. It is very unwhol- 
some. 

Da3 ©ra3 iP feucfit. The grass is moist. 

©eljeit toir in btefe^ ©etjolje. Let us go into 
the wood. 

Diefer Drt ip fb'PIicj). This place is de- 
lightful. 

2Bir fonnen un3 f)ter eine fyalbe ©tun^e nte= 
berfc^en (reg.) We may sit down here 
for half an hour. 

2Bir fmben mtr jtoanjtg TOinuten oon pier big 
an ben We have only twenty 

minutes walk to reach the river. 

Da ©ie mute pnb fo toodeit toir ein Soot nelj* 
men. Since you are tired, we will 
take (spec.) a boat. 

b. Country-seat , Janbftl), P?ar!. 

©in ©pajiergang in bem $arf. A walk in 
the park. 

Da3 ip ein fcfjbner Jag. This is a very 
fine day. 

ffitr troden bur$ ben farf gepen. We will 
take a walk through the park. 


— . 128 


3ucr|l moflen mir ben XempcI fcfjcrt. Let us 
go first to see (e, a, e ; sec. cli. ie), the 
temple. 

@3 fcfietnt jtemlf($ teeth It seems very far. 

SBcnn mir auf biefem 3tafen am 9tanbe be3 
2Baffer<3 f)inge(;cn, fo ftnb mir in mcnigcn 
9Iitnuten bort. By keeping on the grass 
(“turf, sod,” m.), at the water’s, n., 
edge, m., we shall be there in a few 
minutes (f.). 

2Bie flat tjl ba3 SBaffer in biefem (funfl(id)en) 
©eid)e. How limpid is that piece of 
water! (water in this artificial pond, 
m., £eid>, n. pi. *e.) 

S3 fpiegelt bie 23aume unb fogar tie ^erfonen 
in ifyrer natfirltcben Sarbe ab. It reflects 
(reg.) trees (m. sing. 23aum), and even 
persons (sing, fPrrfon, f.) in their 
natural colour (f., *n), 

©e£en (reg.) mir un3 auf biefe 23anf. Let 
us sit down upon this seat (bench, f., 
— 23dnfe, banks, Sanfen). 

2ltle3 ba3 fibertrijft bie SSorfleflungeit, toelt^e 
id) mir baton gemadjt tmtte. Altogether 
it far surpasses (e, a, o, impf. one f., 
sec. ch. in i), the idea (f., sing. SSorflel* 
lung), I had formed of it. 

Saffen ©ie un3 nad) biefem £figet metier ge* 
l)en. Let us advance towards that 
hillock, m. 


2 £a3 if! ba3 fur ein ntebltc^cr SBeiler, ben man 
fiber jenem fleincn ©eljolje erblieft (reg.)? 
What pretty hamlet is that which is 
seen above that little wood (®cl)bl$e,n.) 
34) munfdje, id) fbnnte baffin gefjen. I wish, 
.(reg.) I could walk to it. 

Saffeit ©ie un3 in biefer Saube etnen 2Iugen» 
blirf au3ruf)ett unb bann moflen mir unfern 
©pajiergang fortfejjen (reg.). Let us 
rest (reg.) a little in this summer- 
house, and then we will proceed. 

©inb ©te nidfl tnfibe ! Are you not fa- 
tigued ? 

5bonntcn mir nic&t ein 23i3d)ett langfamer ge* 
t)en? Could we not walk a little 
slower ? 

(S3 foflte mirleib tfjun, menn ©ie rncinetmegm 
langfanter get)en foCltcit; e3 fd>eint 3t)nen 
fo oiel 33ergnfigen (n.) ju madten. I should 
be sorry to slacken your walk : you 
seem to enjoy it so much ! 

©ie ©onne if! uniergegangett. The sun is 
set (see “Dictionary”;. 

©er Wonb getfl fdfmn auf. The moon is 
rising already. 

2Btr fyaben Wonbfcfmin. The moon shines. 
@3 ift 9ftonbfd)cin. It is moonlight. 

©er Slbenbtfoau beginnt ju fallen. The dew 
begins (i, a, o), to fall. 

$el)ren mir nad) £aufe juriicf. Let us return 
(reg.) to the cottage (house). 


Watchmaker, llfirmadjer, m. lltir, clock, watch, f. *en; ju langfam, too slow? ju 
fdmcfl, too fast ; auf$iet>en, to wind up, *jteben, *jog, *gejogen ; au^pufjen, reinigen, to 
clean, reg. 3 c, 9 cr ' hands, m. ; geber, spring, f. *n ; 2Berf, work, n. *e ; ©eljdufe, 
case, n. *n. 

Weight, ©cmidd, n. ©cmidfie unb 5)?aa§c, weights and measures. Gin fPfunb, a 
pound; ein Gentner, a hundred weight ; cine 9J?eiie, nearly five English miles; 
eii» gu§, a foot, m. (pi. as measure, gufj ; as single foot, pi. Bufje ; as feet of 
man, gfijje) ; ein 3^, an inch, m. 


18 


129 


b. HIGH SCHOOL PIECE S. 
A. TEXTS. 

1. Last Pieces as such .* 

PRACTISE, AND APPLY RULES* 


a. Analyze Text, Dialogue, ©cfariidj: 


„5Biffett (Sic nicf)t, ba§, um gut fare* 
cffan ju lernen, man anfangt, ffalefat ju 
farefaen?" 


“Do you not know that to learn to 
speak well, one begins by speaking 
ill ?” 


b. Classic Pieces, Literature, Text, 

(Words in Child’s Dictionary.) 

1. Maid of Orleans” Schiller, Last Words: 

„$6mg (mit abgewanbtem ©ejtdjt), 

©ebt tfyr bic $af)ite* 

(Ttan reid)t jte far. <Sie jle^t gang fret aufgcrid)tet, bie ftaljne tit ber $anb.' Dcr $immet i(l 
ton einem rojtgen ©djcin beleudf>tet.) 

3 of) a it it at ©cfyt tfyr belt Sftegettbogctt tit ber Sitft? 

£>cr £immel bjfnet fetite gofb’itett £f)ore, 

3m (Eljor ber (Sitgel ftefyt jte gfaitjeitb ba ; 

©te f)dft belt ero’geit ©of)tt ait tf)rer 23ruj}, 

£)te 2lrme ftrecft jte Itebeitb mir entgegem 
S33ie rotrb mir? Seicbte SBoIfett f)ebett rntcfj 
£)er fcfjmere $anjer mtrb ^ttm ^fugefffetbe* 

^ptnauf — fytnauf — bte (£rbe fltef)t juriicf — 

^itr$ iff ber ©djmerj, uitb emig tjl bte greube; 

(Die $al)ne entfatlt far, fte ftnft tobt barauf nieber. 9We fle^eit lange in fprafaiofer iRifarung. 
9luf linen Ieifen Sin! be$ Jtonia’d toerben atle ftcfanen fanft auf fte niebergelaffen, bafj jte gang bason 
bebeit t»irb,)“ 


2. Friendship (ftreun&ffaaft.) 

gibt jmeierlei SIrten »on greunbfdjaft. Die eine ijt bon (Siattb auf <Sfamet* 
terlingSfiiigeln; bte SWenffaengeftfater ftnb gleicffaam nur bamtt gepubert. Die 
anbere tragt bie frif^e garbe einer perbjHifaen grufat, betoeifi inroenbige 9teife unb 
(Siifjigfeit unb erquicft ben Durjtigen. 9Jtenfd)en, bie immer ladjeln, aufa toenn 

* See, Otto’s Grammar. 

1 


f 


— • 130 — 

man fte aufroartg flreidjelt, jbld)e 9ftenfdjen fiaSett bte Oireunbfdiaft mtr gepaddct; 
file tfl nid)t tt>r ©igentlium. Slug cinem $ad)tgute jiel)t man [o otcl 9lu0en, aid 
mogltd), unb nur ber ©igentfyumer mcint eg efyrlid) mit feinem 33eft0, ol)ne ebcn 
immer auf S3ortl)eiI babei ju fefyen." (o. gbo^cbue.) 

3. ipflidjt fiir ^cbcn. 

(©duller.) 

„3mmcr flrcbe jum ©attjett, urtb fannft bu fclber fern ©an$eg 
SBeiben, alg btenenbeg ©lieb fdjltcfj an tin ©anjeg bicb an/' 

4. grcunb unb tyeiitb. 

„2^euer if! mtr ber grfunb, bod) aud) ben getnb fann id) nu^en:* 

3eigt mir ber greunb mag td) fann, lel;rt mid) ber 0einb, mag id) fofl." 

(©filler.) 


2 . SOME IDIOMS OF STYLE. 

% 

£er gifcb lebt in bem tjellett 23acf», 

Gin 8*1<$l£tn fcbwunmt bem attbern nad). 

First translate the above. 

This „na$" after , belongs to ^dnuimmen," to “ sioim ,” as a separable prefix* 
imbueing the verb thereby with the intent to follow. If used as a preposition* 
„nadj bem attbern/' after the other, then it would merely denote place, the place of 
swimming. 

Again, translate ; 

G fdietnt ber Sftonb in flitter 9?ad>t, 

©dttaf’, jltnb, bein ©oft ittt £tmmcl ttad)t. 

This u it,” “it shines,” generalizes the effect. We see the impulse, moon, first 
through the effect ; this, meaning, as a form : there is light, coming, here, from the 
moon. 

So in Schiller’s Tell : 

Gg Iddtelt ber ©ee, meaning : “ there is a smile,” as a smile cast over the landscape 
by the lake. So in the same piece : Gg bomtcrn bie £of)cn, ee jittcrt ber ©teg ! meaning : 
There is thunder, coming from the mountain hights, there is shaking, of the log 
bridge. It is not the hights as hights, that we here care for, nor the bridge as 
bridge, but the heights only as far as they are in motion, are tumbling, in the 
avalanches ; the bridge, only as far as it shaking, from thunder, of the avalanches 
or the torrents ; so the impulse is seen through the effect, and this effect, 
so magnified, to the full size of the idea of tlie impulse, by the use of the 
impersonal “it” comes down upon us with the full force of a personal experience. 

We can not say : it shakes, impels., except we feel it ; we can not say, in the 
Geiman idiom “it thunder” (viz. the hights) except we hear it: physic, orinimag. 

Compare: “ There is a rose in yonder glen.” This is a description, not of the 
rose, in its being there, in the glen, but through its presence and being there as a 
rose, of the glen. The fragrance of the idea rose, fills the glen. 

* Ohitictt, to make use of, here turn to advantage, derive benefit from (gov. here 
Acc.) 


2 


131 


B. SKETCHES. 

1. Plural of Nouns. 

The Plural of Nouns is formed independent of the form (gender, and so form 
of Declension) of the word, in the singular. 

Four elements enter into the formation of the Plural : 

a. Umlaut, whether a word takes it or not ; see “Umlaut.” 

- b Fixed gender endings for Plural : masc. -e, fern, -en, neuter er. 

c. Gender, as meaning of the word, involving a possible change of gender in the 
Plural. See “Kiinste, ” arts, from “Kunst,” art, in chapter “Umlaut';” so Gase, 
kinds of gas, masc., from Gas, singular, neuter. 

So: Cf)rnt, Slugen, ears, eyes, pi. as instruments of mind, feminine. In the sin- 
gular, each taken physically, neuter. So ©taat, state, force, masc. ; states, form, 
fern. : ©taatett, 

d. The effect of the liquid letters, when closing an unaccented syllable. 

These four elements combine to the pi'oduction, in the case of each single word, 

of one of the following six forms, as forms of the Plural : See “ Live Strings of 
Words “Remarks,” or list of forms as given below with the words of the 
“ Staar” and “Riddle.” 

Some Nouns have a plural formed irreg. from the form, as word or name, in the 
singular, for instance : merchant, Sbiufmaitn ; pi. merchants, ibiufleute, «„leute," 
(Seute), people, instead of -mannC-DJamt), man, in the singular. 

Some Nouns exist only in the plural, ex. : ©Item, parents ; ©cjctyttnjter, brother 
and sister. 


Plural of the Nouns of Staar and Riddle, 9?atl)fcl, also of 2J?onjCnIiei), morn- 
ing lay, song, in the order of the forms of the plural : 

1. Umlaut, and ending -c: ©runt, Staum (au takes the Umlaut over the a)} 

2. -c, without the Umlaut : ©tear, 25)ort, Sefudfj, Slugenbltd; ©beljletu, 9?tng ; 

STag, £bntg, Slicf. 

3. Umlaut, without the -C (liquid letters) : 3ager, 93ogeI ; 9?af)men, §tmmel, 

4. Neither Umlaut nor-c: 9iat()[el (the Umlaut seen belongs to the word); 

Settler. 

5. Umlaut, and -cr: 23brt ; Silb, Sicfyt, Stcb (SDforgcnltcb), ^runfgemncf) (compound 
word ; Umlaut on — gcmacfy), Dacb, £au3. 

6. Ending at, no Umlaut: ©tube, 9?ad>bar, greube, £afd)e, £t)ure; ©tunbe, ©rope; 
?crc$e, ©onue, £>err (Qual. Noun.), ©dgtar, Sluge. 

Translate these words ; form their Plural ; give Def. Art. to each in the singular. 
Decline each with Def. Art. ; Sing, and Plural. 

Some Nouns show two or more forms iu the Plural, according to their meaning, 
Ex.: word: pi. SBorte and SBbrter; 2t)d c / Staler, valleys, single, or as in mass ; 
Sanber, Sanben, Sanbe (from 23anb, n., ribbons, hoops, fetters'); and volumes, Sdnbe, 
from Sanb, m. 

We can here of course only give the principles without tracing in each case their 
action. The student, throughout this book will best learn the plural, as given, 
with the words. 

3 


132 


2. Principle of Style. 

RECAPITULATION. — SKETCH. 

1. First Item : Subjective , and Objective part, in a sentence. Which words, as 
words of a sentence belong to each part ? 

2. Changes in the objective part : Complements of the idea of action. Changes 
in this part not affecting the order of the subjective part. 

3. Changes in the subjective part : Position of the verb. 

Four positions, straight , emphatic, dependent , question. 

4. Idioms of Grammar as to style, position and grammatical use of forms of 
words in style, — See „2cicfjte ©CtytiicOc," 2d part; Minor points, grammatical 
idioms, as to style. 

Idioms of S'yle, meaning and force of a peculiar manner and mode of expression 
in style (Sep. Prefixes, marking the intent in an action ; use and force of the 
impersonal “*7,”), see beginning of this chapter; “Idioms of Style.” 

Also; Sketch, “ Note as Text,” below. General principle of Style; ‘ Ho build.” 


3. Verb Chart. 

(CHART OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS.) 

Description of the Chart, given here to impress the items occurring in connec- 
tion with the use of the irreg. verbs. 

Horizontally , the tunes and verbs belonging to each tune. 

Vertically, the verbs are arranged as to their meaning. 

The “ second change ,” is marked, given either with the tune, or marked as for 
the individual verb. 

The “ Exchange ” is marked with each verb. 

Inseparable Prefixes are marked as such, each time, with the verb. 

Stem Changes are marked, each time, with the verb. If a verb, whole or in part 
can be used regular, this is noted with the verb. 

An apostrophe at the end, replaces the -en as ending of the Infin. 

A dot in the middle serves for the tune vowels given in front, each time, of a 
series or set of vei’bs having the same tune. Verb Chart itself, see large book or 
“Square Inch Check” at end of book. 


A few examples showing the growth of words from simple verbs, to impress the 
importance of the knowledge of verbs. Compounds go like the simple verbs. 

Here, irreg. Verbs: 

(Sbvcdtcn, to speak, 

Scfotcibcn, to write* 

1. ©brcdjcn (to speak), fprcd)cn, fprodb, gcfprocfjcn ; ©pmcbe, language $ gefyrddjia, 
talkative; ©efprdd), dialogue; ttnau?fpred)lid), unspeakable; befprecfyen, to talk over; 
jufprccfjen, urge; cutfprcdicn, beg, please; rerfpre^cn, promise; cudfprccficn, pronounce 
(all like ,,fprccf>cn"), Sludfpradjc, pronunciation ; ®pru$, judgment, passage; ®pric[j« 
foort, proverb. 

2. (Symbol (to write), fdjretbeit, fdjrtcb, gcfcbrtcbcn; anfcbretben, show conspicuously 
in writing; abfcbretben, copy; berfcfjretben, pledge in writing; au5fcf)mbcn, write out, 
proclaim; guftbretbcn, dedicate, ascribe, impute ; iiberd)retbcn, transfer in writing; 
befdjmbcit, describe (all like „fd)mbcn") ; ©d)rift, writing, script, scriptures ; fcbrift- 
lid), in writing; 3ufd)ri.ft, note; 51bf$rift, copy; 2?orfd>rtft, :c v copy, precept, rule. 

4 


— 133 — 

4. Note, as Text. 

COMPLEMENT OP “IMPULSE ’ (KIND OP ACTION). 

(See “Introduction, Style.”) 

The ab, in abschneiden , and zu Miltag , in zu Mittag essen, are complements of the 
impulse, inasmuch as I wftuld ask for those actions as kinds of actions; and as such 
they maintain the accent even when followed by their own verb or a form belonging 
to that verb ; Ex.: “ Ich habe zu Mittag gegessen” (I have dined); when I shall 
have dined: wenn ich werde zu Miltag gegessen haben. So do also complements 
of effect, when they at the same time complete the idea of the impulse, as kind 
of object : “ Ich habe einen Brief geschrieben (I wrote a letter) ; idea, to write a 
letter; but, when “Brief” is simple object, so that the main idea is in the verb, 
then, “Ich habe den Brief geschrieben ,” I wrote, finished, that letter. These com- 
plements of impulse are of very frequent use ; half of the idioms consist of them, 
for instance, one for many; “aus dem Felde schlagen (lit. to beat out of the 
field”), to defeat, etc., and it is very important for the student to maintain the 
accent on such “prefixes,” tempting though it may generally be to place it on 
the verb. A failure or neglect here may cause serious mistakes. If you said (I 
went to bed at 10 o’clock) ; “Ich bin um zehn Uhr zu Bett gegangen,” placing 
the accent on “gegangen,” (gone) instead of “ Bett ,” a friend might ask; do 
you mean to say that on other occasions you drive to bed in a carriage? 

In the case of two or more of such complements, the one which is meant to 
be, in a given case, more special than the other, has the accent. Ex. ; He 
cut his ear off ; “ Er hat ihm das Ohr abgehauen,” meaning (emphasis on “Ohr,” 
ear), he cut off his ear ; and* er hat ihm das Ohr aJgehauen (accent on ab, off 
and the verb, meaning : he cut his ear off.) In this latter case, “ear” is simply 
“effect.” 

We give a few of such complements of impulse defining the kind of action, 
to illustrate and to guard the student against making mistakes. 

EXAMPLES : Das Zimmer hiiten (keep to one’s room, be confined to the room) ; 
Rath geben, to give counsel; aus dem Felde schlagen (lit. “to beat out of the 
field;” to defeat), urn’s Leben briugen (to bring one “from,” deprive him of, his 
life), etc, 

AGAIN; 

•£>ulfe nnbtefcrt, to offer help, te, o, o, er Ijat mtr fetne £ulfe angebofett. (The 
spacing of words is the German mode of italicising w rds). 1) 3 11 Static gtehcrt, 
to consult, jiefyen, 503, gejogett. 2)_£rn>art ungen ffcgeit, to entertain expectations, 
r eg. 3) 3 u r2Q<t™ung btenen Infjeit, to take as a warning, tiencn, to serve, reg. ; 
Injjcn, to let, a, te, a. 4) 3it Srwdgung jtetten, to take into consideration. 5) @tif» 
fd)ulbiguttgcn bctbringen, to offer excuses. 6) (Sine ote bejafylen, to pay a note. 
7) ©inen 23 r t e f fdjreiben, to write a letter. 8) Sine cintrdglidjc © telle erfjalten, to 
get a good position. 9) (Stnen 33 e fuel) ntadjen, to pay a visit. 10) 9ted)td, liitfo 
geben, to go to the right, left. 11) fiine (5 1 n l a b u it g anitefpneit, to accept an invita- 
tion. 12) Sinett ©pajtergang ntadjen, to take a walk. 13) 3 11 1 r * ^ r ffitben, to be 
admitted, einen 23ortrag tjaltcn, to give a lecture. 14) Sine 21 it t n> 0 r t crl)aiten, to 
get an answer. 15) 3n i <$ 1 1 g f e i t briugen, to settle. 16) dt e i t e n lenten, to take 
lessons in riding (horsemanship). 17) 91 uf bent (!) t )) f C l ber 9CU a d) t jlefjeit, to be on 
the top of one’s power, lb) Okifdje thtft fdjiipfen, to take a litt e air. 19) ©id) auf 
fein 3 1 nt m e r juritrfjieijctt, to retire to one’s room. 20) ©filter'd X e 1 1 lefett, to read 
Schiller’s Tell. 

Learn these by heart. 


5 


134 


C. HIGH SCHOOL D0CUMEN1S. 

Here, as a part of the “ Course.” 

RECORD OP COURSE, INSTRUCTION COURSE: 


1st week. 


2d week. 


3d week. / 


Monday, Pebr. 15. 

Tuesday, “ 16. 

Wednesday, “ 17. 

(Washington’s Birthday). 

Tuesday, Pebr. 23. 

Wednesday, “ 24. 

Monday, March 1. | 1 Lesson. 

6 X 45 Minutes = 4 hours and a half. 


3 Lessons. 


2 Lessons. 


of 45 Minutes, 
each. 


RECITATION OF CLASS BEFORE THE HIGH SCHOOL 

COMMITTEE, 

at Chapel Hall, High School Building, on W^lnesday, March 3.; lasting 

from 3 to 5 P. M. 


Recitation repeated, Invitation to the Board of Education, made with the 
approbation of the High School Committee, by the Class : 

Saturday, March 13., at 10 o’clock A. M. 

Repeated: 

Monday, March 22., at a quarter past 7 o’clock P. M. 

“ Time Table,” (List of Contents), of Examination of March 3., als 3 
Contents of Course, printed and distributed for the repetition, by the Class. 
Copy. (Compare with the Contents of this book): • 

A. “GRAMMAR,” a. Introduction. (Division of Study, Style ; Place of Separable Prefixes. Place 
of Cases ; modification of the rule in the case of pronouns. Discrimination between sentences in their 
meaning.) Letters of Inflection. Analogy ; 23/40 Explanation. Rule of Gender in German, b. In- 
flection. 1. Declension. Declension of Common Nouns, Singular ; Declension of Adjectives. Definite 
Article. Words declined like Definite Article. 2. Conjugation : Classes of Verbs. Endings (general 
and special) ; Rule for Formation of Subjuuctive. Formation of simple Forms of the Verb. 3. Auxiliary 
Verbs. Name and number of them. Use of the Auxiliary “ werde.” (become). Formation of Compound 
Verbal Forms. 

B. “ READING, RECITATION, PARSING. Troepflein. Dialogues. “Staar.” First Part. “ Carving,” 
(Parsing), of “Staar.” Position of Verb. “ Kennst du das Bildf ” (Schiller), Reading, Carving, 
Parsing. 

C. “WORDS, VERBS, PHILOSOPHY, PRACTICE.” Chart of Irregular Verbs. Verbs having 
“Both Changes.” Umlaut,” form, origin and meaning of; new. Words, asking of. Schiller’s Teli, 
Beginning. Dialogues, “Oito. ” 

1 


135 


Copy of Public Invitation, as published on occasion of the reading and 
recitation of the class, before the Board of Public Education, on March IS., 
Advertisement : 

“ Class H 2, Boys’ Central High School, this being a new class, composed mainly of boys who had no 
• previous knowledge of, or instruction in German, having had but six hours instruction in German 
under the “American System,” will recite before the Board of Public Education, at the High School 
Buildiug, Broad and Green Streets, on Saturday, March 13., at 10 o’clock. A. M.” 

The balance of the “six hours time,” the amount of time originally allowed 
for the course, was expended after the first recitation and examination, on 
March 3d, by the writing and preparing by the Class, of the invitation to the 
Board of Education, the writing, dictation of the “Time Table,” and the 
referring of their Class Book to the System. 

Whole amount of time expended in all of this, including the Instruction 
Course, except the three recitations, 6 hours 45 Minutes. 

Our thanks are due here, without exception, to all, who from their position 
or connection, in any way, with the institution, had anything to do with the 
course. 


UMLAUT, Note: given here as part of the Text of the book. The Umlaut 
(modified sound of a , o, or u ), occurs for the student of German twice or in a two- 
fold way : either he finds it ready in the word, then he has simply to know how to 
pronounce it. This the student knows from the “ Tropflein.” Or, the student has 
to give it, as a form of grammatical inflection. In order to be able to do this in 
all cases, he has to know what the Umlaut means. 

Meaning of the “Umlaut:” Negation, that is modification or partial change of 
the meaning of the word taking the Umlaut. This change occurs, 1. In the Plural 
of Nouns. Individuality here is either lost or gained by plurality. It is lost in 
“hats,” from singular “hat,” the individuality of the single hat is lost in the 
idea of the mass of hats as a unit, and so the vowel of hat, in German (Hut), is 
modified, Hiite. Individuality gained is in “arts,” from sing. art. The singular 
is general, an abstract as idea, mass; the Plural as arts is individual, each art. 
A change of character in the word is involved in either case in the Plural by the 
change of “Number.” So we give, in either case, the Umlaut. Or, individuality, 
is preserved in the plural, then the vowel is preserved: Ex. days from day, th tones 
from throne ; there is always but one day at a time, and one throne in a country. 
2. In the Comp, and Superl. of Adjectives of relative meaning: young, old, large, 
near, high, poor, strong, weak. 3. In the Imperf. Subj. of irreg. verbs. Compare, 
I did sing (Ind.) with Subjunctive : I might, should, would sing. 4. In the case of 
certain suffixes, with nouns and adjectives. Ex. : krank, sick ; feeble, not sick 
yet, kranklich ; yet: sickness, state of being sick, Krankhe.it, without the Umlaut; 
and 5. in the case of certain derivations : fiittern, from Putter, food. To give food, 
is not “ food;” yet hageln from Hagel, hail, to hail, because “to hail” is, hail , in 
motion, and nothing else. 


“UMLAUT,” CENTENNIAL SKETCH, 

Will be printed separate. 

« Square Inch, Check,” and the “Wrought Language,” alluded to in these parts 
of the book, may be found at the end of the entire book. 


2 


136 


D. CLOSE 

O F 

HIGH SCHOOL COURSE; EPILOGUE, “TELL.” 

(Part of Course.) 


& c 1 1. 

(Opening.) 

SCHILLER’S WILLIAM TELL. 


ACT I. Scene 1. — A high rocky shore on the Lake of Luzern opposite Schwytz. The lake makes a 
bend into the land: a hut stands at a short distance from the shore ; the fisherboy is rowing about in 
his boat. Beyond the lake are seen the green meadows, the hamlets and farms of Schwytz, lying 
in the clear sunshine. On the left are observed the peaks of the Hacken, surrounded with clouds ; to 
the right and in the remote distance, appear the glaciers. The Ranz des Yaches, and the harmonious 
ringing (tinkling) of the “herdbells” are heard even before the courtain rises, and continue for some 
time after. 

Qf t f d) c r f it a 0 c 

boy 

(©injt im .Rafjn). 

boat. 

SDMob ie beS ^ubretbeitJ. ■ 
ranz des Vaches 

(5$ ladjelt fcev ©ee, er label jum 23abe, 

smiles lake invites to the bath 

©er $nabe fc^Itef cm am grunctt ©eftabe, 

fell asleep at the green shore 

©a bbvt er ctn $ltngen, 

There hears ringing 

SBte gloten fo ffifj, 

like flutes so sweet 

SBie ©ttmmen bcr Qrngel 

voices angels 

3 m ^arabtcg. 

in the 

Uni> rote er erroadjet tit [either Sufi, 

as awakes blissful delight 

©a fpulen bte SQaffer tfyrn um bte 93rufh 

There wash, wave waters (to) him around breast 


3 


137 


Unb e3 ruft aug ben SEtefen, 

calls out of depths 

£teb $nabe, btft metn I 

dear 

3d; locfe ben ©deafer, 

allure sleeper 

3d) Jteb’ tfyn l;eretn. 

draw him in 

■ £>irt. 

herdsman. 

(Singt auf bent Sflerge.) 
on mounta 
SBariattort beS itubretbenS.' 

3br fatten, lebt wofyt! 

mountain-meadows (live) fare- well 1 

3f)r fonntge SBetben ! 

sunny pastures 

2>er ©enne mtt§ fdjetben, 

mountain-herdsman must depart 

2)er ©ommer ift I)tn. 

(away) gone. 

23tr fafyren ju 23erg, totr fomtnen roteber, 

go (drive) to the mountain 

SBenn ber ^ttfuf ruft, toettn ern)ad;cn bte Steber, 

when cuckoo calls songs 

SBenn mit 23lumen bte Grrbe ftd§) fletoet neu, 

clothes anew 

SBenn bte 23runnletn flte§en tm liebltcfjen SDIaf* 

little wells (springs) flow in the lovely 

3f)f fatten lebt n>of)l I 
3fyr fonntge SBetben ! 

£)er ©enne mujj fdjetbett, 

2)er ©ommer tft fyut. 

Sltycningcr* 

Chamois hunter. 

(erfc^etnt gegenuher auf ber Jpolje beJ 3etfen5.) 
appears opposite on top rock 
3»eite Variation, 
second 

(?$ bonnern bte $bben, e3 jtttert ber ©teg, 

thunder bights trembles log-bridge 

9ttd;t grnuet bent ©c^u^en auf fd;totnbltd)em SBeg. 

fear shooter dizzy path 


4 


138 


Ocr fdjrettet tm»egen 

steps bolctly 

Sluf geltern »on Grt'S; 

fields of 

2)a prangct fetn grfi&ltng, 

shines (in splendor) spring 

2)a grunet fetn $et3 ; 

greens (buds) twig 

Unt, unter ten gu&en etn neMtgeg Siftecr, 

beneath feet misty sea 

Srfennt er tie ©table ter 2ftenfd)en ntd^t meljr. 

recognizes (espies) cities man no more 

£>urcb ten nur ter 2Bolfen 

through rent only clouds 

(Srbltcft er bte 2Belt, 

sees (espies) world 

£tef unter ten SSaffern 

deep 

£>a$ grunente gelt. 

greeting) 

(A change comes over the landscape ; a hollow crash, and sound, as of distant 
thunder is heard, coming from the mountains. Shadows of clouds sweep over 
the scene). 


Parse with ordinary Dictionary : 

(NEW HERE.) 

„2$ilf)clm Sell. 

(Srfler 5tufjug. Srfte ©cene. £obe3 gelfenufer beg 23iertoalbjlabter ©ee8, ©cf)to 9 & 
gegeniiber. £)er ©ee mac^t ettte S3udpt in’g 2anb, eine £utte tfl untoeit bent Ufer, gtft^er- 
F n a b e fcifjrt (fatyren, Tune, a, It, a ; fai)tt, 2d change, Present Ind. : faf)re, fiibrft, 
fityrt) ftc(> ttt etnern $abn. Ueber ben ©ee binweg fie^t (fef)en, Tune ; e, a, e; fiebb 2d 
change, Pres. Ind. : fcbe, fie b ft fictjt) matt bie griinen fatten, Dbrfer (Sing. Dorf) unb 
£bfe (Sing. £of) son ©c^tt> 9 ^ int feetlen ©onnenfebein liegen. 3 ur StnFett be$ 3 u f c bflu«$ 
jeigen ftcb bie ©btjjen be3 £aten, nth SBolFen umgeben ; jur Sltecbten tm ffrnen £intergrunbe 
ftet)t man bie StSgebirge. 9tocb ebe bet 23orbang aufgebt, bort man ben $ubreiben unb ba$ 
bavmontfdbe ©elaute ber ^teerbengloclen, welc^ee ftc^ aucb bet erbffneter ©cene noth eint jeit- 
lang fortieth" 


o 


END OF HIGH SCHOOL COURSE, 

HIGH SCHOOL PRIMER. 


B. 

Child’s Story Book 

AND 

Dictionary. 


I. Child's Own; or, The Story of the Little Drop. A 
little drop itself, as story. 

II. Live Strings of Words ; that is. Text of German Read- 
ings offered and translated as words. A collection of 
words. 


III. Child's Reader and Dictionary . 


CHILD’S OWN; 

OR, 

The Story of the Little Drop. 


141 


The Story of the Little Drop.* 


i. 

r 6 p f l c { n." 

(little drop). 

A. What the Little Drop must (do) and can (do). 

Was das Troepflein musz und kann. 

£rijpflctn mu§ mtb famt. 



The “little drop”, falls 
Ta« ..SEropPein", fdtU : 

(The story of the Little Drop falls, like a drop). 

2>a* £rijpfletn : „©efd)i<i)te fce3 SErepfletna" fatlt, trie ein Shijpflein: 


Text of “Troepflein”, a. Taught. 


Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher : 
Class : 


I. 

Little Drop . must . to the . earth . fall : 
Troepflein 
Tropflein 

(must) musz 
musz 

(to the earth) zur Erde 
zur Erde 

(fall) fallen — 
fallen — 

Troepflein musz zur Erde fallen. 
Tropflein musz zur Erde fallen: 



* See end of text of book; also Contents (and Preface). 


1. Erde. 


142 


Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher: 

Class 
Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher : 

Class: 
Teacher : 
Class: 


n. 

Mnst . the . tender . little . flower . moisten : 

Musz — 

Musz — 

das zarte 
das zarte 

(little flower) Bluemchen 
Bliimchen 

(moisten) netzen 
netzen 

Musz das zarte Bluemchen netzen 
Musz das zarte Bliimchen netzen 
bag jarte 231umd)en netjen: 


2. £5ag jarte 
331umd)en 
Slumcfyen 



1. @rbe 

2. nefjen 

1. fatten Xrityflein 


(I.) Sropflein mu§ jur Srbe fallen, 
(II.) Sftufj bag jarte Slumcfyen ne£en — 


Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher: 

Class : 
Teacher: 

Class : 
Teacher : 

Class : 


III. 

Must . with . springs . further . flow : 

Musz 

Sflufj 

mit Quellen 
mit Quellen 

weiter wallen 
wetter wallen 


$?u§ mit Quellen weiter 



wallen, 



1. (Srbe, fallen 

2. S3titmd)en 

3. Quellen 
wallen. 



2 


143 


IV. 

Teacher : Must . the . little . fish . also . delight : 
Musz 

Class : , 

Teacher: das Fischlein 


Class : 
T sacher : 
Class : 


fcag gtfcfylem 


auch ergotzen, 
auch ergotzen, 
aud) ergijjjen, 


Teacher: Musz das Fischlein auch ergotzen 
Class: tag gifdjlein aucfy ergoljen, 


4. gtf$Ietti, 
audj ergojjen, 
©rbe, fatten, mufi 
33Iiimd;en nefcen, 
ergojjett 


Teacher and Class: 



Tropflein musz zur Erde fallen, 
Musz das zarte Bliimchen netzen, 
Musz mit Quellen weiter wallen, 
Musz das Fischlein auch ergotzen. 


V. 


Teacher: 

Must 

. in . the . brook . the . mill . beat, 


Musz 


Class : 

Musz 


Teacher : 


im Bach 

Class : 


im Bach 

Teacher : 

Musz 

im Bach — 

Class: 

Musz 

im Bach — 

Teacher : 


die Miihle schlagen, 

Class : 


die Miihle schlagen 

Teacher: 



Class : 



Teacher : 

Musz 

im Bach die Miihle schlagen 

Class : 

Musz 

im Bach die Miihle schlagen 


Muehle schlagen 
Muehle schlagen 





Teacher: Musz im Bach die Muhle schlagen 
Class: 9D?u£ im 33a$ fcie 9ftuf)Ie fd)lagen 


VI. 


Teacher: Must . in . the . river . the . ships . carry, 
Musz 

Class : 


Teacher : 

im Flusz 

Class : 

im glufj 

Teacher : 

die Schiffe tragen, 

Class : 

fete ©djiffe tragen 

Teacher : 

Schiffe tragen 

Class : 

©djiffe tragen 



Teacher: Musz im Flusz die Schiffe tragen 
Class: im glu§ fete @<$iffe tragen, 


6. <3d)iffe, glujj, 
tragen, 

2Jtiil)le, gif^tein, 
33ad), S£rityftein, 
SMiimcfyen, treiter 
maHeit, ergBiien. 





Teacher : 


Class : 
Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher : 

Class : 
Teacher: 
Class : 


VII. 


And . where . remained . then . the . seas — 

Und 

Und 

wo blieben 
wo blieben 

denn — die Meere 
denn — die Meere 
Und wo blieben denn die Meere, 

Unb wo blieben benn Me 9ft ee re 

benn bie Sfteere 


JL 



7 . 9fteere, 9fteere, 
blieben, toeiter, 
bie, tratten, 

ie = ee 
ei = i 

bie, weiter, Wallen 







VIII. 


Teacher: 

If . not . first . the . little . drop . were: 



Wenn nicht erst 


Class: 

Wenn nicht erst 


Teacher : 

ffienn ni<J)t erfl 


Class: 

SBenn rtic^t erfl 


Teacher : 

das Troepflein 


Class : 

bag tropflein 


Teacher : 

das TropfleiD ware 


Class : 

das Tropflein ware 
ware 

bag tropflein ware 


Teacher: 

Wenn nicht erst das Tropflein ware 


Class : 

2Benn nid)t erfl bag tropflein ware 


1. 5£>a$ £ropf* 

<// 

lein ware 

tropflein 


wenn nicfjt erft 


wenn nidjt erft 
ware 




#&mn nid)t erft bas £rityfletn ttiare ! 



2. 

l u nt d) c tt"5 

(little flower). 

(ffiin 33 1 u m d) c n , erfter Uebuttg, erfdjliefjt fl$ font „2:r5pflrin".) 
(A little flower of practice blooms up, from the “Tropflein”.) 


CANON. 


One child: 

Two children : 
Three children : 
Four children : 

Five children : 

Six children : 
All children : 

Teacher : 

First child : 

All children : 


STropflein ntup jur Srbe fatten, 

9J?u£ bao jarte 531umd)en nejjen, 

$!J?u§ mit Quetten wetter watten, wetter watten, 
ttJiufi bas gifdjlein aud) ergojjen, audj ergofjen, 

audj — ergo^en. 

ttJtufl im 23adj hie -itttuljle fdjlagen, 

ttttitfj | le — fdjla | gen, 

SJhtfi tm gtttf) fete ©djiffe tragen, 

Unb wo blteben benn bte SEtteere, 


benn — bte — 9J?ee 


SBenn nidjt erft — 

bag Sropfletn ware ! 
Unb wo blieben benn bie Sftccrc, 

SBenn nidjt erft bag tropflein ware? 


re, 


147 


3 . 

ell ext." 

(springs) 

Dueflen fees £on« fltegert, al$ S?aut, Oort unb al« ©ago, unb iit bctt Diteflen f[te§t btr Son be« Sroj) ftetnS. 
(Springs of sound flow, as single sounds, words and sentences, and in the springs of sound 
flows the sound of tho “Little Drop”.) 

Text of “Troepflein”, b. Teaching, 
a. Sounds, single: 

- 

„(Edm" — 

(quick) 

Teacher : Trocpflein, quick : 

First child : Strbpflettt mu§ jur (Erbe fatten 
Teacher : (E r b e fallen, 

Echo: — alien, fatten 
(Erbe fatten, 

Second child : ba$ jarte 231umc^en ne£en, 

Teacher : S3 1 u m-d)en netjen 
Echo: — e£en, ne§en 

Slum d)en ne£en, 

Third child : Sftufi mil Cluetten metier matten, 

Teacher : toeiter, metier, toeiter toatten 
Echo: — alien, matten 
toetler toatten, 

Fourth child : 9ftu§ bas ^tfcfylein aud) ergb^en, 

Teacher: aud), audj, and) ergbljen, 

Echo : — ptjen — gotten 
audj e r g 5 £ e n* 

Fifth child : SOfufj tm Sa$ bte — 

Teacher : 2ftu§ tm S a d), S a d), &ad) bte 
Sftujj im Sacfy — 

Echo : Sftug tm — acf) ! bte 

ttftuji tm — a d), Sacfy, S a cfy bte 


148 


Teacher: Sftuf tm 23ad) bie Soluble fdj> I a gen 
Echo : — uj)le, SD^u^Ie 
— uf)le fd^Iagen 

Teacher: 9Jtui)le, 2)?uf)le, 
fdjlagen, fdjlagen 

Echo : — agen, fcfylagen 
— tyk, 2J?ul)le 
— uf)Ie fd^Iagen 
Teacher : 2ftuf)-le f$la-gen 
Echo: 9)?ufy-le fcfyla-gen, 

Teacher: SDhtft im $lu$ bte — 

tm ^ I u fj, gflufj, bie - 
Echo : 9J?tt£ im $ l u ft, $lujj, % I u ft bte — 

Teacher : 2Jtuft tm gluft bte @d)ijfe tragen, 

Echo: — agen, tragett 
Teacher : 0d)iffe, ©cfyiffe, ©cfytffe tragen — 

Echo : 0t$iffe tragen — 

Teacher: Uttb mo blieben — 

Echo : — lieben, — ieben 
ttnb mo blteben — 

Teacher : benn bte SJteere, 

— eere, 50? — e-e--te 
benn bie 50?eere 

Echo: — eere, — eere, — e-e-r-e, 2D?— e— e— re 
benn bie 50?ccrc, — 

Sixth child : 933 emt ntd)t erft bao — 

Teacher: 933enn nictyt erft, tpa§? (what?) 

All children : SCettn nid)t erft b a 0 Xrppficiit mare, 

Echo : — bpflein, Strityflein, 

— bpflein — are 

Teacher: Strfipjlein, £rppfTein, mdre, marc — 
Echo : — are — are, mdre, m a re, 

— Ppfleitt, Strityflein, 

— ppfleitt — dre 
£rppflettt mare, 

SSetttt nicfyt erft bao Srppfletn mdre! 


b. Words. 


(Dropping, from the words of the “Little Drop”.) 
(©etrcpft Beit ten ffiorten tea Zrcpfleina.) 


1 . 

„ntuff 

(must) 

1. like mug (must); 

9iu|j, tie 9hifj, nut, pi. 9tujfe. 

ber g(ug, river, pi. gluffe* 
Stfjug, ber @d)ug, report of a gun, 
pi. ©d)uffe. 

©djlttfc, bev ©d)Ing, close, conclusion, 
pi. ©djlitffe (conclusions) 

23 efdjtu§, ber 23 efd)lug, resolve, pi. 
33 ef<Jjtufe„ 

23 er&ru§, ber iBerbrug, vexation. 

c. Sentences 

(dropping, of the words.) 

(itropfen, ala STropflein, Bon ffiorten, getrepft om ten 
ffiorten tea StropfleinS.) 

£de 9 fug ig runb, the nut is round, 
2 >ie Sftuffe ftttb runb, the nuts are 
round, 

£er f$Iug iff tief, the river is deep, 
!Die ^litffe ftnb tief, the rivers are deep. 
3 d) t)a£>e etnen <Sd)ug geprt, I (have) 
heard the report of a gun. 

3$ f)af>e @d)uj[e gefyort, I (have) 
heard the report of guns. 

£)er @d)Iug ber < 5 d)ule, the close of 
(the) school. 

Sr mad)t ntir SSerbrttg, he causes me 
vexation. 

berbriegt mid), that vexes me. 

(“Grammar” for older pupils) : 

„ 5 h*g", from fltegen, to flow, Imperf. 
flOg, Past Part. geflOffeit (“Tune” 
ie, o, o). 

„@d)ug", from fd)iegen, to shoot, Im- 
perf. fefyoft, Past Part. gefd)Offen 
(“Tune” ie, o, o)* 


„<3d)lug", bon fd)tiegen, to close, Im- 
perf. fd)l0g, Past. Part. gefd)l0|Jeit 
(“Tune” ie, o, o). 

„23e]d)lug", from Befd)ltegcn, to resolve, 
Imperf. befdflflg, Past Part, befd)lOf= 
fen (“Tune” ie, o, o). 

„2>erbrng'', from berbriegen, to vex, 
Imperf. berbrOg, Past Part, ber- 
brO|Jen (“Tune” ie, o, o). 

2 . 

„(Srbe" 

(earth) 

1. like „(5rbe" (earth): 

merbe 

§eerbe 

ipferbe. 

2. These words explained and applied: 
©ott fprad): eS merbe 2id)t, G-od 

said, let there he light. 

Stne ipeerbe $>ferbe, a drove of horses. 
!Die ipeerbe rneibet, the flock is grazing 
(sheep, ©djafe). 

2)te $ferbe jieljen ben SBagen, the 
horses pull the wagon. 

Gender : 

£>ie Jpeerbe, the flock, the drove, pi. 
bie £>eerben. 

T)(t3 3)ferb, the horse, pi. $ferbe. 

3. 

„faEen" 

(to fall, fall) 

1. like fatten (to fall): 
batten 

mieberbatten 

flatten 

matten 

©efatten 

migfatten. 


C 150 


2. These words translated : 
fatten, to sound, resound. 
ttieber fallen, to echo, 
flatten, to sound. 

alien, to float, ramble (also to boil 
up). 

©efaflcn, her ©efallen, favour (tljue 
ntir ben ©efallen, do me the favour) 
tttiflfallett, to displease. 

*£>ag f)at mir mif fallen (that . has . dis- 
pleased . me). 

4 . 

^Slumdien" 

(little flower). 

Pronounce: 

„9Jiul)md)en", little aunt. 

„£uljnd)en", little chicken, 
bag .Jpufyndjen, the little chicken. 
t>a$ 9Jiul)md)en, the little aunt. 

(pi. £uljndjen, Sftufymdjen.) 

5 . 

„ne£en" 

(moisten) ] 

Pronounce : 
tteijen, to moisten, 
tre^en, to sharpen, 
ucrlcjjen, to hurt, 
fe^eit, to set down. 

(For older pupils: all these are 
regular verbs; viz: nejjen, Imperf. 
nc^te, Past Part, gene£t. 

6 . 

„£tueflen" 

(springs) 

fletten, to put, to place. 

©efeUen, fellows, associates, hands 
(assistants in work shop, journey- 
men). Sing, ©efell, ber, masc. 
gefctlen, to associate. 

(For older pupils : The verbs here 
are regular verbs.) 


7 . 

, r tt>etter" 

(further on) 

leibcrl alas! 

&eiber, of both. 

■iftetbet, ber, an envious man. 
gefdjeibter, more prudent, adroit. 
@$neibef, ber, tailor. 

Settet, guide, m.; ladder, f. 

S3H0— ab— Xeitel*, lightning rode. 

(PI. of all the nouns here, like 
the Singular.) 

8 . 

(float, ramble) 

see : fallen, No. 3. 

9 . 

(little fish) 

„3dfd)lein", little table. 

10 . 

»«« <$" 

(also) 

$audj, breath, breeze, ber Jpau<$. 
Stand), smoke, ber 9tau$. 

©d)laud), hose, leather pipe, ber 
©cfylaud), pi. bie <Sd)laud)e. 
©ebraud), use, usage, custom, ber 
©ebrautfy, pi. customs, bie @e* 
braudje. 

11 . 

„erg5£en" 

(to delight) 

„Jtlb|3en", (to the) blocks of wood; 
Dat. pi. Sing. ber, masc. 

12 . 

„23a$" 

(brook) 

ber 33ad), the brook, pi. 23ad)e, brooks, 
bag £>ad), the roof, pi. 2)ad)er, roofs. 


^radj, crash, ber $rad); 

bag £>ad) ftet mit eincrn $radj, the 
roof fell with a crash. 

Ia-d)en, to laugh; 

ttmrum ladjfi bu? Why are you 
laughing ? 

iroriiber Iad)ft bu? What are you 
laughing at ? 
nta-cf)en, to make, to do ; 

tt>ag tnad)[l bu? What are you 
doing? 

©ad)en, things, sing, bie (Sadje. 
Sftadjen, sing, the jaws of a wild beast, 
ber Slacken. 

9iad)en, boat, skiff, ber -ftadjett, pi. 
bie 9tad)en. 

13 . 

(mill) 

.ftiiljle, coolness, cool part of the day, 
bie itiiljte, fem. 

fuf)le, feel thou, fiilden, to feel, 
©efufyle, pi. feelings; sing, bag ©e* 

w* 

14 . 

(ships) 

Sftiffe, (ph) riffs, ridges; sing, bag 
fftiff, neuter. 

SBegriffe, pi. ideas, notions; sing, bet 
iBegriff, masc. 
pftffe, he might whistle. 

(For older pupils: from pfeifen, 
Imperf. pftff, Past Part, gepftffen. 3^ 
tnollte, er pftffe bent £unbe, I should 
wish he wistled to the dog. Parse 
and explain here „pftffe“ and the oth- 
er words of the sentence.) 

15 . 

„tragen" 

(to carry, to bear) 
rcagett, to venture, 
fagen, to say, tell. 


ragen, to tower up. 
fdjtagen, to strike, to beat. 

(Older pupils: “Tune” 0, U, Q, 
that is, Inf. ftfdttgett, Imp’f. fd)lUj, 
Past Part. gefcfylUgen ; so tragen, to 
carry. 

Hagen, to lament. 

(Older pupils : these other verbs, 
all regular : rcagen wagte, getcagt.) 
tterflageit, to sue. 
beflagen, to complain. 

233agen, ber SSagett, a wagon, carriage; 
pi. bie SBagett. 

lagen, laid; bie ^inber lageit int ©rafe, 
the children were lying on the 
grass. 

For old. pupils: “Tune” i$, a, e. 
nf. liegen, Imperf. lag, Past Part, 
gelcgen.) 

16 . 

(remained) 
lieben, to love. 
fd)ieben, to push. 

(Old. pupils: “Tune” ie, o, o. Inf. 
fcbteben, Imperf. fdjQb, Past Part. 
gefd)Oben.) 

5?er|'d)teben, to delay, procrastinate. 
(Old. pupils: like fdjieben; drops 
„ge“ in Past Part, owing to the 
insep. prefex „»er— ‘ ".) 

©ute $tnber liebert iljre SItern, good 
children love their parents. 

17 . 

^eere' 

(seas) 

^eere", seas, sing. 2fteer, bag SHeer.’ 
£eer e, hosts, armies, sing. £>eer, bag 
£>eer. 

2eere, emptiness, f. 

23el)re, armor, f. 

©djeere, pair of scissors, f., pi. ©d)ee= 
rett. 

@$»ere, weight, heaviness, f. 


19 . 


fdjtrer, heavy. 

Befd>tt?ere ntidj nid)t, burden me not. 
fd)tr>ere, pi. of farcer, heavy (things); 
heavy difficult thiogs, fdjroere 
©adjert. 
feljre! turn! 

(£§re, honor, bic Sljre. 

Unefjre, dishonor. 

fcerfjeeren, to destroy, to desolate. 

£eere fcerfyceren tad Sant, armies 
depopulate the country. 

(Verbs here all reg.) 

18 . 

(not) 

$flid)t, duty, tie $fli$t, pi. ^flidjten. 
©eridjt, court. 

SBidjt, wight, ter SBidjt, pi. SBidjte. 
©eftdjt, face, n., tag ©eftd)t; pi. 
©eftdjte (visions), and ©ejtd)tCT 
(faces). 

bidjt, dense, solid. 

SDid^ter, ein Did) ter (a “condenser”) 
a poet, pi. £>id)t£t. 

©ettnd)t, weight, tad ©etoid)t, neuter, 
pi. ©eroicbte. 

fd)Iidjt, plain, sleek, even. 

©etid)t, poem, tad ©etidjt, pi. ©e= 
tidjte, poems. 


„er^' 

(first) 

3 uerft, at first. 

©erfte, wheat, tie ©erfte. 
berften, to burst. 

(Old. pupils: Inf. berften, Imperf. 
fcttrfi, Past Part. ge&Orften. “Tune” 

• e, o,o.) 

20 . 

„5^t*i5^petn // 

SrOpfett, drop, Jrflpfleitt, little drop. 
$nOpf, button, ^nOpfteitt, little but- 
ton. 

pi. of Sropflein and $nopflein, the 
same as the sing, 
pi. of Sropfett, the same as sing, 
pi. of ^nopf, inBpfe. 

2Bo Ijaft tu tie dtnopfe gefauft? where 
have you (bast thou) bought the(se) 
buttons ? 

21 . 

„n>dre" 

(were) 

erfldre, explain. 

erfldre mir tiefed ©etidjt, explain 
to me this poem. 

„erfldre nttr tad Sropflein", explain 
to me the “Little Drop”. 


153 


B. What w 6 can (do) and may (do). 

4. 

„S t f d) C e t n.” 

(little fish.) 

(little fishes of work, at play in the “Little Drop”): 

1. a. Sentences. 

Das Tropflein fallt (falls) 

2>a8 £rityfletn fSttt. 

Das Tropflein kann fallen (can, may, fall) 

25afi Srityftein farm fatten. 

Das Tropflein musz fallen (must fall) 

2 )aS Srityflein tnufj fatten. 

fallen (to fall) 

falle, fallst, fallt (fall, fallest, falls) 
fafle, fattfl, fattt. 

Ich falle, du fallst, er, sie, es fallt. , 

(I) (thou) (he) (she) (it) 

3 $ fatte, bn fattfl, er, fie, eS fattt; hnr (we) fatten, i&r (you, many) fattet, fie 
(they; @ie, you, polite) fatten. 

Das Tropflein fallt zur Erde, ^ yp 

25 aS STrS^ftein fattt — jut (5tbe, 





1. b. 

Letters (first line or lines, Script). 


Teacher: 


/ 




X 

X" 


(ah) 

(9ey) 

(tsey) (dey) 

(ey) 

(ef) 

(ghey) 


a 

b 

c 


e 

f 

9 


a 

b 

c 

d 

e 

f 

g 

Teacher: 

X 

V 

x ; 4 

/ 





(hah) 

(e) 

(yot) (kah) 

(el) 

(em) 

(en) (o) 

(pey) 


D 

i 

i * 

I 

m 

n o 

9 


h 

i 

j k 

1 

m 

n o 

p 

Teacher: 


*> 

/X 



X/ 



(koo) 

(err) 

(ess) 

(tey) 

(00) 

(fou) 

(▼ey) 


q 

r 

f CO 

t 

u 

v 

tv 


q 

r 

s 

t 

u 

V 

w 


P 

(icks) (yp'-see-lon) (tset) 

V 9 i 

x y z 


Teacher : 


154 


£)a$ STropfletn fdCtt 


£a3 Sropftein fatlt jur Srbe. 



.«> fi? 


o 8 ; u u 



§ 


(sz) 



£ 

(tz) 



Jropflein muf? $ur Srbe fatten 




Teacher, 

(Capitals, 

Script): 




w *r <& qe 



=?• », ®, <S, 3), ®, 8 , ®, 

■£>, a' St, S, sot, 9t, D, 9), 

d, at, ©, z, u, ®, ©, 

K, 3. 

* Both, I, and J. 


2 


155 


Compare: ^3 , B, and ^3/ V; the first has two chambers, the latter but one. 
Compare: f N, and 0^, R,. The one is open, all through, the other 


is devided. 


Compare, the m , M, and the SB , W. Notice the wavelike motions 
and bend of lines, in the SB, connected, and flowing as it were, one into the other; 
compare with this the stiffer forms of the 2)1, open, not closed all through, like 
the 2B. 


Distinguish : % 91, S3, 9J1, SB, S3. 

Again: 91, S3, 91, S3, S3, 931, 91, 91, SB. 

The same, in smaller type: 33, 33, 3?, 33, SB, tft, 33* 

Still smaller: S3ad), Sliimcfyen, 33ogel (bird), 23ater (father), 91fld)t 
(night), 33ed)t (right), SBagen (wagon), SSltagcn (stomach). 

And smaller still : 2J 1, 211, 2B, SB, 91, 91, 91, 91, S3, S3, 33. 



a, f), c, , . 


a, b, c, b, e, . . 

1. c. 


Xriipfletn fdttt. 



£)a$ Sropfleitt faflt jur (Srhe: 




156 


5 . 

a dV' 

(Dcr Sad) bcr Strbeit— The Brook of Labour.) 

$er Sa<t ter Slrbeit treibt bie SHiifjle fcc« ©efpradjS. 

(The brook of labour drives the mill of speech, in conversation.) 
(Sacks of grain, “Words,’, waiting outside, for the work of the mill.) 

1. d. 


£rifyflettt mug jur Site fatten — 

little drop must to the earth fall 



2)a$ Jropfletn ift runl (is round). 
2)ie Srle ijl ruttl. 



2a3 runic (round) Sropflettt. 
2) i c runle (£ r t> e. 










2. a. 


9ftug ba§ garte 33lumcf)en ne£en — 

must the tender little flower moisten 



2)a$ 23lumd)en ijl jart (delicate, tender). 

3art tfl las 33lumcf)en. 

(Sin 53Iumd)en ifl eine Heine (little) 53Iume (flower). 




157 



2Bie fcfyreibft 3)u (how writest — spellest — thou) „53Iunt e"? 
(So (so) fox S3 . 1 1 . u ♦ nt . c 

&.S. 


(Scfyreibe (write) bag (that) etnmal (once); 

©cfyretbe tag jtreimal (twice); 

(Scfyreibe bag breintal (three times) : 

Ich (I) habe (have) es (it) geschrieben (written). 

3 a ^ r e {count): 

Sing, jtoei, brei, oier, fiinf, fedjg, fieben, adjt, neun, jefjn, (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 
7, 8, 9, 10); elf (11), gtoolf (12), bm-jefyn, »ier-jef)n, fiinf— fed) | jeljn 
(“sechzehn”), fteben— ae^n, adjtjetyn, neunjefyn, j m a n 3 i g (20) ; etn unb (and) 
gtnanjig (twenty one), gtoei unb jtranjig (u. f. tt>. = ttnb fo toeitcr and so on); 
bretfjig (30), sierjig (40), ftinfjig (50), fec^gig (60), fiebenjig (70), ad^ig 
(80), neunjtg (90), I) u n b e r t (hundred) ; taufenb (1000); 50£ittion 
(million). 


2. b. 


2Bo (where) tooljnft (livest) Du? 

3$ tooljne in ber @tabt (city). 

2Cie (how) alt (old) bifi (art) Du (thou) ? 

3dj bin (I am) je^n Sa^re alt (ten years old). 




®eC)|t (goest) Du jur @d)ule (to the . school) ? 
3 $ geije jur <3$ule. 



sjBag (what) lernft (learnest) Du? 

3 $ terne Snglifdj, Deutfd) (German), 9iedjnen (“counting”, Arithmetic), 
<5d)teiben (writing), ©eograp^ie (Geography), ©efcfyicfyte (History). 

2BeI$e (what) ©ef$id)te ? 

Die ©efd)id)te ber 33er— einigtcn <2taaten (of the United States). 


158 



jL. — . 


3. a. 

mit Oueftett better toctftett — 

must with springs further flow 

S 

£)ie Quelle (spring) fliept (flows), 

2)ie Quellen fliepen (flow). 

3m (in the) grilling (spring) fliepen tie Quellen. 
gltepen tie Quellen ? 


©ann (when) fliepen tie Quellen ? 
£)ie Quellen fliepen im grilling. 
3m grilling fliepen tie Quellen. 



gliepe (flow), o Quelle ! 
ifl grueling. 



3. b. 

91ad) (after) tern fjruljling lommt (comes) ter (Sommer (summer), 
grilling, Sommer, £erfcft (autumn), ©inter (winter). 

ai Cp&y, , y 

3m grueling Mitten (bloom) tie 23ciume (trees). 

3m Sommer ip e$ Ijeip (hot). 

£)ie Sonne (sun) fdjeint (shines). 

Sdjeint tie Sonne ? 

®er £ertp ip f$on (beautiful). 

3m ©inter fc^neit (snows) eS (it). 


159 







S$ fdjneit, eS regnet (rains). 





Q$ regnet, after (but) ed fc^neit ntd)t (not) ; e$ ifi grilling. 



2)a$ (that, these) ftnh (are) hie ttier SaftteSjeiten (seasons). 


aZs> fLJ'JL 



4 . 


Sttug ba$ gif extern aud) ergb^ett, 

must the little fish also delight 



Sin gifdjtein tfl ein fleiner (small, little) gifd) (fish) 
Heiner gifd). 

gifdj . Hein (little) . Hein . gifd). 

£>er (the) Heine gifd). 

0ifcf) . ^lein . Steiner gifdj. 

£)er gifa tft Hein. 

a2L 





28 o (where)? 

$3o tebt (lives) her gtfcf) ? 

£)er gifdj tebt int 22af[er (water). 

gtfcfye (fishes) Ieben and) (also) im giuffe (river). 

gifdjf teften (live) im SEfteere (sea). 

©rofjie (large) gif^e, Heine gifdje. 


160 



3nt glufie ftnb (are) Heine gif$e, im fJJZeere ftnb grofje gifdje. 
0 9Jleer, o gifdje! 



5. a. 


mu% im bie SD^it^Xe fcftfctgen — 

must in the brook the mill beat 



Dag Stropfletn treibt (drives) im 23ad) bie -Jftufyle. 
MeineS Sropflein, grofje 9Jiul)le. 



5, b. 


Die Sftufjle rnalflt (grinds). 

2Bag (what) rnafyU jte (“she”, it) ? 

Die grudjt (grain) ; bag $orn (rye); ben SBeijen (wheat). 

SBag mailt bie Sftufyle? Den SBeijen. 

Dag 9J?tiljlrab brel)t fid^ (turns itself, revolves). 

Dag -Sftufylrab (mill-wheel); bie 'DSJtu'fjle. Dag Staffer (water); bie SDluljle. 



JLP 




-a. 


iOhtf; im bie ©cfyiffe tvageit. 

must in the river the ships carry 



161 


3m gtuffe gefyen (go, float) bie ©djiffe. 

©rope ©djtffe, Heine ©tfyiffe, t>iete (many) ©djiffe. 
©rope ©djiffe, fleine ©djiffe. 



Der glup fliept in’g (into the) 9Jieer (sea). Die ©djiffe geljen ctuf bem 
SJieere (on, in the sea). 3m SWeere ftnb (are) gifc^e. 

at. 

©rope gifdje, Heine gifdje. 

Sifdje ftitto im SSfteere. 


6. b. 

Dag SBaffer, bag (which) bie 9ftut)le treibt (drives), fliept (flows) in’g 
SEfteer. 2ttfe (all) glitjfe (rivers) fliepen (flow) in’g 2)£ee u 
Sropfen (drop, drops), 9fteer (sea). 

Sropflein — SKeer. 

Sropflein ftnb im SWecr. 



Jropfen ftnb im 23adj. 


0. c. 


Der 23a dj (brook) treibt (drives) bie SJluljfe. 

Die 9J?u$le mirb (becomes, is being) son bem 23ad)e getrieben (driven). 


a2L 





Der glup tragt (bears, carries) bie ©djiffe. 

Die ©cfyiffe toerben (become, are being) oon bem glujfe getragen (born. 


carried). 

©djiff. glup (river), gtuffe (rivers). 



162 


Die Slufie flie^en in’g SDZeer; atlc f^Iiiffe flicfjen in’g 9Jicer. 
(Sc^iffe faftren (go, float) auf bent gluffe, auf tern Sfteere. 



Der Heine Sropfen. Dag gro§e ^eer. 
Dag Sropflein tragt bie @d)tffe. 
gluffe fhefjen in’g SDfeer. 


7 . 


JL~~ JL 

benn bie Sfteere, 

Unb too BlteBen bemt bte $?eere, 

And where remained then the seas 
2£enn nidjt erfi — 

SBemt rttd>t erft 

if not first 

~&S> 

bcto Srityflein tocire! 

the little drop were 
$3enn nid^t erjl bag Srobfletn mare ? 

^ ^ . cy. „ . a 






/ 


/ 


£)ctS tft bie (Befdjidjte (history, story) rom (of the) STrdpf- 
lettt fur (for) Heine ©d)uler (scholars) ; ctber (yet) bte grofien, 
ft>enn (if) fte (they) tnoHett (are willing, wish), fbnnen (can) c0 
and) (also) lenten nnb ftfyretben (write)* 

©cfjreibe (write) bct3 in beutfcfyer (script). 

Z JU>~ 

©tnrnal, jtreimal, bretmal. 



3$ f)abe bag gefcfyrteben. 

(have) (written) 



©cfyreiben (Inf.), fcfyrieb (Imperf.), gcfd^rieben (Past Part.) 

(to write) * (wrote) (written) 



F)ajl T)« gefcfyrteben? 



©It &C (end) 



grofe (large) 
unb (and) 

F I e t n e (little) t n b e r (children) . 



c tSLjl. 


Dag ift bag @nbe beg Sropfletng a(g $ r 6 p f I e i n, aber nidljt bag Ctnbe 
beg „$ropfletng": ©efcbidfyte beg Sropfleing. 3e£t lommt erft ber 
unb bann bag „9Jiccr". Der „glufj" ftnb bie Sefejliidfe; bag „9fteer" ift bag 
2efebud&. O^glu^'! O „9fleer"! 2Bare tdb iiber bent „97teer" ! ©areft 
Du iiber bem SDleer (if you were), fo mareft Du in D e u t f clj I a n b. Deutfdf)-- 
lanb ift iiber bem SJteer. Ueber bem „9Jteer" ift „Deutfdjlanb". 

„Ueberfe£e bteg," translate this. 

("Words in “ Child’s Dictionary.”) 

,v£efeftucFe," reading-pieces. 

„Deutfd)Ianb", „Deutf<bIanb" 
ift iiber bem ^ee r", 

uBer tern „3J?cct" ! ! 

iiber bem $luffe, bem Sfteerl — tjl „Deutfd)lattb"«. 


II. 

LIVE STRINGS OF WORDS 

THAT IS, 

TEXT OF GERMAN READINGS, OFFERED 
AND TRANSLATED AS WORDS. 


A COLLECTION OF WORDS. 



;; 


“ River.” 


(See tc Little Drop.”) 





























167 


“READINGS.” 

TRANSLATED AS “WORDS.” 
See end of the “Remarks.” 


Remarks (Note) : 

In order to make these “Readings” as profitable as possible to our 
young friends, we have 

GIVEN, 

besides the 

Text of the German, and 
The English, given with it, 

1) The GENDER of Nouns ; either , 

a. under the piece and, then, either, with the German words, 

repeated, as in the case of the first three pieces , 
or, with the English word, as in the last pieces ; m., in that 
case, stands for masculine, /. for feminine, and n. for neu- 
ter; or, 

b. in the pieces, by the types of the words, as in two middle 

pieces ; see these pieces. 

From the Gender follows here, the Declension, Sing.; “Quality Nouns” are 
marked as such. 

2) The PLTJRAL of the Nouns , 

by numbers, added to the words, and referring to the forma- 
tion of their Plural as follows : 

1 means: u e, that is, Umlaut, and ending e, for instance: 

$orb(l) means, $ovb (basket, m.) plur. $mbe. 

2 means: — e, that is, ending e without the Umlaut; for 

instance: Sag, (2) meaning Xag (day, m.) plural Stage, 
days. 

3 means : 4t , that is, Umlaut, without the e, for instance : 

93ogel,(3) meaning $ogel (bird, m.) plur. 95pgel (birds); 
the omission of the e is caused by the “liquid letter,” 
here l, at the end of the word. 

4 means: — , that is neither , neither Umlaut, nor ending e, 

for instance: $nocf;en,(4) bone, m., plur. $no$en, bones. 

5 means: " er, that is, Umlaut and the ending ct; for in- 

stance: $au3, (5) house, n,, plural: $aufer, houses. 


1 


168 


6 means: — en or n, that is, ending ett or tt, always with- 
out the Umlaut. For instance : Stfyure,^) door, /., plu- 
ral, £f>uren, doors (the Umlaut you see in this word, 
belongs to the word); ©onne,(6) sun, f., plural, ©on* 
nen: U&r,(6) clock, f., plural: Ufyren, clocks. 

Nro’s 1 to 4, are forms of plurals belonging to words understood 
as masculine in the plural. 

Nr. 5 is the form of the plural of words understood as being 
neuter in the plural; and 

Nr. 6 is the form of the plural of words understood as words 
feminine in the plural. 

A little upright dash, or dividing line, before an end letter of 
a word, marks this end letter as an ending, which you have to 
remove before forming the plural, from the stem or the name of 
the word. Example: „$orb|e(l)," means, the word, name, Nom. 
Sing, is $orb (basket),- the plural, is: $prbe. 

Read, plurals of: 

£opf,(l) £au3,(5) Mcbe,(6) £ant\(l) £no<$en,(4) 9?ogeI,(3) £rrppe,(6) 

pot, m, house, u. kitchen, f. hand, f. bone, m. bird, m. staircase, f. 

3ettel,(4) £013,(1) £utte,(6) 2HauU5) 

note, m. neck, m. hut, f. mouth, of animals, n. 
and others more, picking or selecting them beforehand, here, for 
practice, from the text of the “Readings.” 

8) The VOCAL CHANGES (“Tunes”), of the IRREGULAR 
VERBS; 

for instance: rtef (called), u, tc, it, that is, Inf. mfen, to call, 
Imperf. rtcf, called, Past Part, flerufen, called. Verbs specially 
irregular, that is, the inflection of which involves important 
other changes, changes of spelling , are marked as such, by the 
letters “sp.” (meaning “special”), added to the word, in English. 

“B. C.,” means, Verbs having “Both Changes.” For these 
terms, we must refer those for whose benefit they are given, 
to the book. 

Explanation: “Live strings of words,” this means: strings, of 
words, alive, as stories, and strings of stories, alive, as “words,” 
that is, a collection of words, ottered as stories , and explained, and 
translated, as words . 


2 


169 


L £»cr ©fTcnfc^rcr* 

(Notation of Gender, here, and in the next two pieces, under the piece. 
Translation, here, given under each line ; afterward in separate lines, under 
the pieces, whole pieces or parts. The lines in that case are numbered, and 
the numbers of the English lines correspond to the numbers of the German 
lines, of the text. The words of the English line, as separated by dots, 
correspond, severally, to the German words, of the same or corresponding 
line; and this, throughout the pieces. In one piece, the „33lint)e jtonig," 
the Blind King, we put the' English, and without dots, on the same line.) 

&et (gffcnfcfcrer* (4) 

the . chimney-sweeper. 

3n bent ^>aufe, C5) in tneldjem bie Heine 2Jtarie(6) mofmte, mar 

in . the . house . in . which . the . little . Mary . lived . (was) had 

bie (Effe(6) eittmal langc nicfyt gefefyrt morben. Die 3lbcfyin(6) 

the . chimney . once . long . not . swept . (become) been | the . female cook 

Hinn roofyl bie^udje(6) unb bie 0tube(6) Hfyren, aud) bie £opfe(l)* 

can (B. C.) . (well) . the . kitchen . and . the . room . sweep . also . the . pots 

tuieber blanf ftfyeuern, menn fte beru§t ftnb; aber bie Seuerejjc (6) 

again . shining . scour . when ♦ they . sooty . are . but . the . chimney 

famt fie nidjt fefyrcn, bas mu§ ber (£ffenfel)rer (4) tfyun, ber aud) 

can(B.C.).she. not. sweep.that.must(B.C.),the.cliimney sweeper. do (sp.).who.also 

@d)ornfteinfeger (4) fyeijiu 

chimney-sweep . is called. 

2) a fam er eben gum £>aufe(5) herein, als3 Sftarie (6) auf ber 

there , came (sp.) ♦ he . just . to the . house ♦ in . when . Mary . on . the 

£reppe(6) mar* 0cbnet( lief (au, te, au) fie gur Shutter (3) unb 

steps ♦ was } quickly . ran . she . to the . mother . and 

rief (u, ie, it): „2Jtutter, (3) Gutter, (3) get)’ nid)t f)inauS, ber 

cried , mother . mother . go (sp.) . not . out . the 

0tfyornjleinfeger(4) braufjem" (Si, fagte bie Gutter, (3) bas ift 

chimney-sweeper ♦ is . without | eh . said . the . mother . that , is 

gut, er mill bie (£ffe(6) fcfyren; fomm mit mtr, rotr moflen if)m bie 

good , he . will . the . chimney.sweep.come (sp.). with . me . we . will(B.C.).him . the 

^utbe(6) geigen* SWarie^en (4) ging roofyl mit, aber il)r £erg (6) 

kitchen * show | little Mary . went (sp.) . (well) . with . but , her * heart 

podjte beim Stnblicf bes fdjroargen 9Jknn|eS*(5) 

beat . at the . sight . of the , black . man 
* Singular : £o|>f* 


» 


— 170 — 

Die 2J?utter(6) bffnete bie ^ut^e( 6 ) gab (e, a, e) t|m cine £anb(l) 

the ♦ mother ♦ opened . the . kitchen . gave . him . a ♦ hand 

unb fpi'ac^ (e, a, o): ©uten Sag, ( 2 ) liebcr 9 Jlann,( 5 ) eo iff gut, 

and . said . good * day . dear . man . it . is . good 

bap bu ba bift. ©a lacbte ber (Sfienfebrer, (4) a!3 er fab, (e, a, e) 

that . thou , here . art | then , laughed , the . chimney-sweeper . when . he . saw 

tt)ie 2)torie fid) Winter bent 3Heib|e(5) ber 9)?uttcr(3) oerftecfte, unb 

how . Mary . herself . behind . the . dress . of the , mother . hid . and 

fragtet „2Ber tft ba£ Heine 9)?dbd)cn?"(4) „($i," fagte bie 9)?utter(3) 

asked . who , is . the * little . girl j eh ♦ said * the . mother 

„bas ift meine Heine SJZarte." ( 6 ) 

that . is ♦ my , little , Mary 

„9fai n, ge^e einmal in ben £of,(l) Heine 9J?arte,"(6) fpracb (e, a, o) 

(now) well . go (sp.) ♦ once . in . the . yard . little . Mary . said 

ber (£ffcnfebrcr,(4) unb ftel)e (e, a, e) nacb ber $euercffe,( 6 ) ba nurji 

the . chimney-sweeper , and . look . towards * the . chimney . there , wilt 

bu etioaS SufHgeS fel)en (e, a, e). Das H)at 9J?arie(6) mtb ging 

thou * something . funny . see | that . did (sp.) . Mary . and . went (sp.) 

mit ber 9)cutter(3) b* na &* @3 baucrte gar nid)t iangc, fo fab (e,a,e) 

with . the . mother . down | it . lasted . quite ♦ not ♦ long . so . looked 

ein S3efen(4) $ur (£ffc( 6 ) ^eraits^, bann fam ein ^cpf(l) unb gulefjt 

a . broom . to the . chimney . out . then . came (sp.) . a . head . and . finally 

ber ganjc ©jfenfcbrer, (4) ber fdjaute fid) um unb rief: „£>ol)o! 

the . whole . chimney-sweeper . he . looked . himself . around . and . cried . ho 

Ho!" Die Heine 2Rarte(6) frcutc fid> ebenfads unb rief (u,ie, u) : 

ho | the . little . Mary . rejoiced . herself . likewise . and . cried 

„(5ffenfcbrer!(4) (Sffenfefjrer !(4)" Der (Sjjenfebrcr (4) batte aber 

chimney sweeper ♦ chimney-sweeper | the . chimney-sweeper . had . however 

nicbt lange 3dt, ( 6 ) ba oben 311 fi£en, barum Hetterte er toiebcr 

not , long , time . thereup . to . sit (sp.) . therefore . climbed . he . again 

bermtter. Die Gutter (3) gab (e, a, e) ibnt ein ©elbftucf, (2) unb 

down | the . mother . gave ♦ him . a . money-piece . aud 

als er fortging, fpracb tv * //&b Heine 9)iarie."(6) 99?aric(6) 

when . he . away- went (sp.) . spoke . he . live . well . little . Mary | Mary 

fprad) t „2eb toobi, guter (5ffenfebrer"(4) unb gab (e,a,e) i()m bie 

spoke . live . well . good , chimney-sweeper . and gave * him . the 

Jpcmb. ( 1 ) 

hand. 


4 


— 171 — 


Gender of the nouns in the “ Essen kehrer.” 


Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Neuter. 


tier GiffcnFcfjrcr. 
tier So*f (|il. Siijife). 
tier (S^ontficinfcflcr. 
her 


(bic) ^ttarie. 
btc tEfle. 

J>ie £od)itt. 
bif £iid)e. 
bie 3tube. 
bie <£cuere|Te. 
bit Sreppe. 
bie Jllutter. 
bit $anb. 
bit £eit. 


bag $au3. 
bag Wartedjen. 
bag £crj. 
bag $leib. 
bag SDlabdjeit. 


tier SRantt. 
her 2ag. 
tier §of. 
&er SBcfcit. 
tier Uo|if. 


(Sujhgeg). 
bag ©elbftiicf. 


(Give the English of each.) 


2. $urd)te 


fear . not(hing) 


1 @5ott(5) ift, wo bie @ontte(6) gluljt, 

2 ($5ott(5) ift, mo bao 23etlcben(4) bluf;t, 

8 3ft/ wo fencr $ogcI(3) fd&lagt, 

4 3 |t/ wo biefer 2Burm(5) fid) regt: 

6 3jt fern $rcunb,(4) fern 9)?enfd)(6 Qual. N.) bet btr, 

6 $urd)te ntcfyto! 3)etn (£5ott(5) ift liter. pinter. 


1 God . is . where . the . sun . glows 

2 God . is . where . the . violet . blooms 

3 is . where . that . bird . warbles 

4 is . where . that . worm . itself . stirs 

5 is . no . friend . no . man . with . thee 

6 fear . not(hiug) . thy . God . is . here 


Nouns , Gender , Masculine: Wtftt, her SStxjd, her SSSurnt, 

bet* fcet Sftetifd). 

Feminine: Pie &onne. 

Neuter: 2)a3 SSetlcfyen. 

Irr, verb: fcfcldgt— fdjfagctt, fdjlug, gcfdjlagnt a, u, a, to strike, to beat, to 
warble; (fc^ldgt is “ Second Change ” in d). 


3. <2ultan(2) mit bent ^ocb c.(l) 


Sultan . with . the . basket 


1 @ultan(2) war etn grower £unb,(2) aber er t^at 9itemanb exit 

2 £eib. Slttgujt unb ^arl burften auf t^m rettcit, (ei, t, t, double t 

3 after the i) unb wettn ba$ fletne 2)Mbd)ctt(4) jtd) in ben 2Bagen(4) 
fefcte, fo jog er jte. 


1 Sultan . was . a , large . dog . but . he . did (sp.) . nobody , a 

2 harm | Augustus . and . Charles . durst (B. C.) . upon . him . ride 

3 and . when . the . little . girl . herself, in . the , wagon 

4 set , so . drew . he , her 


6 Sr fdjlidj (ei, t, i) jtdj audj nid;t in bie 3lud)e,(6) unb ttjenn bic 

6 Gutter (3) einen $nod)en(4) l;attc, fo rief (u, it, u) fie: „0ul* 

7 tan, (2) 0ultan!"(2) unb roemt cr nun fyerbeigefprungen (i, a, u) 

8 fam, fo gab (e, a, c) fie if)m ben $nod)en. (4) Dafur fyolte bcr 

9 gute ©nltan(2) ber 2Wutter(3) and) $lctfd) unb odcrlei 0ad)c|u(6) 

10 bcim $Ieifd)ev(4) nnb bem ^aufmann. (pi. itaufleute.) 

11 Die 33 f iutter(3) rief (u, ie, n) ben 0ultan,(2) gab (e, a, e) bem 

12 £unb|c(2) etnen ^orb(l) in’b 2)iaul(5) nnb fdpicfte if)n jum 

13 $lctfd)er.(4) 3m ^orb|e(l) aber lag (ie, a, e) ein 3dtel,(4) 
u barauf ftanb gefcbrteben, (ei, te, ie) toab 0ultan(2) fyolen follte. 

15 Da fratjte bcr Jpunb(2) an ber D()ure, (6) bcr $leifd)er(4) lie§ 

16 (a, ie, a) ifyn herein, gab (e, a, c) if)m bab $leifd) unb etnen 

17 ^nod)en(4) fur feitt 2)1 aul, (5) unb fitted lief (au, ie, an) 0ul= 

18 tan (2) bamit fort. 

19 Da faf) (e, a, e) t'fm $acfan, ein groper ftJjttmrjer $unb,(2) 

20 unb rod) (ie, o, o) bab fd)5ne $lcifd) tm $orb|c.(l) „5Barte 

21 ctttmal, 0ultan,(2) id) rutll bid) ctruab fragen," fprad) (e, a, o) cr, 

22 bod) 0ultan(2) mcrfte feittett bbfen 0intt,(2) unb lief (au,ie, au) 

23 fd)nelt toeiter. Der $>acfan fct^te Winter brent, unb balb l;at cr ben 

24 0ultan(2) cingcfyolt, ber mit bem 5lorb|c(l) nid)t gut laufcn (au, 

25 ie, au) fonnte. 

5 lie . sneaked . himself . also ♦ not . in . the . kitchen . and . when . the 

6 mother . a . bone . had . so . cried . she . Sultan 

7 Sultan . and , when . he . then . jumping (in a run) 

8 came (sp.) . so , gave , she . him , the . bone | (for it) in turn . fetched . the 

9 good , Sultan . to the ♦ mother . also . meat ♦ and . various , things 

10 from ♦ the . butcher . and . the . (merchant) grocer 

11 the . mother . called . the . Sultan . gave . to the 

12 dog . a . basket . in the . mouth . and . sent . him . to the 

13 butcher | in . the . basket . however , lay . a . note 

14 thereon . stood (sp.) . what . Sultan . fetch . should (see “B. C.”) 

15 then ♦ scratched . the . dog . at . the . door . the . butcher . let 

16 him , in , gave . him . the . meat . and ♦ a 

17 bone . for . his . mouth . and . quickly 

18 ran . Sultan . therewith . off 

19 here . saw . him . Packan (Hold Fast) . a . large . black . dog 

20 and . smelled . the . fine . meat . in the . basket | wait 

21 once . Sultan . I . will . thee . something . ask . spoke . he 

22 yet . Sultan . perceived . his . bad . intention . and . ran 

23 quickly, on | the .Paclcan .set . after, in (gave chase) . and .soon . has.he.the 

24 Sultan . overtaken . who . with , the . basket . not , well . run 

25 could (B. C.) 

6 


173 


26 Sultan (2) fet^tc afar fcfynell ben $leifdjforb(l) $tn unb fa'§ 

27 (ci,t, i) ben $acfatt tucfatg in ben &alg.(l) £)tc anbern $unb|e(2) 

28 liefen (au, te, au) at(e farbet, unb fafyen (e, a, e) $u, boc^ feiner 

29 na()m ben ^orb.(l) £)a lief (au, te, au) ber $acfan fort mit 

30 0d)reten unb mit £>eufcn, bass Slut f(o§(ie,o,o) ibm oom £alfc(l) 

31 ^crab, bodt) @ultan(2) nal)m ben ^orb(l) unb bratfae i^n ber 

32 3)tuttcr*(3) £)ie 2)?utter(3) lobte il;tt, gab (e, a, e) ibm feinen 

33 $nod)en(4) unb fdt>idfte tbn in feme .!putte.(6) 

26 Sultan . set . however . quickly . the . meat-basket ♦ down . and , bit 

27 the . Packan . severely ♦ in . the . neck | the , other . dogs 

28 ran . all ♦ hither . and . looked . on * yet ♦ none 

29 took (sp.) . the . basket | then . ran . the . Packan . away . with 

80 crying . and ♦ with . howling . the . blood . flowed . him . from the . neck 

81 down . yet . Sultan . took (sp.).the. basket ♦ and . brought (B. C. sp.) . it , to the 
32 mother | the . mother . praised . him * gave . him . his 

83 bone , and . sent , him . in, iuto . his . hut 


Nouns of “ Sultan mit dem Korbe .” 

Gender, Masculine: £Wr ©ultan, bet* Slovb, bet* £>un6, (ber) 3luquft, 
(ber) Slarl, bet? SBaqcn, ber Stnocbcn, ber ftlctfcber, bet? 5bau f* 
mantt, ber 3cttel, ber Marfan, ber Jflcifcbforb, ber ^al$. 
Feminine : jDtc iUtdje, tie JHuttcr, fcie .Sadje, tie ®biire (®f>ttr), bie ^iitte. 

Neuter : £)a3 2etb, bag 9D?abc()en, ba$ 5(ctfc$, ba$ S0?aul, (baS) (bag) £eu- 

leit, bag Slut. (Give the English of each.) 

©eftmtd) tifccr „0itltau." 

dialogue on, about 

SSte fa'e§ (how was called) ber £unb? 2)er fjunb'btefj ©ultan. 

23ag (what) tfat (did) ber £unb fur bte Gutter? dx gittg (went) $um 

gletfcber. . 

5Bctg gab (gave) t'bm bte gutter in’g SD^auI? (mouth— as of animals—) 

ginen $orb (basket). 

2Ben (who?) fab (saw) ©ultan? 

ffier obet; wag war $acfan? (Etn grower (large), fcbwarjer (black) £unb. 
2Bag that $acfan? dx fagter warte (wait) ©ultan, td> will btcb etwag 

(something) fragen (ask). 

2Bag fagte (said) ©ultan? dx fagte md)tg (nothing), fonbern (but) lief 

fort, (ran r^way, on) 

2Bag that $acfan? dx lief binterbrein (after him). 

2Bag that ©ultan? Sr fefcte (put) ben £orb bin (down) unb bifl (bit) 

ben ^aefan tn ben £alg (neck). 

2Ber fab $u (looked on)? £)t'e anbern £unbe. 

7 


174 


Cabmen (took) fte (they) bag gletfcfy? 9?etn (no) ftc ttabmen eg ttt$t (not). 
2Bag tl)at ©ultan mtt bem gletfdje? Qr bracbte (brought) eg ber gutter. 
Sag tl;at bte Gutter? ©te flab tfjm [etnen ^nocbett (bone). 

Hub tvag tfyat bie Gutter wetter (else)? ©te fcbtcfte (sent) tljtt (him) tit 

fetne #utte (hut). 

Words. Give in English: 

$orb, #utte, gletfcber, ^nocbett, SWattl, betfien, $Ietfcb, #aTg, Hwitlett, 
brarftte, Gutter, ©cbretett, lief, flefcbrtebett, 3*ttel, Iaufen, fragen, nabm. 

Render into German the following Nouns, first without the Def. Art,, then 
with it: 

Basket, bone, wagon, neck, note, butcher, dog-all masc.; mother, 
hut, door, kitchen -fem.; mouth (of animals), meat, girl, harm, 
blood -neuter. 

Decline each of these Nouns, in the Singular, first without the Def. Art., 
then with it. 


4- &ct fclinfce ^diti^.(2) 

the blind king 

In this and the following piece, the gender of the nouns is marked by the 
mode of printing the nouns in the text. Masc. nouns are printed in heavy 
type, for instance: ^oittfl (king) meaning as gender fccr ifiinig, maser, fem. 
nouns are spaced, for instance: £anb (hand) meaning, as gender, bte $anb, 
fem . ; neuter nouns are printed with the initial letter in English type, for 
instance: Mecr (sea) 'meaning, as gender, bag SKeer, neuter . 

The notation of the irreg. verbs is here and in the next piece, at the end 
of the piece. 

The numbers added to the nouns, refer to the plural, as in the other pieces. 


The words of the translation cover singly the words of the text. Where they 
do not, we have used dots. 


u 

fte^t ber norb’f^en ^ctfjtcr(4) ©djaar(6) — what stands (sp.) the north- 
ern . brave’s, fighters’ . host, 

# 0 $ auf beS Meereg(2) 93orb?(2) — high on the sea’s border 

2Ba$ will in fetnent grauen Haar(2) — what will (B. C.) in his gray hair 

3Der blinbe $iiitig(2) bort? — the blind king there 

@r ruft, in bittern $nrntc, — he cries in bitter grief 

2luf feinen ©tab(l) gelctynt, — on his staff leaned (leaning) 

£>a{j itbernt Meere$arnt|e(2) — that over the sea-arm (bay) 

Ei(anb(2) wiebertbnt: — the island resounds 
8 


— 175 — 

2 * 

„©ie6, 9liiu6cr(2) auS bent $cl£verlie$(2) — give robber out of the rock- 

dungeon 

£)te Softer (3) mtr juriicf! — the daughter . to me . back. 

3br $arfensptel(2) i()r Lteb(5) fo fiif) — her harp-play her song so sweet 

2Bar nteineS Alters Grliitf — was my old age’s delight 

23om Snnj auf gritnem Strattb|e(2) — from the dance on green shore 

£>aft bu fie toeggeraubt; — hast thou her away-robbed 

3Mr ifi eS erotg ©djanbe; — to thee is it forever disgrace 

Sftir beugt’S bas graue Haupt." — to me . it bends . the gray head 

3 . 

£)a trttt auS fciner illuft(l) I)eroor— then (there) steps out of his . rocky 

cleft . forward 

£)er fRou6cr,(4) grofj unb tvilb, — the robber (outlaw) huge and uncouth 

Sr fdjnnngt fein §uncitsd)roert(5) empor — he brandishes his . giant sword . up 

Unb fd)lcigt an feinen <St()ilb;(2) — and strikes to his shield 

,/Du baft fa ttiele JEBtidjf cr(4) - thou hast indeed many . watchers, guards 

SBarum benn litten’S bte? — why then . suffered (permitted) it . they 

£)ir bient fo mandfer ^ctf)tcr,(4) — to thee . serves so many (a) fighter 

Unb feiner fdmpft um fie? — and none fights for her 

4 . 

9todj ftcb’n bte $ccljicr(4) afie jtumrn; — yet stand (sp ) the braves all silent 
SEritt feiner au$ ben flleilj|n?— steps none . out of . the ranks • 

(Der felinbe $imtg(2) fet)rt fid) mtt the blind king turns himself around 

SBin id) benn ganj aflein?— am I then entirely alone 

£)a fafjt beS S>atcr|§(3) 9led)te — then sizes the father’s right 

<3ein junger ©of)ii(l) fo warm: — his young son so warm 

„2>ergonn’ nttr’S ba§ id) fec^te ! — permit (grant) . to me it . that I fight 

SBotyl fttfl* id) ^raft(l) itn 9lrm."( 2 )— wel1 ( in truth) feel I strength * in 

the ♦ arm. 

5 . 

„D (Soljlt/l) her $ctttb(2) ijl riefenftarf,— 0 son the foe is giant-strong 
3bnt ^ielt nod) feiner <$tttttb; — to him . held (made) yet none . a stand 
Unb bod), in bir ift ebleS Marf,— and yet in thee is noble marrow (strength) 
3d) fiiljl'S am $rutf ber £ a nb (1)— I. feel it . from the . pressure . of the . hand 
9timm pier hie alte $ I i n g e,(6) - take here the old blade 
@ie ift her Sfalbc|tt(6) H$rci§;(2)— she (it) is the minstrel’s (object of) praise 
Unb fdflft bu, fo oerfcplinge — and fallest thou then . may devour (engulf) 

JDie ghtt()(6) micp armen ©m§!"( 2 )— the flood (sea) me poor . old man 

9 


176 


6 * 

Unb $ordj, eg fdjaumet unb eg raufd&t — and hark it foams and it goes 

“rustling" 

Der 9iacfjcit(4) uber’g Meer(2) — the boat . over the . sea 

Der blitibe $ontg(2) {tebt unb laufcbt,— the blind king stands (sp.) and listens 

Unb Slfleg fcbmeigt umber, — and all is (are) silent around 

23ig bruben fid) erboben — until yonder (over there) itself . has raised (risen) 

Der Sdnlb’(2) unb Scf>n>ertjer(5) Sdjtttl — of tbe shields and swords report 

Unb $atnpfgefd)rei unb Toben — and combat-outcry (cries) and uproar 

Unb bumpfer SBicbcrljttU.(2) — and hollow echo 

7* 

Da ruft ber @rci§,(2) fo freubig bang’ : — then exclaimes the . old man . so 

joyously alarmed 

„@agt an, mag ifjr erfcbaut!— say on what you see 

•JJlein Sd)mert,(5) i<b tenn’g am guten ^Iaitg%(l) — my sword I. know (B. C. ) 

it . by the . good ring 

Sg gab fo fcbarfen Cant !"(2) — it gave (sent forth) so sharp sound 

Der tHtiubcr(4) if! gefaUen, — the robber is fallen 

Sr t)at ben blut’gen — he has the bloody reward 

£ctl bir, bu £>clb(6) sor 2Wen,— hail . to thee . thou hero before all 

Du ftarfer $imig§fo;{jtt ! (1) — thou strong . king’s son 

8 * 

Unb toieber mtrb eg flitt umber. — and again becomes it still around 
Der $bntg(2) flebt unb laufebt: — the king stands (sp ) and listens 
,.5Bag bor’ teb tommen uber’g Meer?(2) — what hear I come (coming) . over 

the sea 

Sg rubert unb eg raufd)t.“— it “oars” and it rustles 
©ie lommen angefabren,— they come (coming) over 

Dein ©oljtt(l) mit Sd>roert(5) unb <Sfl)iIb,(2) — thy son with sword and shield 
3n fonnenbeOen Haar|en(2) — in (with) sun-bright hair 
Dein Tod)terlein ©unilb. — thy little daughter Gunild. 

9. 

„2BiH!ommen !" ruft bom bob en ©tcitt(2) welcome cries from the lofty 

(stone) shore (posture) 

Der Hinbe ©rci§(2) binab — the blind . old man . down 

„9?un toirb mein 5Utcr roonnig fein — now will my . old age . cheerful (glorious) be 

Unb ebrenoott mein Grab(5) — and honored my grave 

Du legjt mir, ©oljtt(l) jur ®eite(6) — thou layest.to me . o son . to the. side 
Dag Sd)toert(5) non gutem $lang,(l) — the sword of good .ring 
©unilbe, bu SSefreite, — Gunild thou . rescued (freed) one 
©ingft mir ben Grabgcfang."(l)— singst me the . burial song (ttblantr.) 


177 


The irregular verbs of the piece, a) those other than “sp.” (special) or B. C., 

Both Changes. 

Strophes : 1) ruft — rufen, riff, gerufcn (u, it, u), to call, cry ; 2) gicb — geben, 
gab, gegebtn (e, a, c), to give; gieb is “second change.” See Text of Grammar, 
Diagrams. 3) tritt — trctcn,4rat, getrctcrt, (e, a, t), to tread, step; tritt is “second 
change ;” frfnuingt — fc&toingen, fdwang, getfftungen (i, a, u), to swing ; fcbtagt — 
fcblagen, feeing, geftylaccn (a, u, a), to strike, to beat; febiagt is “second change; 
Httcn — leiben, litt, gelittcn, ei, i, i, to suffer ; 4) f ccbte — feebten, foc$t, gefoefcten (e, o, o ), 
to fight. 5) I)iclt - fwlten, gefalten, (a, it, a), to hold ; nimm — nefjmen, na$m, 
genommen, e, a, o, to take ; fdllft — fallen, ftel, gefattert, a, ie, a, to hill ; yerfdriinge 
— mjcfhinaen, terfc&lang, mfcfclungen, i, a, «, to devour; 6) fdnuctgt — fc&toeigen, 
f(|t»ieg, gcfdhricgcn, ei, it, it, to be silent ; erf) obcil — cvfjebcn, ertjob, evijoben, c, o, o, to 
raise or to rise up; 7) ruft — see above; gab — see above; gcfaUcit — see 
above; 8) f omtttcn — fommen, fant, geFommeh, o, a, c, to come; ungefaltrcn — 
anfatjrcn, anfitbr, angefaljren, a, u, a, to drive up, near ; 9) ruft — see above ; fingt 
fingen, fang, gefungen, t, a «, to sing. 

b) Verb specially irreg : Strophe 1) fteljt— flefjen, ftanb, geflauben, to stand; c) Verb 
of “both changes,” Strophe 7) fcttit (fenne) — fennen, fannte, gefamtt, to know, be 
acquainted with. 

5* RdtljfeL (4) 

riddle 

1 3(uf eincr gro§en 20ctbc(6) gefyen 

2 23iel taufenb Scbafc(2) ftlbcnretj), 

8 SSie mv fte f)eutc toanbeln fef)en, 

4 ®a() fte ber aUeral.tftc SkciS.(2) 

6 ®ie altern nie mtb trinfen Lcbcit 

6 Stub etnem unerfcf)bpften S3ont ;(2) 

7 Sin §irt(6) ift ifyiten jugegeben 

8 -Dftt fd)bn gebog’ncm Silbcrf)orn.(5) 

9 Sr treibt fte cuts golb’nen T|)orjen,(6) 

10 Sr liber^afylt fte jebc 3^ a cf> t,(l) 

11 Unb bat ber Lammcr(5 Santm) fetnb oerlorcn, 

12 ®o oft cr aucb ben 2Bcg(2) iooUbrac^t^ 

1 upon . a . large . pasture . go (sp.) 

2 many . thousand . sheep . silver-white 

3 as . we . them . to-day . wander . see 

4 saw . them . the . very oldest . old man 

5 they . grow old . . never . and . drink . life 

6 out of . an . unexhausted . well (spring) 

7 a . shepherd . is . to them . given . to 

8 with . finely . bent . silver horn 

9 he . drives . them . out . at (from) . golden . gates 

10 he . counts-over . them . every . night 

11 and . has . of the lambs . none . lost 

12 so . ofteu . he . even . the . way (journey) . has performed 


178 


13 Sin treuer §un&(2) fjilft fie tbm Iciten, 

14 (Sin mimt’rer 2Stbbcr(4) gebt scran* 

15 £)te .freer be, (6) fannft bu mir fte bcuten? 

16 Unb aucb ben §irtcn(6) seig’«mir an! filler. 

13 a . faithful . dog . helps . them . to him . to guide 

14 a . cheerful . ram . goes (sp.) . ahead 

15 the . flock . canst (B. C.) . thou . to . me . it . indicate 

16 and . also . the . shepherd . show . me . on (indicate) 


The irregular Verbs, a ) those other than “special,” or of “both changes.” 
Strophes, 1. feftcrt, fflf), geiefjett, to see; sec. change in te; 2. tt'ittBctt — trinfett, 
tranf, gctrunfen, i, a, u, to drink; jugcgcbctt, see gebett, preceding piece; here: 
jugebeit, jugab, jugegebtit, to add, give to, ordain ; gcbog’ltcm for gebogeitem, Past., 
Part, declined, of : btegen, bog, gebogett, te, o, o, to bend. 3) trcibt — tretben, trieb, 
gelrtebeit, et, te, te, to drive ; pcrlorctt — oerlterett, oerlor, serlcrctt, te, o, o, to lose. 
4) bilft — belfett, half, gefyolfen, e, a, o, to help ; tyilft is “second change.” 

b. Verb “specially” irreg : Strophe 1. gcbeit — gcfjctt, gtttg, gegaitgett, to go. 

c. Verb having “both changes:” ooEbrtttgen, soHbrac^te, sollbradjt, t® do, perform, 
accomplish. 


6. £>tc <5td)e(6) unb Me 3Scibc*(6)* 

the oak and the willow 

I 9?acb einer fef)r fh'irmifcben 9?acbt(l) ging etn 23ater(3) mit fei* 

2 nem 0obn|e(l) auf bas fvelb, nrn ju feben, (e, a, e) rocldjen ©djaben 

3 ber ©turm(l) seritrfacbt babe, ©ieb (c, a, e) bocb, rief(u, te, it) 

4 ber ^nabe,(6) ba liegt (ie, a, e) bie grojje, ftarfe (Sic^e(6) auf bent 

5 23oben fjingeftreeft, mdbrenb bie fd)toarf)e 2Scibc(6) am 23acfye(l) 

6 nod) aufredjt baftebt* $cb f>atte geglaubt, ber ©turmtoinb(2) tciirbe 

7 leidjter bie 2Beibe,(6) ale bie (Eicbe(6) niebergeriffen (ei,i,i) baben* 
8 SJZeitt 0obn,(l) fagte ber 23ater,(3) bie ftolje (£icf)e,(6) bie ft# 

9 niebt biegett (ie, o, o) fann, mufjte bred)cn; (e, a, o) aflein bie 

10 gefd>meibige2Beibe(6) bat bem ©turmnnnb|e(2) natbgegeben (e, a, e) 

11 unb ift baber serfebont geblieben, (ei, ie, ie) 

1 after . a . very . stormy . night . went (sp.) . a . father . with . his 

2 son . upon . the . field . in order . to . see . what . damage 

3 the . storm . occasioned . had | see . yet . cried 

4 the . boy . there . lies . the . large . strong . oaktree . on 

5 the . ground . stretched out . whilst . the . weak . willow . at . the . brook 

6 still .upright . there . stands (sp.). | I . should . have.believed.the.storm-wind 

7 would . easier . the . willow . than . the . oak . down-torn . have 

8 my . son . said . the . father . the . proud . oak . which . itself 

9 not . bend . can (B. C.) . must (B. C.) . break . yet . the 
10 pliant . willow . has . to the . storm-wind . yielded 

II and . is (has) . therefore . unharmed . remained 

* Gender of Nouns of pieces 6 to 10, see below. 


179 


7* Dab jjcrfrrudK'iic ^gmfetfen*(4) 

the broken lioof-iron (horse-shoe) 

I Gttn Sauer (6) ging mit fcincm 0ofm|e,(l) bcm fleinen 

2 tit bte 0tabt*(l) 0ie|, (e, a, c) fagte er untermegb ju il)m, ba 

3 liegt (ie, a, e) etit 0tutf(2) son etnent £ufcifcn(4) an ber @rbe,(6) 

4 l)cbe (e, o, o) eb auf unb ftccfe cb itt bte £afcbe*(6) Sab, berfefcte 
6 Df)omab, tft md)t ber 2)?ul;c(6) mertl), b aft man ftd) bafur 

6 bucft* Dev Satev(3) ermiberte ntd)tb, italmt bab @ifen(4) unb 

7 ftccftc eb tit bie 3^afd>e*(6) 3m nad)ftcn Dorfc(5) berfaufte er eb 

8 bcm 0cbmtb|e(2) fur bret &cllcr(4) unb faufte bafur $trfdje|n*(6) 

9 #terauf fcfjten ftc t^rett 2Beg(2) fort* Die 0onne(6) mar 

10 brennettb l)et§* SJian fal)(e, a, c) mett unb breit mcber £aub,(5) 

11 itocb S3alb,(5) nod) Qucllc(6)* £l)omab oergtng sor Durft unb 

12 fonnte fetitem Satcr(3) nur mit 9ftuf)e(6) folgen* Da Ite§.(a,te,a) 

13 btefer, mte burd) 3 u f^K,(l) eine Jltrfd)e(6) fallen* (a, te, a) 
u &l)omab l)ob fte fo gterig auf, alb mare eb ©olb, unb ftecfte fie 
15 fd)ttell in ben SSftunb* 

16 (Sttttge 0d?rttte(5) metier lte§ (a, te, a) ber Sater(3) eine 

17 jmette 3ltrfd)c(6) fallen, meld)e Dl)omab mit bcrfelbett ©ierigfeit 

18 ergriff (ei, t, t), Dteb bauerte fort, bib er fie alle aufgel;obett 

19 I)atte* 

20 2llb er bie let^te bcrjc^rt I)atte, manbte ber Sater(3) ftd) $u 

1 a . peasant . went (sp.) . with . his . son . the . little . Thomas 

2 into . the . town | see . said . he . on the way . to . him . there 

3 lies . a . piece . of . a . horse-shoe . on . the . earth 

4 pick . it . up . and . put . it . in . the . pocket | “bah” . replied 

5 Thomas . that . is . not . of the . trouble . worth . that . one . himself, for it 

6 stoops | the . father . replied . nothing . took (sp.) . the . iron . and 

7 put . it . in . his . pocket | in . the . next . village . sold . he . it 

8 to the . smith . for . three . pennies . and . bought . for it . cherries 

9 thereupon . set . they . their . way . forth (sp.) | the . sun . was 

10 burning . hot | one . saw . “wide,” far and “broad” . neither . house 

II nor . wood . nor . sirring | Thomas . perished (sp.) . of . thirst . and 

12 could (B. C.) . his . father . only . with . difficulty, trouble . follow | then. let 

13 this . as . by, through . chance . a . cherry . fall (Impf. onel.) 

14 Thomas . picked . it . so . eagerly . up . as . were . it . gold . and . put . it 

15 quickly . in . the . mouth. 

16 a few. steps . farther . let . the . father . a 

17 second . cherry . fall (Impf. one 1.) . which . Thomas . with . the.same.avidity 

18 seized upon (Inf. onef.) | this. continued . forth, until. he. them. all. up-picked 

19 had. 

20 when. he. the.last.f consumed) eaten. had. turned(B.C.).the.father.himself.to 

13 


180 


21 ijjm I;tn unb fagtet ©ief), (e, a, c) menn bu bid) ein einjigeS Sftal 

22 i^atteft burfen moUcn, urn bas £ntfcifen(4) auf$ui)cben, fo murbeft 

23 bu nid)t nbt^ig gel;abt fyaben, cS fyunbcrtmal fur btc $trfd)e|n(6) 

24 ju t^um 

21 him . there . and . said . see . if . thou . thyself . a . single . time 

22 hadst.stoop.be (been) willing (B.C.) . in order, the . horse-shoe, up-to-pick. so 

23 wouldst. thou . not . need . had . have . it . hundred-times . for . the . cherries 

24 to . do 


8 # ®ameitfo¥tt«(5) 

the seed-grain 

1 20er nterft’S am @amenfcrn(5) fo Hein 

2 Da§ b’rtn ein ?ebcn fonnte fciit? 

3 $aum l;ab’ id)’S in bas 2anb(5) gcftccft, 

4 Da ift and) feiite ^raft(l) erroccft, 

6 Da bring! (t, a, u) cS au$ ber Grbe(6) oor, 

6 Da ftcigt (ci, te, ie) cS in bic £uft(l) cmpor, 

7 Da treibt’s (ei, ie, ie) unb toad) ft (a, u, a) unb grunt unb bluljt; 

8 Da lobt ben 0d)5pfer, toer es ficf)t.(e, a, e) 

1 who . perceives . it . in . the seed-grain . so . small 

2 that . therein . a . life . could (B. C.) . be 

3 scarcely . have . I it . in . the . ground . put 

4 there . is (then) also . its . power . awakened 

5 there . presses . it . out . the . earth . forward 

6 there . rises . it . into . the . air . up 

7 there . pushes it . and . grows . and . buds . and . blossoms 

8 there . praises . the . Creator . who (whoever) . it . sees (whoever sees it) 


9* ^tdtt)fcl.(l) 

riddle 

(Day and Night.) 

£ng unb 9?ad()t 

1 3d) tocij) cin $aar(2) (tub 9)?ann(5) unb 2Ccib,(5) bic fyabctt 

2 bcibe cincn §eib;(5) finb. alter aid bic 9)?ann|er(5 9)fann) unb 

3 $rau|en,(6) bic je bic 0onne(6) mod)t befefyauen* Das 2Bcib(5) 

4 ift fd)ioar$, ber 2)?ann(5) ift tocif}; fic oottcr 0d)IafS, er oofler 

1 I . know (sp.) . a . pair . (they) are . man (husband) . and . wife . they . have 

2 both . one . body . (they) are . older . than . the . men . and 

8 women . whom . ever . the . sun . might, would, did (B. C.) . behold | the . woman 
4 is . black . the . man . is . white . she . full of . sleep . he . full of 
14 


— 181 — 

5 D’rum fomten fte jtcfy nicfyt berglet^en; fommt (o, a, o) 

6 tim, fo mu 9 bad anbre meicfjen (ei, t, i)„ 2We$r J>cUe 2luge|n(6) 

7 tyat bte $rau,(6) al$ in bent £of(l) ber ftoije $fau (6). 23tcl 

8 tanfenb 2icf)t|er(5) man f)ier ftnbet, (t, a, u) btd $atfcl|n(6) 

9 merben angegunbet; bod) ftel)t (e, ie, c) fie minber aid ber 2Kann,(5) 

10 ber nur Stn 2Iugc(6) brauefyen famu 

5 industry | therefore. can(B.C.). they. themselves. not. agree. (if) comes (Imp’f. lm) 

6 one . so . must . the . other . yield | more . brigt . eyes 

7 has . the . woman . than . in . the . court yard . the . proud . peacock | many 

8 thousand . lights . one . here . finds . many . torches 

9 are . lit . yet . sees . she . less . than . the . man 
10 who . only . one . eye . use . can (B. C.) 


10, iT'ie 3al;>rcd$citciu(6) 

the years-times (seasons) 

1 *Dcr ^frufjltng iji bte 3eit(6) ber @aat,(6) 

2 Dcr Summer reift bie solicit 3let)re|n,(6) 

3 £)er £erbft bring! milbe $rud)te (1 f^ruefyt) mil, 
4 2)er ©inter fommt, (o, a, o) fie $u »er$et)ren. 

1 the . spring . is . the . time . of the . seed 

2 the . summer . ripens . the . full . ears 

3 the . fall . brings (B. C.) . mild . fruits . with (it) 

4 the . winter . comes (Imp’f. kam) . them . to . consume 


GENDER OF NOUNS, OF PIECES 6 TO 10. 

6. m. father, son, damage, storm, hoy, ground, brook, “ stormwind j” /. oak, 
willow, night ; n. field. 

7. m. peasant, son, Thomas, smith, penny, way, wood, thirst, chance, mouth, 
step; /. town, earth, pocket, trouble, cherry, sun, spring, difficulty, avidity; 
n. horse-shoe, piece, iron, village, house, gold, “times.” 

8. m. creator; /. power, earth, air; n. seed-grain, life, ground (“land.”) 

9. m. man, body, sleep, industry, court-yard, peacock ; /. woman, sun, torch ; 
n. riddle, pair, wife, eye, light. 

10. m. spring, summer, fall (autumn), winter ; /. season, time, seed, ear (of 
grain), fruit ; n. — . 

Give the German of the above nouns, adding in each case the Def. Art., 
m. ter, /♦ He, n. 



























































. 







































•• 






. 







• 








* 















































III. 

CHILD’S READER 
DICTIONARY. 

"Ma." 

The Child <c at Sea,” on the “ Little Drop.” 

(See “ Little Drop.”) 


CO 


SS : DICTIONARY. 



185 — 


Cl. — JFl_ _bJ _A_ 2D .hJ 3FI— 


1. $te jltitbet mib feet; SJtonb* 

Sfte (Sonne mar untergegangen uitb eS moltte fdjott 
bunfet merben, aber bie .fttuber marett nod) nid)t a He 
3 U -paufe bei ibrer Gutter. 

3 mei .ftinbev marett attf bent ffetbe, uitb batten 
beint @btete oergeffen, bag ntan bes StbenbS, ebe es 
bunfet mirb, nad) pattfc fomnten mug. 

25a marb ben ft'inbern battgc, ttnb fte meinten, benn 
fte mugten ben SfBeg nict>t ju fittben. Stuf einntal 
mttrbe es belt binter ben SMumen, uttb fte fabeit cut 
runbes Cicbt berauffteigett, baS mar ber fftfottb. Sits 
er tie .ftinber erbtidte, fagte er: „@uten Stbenb, .ft in- 
berdjen, mas rnaebt ibr nocb fo float auf bent Setbe?" 

2)ie .ftinber maren anfangS crfdjrocfett, ats fte aber 
fabeit, bag ber 3)1 onb freunbltd) tadjette, fagteit fte 
ein •pet '3 unb foradfen: „Sld), mir babeit unsoer* 
fioatet, unb nun ftnben mir ben SB eg nidtt ntebr ju 
ttnferer Gutter, meit eS -Jtadft iff." Unb fte meinten 
fo taut, bag es ben gitten Sftonb ritbrfe. 

£>a forad) er au tbitcn: „3Benn ibr bas paus mobt 
fennt, mo cure 3)1 utter mobnt, fo mitt id) ettd) ein 
menig leud)ten, bag ibr ben SBeg finbet." Uitb ber 
SDlonb teudftete fo bette, ats menu es micber £ag ge* 
morbett mare; bie ftiitber fagteit fSJfutb, unb eilten 
fo oiet fte fonnten, ttnb fanbett glitrflid) ben SBeg. 

Sits fte oor ber paustbur ftanben, fagteit fte: 
„<Sd)biten £)anf, lieber SJfoub, bag bit tuts geteudjtct 
baft!" 6 r antmortete: ,,@S iff gertt gcfdfcben. Slber 
eitt nun, bag ibr 3 it ettrer SJtutter fomrnt, benn fte 
bat fid) fdjott Diet urn eud) gebngftigt. 


W. (Turtmann. 


— . 186 


2 . $!bcitknil)\ 

tPcnn am 2fbenb Sftann unb Ivinb, 

Tltyk? unb Pogel mubc ftnb, 

(Sort, ber *5cw, bat’s fd)on gefel;en, 
bci'^t bie ©onne unterget>en, 

bie ftiUe Hac^t f^rnieber, 
fpdcbt $u i\)vx //Hun bctfe bu 

ailc meine l\inber $u, 

bring’ $ur Jvub bie tnubcn (Blieber." 

©ieb, ba Fommt bie liebe XXafyt, 
wieget uns in ©cf)laf gan$ facf)t$ 
nur bcr iicbe Pater u?acf)k. tn. §tx>. 

3. Sill <$ttlettfpicgel« 

£ill (Sutenfpiegel $og einmal 
SD^it Mbern iiber 33erg unb £ljaL 
©o eft al8 fte $u einem 23erge famen, 
d5ing 5Litt an feinem SBanberftob 
S)en S3erg gan$ fadjt unb gan$ betriibt binab; 

Mein menn fie berganrodrtS fltegen, 

2Bar (Sulenfpiegel ooK £>ergniigen. ' 

,,2Barum," ftng Qciner an, „gebfl bu bergan fo frolj, 
23ergunter fo betriibt?" „3d) bin," fpra^ „nun fo. 
SBenn idj ben 23erg blunter gelje, 

©o bent’ idj ^ftatr fd)on an bie §bbe, 

S)ie fotgen mirb, unb ba oergebt mix benn ber ©<ber$; 
Mein toenn icb berganmavtS gef)e, 

©o bent’ id) an ba§ £ljal, ba§ fotgt, unb faff ein §er$." 

SBiflft bu bid) in bent ©liid nid)t auSgelaffen freu’n, 

3m Ungliid nid)t unmdfig frdnfen, 

©o lent’ fo Hug mie (gulenfpiegel fein, 

3m Ungliid gem an’3 (Mid, im ©lucf an’S Ungliid benten. 


187 


4. 35cr SOimttt mit fcer ©dgc. 

$8o r ber Xfyiixt ftefyt eiit Warn, ba§ ift eirt gar armer 
SDiann. (Sr arbeitet unb fd;mi£t, ba§ ber ©djjtoeif; il;m 
toon ber ©tint rinnt. (Sr l;at in feiner §anb ein SDing, 
ba§ ift Mi |jol$ nnb (Sifen. & ift eine ©age. 

2)ie ©age l;at fd;arfe ,3c$ne, unb famt ba3 §arte, fefte 
§olg jerf<$neiben, ©ie Stofce tyacft ber $iann mit einem 
fc^arfen, fcfytoeren 25eile, nub fpaltet fie in fleine ©tiicfe. 

S)ie Gutter f tecft fie in ben Dfeit, barnit ba$ $inb nid;t 
friert, menu e§ im SBinter fait ift, unb fod;t and; ba$ 
©iippd;en bamit 

®er 2Rann §at and; ein ®inb, ba§ ift ein arme§ Sinb, 
unb l;at nid;t ®leib nod; 23rob. SDrurn fdgt ber SJtann 
ben gangen Stag unb l;adt nnb fd;afft, bamit ba§ Stub 
nidjjt fymtgert unb nid)t friert 

©efy ; , lieBe§ ®inb, l;innnter in ben |)of, unb Bringe bem 
Hftanne eine toarrne ©tt^^e. Sruuf and; feiit $inb mit 
^erauf, mir moden tym ein |)embd;en unb ein -Saddjen 
fcfjcnfen, nnb fd;one$ ©pielgeug. §, e^mas. 


5. ££inbc$ SSunfd)* 

Q roar’ tcf) hod) etn TTogeCem, 

TUte Cuflio tnoarr tcf) ffiegen, 

Hub mit bem fjjttjen Sd)nuGeCcin 
Die rotten DCirfdjen ftrtegen. 

Dod) meiC id) nun (kin TTogCein Gin 
So mu(j id) tmmer faufen, 
llnb mu G mir Oei ber ftramertn 
<fiir etneu Dreier feaufen. 


6. £Ue ^Mrtenftdtc* 

Sin ^onig l;atte etnen ©djafcmcifter, ber (td) fcom $irtem 
jtaBe gu biefem rouBttgett 5tmte emporgefdjwungen Bate. £>er 
©cBa^meijter trntrbe aBer Bet bem $onige fcerflagt, bap er ben 


188 


®dja§ BerauSe unb bie geraubteit dtoitbarfeiten tit eittem ©e* 
molbe oerberge, ba3 mit einer eifernen £f)ur oerfefyeit fet* 

©er $onig befudjte ben ®dja|meijter, befal) feinen $alaft, 
unb al3 er an bie eiferne £j)itr fam, befall er, fie ju cffneiu 
2113 ber $bnig Ijineintrat, mar er gan$ erfiaunt* (£r fab) nidjtS 
al3 bie toter 2Bdnbe, einen Idnbltd>en ©ifdf) unb einen ®trob* 
feffeL 2luf bem ©ifcfye lag eine §irtenflbte, etn $irtenftab unb 
etne £irtentafd)e. 

©er ®($agmeijier aber fpradj : Sit meiner S^S^ tyutete idj 
bte ©c^afe* ©u, o ^bitig, gogft midj an beinen §of* §ier in 
biefent ©emolbe bradjte id!) feit ber 3 e d tdglidj etne ®tunbe $u, 
erinnerte mid) mit greuben meine3 oorigeit Stanbeg, unb mieber* 
l)olte bie -Cieber, bie id(j el)emal3 junt J£obe be§ ®djbpfer3 fang, 
al3 id(j fricblid) nteine §eerbe ljutete* 2ld), lajj ntid) mieber $\x* 
ritcffeljren auf nteine odterlidjen gluren, mo idj gliidlicfyer mar, 
alS an beinern fmfe! 

©er dtonig mar feljr erjurnt itber biejenigeit, meld)e ben eblen 
SDiann oerleumbet fatten ; er untarmte it;n unb bat ttyn, bei ijjrn 
ju bleibeiu 

7„ 31 e f p p* 

3lefop guttf cinft itad) cittern 0tdbtd)cit b*n; 

Gin SSaitbrer fouunt unb grufjct tbit 

Unb fratjt: tPie lait<ie, ^freuitb, bab’ id) $u flcbcit 

23i$ ju bent ,©rtc bin, bett totr hurt Poe tine fcb?n? 

Gcb! fprtcbt s 2iefop. — Uitb cr: bad tpcip id) tpobl, 

JT'ap, tpcnit id) toettcr Fommeit fo.i, 

3M) flcbctt mu?); all cut bn full ft tttir fatten, 

^it tPie Piet (Stunben? „3tuit, fo ^cb’!" 

^cb febe \vol)t, 

Sruiitmt bier ber grentbe, btefer &crl ift toll; 

3d) toerbe uid)t£ Putt ibnt erfragett, 

Uitb brebt ftd> tint unb gebt. 4£>e, ruft Slefop! ettt 3Qort! 
StPct <2fnnbeit briitgcit bid) an ben befttntntteit iOrt. 

©cr 38attbrcr bleibt, betrtfffcn, fteben. 

Gt, rnft cr, unb tPie tocifjt bu’$ nun? — 

Uitb tPie, Perfect 2lcfop, fount id) ben 3fu$fprud) tb un, 
3$coor id) betnen Gang gefebett? 


189 


8 , £a« 3 ltcfcd)eiu 

3ftdnnd)en, 3)iannd)en, geig' tnir y mat, 

$arld)en mill 'mat tauten, 

©at ein rotfjeg 9iodd)en an, 

Stunb fierunt mit <yranfen! 

JUnberleben in |3ilbcrn. 


9* £>ic Slngcit* 

Stnet 2lugcrt §ab' id), flar unb Jell, 

SDie brelj'n fid) nadj alien ©eiten fdjnett, 

SDie felj'n alle 33Ktmd&en, 23aum unb ©traud; 

Unb ben l)ofyen, blauen ©unmet and). 

SDie fefcte ber liebe ©ott tnir ein, 

Unb mag id) fann fe§en, ift alleg fein. w. $ctj. 


10 * ©or$c» 

©djtiejs bie Satire, fdjliejs bag SDIjor, 

£ege ©djloft unb ERiegel cor. 

©aft bu alleg roofjl gemadit, 

©dflafft bu ficEjer in ber 9iad)t; 

Siegft in filler, fanfter 9tulj, 

©otteg 2lllmad)t bed’t bid) j$u. /. fci^mas?. 


11. Itefcer alien ©ipfelm 

Ueber alien ©ipfeln 
3ft Sftufj, 

3n alien 3Sipfeln 
©piireft bu 
$aunt einen ©audj; 

SDie SBoglein fdjraeigen irn SSalbe. 

SBartenur, balbe 

9htf)eft bu audj. ©ottljc. 

12. 2lnefbote: ©liter i>ber &ct 2lnbcre* 

3ur Belt ©etnrtcf)g beg SSt'erten, $5ntgg son gvanfretd), rttt etntnal etn 
S3duerlein son fetnem 2)orfe nacb ^arte, mefn tsett son ter Start 


190 


begegnete er etnern better. Sg war ter ^ontg. ©etn ©efolge 

war abftcbtlicb tn etntger Sntfernung geblteben. r/ 3Bot>er beg 23egg, mein 
greunb? £abt 3b* ©efcbafte ju $>artg?" 

,, 30 /' antwortete ber 33auer; aud) mbcbte tcb gem ctnrnal unfern guten 
$oittg feben, ber fern 23olf fo jdrtltcb Itebt." 

2>er $bntg lacbelte unb fagte: „2)a$u fann Sucb 9tatb werben." 

,,5Xber wenn tcb nur witfjte, weld;er eg tft unter ben snelen .fjbfltngen, non 
bencn er umgeben fetn wtrb." 

,, 2)06 wtll tcb Sucb fagen : 3b? burft nur 2lcbtung geben, welcber ben £ut 
auf bem £opfe befallen wtrb, wenn alle Slnbern ftcb ebrerbtettg werben ent* 
blo&t baben." 

Sllfo ritten fte mttetnanber tn $artg bmetn, unb jwar bag 25aucrletn auf 
ber recbten ©ette beg $ontgg; benn wag bte Itebe Stnfalt, eg fct mtt 2tbfict>t 
ober burdb 3 U W Ungefdjtcfteg tbun fann, bag tbut fte. £)er S3auer gab 
bem 5?ontg auf alle fetne ^ragen gefprac^tge 5lntwort. Sr erjablte t'bnt 
Sftancbeg uber ben gelbbau, aug fetner ^augbaltung unb wte er juwetlen 
beg ©onntagg aucb fetn £ubn tn bent Xopfe babe, unb merfte lange ntcbtg. 
Sllg er aber fab, wte alle genfter ftcb bffneten unb alle ©trafjen ftcb mtt SHen^ 
feben anfutlten, wte 3ebermann ebrerbtettg augwtcb, ba gtng tbm etn Stcbt 
auf. „9ftetn #err," fagte er ju fetnern unbefannten 23egletter, ben er mtt 
Slengftltcbfett unb 23erwunberung anfebaute, „entweber fetb 3br ter $cntg, 
ober tcb btn’g; benn wtr betbe bnben alletn nocb ben £itt auf bem $opfe." 

Da lacbelte ber £8ntg unb fagte: „3cb btn’g. 2Bann 3b* Suer SWfjletn 
tn ben ©tall geftellt unb Suer ©efebaft beforgt bnbt, fo fommt ju mtr auf 
metn ©cblofi; tcb mtU Sucb bann mtt etner Sftittaggfuppe aufwarten unb 
Sucb ben 2>aupbtn jetgen." ^oljann Paul Hebei. 


13. 3Sa^rcr SJiutlj* 

2>er ^urebtfame erfcbndft t>or fcer <Sefaf>r, ber in 
tl)l*, ber iThttbicje nacb tbr. ^ean Paul /riebrid) ttid)ter. 

14. 2Bdcf)terruf. 

£>ort, mag id) eud) mid fagen! 

5Die (Stocfe bat 3^bn gefd&Iagen. 

$e£t betet unb je|t gebt gu 33ett' ; 

SDodj lofcbt bag £td)t aug, eb' tyx gebt. 

©dbtaft fanft unb raoljl; im $ttnmel road;t 
(Sin ftareg Slug' bte gauge -ftad&t. $ebel. 


191 


b.-PRAOTIOB. 

1. ONE WAY. — GERMAN INTO ENGLISH. — TRANSLATE. 

(WORDS IN DICTI0NAR5T.) 


1* ©ib mir bad 33u$. mir ben ©eg* ©illjl bu ntir ben 
©eg ^eigcn? SBarum roilljf bu mtr nid)t ben ©eg jeigett? 3$ fab 
bctnen 25ruber geftern tit ber 0tabt* Deine 0cbn>cfter t)at ein tteued 
dtleib gefauft* ©o baft bu bie fcfybne 9)?appe gefauft? £aft bu $e* 
beru? ^paft bu £tnte? 3$ ft^reibe mtt einern ©leiftift; id) braucbe 
feme £inte* ©ib 2lcbt, bu mirft bie £inte oerfcbutten* ©o ifl bad 
25fd)blatt? Jpter I (&d liegt in metnetn ©eograpfae * 23ud)e* ©ad 
^>aft bu §eute gelernt? 3$ b fl be beute ©efd)id)te ttitb 9faturmiffen* 
fdjaft gelernt* faunft bu red)neit, faunft bu gcib>len ? ®o ga^Ie* 
(Sind, jtoei, bren Set) febe, bu faunft ed* ^annft bu bid £aufenb 
gab)Xen ? 3d) faun ntdjt fo mcit fablen* 3dfa en fabt beinaf)e aud 
trie jafaen* ©ettn man jablt mu§ ntau jdbletu ©eld)e $ofttion iff 
bier ber 0af?t „tnub man gabfeu ?" £)ie grpeite* ©arum? ©etl 
btefer £b e ^ ^ er <!paupttbetl bed garden 0a£cd ift uub bett 0a§ niebt 
anfangt* „2litfdngt" fommt oon anfangen. ©ad iff ber 2)ocal* 
med)fel son anfangen? £>erfelbe mie son fangen, a, t, a; fo bap bad 
eittfacbe Bcitroort, in ben »erfd)iebenen ^ormen, lautet: fangen, ftng, 
gefangen* Unb anfangen? 2lntmortt anfangen, anftng, angefattgen* 
©arum ftebt bad „ge" bed $articipiumd ber $ergattgenl)eit in bem 
©orte brin, ttad) bem „an"? ©eil bad „an" eine trennbare 23or* 
fplbe ift* ©ober weijjt bu bad ober tooran ficbft bu, bap „an" trenn* 
bar ift in „anfangett." 3d) b& re e ^, f*b«* ^ ann *d) ^ n id)t* 2Bie 
bbrft bu ed? 3d) b& re ^ bartn, bajj ber Accent, bab f)ei$t bier ber 
^acbbrucf bed Stond im ©preeben, auf ber 0plbe „an" ift* S)ad iff 
riefaig* faunft bu fpielen gebn* Sobann, griebrid), 3acob, 

fommt l mtr toollcn SSafl fpielen gebn* 3d) baben gebn* 3<b 
mill mir einen fliegenben £>rad)cn macben* Jpier iff papier baftir* 
3ft beine 0(bnur lang genug, bap er bod) fliegen fann? £), er fann 
fiber ben bbtbften &b urm fliegen* 3a, oerftebt ficb, menu ber ©inb 

barnad) gebt* 

7 


192 


2* 2) a tdj gefkrn ntcfyt fpajicren gel;en Fomtte, fo f)abe td) metnc 
Slufgabcii, fur morgen, gemadjt; fo Famt tefy nun, l;eute, tit ben 
SBalb gefyen* 

3m SBalb, tm SBalb, 

2Bo'$ (Ed)o fc^atlt ! 

«€>i5rft bu, tote bte S35gel ftngen? ^pbrft bu, tote c$ raufdjt? 2)aS 
ift ber 2Ctnb, tn ben Sdumen, tit ben Slattern* Slattern" fommt 
oon 23Iatt ; ein 23latt tm 23ud)e, etn 23latt an ben 23dumett; e$ gibt 
aud) etn 3^itmort: bldttern, bao meint, bie ©et ten etnes 23ud)cO 
ofytte befonbere ©orge uttb SlufmerFfamFeit umbrefyen mtb baniber 
fcf)cn* 23emt bu 2)eutfdj> leritft, bldttere nidjt tm 23ucfye. Sftntm eS 
crnfHtd) oor. $ange am Slnfange an unb fybre am (Enbe auf, uttb 
f)bre nid)t auf bt$ bu atles toao bartn ftcbjt, ooKftdnbtg gelernt l)aft 
unb Fannft 

3. Sim Slnfang fcfcuf Oott £tmmel mtb (Erbe. Unb bt'e (Erbe toar n>ufte 
unb leer, unb c£ toar ftnfter auf ber £tefe; unb ber ©etft ©otteS fcfymebete 
auf bem SBaffer. 

Unb ©ott fpracb: (E$ toerbe Stdrt. Unb eS toarb 8t<$t. 

Unb ©ott ft$uf ben $lenf$en tym junt 33tlbe, sum SStlbe ©otteS fdmf 
er tyn. 

Unb ©ott ber $err maefyte ben SD?enfd)en auS etnent (ErbenFlofb unb er 
blteS tfym etn ben lebenbtgen Dbent tn fetne Sftafe. Unb alfo toarb ber SDIenfcb 
etne lebenbtge ©eele. 

Unb ber Sftenfd) gab etnent jegltcben 93teb, unb SSogel unter bem #tmmel, 
unb £bter auf bem $elbe fetnen Stamen; aber fur ben SSlenfdjen toarb Fetne 
©efytilftn gefunben, bte urn tfyn mare. — 

3m ©dttoetfj betneS Slngejtc&tS foUft bu betn 33rob effen, btS ba§ bu mteber 
$u (Erbe merbefl, baoon bu genomnten btfh £>enn bu btft (Elbe, unb follft gu 
(Erbe toerben. 


2. PRACTICE, THE OTHER WAY.— ENGLISH INTO GERMAN. 
TRANSLATE. 

(WORDS IN DICTIONARY.) 

1. Will you give me the book? Why have you not shown 
me the way? Thy brother was in town yesterday. Who bought 
that new dress? I bought a beautiful, new map. I have pens. 
Where are thy pens? Take care, lest you will spill the ink. 
The blotting paper lies on the table. 


193 


2. The history of the United States. The science of nature. My 
brother can not count yet. How many stars can you count? We 
can not count the stars. There are too many. Shall we take a 
walk? I must learn my lessons. 

3. Come children, now we can play ! Let us go into the woods. 
The birds sing. The leaves rustle. The wind rustles in the leaves. 
The wind makes the kite fly. The kite flies over the steeple. 

4. Oh, children, come, let us take a walk. See, how the sun 
shines. How the light flashes. The whole earth is suffused with 
its light. The sun is my father, said that great Indian, and the 
earth is my mother ; I will sit down in her lap. 

5. And the Lord God said, it is not good that the man should 
be alone, I will make him a help meet for him. 

And out of the ground the Lord God formed every beast of the 
field, and every fowl of the air, and brought them unto Adam to 
see what he would call them; and whatsoever Adam called every 
living creature, that was the name thereof. 

3. PRACTICE, WORKING TWO WAYS, AT ONE AND THE 
SAME TIME, 

that is, giving the literal meaning of the words of a German phrase, proverb or 
idiom, and the meaning of the phrase, from the English proverb or idiom set 
opposite to or given with it. 

A. Proverbs. Find out the literal meaning of the words of the German proverb, 
and observe its meaning as a proverb, from the corresponding English proverb, 
set opposite to or given with it. 

(Words where not given here, in “Dictionary”). 

1. Tev ttTenfil) ben Ft, <33ott IenFt: 11 Man proposes , God disposes .” — 2. YDte 

ttetuonnen, (Inf. getoinncn, to win, to gain ; Tune i, a, o), fo $ert 1 * * 4 onnen (Inf. jer* 

rinnen, to dissolve, to melt, here, to “go,” to vanish ; Tune t, a, o) : “ Lightly come, 
lightly go.” — 3. VTorl) bt 4 ti1)t (breaks; Inf. bredjen; Tune e, a, o; i is “second 
change”) i£tfen : '■'■Necessity is the mother of invention.” — 4. 3tuet ^Itegen tlitt 
einec lUappe fit)I«gca (Sflicge, fly, fem., pi. *en $ ettt, here one ; flap, fem., 

pi. *en ; fdjlngen, to strike, to beat, Tune a, u, a; second change in a) : “To kill 
two birds with one stone” — 5. 2Cufgefcboben ijl nid)t mifgel)oben, (auffdjteben, to 
delay, Tune it, o, o; auffjckrt, to abolish, to give up, Tune t, o, o); “ Forbearance 
is no acquittance.” — 6. Morgen (to borrow) maibt Socgen (cares, troubles, 
sorrow; Sing. <SorgC, fem.) “He who goes borrowing , goes a sorrowing.” — 7. 2lui3 
bent 2\egen in bie £r«ufe (5Hct)cn r rain, m. ; in, in, or, here under ; Sraufe, eaves, 
watei’-spout, gutter, fem) : “Out of the frying pan into the fire.” — 8. T'etr «^el>let‘ 
ift fo tuie ben Btelflet 4 (§cl)Ier, concealer, receiver of stolen goods, m. ; arg, 
bad, wicked; toic, as, how; Sfeljler, one who steals, thief, m.) : “ The receiver is 
as bad as the thief.” — 9. 2111. u Jtnfang i|f f<t)U>en : “Beginnings are always difficult.”- 
9 


194 


10. Sftufftggang tfi offer £ajier 2ht* 

fang. 

11. SBemt bte am fyocfyfien, tfi 

©otteS £itlfe am nacbftcn. 

12. (Stic mtt 2Betle. 

13. (Sr fpannt bte Deafen Winter ben 

$ffug. 

14. Sftorgenfiunb’fyatQoIbtmifftunb. 


15. $rbfyltcb tn (S^ren, fann Sfftemanb 

oerroefyren. 

1 6. 5D^tt bem £ut tn ber #anb, fommt 
man burcb’S ganje Sanb. 

17. grtfeb geroagt tft ^alb geroonnen. 

18. ©letcb unb gletcb gefetlt ftdf) gern. 

19. SSerfprecfcen unb $alten ftetyt trotyl 

bet 3ungen unt> Sllten. 

20. ©cbmtebe bag (Stfen roenn eg 

warm tft. 

21. £ocbmutb fommt »or bem gall. 

22. 3eber tft ftcb felbft ber ^adfjfte. 

23. 3ung gcroobnt, alt getfyan. 

24. (Snbe gut, affeg gut. 


Idleness is the root of all evil. 

Man’s extremity is God’s oppor- 
tunity. 

The more haste, the less speed. 
He puts the cart before the horse. 

Early to bed and early to rise 
makes a man healthy, wealthy 
and wise. 

Innocent mirth cannot offend. 

Politeness is the best recom- 
mendation. 

W ell begun is half done. 

Birds of a feather, flock together. 
Let your word be your bond. 

Make hay while the sun shines. 

Pride will have a fall. 

Charity begins at home. 

What’s bad in the bone, will ne’er 
come out of the flesh. 

All’s well that ends well. 


B. Idioms. 1 . Find the literal meaning of the Words of the German Idiom, and 
its meaning as an Idiom from the English Idiom set opposite to it, 

(WORDS IN DICTIONARY.) 

German . English. 

(Idiom.) (Idiom.) 


1. ©eflern Slbcnb. 

Sttacbe ben 33rtef fret. 

3$ btn bafytnter gefommen. 

(Sr bat eg aug ber £uft gegriffen. 
5. £)ag oerflebt ftcb oon felbft. 

(Sr fpannt bte ©atten ju bo$. 
Slffeg jufammengenommen. 

Unter oter Slugen. 

Dfjne Ueberlegung. 

10. SBenn’g $um 2Ieufierften fommt. 
10 


Last night. 

Pay the postage. 

I have found it out. 

He has coined it. 

That is a matter of course. 

His pretensions are too high. 
All in all. 

By ourselves. 

Heedlesly. 

If the worst comes to the worst. 


195 


34) effc fcbr gem £)bfl. 

(Stn?a^ auf tern £erjcn babcn. 
Grr ift ©oltat gcroorben. 

£aben ©te bae 53ucb gelefen? 
15. 2Bte fam e$? 

23te gebt’3? 

2Bte beftnben ©te ftd^>? 
3emanben l;olen lafrcn. 

Sftorgen frub. 

20. 9tad) ©onnenuntergang. 

•£>eute uber oterjc^n £age. 

Contiuue this kind of Exercises, 


I like fruit very much. 

To have something on one’s mind. 
He has enlisted. 

Have you finished the book? 
How did it happen? 

How do you do ? 

How are you ? 

To send for some one. 

To morrow (morning). 

After sun set. 

A fortnight hence, 
with Idioms and Proverbs, hereafter. 


2. APPLY IDIOMS, IN TRANSLATION. 

(Words in Dictionary.) 

A. GERMAN, INTO ENGLISH. 

£rage ben 35rief auf bte pofl, aber niad;e tfyn fret. 34) babe t'bn fd;on 
geftern Slbenb auf bte $ofl getragcn. £aft tu betnen better Carl ntcbt gefe? 
ben? 34) babe tbn.lange ntcbt gefeben. Sr ift ©olbat gemorben. 253ag 
ttmitfcben ©te? 3d> effe fet;r gem £)bft unb null nttr ctnen Slpfel faufen. 
SCte fam e3, ba§ bem better fortgtng? Unter nter 2(ugen null td; 3b»en 
fagen: er banbelte obne Ueberlegung. 

B. ENGLISH, INTO GERMAN. 

You have something on your mind. WJiat is it? My Cousin 
has gone off. When? last night. Where did he go to? I think 
he has enlisted. Have you finished the book which I (have) lent 
you? How did it happen, that he went away? I do not know. 0, 
I think they have coined it, it is not so. We will send for him. 
When? A fortnight hence. When will you write? To morrow 
morning. Will you take the letter to the post office? Don’t forget 
to pay the postage. 

How much is it ? Three Cents. 


196 


O. — 3FL E3 13 X 1ST G". 

^riSpfleht,.* 

©a3 ©ropfletn erflart als jroet ©ropfletit. 

<£in iErtipflein im ctnbern, eineg mit bem anbern, etneg burd) Has anbere. 

©as eine ©ropflein ift baS ©ropflein felbfl; 

©as anbere ©ropflein ift bie ©efd)id)te beS ©ropfleinS. 

3wet ©ropflein : eines in bern anbern, eines mit bem anbern, fliefjen jte atS ©ropflein. 

1. 

„%t opf let it." 

©aS ©rbpfletn faHt* 

„©ropflein:" ©efdjidjte beS ©ropfleinS. 

©ie ©efc^icfctc beS ©ropfleinS fatXt wie ein ©ropflein. 

2Bof)er? 23om £immel, toie bas ©ropflein. 

2 . 

„23 lii m dj ett." 

2Bo ift bas Slumdjcn? ©as 23lumd)en ift bic erfte UeBttng beS HtnbeS unb 
©Rulers, bie pom „©ropflein" entfpringt, im „Ganon." Gin „Ganon” ift ein 
tttunbgefang, ein ©efang, ein Sieb, ein 23ortrag too Giner anfangt unb bie 2ln* 
beren fortfal)ren. ©as 23ltimd)en bet erften Uebung unb greube beS ©djiilerS, 
ift ber „Ganon." Uebet ben Ganon fleiffig, bas ^ei§t, ternet bas ©ropflein orbent* 
lid), ba§ iljr ben Ganon gut ^erfagen ober oortragen fonnt. $3er bas ©anje 
baben mill, mufj ber ST^cUe SJteifter fein. ©er Ganon als SSortrag SSieler, ift 
bas ©anje; bie einjelnen 3 e ^ cn fur 3^**/ ftnb bie ST^cilc. 2&enn iljr, jeber, 
bie etnjelnen 3^ en nic^t fertig unb genau fennt, fo fonnt iljr ben Ganon nid)t 
fertig iiben unb otyne Slufentbalt, trenn iljr einfaflen fottt, 3 ufammen berfagen. 

3. 

2Bo finb bie „C u c II e tt ?" 

©ie Quetten flnb bie 2Borte, Saute, ©iifje, bie pon ben Shorten beS ©ropfleinS 
fatten, unb fliefjen, unb im Gdjo flatten, ©ieb tt>ie fte niebertropfen, bie ffiorte! 
£ort i^r ben ©on? rnufr, 9lu§, ©djufj. ©as ift ber ©onfall ber SOBorte beS 

* 2efe*Uebuitg (Practice of Pronunciation) ; aw$ jum Ueberfejjen (also for trans- 
lation). See part : “Child’s Own,” the “Story of the Little Drop,” in this book. 

12 


197 


Sropfleing. £i>rt iljr bag Gsd)o, bag (Sdjo. ber 2©orte beg Dropfleing, bag @d)o 
ber Saute beg Drbpfleing? £abt il)r bag (Scf)o ber Saute, bet 2Borte beg Jrbpfleing, 
ge^ort: sitfjlc, 8)tul)lc, siifjle? *iil)le ift bag (Sdjo son ‘Sftufyte. ad), sod), *acb, 
ift bag (£d)o son S3ad^ ; ad) ! ift aud) eine 2lugrufung, fie meint, alas ! oh ! 
Sftandjer ber „23ad)" lernen fod unb augfpred)en, oon ben 23ud)ern, benft, ad)! 
alas! oh! roie l)art, rote fc^roer ! Ung pier ijt bag 2ldeg eing; roir fagen 23ad) fo 
leidjt, rote einer ben!t ad) ! unb *uljle, 9)?ul)le, eben fo Ietd)t. Dag mad)t bag 
SLropfleitt, bag Dropflein fd)afft im „©ad)," unb alg 23ad); eg treibt aud) bie 
9ttul)le beg ©efpradjg. Dod) erft tomnten im Deid)e, 

4 . 

Die dj I c in." 

Dag gifcbleitt, Ijeifjt eg im Dert, ein gifd)lein, bod) bag meint oiele gffdjlein, ade 
. gifdje bie flein ftnb alg gifd)lein. Dag eine gifcf)lein jtel)t fiir oiele, aUe gifd)lein, 
roeil bag gifdjlein nid)t alg ein gifd), fonbern alg ein fleiner gifd) gemeint ift. 2Bag 
e i n gifd)lein ergoijt, roeil eg ein gifd)lein ijt, ergo^t unb gefdtlt alien gifd)lein. 

Die gifdjlein ftnb bie ©a|3d)en ber erften 2lnroenbmtg. ©iel), roie fie blinten im 
£eid), im „DropfIeitt." Dag Dropflein, ©efd)id)te beg Dropfleing, ergbjjt bie gifd)* 
lein, macf)t bafj fte ftd) regen unb luftig beroegett. Die gifd)lein »on ©d()en unb 
©apdjen fpielen unb fd)roimmen in bent Xeic^e beg Drbpfleing. 2lud) bag 21, 23, £, 
bag grofje unb Heine a, b, c, bag fpringt unb glanjt in ben 2Beden, auf ben ©eiten 
beg Dropfleing. gang eg, roenn bu fannjt, unb fyalt eg feft: 

a, &, c, b, e, f, g, 

V , i/ i, l I, m, n, o, p, — 

u. f . to. ; roag meint bag : u. f. ro. ? (Si, bag reimt ftd), bag 21, 23, (L Dag fod’g. 

Dod) jept fommt ber 23 ad), ad)! ber 23ad) ber 2lrbcit. Da paben bie gifcplein, 
b. {). (bag (jeipt), ba l)at bag ©pielen ein (Snbe. 3ef)t fomntt bie Slrkti, ber 

5. 

a d);" — 

Der 23ad) ber 2lrbeit; ber 25ad) ift bie 2lrbeit, bie 2lrbeit ber OTuble beg ®e* 
fprdd)g. 2lrbeiteft bu gerne? ©age eg, roie ift’g? Der 23ad) treibt bie ‘Stuble 
beg ©efprddjg. Dl)ne 2lrbeit feitte (Sljre. Der ^onig arbeitet unb bie jbonigin. 
2Ber nicfyt arbeitet ber fod au$ ni$t ejfen. 3«t ©djroeifje beincg 2lngeftcf)teg fodjt 
bu betn 23rob effen, roiffet iljr, jteljet gefcfyrieben. 

Slrbett macpt b«3 Sebctt fitf), 

Sftiibert ade Saft, 

Der nur pat 23efummerntfj 
Der bie 2lrbeit pafjt. 


13 


198 


Slrbeite, o S3adj! 9Jtaljle, o SJtufjle! Sapt ung arbeiten unbfrofjlidj feint groij* 
lid) in Sijren fann Pltentanb oenpefyreit. Der S3adj arbeitet, tie SSJlu^Ic arSeitct; 
ba3 Sropflein arbeitet int S3ad). Unfer „$roppetn" arbeitet in ber SOtuljle beg 
©efpracfyg. Dt)ne bag Srbpflein mare feine iSTZu^Ie* Dag ©efprad) ip bie 
SJtuljle. Die 5JiuljIe flappert. .ftlappere, o Soluble! Draupen por ber Ibure 
Peljen ©acfe Poll SBetjen. ©acfe poll SBeijen fdjtpimmen, alg SBorte, in 
(Stiffen, ben (Srjaljlungen auf bent 

C. 

„$luffc" t« Plebe. 

Der glup if! bie Slebe ber Gtrjaijlung. £>bne bag Xropflein fonnte er nid)t 
piepen. Der glup fliefjt, ber 53ac^ piept; in bent 23ad)e, in bent glujfe piept unb 
fc^afft ber Ion, bie Uebung beg SLropfleing, fonfl murbet iljr feflfi^en. gttepe, o 
glup ber 0lebe, fti^re bie ©acfe poll SBeijen, bie SBorte, jur SJlit^Ie beg ©efprad)g. 
Sftalpe, o 9Jtuf)le! ©djaffe, o S3ad)! gliepe, fd^affe, malpe, o mafpe in ber „$ftui)le," 
o Jropflein! Dag Jropflein treibt bie 9Jluf)le. Die 9Jtu(jIe beg @efprad)g ntalpt 
ben SBeijen, ber SBorte. Dljne bag Srbpflein fonnte bie SSftitble nidjt malpen, 
o^ne bag „3:r6pflein /< fonnte ber S3ad) ber Slrbeit nid)t piepen, in ber „SJtuljle" 
fdjaffem D^ne bag ^roppein" fonnten bie SBorte, bie Srjafpungen nid)t 
fdjtpintmen; iljr tpurbet fejlft^en auf bent©anb: ^arte, fdjtpere SBorte, unb SBen* 
bungen, unb Saute, alg ©anb, alg ©anbbanfe. Sluf bent glufte beg Sropfleing 
fd^tpimmen pe, bie ©djiffe ber Srja^Iungen. Der glup piept in’g SDfeer — 
glujfe piepen in’g 9)?eer. Dag Droppein piept int S3adj>e, ber S3ad) tpirb junt 
glujfe, ber glup junt SJieerj bag Sroppein tpirb junt 

7 . 

„9)i c c r." 

SBir Pnb auf bent SUfeerr auf bent 9fteer auggebeljnter Uebung unb Sljatigfeit, 
ber Ueberfejjung. SDfeer ip Qtinjaljl, ein SSfleer; SJieere ftnb piele SSfteere. 
SBir Pnb auf bent $?eer. „9)lecr!" ^ein Ufer! feine 3 e i$ en , 3 a ^en‘SBorts 
angabe, an bie bag ^inb, ber ©cfyuler pdj ^alten fannl ©o tpeit bag Sluge 
reic^t nut £ert! Dag Droppein, „©efd)id)te beg JropPeing," roarb 3 um 9fteer. 
Pltdjtg Ijat ber ©fitter alg ben Sompap beg SBorterbud)g, unb bag ©teuer* 
ruber ber ©rammatif. Plidpg aig biefeg unb fein 3utrauen, feinen Sftutlj! 
galjre, Jtinb! galjre gut, J?inb! ©iel) nad) bent (Sompap, peipig, nid)t nacblafpg, 
fonp fontmp bu auf ©anbbanfe, ober an getfen, tpenn bu „rat^en" tpiQp; lenfe, 
fii^re bag ©teuerruber gut, eg tpirb Ijalten, tpenn aud) ber ©turm ge^t. S31afe, o 
©turnt! tpir ge^en rnit bent ©turm gegen ben ©turm! mit ben SBeilen; gegen bie 
14 


199 


SBctXen ! £aKte fcfl an bag ©teuerrutxr; gib ben SBeflen, bent ©turme ntdjt nad). 
(5$ roirb augbatten, eg with bid) ffdjer fiibten. ®g ift titdjtig unb ftatf, eg with 
bag <Sdjiff bewabren. 33ewabte bag <Sd)iff! 3ej?t fdjweigt bet <5turm; eg ift 
SBinbfttlle. 

@g gibt nod) anbere -SJieere, grofjere SDleete bet ^attgfeit, Sropflein wieberum 
alg SJfeere. 

9tocb ftnb wit auf bent 9Jleer, bent Sefebudje, bent “Reader,” bocb ftnb Wit ant 
Snbe. <Sd)on feb’ tdj bag Gtnbe. 2)od) ftnb wit fc^on nafye ant (Snbe. 

©efcbwinbel ©efc^winbe! 

©te 9le6el jerretffen, 

3Der 4Mmmel tfi b { Ke l 
* * * * * 
eg faufeln bte SButbe, 

£g rubrt ftdj bet ©duffer: 

©efcbwinbe! ©efcbtoinbel 
(£g ttjeilt ftcb bte Sffietle, 
eg nabt ft<b bte Serne, 

©<bon feb’ tdj bag 2anb!* 

2Dir fubren auf Sropflein, bent Stiiden beg Jropfleing, uber bag 
„SR e c r." 


* ©oetbe (©ludlttbe gabrt). 


“APPENDIX:” „9teuc 9Jtecrc." 
“New seas,” yet the same (old, former, )skip. 


15 


Child’s Dictionary. 


(COMPASS.) 


201 


DICTIONARY. 


(Child’s, for “Reader”; covering also former pieces where the English is not 
given with the piece.)* 


9 (. 

after, but, Coordin. Conj. 

2lftenb, evening, m. pi. 2. beg 2lftenbg, 
in the evening. 

Slftenbruft’, evening rest, calm; f. ; 
Apostrophe here in place of an e. 

aftgeroanbtem, from : aftmenben, to 
turn away; verb having both chan- 
ges; P. P. used as Adj , here in 
place of Def., Art. Parse : 
aft=ge*m<inb=Ucm. 

Mftfid)t, intention, f. pi. 6. 

uftftcfttlicft, intentional, intentionally, 
Adj. and Adv. 

Accent, accent, stress of voice in speak- 
ing, m. pi. 2. 

ad)! ah ! oh 1 Interj. 

2ld)t, attention, f., also 2ldjtung, f. 

21d)tung, attention, f. 2ld)tung geften, 
like 2lcftt geften, to pay attention. 

2IengfHid)fett, anxiety, solicitude, f. 
pi. 6. 

Slefop, Esop, Noun prop., name. 

aller, e, eg, all. Declined like Def. Art. 

alletn, but, Coord. Conj. 


2(C(mad)t, omnipotence, 
alg, as, when, Conj. requiring 3d Pos. 
alfo, thus, then, in this manner; con- 
sequently; Adv. 

2I(te, old one, Adv. used as noun. 

am, contracted from an bem, at the. 
2lmt, office, n. pi. 5. 

an, at, on, gov. Dat. and Acc. 

21nbere, other, Adj. used as noun. 
21ncfbote, anecdote, f. pi. 6. 

2lnfang, beginning, m. pi. 1. 
aitfangg, at first, Adv. 

anfangt, 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. of anfatt* 
gen, to commence, irreg. Verb a, t, 
a; a is “Second change”, 
anftitten, to fill, to fill up, reg. v. 
an’g, contracted from an bag, at the, 
of the. 

anfd)auen, to look at, to view, to con- 
template, reg. v. 

Slntmort, answer, reply, f. pi. 6. 
annuortete, antroorten, reg. verb, to 
answer. 

anfangett, to commence, irreg. V. a, i a. 
2lngeftd)t, face, n. 

Slnmentmng, application, f. pi. 6. 


* Grammatical Note, for older pupils. B. C. means “both changes”; 
“SPEC.” (special), means, irreg. Verbs, having consonant changes, in stem ; the 
SINGLE VOWELS added to irreg. Verbs, are the “Tune” of those verbs. The 
NUMBERS, added to nouns, denote their plural, according to the schedule given 
with “Text of German Readings. Live Strings of Words”. “Umlaut”, 
vowels here, as a general thing, are counted like the simple vowels. When the 
“Umlaut” is a capital letter, the letter c is put after the capital. So, printers, 
also in the case of small letters, put the c after the letter taking the “Umlaut”, 
when they, as in English, have no type for the “Umlaut”; fi, counted for f. 

1 


202 


2lpfel, apple, m. pi. 1. 
arbeiten, to work, reg. v. 

2lrm, arm., m. pi. 2. 
arm, poor, Adj. 

2Irt, kind, sort, f. pi. 6. 
aud), also, Adv. 

auf, upon, on, Prep. gov. Dat. when 
it signifies rest: auf bent 3elbe, on 
the field, and Acc. when it signifies 
motion, upon, into the field, auf 
ba$ gelb. 

21ufentljalt, delay, stop, m. 

5Iufgabe, task, lesson, f. pi. 6. 
aufgeridjtet, erected; P. P. from auf* 
ridden, r eg. v. 

Slufmerffamteit, attention, f. pi. 6. 
aufroarten, to wait for, to wait on, to 
serve; to visit, reg. v. 
aufroarta, upward, upwards. 

21uge, eye, n. pi. 6. 
au$, out, gov. Dat. 
ausgebetynt, extended, P. P. of auS* 
befynen, reg. 

au$gelaffen, P. P. from auSiaffen, to 
let out; irreg. Verb, like laffen, to 
leave, to let, a, ie, a; auSgelaffen, 
here, Adj. or Adv., excessively, 
extravagant. 

auSgelefen, from auslefcn, to read out, 
through, to finish; irreg. V. like 
lefen, e, a, e,; sec. ch. in ie. 

Sleujjerjl, last, extreme; Superl. 
au$fprecbcn, to pronounce, irreg. Y. 

like fprecfyen, t, a, o; sec. change in i. 
2iu$fprud), answer, sentence, verdict, 
m. 

auSrotd), Imperf. Ind. of au3wetd)eit, 
to give way; like roetcfyen, ei, i, i. 

©. 

23ad), brook, m. pi. 1. 
baben, to bathe, reg. v. 
batbe, balb, soon, Adv. 

33all, ball, m. pi. 1. 


bange, anxious, Adj., also Adverb, 
bat,. Imperf. Ind., of bitten, to ask, 
beg; irreg. Y. bitten, bat, gebeten. 
SBauer, peasant, m. “Qual. Noun” 
(pi. 6.) 

Sduerlein, little peasant, playfully for: 

peasant, n. pi. 4. 

33aum, tree, m., pi. 1. (33aume). 
bebeden, to cover, reg. 
befall, Imperf. Ind. of befe^Ien, to 
command, to order; irreg. Y. e, a, 
o; sec. ch. in ie. 

beftnben, to find (one self), irreg. Y., 
i, a, u. 

begegnen, to meet, reg. v. 

23egieiter, companion, m. pi. 4. 
befjaiten, to keep, irreg. Y., like fat- 
ten, a, ie, a. 

bei, with, Prep. gov. Dat. 

33eil, hatchet, n. pi. 2. 
beim, contracted from bet bent Pre- 
pos. and form of Def. Art. Dat. S. 
m. or n., at the, by the, with the. 
The tit is the ending of the Def. 
Art. in Dat. S. m. & n., bet is a 
prepos. gov. Dative, by, with, at. 
beinape, almost, nearly, about, Adv. 
33efiimmernip, affliction, grief, trouble, 
f. pi. 2. 

beleud)ten, to illuminate, reg. 
beraube, berauben, to rob, reg. verb. 
23erg, mountain, m. pi. 2. 
bergatt, up hill, Adv. 
berganroarts, up the hill, Adv. Com- 
pound word. 

bergunter, down hill, Adv. 

befab, from befeben, examine, irreg. Y. 

like fe^en, see feben. 

93eftb, possession, m. 
beforgen, to take care of, to provide, 
reg. v. 

beftimmt, destined, understood, P. P. 

of beflimmen, reg. v. 
befuebett, to visit, reg. v. 


203 


fatroffen, startled, surprised, per- 
plexed. 

beten, to pray, reg. v. 

Sett, bed, n. pi. 6. 

betrfibt, sad, P. P. of reg. verb betrfi* 
ben, to trouble; here Adj. 
beoor, before, Conj. 
bettjfl^ren, to preserve, keep, protect, 
save, reg. 

besuegert, to move, to stir, reg. (also 
irreg., e, o, o, to move, morally), 
beroetfen, to prove, irreg. Y. ei, ie, ie. 
©ilb, image, n. pi. 5. 
bitben, to form, reg. 
bin, am, Pres. Ind. of fetn, Aux. Yerb. 
big, until, Conj. requiring 3d pos. 
blafen, to blow, irreg. a, ie, a; sec. ch. 
in a. 

©latt, leaf, n. pi. 5. 
bldttern, to turn over the leaves, of a 
book, reg. v. 
blau, blue, Adj. 

bleiben, to stay, remain, irreg. Y. ei, 
ie, ie; fie^en bleiben, to stop (walk- 
ing). 

©leiftift, lead pencil, n. sometimes m.), 
pi. 2. 

blteg, from blafen, blieg, geblafen, to 
blow, to breath; sec. ch. in a. 
blinfen, to gleam, to sparkle, reg. 
©Ifimcben, little flower, n. pi. 4. 
brad)te — ju, Imperf. Ind. of jubringen, 
to spend; irr. V. like bringen, to 
bring, bringen, braebte, gebracbt (sp.), 
„ju" is separable prefix, 
btaueben, to be in need of, to use 
reg. v. 

©rief, letter, m. pi. 2. 
bring’, for briitge, bring (thou), Im- 
perat., of bringen, irreg. Yerb; see 
bringen. 

bringen, to bring, irreg. Y., having 
both changes, spec., bringen, braebte, 
gebraebt. 


©rob, bread, n. (pi. loaves or kinds of 
bread, 2). 

©ruber, brother, m. pi. 3. 
brummen, (to growl), to murmur, t» 
grumble, reg. v. 

©ruft, breast, bosom, f. 

©u<b, book, n. pi., 5. 

C 

Saiton, canon, m. 

Sari, Charles, Prop. Noun. 

Sbor, chorus, m. pi. 1. 

Sompafj, compass, m. 

2 ). 

ba, there, then, Adv. 
babet, thereby, therein, in it. 
baffir, compound of ba and fur, for it. 
babinter, there behind, behind it, after 
it. 

bamit, so that, compound of ba and 
mit, “there-with”, with it or by 
means of it. 

£)anf, thank, m. 
bann, then, Adv. 

barauf, compound from ba, and auf, 
there on; the r is euphonic, 
barin, therein, from that, used as 
pron. 

barnacb, compound from ba and nad), 
the r is euphonic; according to it, 
suitable. 

bariiber, compound from ba and fiber; 

the r is euphonic, over it. 
bag, the, Def. Art. Nom. or Acc. S. n. 
ba§, that, Conj., requiring in the Yerb 
the 3d position. 

£)aupbin, Dauphin, m. (French Prince 
of Wales). 

baju, compound from ba and ju, to it, 
for it. 

beefe, cover, Imperat. of beefen, reg. 
verb., to cover; jubecfeit, to cover up 
(ju separable prefix). 


204 


bcin, thy, m. & n. 
heineS, of thee, thy, m. 

hem, to the, in, upon the, Dat. S. m. 
& n*, Def. Art. 

hen, Def. Art.: Acc. sing. m. the; Dat. 
plur. to the. 

henen, Dat. Plur. of Art. when used 
as Rel. Pron.; »on henen, of or by 
whom. 

hcnf’, for henfe, Verb having B. C., 
henfen, had)te, gehad)t, to think, 
henfen, to think, irreg. Y. Both chan- 
ges, spec, henfen, hacfyte, gehad)t. 
henn, for, Coord. Conj. 
henn, then, Adv. 

her, the, Nom. Sing, m.; or, to the, 
Dat, Sing, fern.; or of the, Gen. 
Plur., Def. Art. 

herfelbe. the same ; her is declined (as 
Art.), and "felbe" as Adj. 
he$, of the, m. & n. 
heutfd), german, Adj. 

£>eutfd)lanh, Germany, (n.) 
hid), thee. 

hie, the, N. & Acc. S. f. the, N. & Acc. 
pi. the. 

hie, which, Art. as relat. pron. f. or pi. 
hiejenigen, those, pi. from herjenige,tie* 
jenige, haSjenige, like herfelbe. 
hienen, to serve, to minister, reg. 
2)ing, thing, n. pi. 2 (in the sense of 
things), 5 (in the sense of small 
things), 
hir, to thee, 
hod), yet, but, Adv. 

£)orf, village, n. pi. 5. 

£)rad)e(n), dragon, kite, m. pi. 4. 
hraujjen, out of doors, without, 
hreto’n, instead of hrefyen; hrel)en, to 
turn, reg. v. 
hrei, three, num. 

£)reier, three cent piece, m. pi. 4. 
hrin, in, Adv. (contracted from harin). 
hrurn (harum), therefore. 


hu, thou, pron. 

hunfel, dark, Adj. & Adv. When an e 
follows, after the liquid 1, then we 
drop the e before it, hunfle, hunfler. 
Comp, hunfler; Superl. bunfelfl. 
hurd), through, gov. Acc. 
hiirfen, to dare, to be permitted, verb 
having. B. C.; hiirft nur, you 
need but. 

©urftige, thirsty one, Adj. used as 
Noun. 

hu’S, contracted from hu e$, thou it. 

S. 

eben, just, even. 

Sd) 0 , echo, n. pi. 4. 
ehlen, from ehel, noble; the e after the 
h is ommitted, before the liquid 1. 
eb\ instead of ebe, before, Conj 
el)e, before, Conj. requiring 3d pos. in 
Yerb. 

ebemals, formerly, Adv. 

Sbre, honour, decency, f. pi. 6. 
etorerbietig, reverent, respectful, Adj. 
etorlid), honest, 
ei ! ah ! eh 1 hey ! alas ! ay 1 
Sigenttoum, property, n. 

Sigenttoumer, owner, m. pi. 4. 
einig, sole, only, united, agreeing ; ei* 
niger, einige, eintges, some, Adj. 
eilen, to hasten, to hurry, reg. 
eilten; eilen, to hurry, reg. verb, 
ein, a, indef. Pron. and indef. Art.; 

Nom. m. or Nom. & Acc. n. 

Siner, one, absolute, meaning one, as 
a man, mascul. 

einfacto, simple, Adj. and Adv. 
einfallen, to fall in with, to join, like 
fallen, ftel, gefaOen; sec. eh. d. 
Sinfalt, simplicity, f. 
einmal, once, Adv. 

Sin 3, one, num. 

Sines, one and the same, all the 
same, n. 


205 


cirtfl, once, Adv. 

Sinjaljl, Singular, m. 
etnjeln, single. 

(Sifen, iron, n. (pi. 4, in the sense of 
smoothing irons or other kinds of 
iron implements), 
etfern, of iron, Adj. 
emporgefcbttmngen, P. P. of empor* 
fcbroingen, to lift himself up as by 
wings, to rise; compound of empor 
and fctyroingen, irreg. Y., like farcin* 
gen, i, a, u. 

GsnPe, end, n. pi. 6. 

Sngel, angel, m. pi. 4. 
entblojjen, to uncover, reg. v. 
entffitlt, from entfallen, to fall from, 
irreg. Y. like fathn, ftel, gefaUen; 
sec. ch. in a; see faflen. 

Sntfernung, distance, f. pi. 6. 
entgegen, over towards, 
entfpringett, to rise, originate, irreg. 
V., i, a, u. 

entroePer — oPer, either— or. 
er, he, pron. 

erblicfte, perceived, espied, reg. Verb., 
erbltcfen. 

SrPe, earth, f. (pi. 6). 

(SrPenttofj, clod of earth, m. 
erfragen, to find out by asking, like 
fragen, reg. v. — Imperf. may be 
irreg. frug. 

ergojjen, to delight, reg. v. 
ertnnern, to remind; to remember, to 
recollect, reg. v. 
erflaren, to explain, reg. 
ernftlicf), serious, Adj. & Adv. 
erquitfen, to refresh, to recreate, reg. 
erfdjricft, 3d sing. Pres. Ind. of er* 
fcfyrecfen, to be frightened; irreg. V., 
erfcbrecfen, erfdjral, erfcbrocfen; the i 
is “Second Change”, 
erfcfirocfen, frightened, irreg. Yerb, er* 
fcpraf, erf^reden, here an Adj. 
erjl, first. 


erjlaunt, astonished, P. P. of erjlau* 
nen, reg. v. 

erja^Ien, to relate, to narrate, reg. v. 
Srjaljlung, narration, story, f. pi. 6. 
erjiirnt, angry, enraged, P. P. from 
erjurnen, reg. v. 

eg, it, pers. pron. 3d pers. S.; X. & 
Acc. n. 

effen, to eat, irr. Y., effen, gegeffen; 

sec. ch. in i. 
etiuctg, something. 

eucb, you, to you, if many or more 
than one. 

Sud), to you; Plur. of fcu, often used 
as form of an address, both familiar 
and respectful, and then spelled 
with an initial capital letter, 
euer, of you, your, m. & n. 
eure, your, pron. 

etu’gen, for eroigen, from ercig, eternal. 

5aljne, flag, f. pi. 6. 
fa^ren, to drive, travel, irreg. Y. a, it, 
a; sec. ch. in a. 

^a^rt, drive, ride, f. pi. 6. 
gall, fall, m. (pi. cases, 1). 
fallen, to fall, irreg. Y., fallen, ftel, ge* 
fatlen; sec. ch. in a , 
fallt, from fallen, to fall, irreg. Y., fal* 
len, ftel, gefaden; a is sec. ch. 
fanPen, see ftnten, 

fange — an, from anfangen, anftng, an* 
gefangen, to begin; an is a separable 
prefix; fattgen has sec. ch. in a. 
fangen, to catch, irreg. Yerb, fangen, 
ftng, gefangen. 
garbe, colour, f. pi. 6. 
fajf, instead of faffe, from faffen, to 
take, reg. v. 

fasten, took, reg. Yerb, faffen. 
geber, pen, also feather, f. pi. 6. 
gelP, field, n. pi. 5. 
gelPbau, agriculture, m. 


206 


gelfen, rock, m. pi. 4. 
geige, the coward, Adj. used as noun, 
geinb, enemy, m. pi. 2. 
genfier, window, n. pi. 4. 
geme, distance, f. (pi. 6). 
fertig, done; readily, 
fejt, firm, hard, solid, Adj. 
feflftjjen, to be hard aground, stuck- 
fast; like ft£en, to sit, fafj, gefeffen. 
ftnben, to find, irreg. Y., i, a, u. 
ftng — an, anfangen, to commence, to 
commence to speak, simply : to 
speak.; like fangen; see fangen; an 
separ. Prefix, 
ftnfler, dark, Adj. 
gifd), fish, m. pi. 2. 
gifd)lein, little fish, n. pi. 4. 
fleijjig, industrious, diligent 
fliegen, to fly, irreg. Y., ie, o, o. 
fli'e§en, to flow, irreg. Y., ie, o, o. 
fliegen, to flee, move rapidly, irreg. Y., 
ie, o, o. 

gliigelfletb, (winged) light dress, n. 
Slur, field, plain; f. pi. 6. 
glujj, river, m. pi. 1. 
folgen, follow, reg. Yerb. 
gorm, form, f. pi. 6. 
fortfabren, to continue, to drive on, 
irreg. Y. like fasten, a, u, a; sec. 
ch. in a; see fasten, 
fortging, from fortgefyen, to go away; 
see geben. 

fragen, to ask, reg. v., Imperf. also 
frug, irreg. 

grage, question, f. pi. 6. 
granfreicb, France, (n.) 
granfe, fringe, f., pi. 6. 
frei, free, paid. 

grernbe, stranger; Adj. used as Noun, 
m., f., and n.; pi. 6. 
greube, joy, gladness; f. pi. 6, „mit 
Steuben", the n in greuben is not 
the plur. of the word, but, a part 
here of its name. 


greunb, friend, m. pi. 2. 
freunblid), friendly, Adv. 
greunbfd)aft, friendship, f. pi. 6. 
freu’n, instead of freuen, to rejoice, 
reg. v. 

frieren, to freeze, irreg. Y., te, o, o. 
griebricb, Frederick, Noun Proper, m. 
frtebltd), peaceably, peaceful, quiet, 
frifcb, fresh, briskly, Adj. & Adv. 
frob, joyous, Adj. & Adv. 
frof)ltd), joyous, cheerful, Adj. 
grudjt, fruit, product, f. pi. 1. 
frtilj, early; in the morning. 
fut)ren, see fafjren. 

fiif)ren, to conduct, to lead, to guide, 
reg. v. 

fur, for, gov. Acc. 

gurcbtfame, "the timid”, Adj. used as 
Noun. 

(S). 

©ang, walk, gait, m. (pi. 1). 
ganj, quite, Adv. 

©anje, whole, Adj. used as Noun, 
gar, quite, Adv. 

geangfligt, worried; reg. Yerb., angfli* 
gen. 

geben, to give, irreg. Y., e, a, e, sec. 
ch. in i. 

geblieben, from bleiben, to remain, 
irreg. Y., ei, ie, ie. 

©efabr, danger, f. pi. 6. 

©efolge, train, attendance, retinue, n. 
(pl- 4). 

gefunben, from ftnben, fanb, gefunben, 
to find, irreg. Y. 

gegen, against and toward, gov. Acc. 
gegriffen, from greifen, to snatch, to 
seize; irr. Y., greifen, griff, gegriffen. 
gefyen, to go, to walk; irreg. Yerb., 
geben, gtng, gegangen. 
gebt’S, contracted from geljt e$; see 
geben, to go. 

©el)ulftn, she-mate, consort, f. pl. 6. 


207 


getg\ instead of geige; geigen, to fiddle, 
r eg. v. 

©eift, spirit, m. pi. 5. 
gefpmmen, see fontmen. 
geleud)tet, leudjten, to light, reg. Verb, 
geitau, exactly, accurately, 
genommen, from nebmen, nabm, ge* 
nomuien, to take; sec. change in i; 
spec, irreg., change in spelling; see 
„nefymen". 

gemig, enough, Adv. 

©eograpfyie, Geography; f. pi. 6. 
geraubt, raubcn, to robb, reg. v. 
gem, willingly, Adv., gem benfen, to 
like to think. 

©efd)<ift, business, n. pi. 2. 
gefcbefyen, happened, done, irreg. Verb., 
gefdjeben, gef<bab, gefcbeben. 
©efd)id)te, history, f. (pi. 6 “stories”). 
gefd)Iagen, P. P. of fd)lagen, to strike, 
irreg. V., a, u, a; sec. ch. in a. 
gefcbroinb ! quick ! 

gefeben, seen, from febeit, irreg. Verb., 
e, a, e. 

gefetien, fid) gefefiett, to associate, reg.; 

fid) gem gefetlen, to like to associate. 
©efid)t, face, n. pi. 5. (©cficbte, visions), 
©efprad), dialogue, n. pi. 2. 
gefprad)ig, communicative, affable, 
talkative, 
gefiem, yesterday, 
getban, see tbun. 
getragen, from trageit, see tragen. 
geroagt, from roagen, to dare, to ven- 
ture. 

geroobnt, accustomed. 

©efebtbe, vault, n. pi. 4. 
genmnnen, from geroinnen, to win, to 
gain, irr. V., i, a, o. 
getuorben, see roerben; here Verb., not 
Aux. 

gib, Imperat. 2d change, irreg. V.; 
geben, to give, e, a, e. 


gibt, from geben; see geben; cS gibt, 
there is or there are. 
ging, Imperf. of geben, to go, irreg. V., 
(spec.), geben, ging, gegangen. 
©ipfel, top (of trees, or mountains, 
etc.), m. pi. 4. 

glanjen, to shine, to glitter, to gleam, 
reg. v. 
gleicb, like. 

gleicbfam, as it were; like as if. 

©lieb, limb, member, n. pi. 5. 

©lode, bell, f. pi. 6. 

©lud, luck, good fortune, n. 
glittflicb, happy, Adj. 

©olb, gold, n. 

golb’nen, for golbenen, golden, of gold, 
©ott, God, m. (pi. 5). 

©rammatif, Grammar, f. pi. 6. 
gritjjen, to greet, reg. v. 
gut, good, Adj.; Comp, beffer, Superl. 
beft. 

& 

bn ben, to have, Auxil. 
baden, to chop, reg. v. 
balb, half. 

bart, hard; Comp, barter, Superl. bar* 
teft. 

batten, to hold, to keep (a promise), 
irreg. V., a, ie, a; sec. ch. in a. 
bait, from batten, to hold, see batten, 
banbeln, to trade, to act, reg. 
baffen, to hate, reg. 
baft, baben, to have, Aux. Verb, 
bat, from baben, has; anl)aben, to have 
on. 

bat’$, contracted from bat eg, has it; 

bat, from baben, Aux. 
batten, had, Imp. Ind. of baben, to 
have, 1st or 3d Pers. Plur.; Subj., 
1st or 3d Pers. Plur. batten; P. P. 
gebabt; see “Diagrams”. 

.fraud), breath, breeze, m. pi. 2. 
fraub, house, n. pi. 5. 


208 


#aufe, (house), Dat. Sing, of #au3, n. 
pi. 5; £aufer, Umlaut on a, a; ju 
£aufe, at home, like an Adverb. 
#au6ftaltung, house-keeping, economy, 
family. 

£au$tftor, house door, f. pi. 6. 
•£>auftttftetl, main, principal part, m. 
pi. 2. 

fte! heh ! ha! ho ! Inteij. 
ftebett, to heave, to lift, irreg. Y. e, o, o. 
£eerbe, flock, f. 6. 
jpeinricft, Henry, Noun, proper. 
ftei§en, to bid, to order; also, to be 
called; irreg. V., ei, ie, ei. 
fteifjt, bids, also, called, irreg. Verb., 
fteijjen, ftieg, gefteipe n, "ba$ fteifjt", 
“that means”, 
ft el I, clear, bright. 

-£>emb(ften, little shirt, n. pi. 4. 
fterauf, up, Adv. 

fteraufjteigeu, (to) ascend, rise, irreg. 

Yerb, ei, ie, ie, compound word, 
fterbftiicft, autumnal, 
fternieber, down. 

£err, Lord, master; Quality Noun. m. 
pi. 6. 

fterfagen, to recite, reg. 

£erj, heart, n. pi. 6. 
fterum, around, Adv. 
fteute, to-day, Adv. 
ftier, here, Adv. 

£immel, heaven, sky, m. pi. 4. 
ftin, there, to, Adv. 
ftinab, down, Adv. 

ftinauf, comp, from ftin and auf, thither, 
there up, up. 
ftinein, in, into, Adv. 
ftineintrat, Imperf. Ind. of ftineintreten, 
to step in, to enter, irreg. Y. like 
treten, to step, e, a, e. 

Winter, behind, Prep. gov. Dat. & Acc. 
#irtenflote, herdman’s flute, f. pi. 6. 
£irtenftab, shepherd’s crook, m. pi. 1. 
£trtentafcfte, shepherd’s pouch, f. pi. 6. 


ftocft, high; comp. ftofter, Superl. fto<ftfl, 
Adj. & Adv. 
ftocftft, see ftocft. 

£ocftmutft, pride, m. 

£of, court, court yard m. pi. 1. 

£6fling, courtier, m. pi. 2. 

ftoften, from ftocft, high, Adj.; Comp. 

ftofter, Superl. ftocbfh 
Jpofte, height, f. pi. 6. 
ftolen, to fetch, ftolen laffen, to send for. 
$olj, wood, n. pi. 5 (as kinds of wood, 
pi. 2). 

ftore — auf, from aufftoren, reg., to 
cease, to desist, to finish; auf is se- 
parable prefix, 
ftoren, to hear, reg. v. 

Jpuftn, chicken, n. pi. 5. 

£ulfe, help, f. pi., £ulf$leiflungen, acts 
of aid or help, 
pungent, to hunger, reg. v. 

#ut, hat, m. pi. 1. 

ft u ten, to watch, to tend the flocks, 
reg. v. 

& 

{(ft, I, pron. 
tftnt, to him, to it. 
iftn, him. 

Sftnen, to you. 
iftnen, to them, pron. 

3ftr, you; polite and respectful ad- 
dress in a familiar way of speaking; 
plur. of £>u, thou. 

iftr, you, if many, or more than one, 
her, m. & n. 

3ftr, your, m. & n. 

iftrer, of her, of them, her, m. 

3ftrer, of you. 

im, contracted from in bent, in the. 
immer, always. 

in, in, prep, governing Dat. and Acc. 
inrocnbig, internal. 

ift, is, Aux. Yerb., Inf. feitt. 
fa, yes, Adv. 


209 


3acob, Jacob, Proper Noun, m. 
3<icfcf)en, little jacket, n. pi. 4. 
jeber, each. 

Sebermann, every one, every body, 
any one. 

jeglidje, every, each, pron. 

3emanb, some one, pron. 

jejjt, now, at present, at this time. 

3ofo<mn, John, Noun proper. 

3ugenb, youth, f. 

jung, young; Comp, jiinger, Superl. 
jiingjl. 

3«nge, young one, youth, Adj. used 
as Noun. 

t. 

fait, cold, Adj. 

fam, Imperf. Ind. of fommen, irreg. 

Verb, came; see fommen, to come, 
fann, can, Yb. having B. C., Pres. 
Ind. fann, Impf. fonnte, P. P. gefonnt; 
Inf. fonnen, to be able. 

$arld)en, little Charles, n. pi. 4. 
faufen, to buy, reg. 
faum, scarcely, Adv. 
fein, no. 

fennen, to know, to be acquainted 
with, Yb. hav. Both Ch., vowel, a. 
jterl, fellow, m. pi. 2. 

Jltnb, child, n. pi. 5. 
j?int>erd)cn, little children, Diminutive 
of 3linb; plur. 4. 

.ftinberleben, child’s life, n. 

$irfd)e, cherry, f. pi. 6. 
flappern, to clapper, to rattle, reg. 
flar, clear, bright, Adj. 

$leib, dress, n. pi. 5. 
flein, small, Adj. 

jllojje, Sing, .ftlojj, lump, log, block 
©f wood, (pi. 1). 

Hug, prudent, 
focpen, to cook, reg. v. 
fommen, to come, irreg. Y. fommen, 
fam, gefommen. 


$6nig, king, m. pi. 2. 

$onigin, queen, f. pi. 6. 
fonnt\ instead of fonnte, could, Im- 
perf. of fann, Yerb. having B. C. 
fonnten, could; Yerb. having B. C. 
Pres. Ind. fann. 

fdnnt, from fdnnen, to be able; Y. hav 
Both Ch., Pres. Ind. fann. 
^oftbarfeit, precious thing, f. pi. 6. 
^rdmerin, store woman, here market 
woman, f. pi. 6. 

franfen, to vex, to grieve, reg. v. 

friegen, to get, reg. v. 

furj, short; Comp, fitter, Sup. fiirjcft. 

Q 

ladjeln, to smile, reg. Yerb, Inf. 
Iddjeln, without the e in the ending, 
this owing to the liquid l at the 
end of the stem. 

lag, Imperf. Ind. of liegen, to lie, to 
put, irreg. Y., ie, a, e. 
lanblidf, rustic, Adj. 
long, long, Adj. & Adv. 
lange, long, Adv., & Adj. 
la§, instead of laffe, from laffen, to 
leave, let, permit, irreg. Y. laffen, 
lief$, gelajfen. 

laffen, to leave, to let, irr. Y., a, te, a; 
sec. ch. in a; madjen laffen, to have 
made. 

Safi, load, burden, weight, f. pi. 6. 
Softer, vice, n. pi. 4. 
laufen, to run, irreg. Y., au, ie, au. 
laut, loud, Adv. 

Saut, sound, m. pi. 2. 
lauten, to sound, to be pronounced, 
reg. v. 

leben, to live, reg. 
lebenbig, living, having life, Adj. 
leer, void, empty, Adj. & Adv. 
legen, to lay, to put, reg. v. 
lepren, to teach, reg. 
letcfyl, light, easy. 


210 


teife, soft, gentle, slow, 
lenfen, to manage, to govern, to steer, 
r eg. 

Tern’, instead of lerne, Imperat., ler* 
nen, to learn, reg. v. 

Sefebud), “Reader”, n., see 53udj. 
Ieud)ten, to light, reg. v. 

£id)t, light, n. pi. 5. (Sin 2fd)t ging 
iijm auf: he commenced to under- 
stand. 

lieb, dear, Adj. 

Heben, to love, reg. 

Sieb, song, n. pi. 5. 

liegen, to lie (down), irreg. V., ie, a, c. 
Sob, praise, n. 

Iofd)en, auslofd)en, to extinguish, reg. 
Cofdjbtatt, blotting paper, n. pi. 5. 

Suft, air, f. pi., drafts of air, 1. 
luftig, merrily, cheerfully, Adv. 

m. 

madjen, to make, to do, reg. Verb, 
’mai, abbreviated, instead of einmat, 
once, Adv. 
mein, my, poss. pron. 
man, one, indef. pron., “they”, man 
fagt, they say, it is said. 

UTfann, man, m. pi. 5. 

Sftanncfyen, little man, n. pi. 4. 
mand), many a (person or thing). 
UJfappe, portfolio, f. pi. 6. 

1Ufee r, sea, n. pi. 2. 
metjr, more, Adv. 
mein, my, m. & n. 
meinen, to mean, to signify, reg. v. 
meiner, of me, and mine, m. 
mfeifler, master, m. pi. 4. 
mZenfcb, man, human being, person, 
m. Quality Noun (pi. 6). 
1!Jfenfd)ettgeftd)t, men’s face, human 
face, n. pi. 5. 

merlen, to perceive, get aware, reg. v. 
mid), me. 


miibern, to soften, to mitigate, to 
sooth, to lessen, reg. 
mit, with, prep, governing Dat. 
mir, to me. 

miteinanber, together, Adv. 
lOfittagSfupbe, soup for dinner, f. pi. 6. 
modjte, Imperf. Subj. of mag, Inf. mo* 
gen, verb, having B. C., to may, 
have a mind, to dare; moefyte, I 
should like, 
mbglidj, possible. 

9)fonb, moon, m. pi. 2. 
morgen, to morrow, Adv. 
mforgenflunb’, for — (iunbe, morning 
hour, m. pi. 6. 
miibe; tired, Adj. 

SOfufyle, mill, f. pi. 6. 

UJfunb, mouth, m. 

mufj, must, Verb, having B. C., Inf. 

rnuffen, Impf. mufjte, P. P. gemujjt. 
UJfujjiggang, idleness, m 
U)f utter, mother, f. pi. 3 
HJfutlj, courage, m. 

UJfutbige, courageous, Adj. used as 
Noun. 

31 . 

nad), after, to, Prep. gov. Dat. 
9fad)brud, emphasis, m. 
nacf)laffig, slovenly, carelessly. 
nad)ft, nearest, next, Superl. of nai), 
near. 

Dffadjfte, next, nearest, Sup. of nai), 
near; Adj. used as noun. 

3ffad)t, night, f. pi. 1. 
natjen, to approach, reg. 

Dffame and 9famen, name, m. pi. 6. 
Sffarr, fool, m., Qual. Noun (pi. 6). 
Ufafe, nose, f. pi. 6. 

Ufaturroiffenfcbaft, science of nature, 
physics, f. pi. 6. 

Ufebel, fog, m. pi. 4. 

neben, aside of, gov. Dat. & Acc. 


neljmen, to take, irreg. Y., sp., ne^= 
men, naljm, genommen, sec. change 
in i; nimm, Imperat.; nimm — oor is 
from the verb in full, cornermen, to 
take before one, to undertake, to 
take in hand, 
neu, new, Adj. 
nid)t, not, Adv. 

nicbte, nothing, adv.; 91idjts, nothing, 
Noun. 

nieber, down. 

niebergelaifen, from nieberlaffen, let 
down, irreg. Y. like laffen, see laf> 
fen. 

niebertropfen, drop down; compound 
word from nieber, down, and tropfen, 
to drop, reg. v. 
nod), yet, still, Adv. 

91ot^, need, difficulty, distress, f. 
nun, well, now, Adv. 
nur, only, Adv. 

91 ufj, nut, f. pi. 1. 

^tutjen, advautage, profit, m. 

£>. 

0bjt, fruit, f. 

0d)fe, ox, m. pi. 6. 

Dbem, also : 2ttl)em, breath, m. 
ober, or, Coord. Conj. 

Dfen, stove, m. pi. 3. 
bffnen, to open, reg. Y. 
oft, often, Adv. 
ot)ne, without, gov. Acc. 
orbentHd), properly. 

Drt, place; hamlet, village, m. pi., in 
the former sense, 2; in the latter, 5. 

% 

$adjtgut, rented farm, n. pi. 5. 
patten, to rent — a farm, -giiter, reg. v. 
$)alaft, palace, m. pi. 1. 

^anjer, armour, m. pi. 4. 
papier, paper, n. pi. 2. 

$ari3, Paris, (n.). 


9>arttcipium, Participle, n. pi. $)arti* 
dpien. 

9>flid)t, duty, f. pi. 6. 

$flug, plow, m. pi. 1. 

3)ofttion, position, f. pi. 6. 

3>ofl, post, post office, f. 
pubern, to powder, reg. v. 

£ 1 . 

Quelle, spring, f. pi. 6. 

9i. 

Staff), counsel, advice, m. (pi., in that 
sense, 9iati)fd)lage; else, Siatt)e, in 
the sense of: counsellers. „Statl) iuei> 
ben", means will be found out.) 
ratt)en, to guess, to advise, irreg. Y., 
a, ie, a; sec. change in a. 
raufd)en, rustle, to murmur, to purl, 
reg. v. 

redjnen, to count, to reckon, to cy- 
pher, reg. v. 
red)t, right, Adj. 

Stebe, speech, narration, oration, f. 
pi. 6. 

rtgen, to move, to stir, reg. 
Stegcnbogen, rain bow, m. pi. 4. 
reidjen, to reach, reg. 

Steife, ripeness, f. 
reimen, to rhyme, reg. v. 

Steiter, horseman, m. pi. 4. 
rid)tig, right, just, accurate, Adj. & 
Adv. 

Stiegel, bolt, m. pi. 4. 
rinnen, to run, to flow, irreg. Y., {, a, o. 
ritt, from reiten, to ride on horseback, 
irreg. Y., reiten, ritt, geritten. 
3totfd)en, little coat, n. pi. 4. 
roflg, rose-coloured, rose like. 

Stojjlein, little horse, n. pi. 4. 
rotf), red, Adj. 

Stiiden, back, m. pi. 4. 

Stub’, Stui)e, rest, f. 
rut)en, to rest, reg v. 


212 


Sprung, emotion, f. pi. 6. 
riiljren, to move, to stir, reg. v. 
riiijrte, moved, touched, reg. v. 
runt), round, Adj. & Adv. 
fllunbgefang, round -song, roundelay, 
m. pi. 1. 

fad)t, gently, Adv. 

©ad, sack, bag, m. pi. 1. 
fagen, to say, reg. v. 
fagte, said, reg. v., fagen. 

©age, saw, f. pi. 6. 

fafyen, saw, irreg. V., fefyen, fa!;, ge* 
feljen; sec. ch. in ie. 

©aite, chord, f. pi. 6. 

©ant>, sand, m. 

©anbban!, sand-banfc, f. pi. 1. 
fanft, soft, Adj. & Adv. 
fang, Imperf. Ind. of fingen, to sing, 
irr. Y., i, a, n. 

©a£, sentence, phrase, m. pi. 1. 
©ci£d)en, little seutence, n. pi. 4. 
fdufeln, to buzz, to breathe, reg. 
©$af, sheep, n. pi. 2. 
flatten, to sound, resound, reg. v. 
fd^affen, to work, to do, reg. v., also 
fdjaffen, to create, irreg. V., fd^affen, 
fd>uf, gefdjaffen. 

fdfyaflen, to sound, irreg. Y., a, o, o. 
fd)arf, sharp, Adj. 

©<fya$, treasure, m. pi. 1. 

©d)ajjmeiffer, treasurer (literally : trea- 
sure-master), m. pi. 4. 

©cfyein, shine, lustre, brightness, sem- 
blance, m. 

fcfyeinen, to shine, irreg. Y., ei, ie, ie. 
fcfyenfen, to present, reg. v. 

©d>erj, joke, joking, m. pi. 2. 
fduden, to send, to dispatch; reg. v. 
©d)iff, ship, n. pi. 2. 

©d)iffer, sailor, m. pi. 4. 

©dfifffafyrt, navigation, a sailing, f. 
pi. (5. 


©djlaf, sleep, m. 

fd)lafen, to sleep, irreg. Y., a, ie, a; 
sec. ch. in a. 

fdjldfji, from fd)lafen, to sleep, irreg. 
Y., a, ie, a; a in fc^ldfft is “Second 
Change”. 

fd)lie§, instead of fcfyliefje, Imperat.; 
fd)Itefjen, to close, lock, irreg. Y., 
ie, o, o. 

fcfyltejjen, to close, irreg. Y., ie, 0, o; 

anfcfyliefjen, to join. 

©djlofj, lock, castle, n. pi. 5. 

©d)lujj, close, conclusion, m. pi. 1. 
©cfymerj, pain, m. pi. 6. 
©cfymefterltngeflugel, wing of butterfly, 
m. pi. 4. 

fcfymiefcen, to forge, reg. 

©djnabelein, little beak, n. pi. 4. 
fcfynefl, quick, Adj. 

©d)nur, string, f. pi. 1 (and 6). 
fcfyon, already, Adv. 
fdjon, pretty, fine, Adj. 

©djopfer, creator, m. 
fcfyreiben, to write, irreg. Y., ei, ie, ie. 
fc^uf, from fdjaffen, to create, fc^affen, 
fauf, gefc^affen. 

©filler, scholar, pupil, m. pi. 4. 
©cbu(j, report (of a gun), m. pi. 1. 
fd)tt>eben, to float, to hover, to move, 
as on wings, reg. v.; fd)t»ebete, 
lengthened form, for fcfyroebte, (so- 
lemn). 

fdjroeigen, to be silent, irreg. Y., ei, 
ie, ie. 

©d)tt>ei{j, sweat, m. 
fdjroer, heavy, difficult. 

©djroefter, sister, f. pi. 6. 
fdjroimmen, to swim, irreg. Y., i, a,o; 
nacfyfcfyroimmen, to try to follow, in 
swimming, swim after (intent), 
fdjtuijjen, to sweat, reg. v. 

©eele, soul, f. pi. 6. 
fet>en, to see, irreg. V., e, a, e. sec. ch. 
in ie. 


213 


fe’&'tt, instead of fetjen. 
fet)r, very, much. 

fei, Subj. Pres, of fein, to be, Aux. V.; 
v fei eg, be it. 
fein, his, m. & n. 
fein, to be, Aux. 

feiner, of him, of it; his, m. absol. 
©eite, side, page, f. pi. 6. 
felt ft, self. 

fefjen, to put, to place, reg. v. 

fid), himself, herself, itself; themselves. 

ftdjer, safe, secure, Adj. & Adv. 

©ie, you. 

fte, she, they, them. 
ftef>, Imperat. : see; irreg. Yerb : fefjen, 
fal), gefeljen; the ie is “Second 
Change”; see term in Grammar, 
book. 

fieljt, 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. of feljetj, to 
see, irreg. Y., c, a, e; ie is Second 
Change; augfeljen, to look, 
ftnb, are, from fein, to be, Aux. Yerb. 
ftnfen, to sink, irreg. V., i, a, u. 
fo, then, so, Adv. 

©oljn, son, m. pi. 1. 
fold), such. 

©olbat, soldier, m. Qual. N. (pi. ,6.). 
fed, shall, Pres. Ind. of foden (on List 
of Yerbs having B. C. 
fod’g, bag fod’g, contracted from foil 
eg, that it shall do, that it is in- 
tended for. 

fonbern, but, used only after a nega- 
tion. 

©onne, sun, f. pi. 6. 

©omtenuntergang, sun’s going down, 
sunset, m. 

©onntag, Sunday, m. pi. 2; beg ©onn= 
tagg, on Sunday. 

(gorge, care, attention, f. pi. 6. 
fpalten, to split, partly irreg. Y., 
fpalten, fpaltete, gefpaltcit. 
fpannen, to harness, to put, reg. v. 
fpiit, late. 


fpajiercn, to walk, reg. Yerb, Accent 
on ieren; drops „ge" in Past Part.; 
fpajieren getyen, to take a walk, 
©piel, play, n. pi. 2; Yerb, to play: 
fpielen, reg. v., fpielen, fpielte, ge* 
fpielt. 

fpielen, to play, reg. v. 

©pielen, play, n. 

©piel$eug, play things, n. (pi. in Ger- 
man, ©pielfad)en.) 
fpij), pointed. 

fprad), fpradjen, forms of Imperf. Ind. 
of fpred)en, irr. Y., e, a, o; sec. ch. 
in i. 

fprad)log, speechless. 

©predjen, speaking, n. (Inf. used as 
Noun). 

fprid)t, 2d Change, Pres. Ind. 3 Sing., 
of fpred)en, irreg. Verb, e, a, o, to 
speak. 

fpringen, to jump, irreg. V., t, a, u. 
fpiiren, to feel, perceive, reg. v. 

©tabt, city, f. pi. 1. 

©tabtdjen, little town, n. pi. 4. 

©tad, stable, m. pi. 1. 

©tanb, station, position, m. (pi. clas- 
ses of society as representing 
ranks, 1). 

flanben, stood, Imperf. of jleljen, flanb, 
geflanben. 

flarf, strong; Compar. flcirfer, Superl. 
ftarffl. 

flattlid), stately, Adj. 

©taub, dust, m. 
jleden, to put, reg. v. 
ftel)en, to stand, irreg. Yerb (spec.), 
fleljen, flanb, geflanben; nmljl fleljen, 
to look well, behoove. 

©teuerruber, helm, rudder, n. pi. 4. 
fliegen, ascended, from fleigen, irreg. 

Yerb, fleigen, flieg, gefliegen. 
flid, still, Adj. 

©tirn, forehead, f. pi. 6. 

©trafje, street, f. pi. 6. 


214 


©traucfy, shrub, m. pi. 5 (©traucf)er, 
also „©ejtrdud)e"). 

ftreben, to strive, to aim, to endea- 
vour, reg. v. 

firecfen, to stretch, reg. v. 
ftreicfyeltt, to stroke, reg. v. 

©trofyfeffet, cane seated chair, m. pi. 4. 
©tiicf, piece, n. pi. 2. 

©tunbe, hour, “league”, f. pi. 6. 
©turm, storm, m. pi. 1. 

©uppe, soup, f. pi. 6. 

©iippdben, “little soup”, n. pi. 4. 
fu§, sweet. 

©iifjigfeit, sweetness, f. pi. 6. 

©plbe, syllable, f. pi. 6. 


Zciq, day, m. pi. 2. 
tanjen, to dance, reg. v. 

Sonjliebcpen, little dance song, n. pi. 4. 
SEaufenb, thousand, num. 

Steiify, pond, m. pi. 2. 

Serb text, m. pi. 2. 

£pal, valley, vale, n. pi. 6. 

Slpdtigfeit, activity, action, f. pi. 6. 
Speil, part, m. pi. 2. 
tpeilen, to divide, reg. v. 
tpeuer, dear. 

24)ier, beast, animal, n. pi. 2. 

2:por, gate, n. pi. 2. 
tfyun, to do, irreg. Y. (spec.), t§un, 
tfyat, getfyan. 

2:t)ure, door, f. pi. 6. 

Stpurm, tower, steeple, m. pi. 1. 

Siefe, depth, f. pi. 6. 

Sill (Sulenfpiegel, Noun proper, name. 
Xinte, ink, f. pi. 6 (sometimes spelled 
£)inte). 

£ifd), table, m. pi. 2. 
tobt, dead, 
toll, mad, Adj. 

Son, sound, tone, m. pi. 1. 

Sonfatl, sound, accent, m. 


$opf, pot, m. pi. 1. #ul;n im £epf, 
chicken for dinner. 

trdgt, from tragen, to carry, irreg. Y., 
a, u, a; sec. ch. in d. 
treiben, to drive, irreg. Y., ei, ie, ie. 
trcnnbar, separable, Adj. 

Stropfletn, little drop, n. pi. 4. 
tiicptig, valiant, stout, strong. 

It 

iiben, to practice, to exercise, reg. v. 
fiber, over, across, prep, governing 
Dat. & Acc.; concerning. 
Ueberleguitg, consideration, reflection, f. 
fiber’m, contracted from iiber bem, 
over the, across the. 
fiberfe^en, to translate, reg., accent 
here on fejjen. 

Ueberfe^ung, translation, f. pi. 6. 
Uebung, exercise, practice, f. pi. 6. 
Ufer, shore, n. pi. 4. 
umarmcn, to embrace, reg. v. 
umbrefyen, turn over, reg. v. 
untgeben, to surround, irreg. Y., like 
geben, e, a, e; no „ge" in P. P., 
owing to „um" being here an in- 
separable prefix, 
unb, and, Coordin. Conj. 
unbelannt, unknown, Adj. 

Ungefd)icfte$, something awkward. 
Unglficf, misfortune, n. 
unmdfjig, immoderately, Adj. & Adv. 
un$, us, pron. 
unfer, of us, our, m. & n. 
unter, under, below, gov. Dat. & Acc. 
untergegangen, gone down, set, P P. 
from untergefyen, to go down, to 
set; unter is here a separable pre- 
fix; the accent, stress of voice in 
speaking, is therefore on unter, 
uittergefyen. 

untergefyen, go down, to set, irreg. 

Yerb, like gefyen; see gefyen. 
u. f. to., wnb fo ttteiter, and so forth. 


215 


S. 

Sater, father, m. pi. 3. 
tiaterltcb, paternal, Adj. 
tierbergen, to conceal, hide; irreg. Y., 
e, a, o; sec. ch. in t. 

Sergangenbeit, past time, or past 
tense, f. pi. 6. 

tiergebt, from tiergeben, to pass away, 
irreg. Yerb, like gefyen; see gel)en. 
tiergeffen, forgotten, P. P. of irr. Y., 
tiergeffen, Tune e, a, e, tiergeffen, tier- 
gafj, ttergeffen, no „ge" in P. P. 
owing to the insep. Prefix » e r— ; 
“Second Change’’ in i, oergiffejl, 
tiergifjt, Imperat. tiergijj. 

Sergnugen, pleasure, joy, n. 
tierflagt, accused; reg. y., tierflagen, to 
accuse. 

tierleumben, to traduce, reg. 
tierfcbteben, different, Adj. 
tierfcbiitten, to spill, reg. v. 
tierfefyen, to provide, irreg. Y., like 
fefyen; see feben. 
tierfeljen, to reply, reg. v. 
tierfpatet, delayed, reg. Yerb, tierfpa* 
ten, (ftcb, himself). 

tierjteben, to understand, irreg. Y.,sp., 
tierjteben, tierflanb, tierftanben (like 
fteben); „tierjlebt fldb", of course. 
Serrintnberung, wonder, surprise, f. 
»erwel)ren, to defend, to hinder, to 
blame, reg. v. 

Setter, cousin, m. pi. 4. 

Sieb, beast, n. 

tiiel, much, Adj. & Adv. 

tiier, four, numeral. 

Sierte, fourth, from tiier, four, 
tiiergebn, fourteen. 

Socaltuecbfel, change of vowel, m. pi. 4. 
Sogel, bird, m. pi. 3. 

Sbgelein, little bird, n. pi. 4; ordinary 
form: Sbglein, without the e. 
Sbgletn, little bird, n. pi. 4. 


Soil, people, n. pi. 5. 
tioU, full, Adj. 

tiofljtanbig, complete, Adj. & Adv. 

tiom, contracted from tion hem, from 

tion, from, of, gov. Pat. [the. 

Sortrag, recitation, reading, m. pi. 1. 
tiortragcn, deliver, speak, recite. 

oor, before, prep. gov. Dat. & Acc. 
tiorig, former, Adj. 

Sortbeil, advantage, m. pi. 2. 

Sorfplbe, prefix, f. pi. 6. 



wacben, to watch, reg. v. 
tnacbfen, to grow, irreg. Y., a, u, a; 
sec. ch. in a. 

©acbterrnf, watchman’s cry, m. pi. 2. 
wagen, to venture, to dare, reg. v. 
roabr, true, Adj. 

©alb, wood, forest, m. pi. 5. 

©anb, wall, f. pi. 1. 

©anberer, ©anbrer, traveller, m. p 1. 4. 
©anberftab, wandering staff, walking 
stick. 

tcaun, when, Conj. 

war, was, Impf. Ind. of irreg. Aux. 

Y. fein, to be. 
warb, see werben. 

war, instead of ware, Imperf. Subj. of 
bin, I am, or, fein, to be, Aux. 
ware, were, Aux. Yerb, Inf. fetn; as 
Aux. of werben, it must be trans- 
lated by “had”. 

waren, were, pi. of war; see war, also 
the Diagrams, 
warm, warm, Adj. 
warten, to wait, reg. v. 
warum ? why ? Interrogation, Adverb, 
wag, what ?, Interrog. Pron.; also re- 
lat. pron., which. 

©offer, water; n. pi. 4. 

©eg, way, m. pi. 2; wobin beg ©egeg? 

where are you going to ? 

Weil, because, Conj. requiring 3d pos. 


216 


©eife, while, idle time, leisure, delay, 
admitting of circumspection, f. 
toeinten, wept, reg. Verb, Inf. written. 
toei§, from toiffett, Yerb having both 
Changes, to know; Inf. totffett, Pres. 
Ind. toei§, Impf. tou§te, P. P. getou§t. 
toeit, far, distant, oon toeitem, from 
afar, in a distance. 

toeiter, further, on; Compar. of toeit, 
©etjeit, wheat, m. 
toelcfyer, which, who. 

©etle, wave, f. pi. 6. 

©enbuttg, turn, turning, f. pi. 6. 
toemt, if, Conj. requiring 3d pos. 
toenig, little, Adv. & Adj. 
toerbett, to become, Inf. Pres., irreg. 
ordinary and irreg. Auxiliary Yerb. 
In bunfel toerbett, it is the ordinary 
Yerb in the full sense of: to be- 
come, to get. The P. P. of this 
Yerb, here, would therefore be : 
getoorbett, not toorbett. ©erben is 
used as an Auxiliary for toerben, 
fetn, and other Yerbs. When used 
with an Inf., the form, of which 
toerben is a part, is Future Active, 
for instance : 3d) toerbe toerbett, I 
shall become; id) toerbe fetn, I shall 
be; I shall love, td) toerbe Iteben; 
but when used with a Past Part., 
of another Yerb, then the form of 
which toerben is a part, is Passive : 
id) bin geliebt toorbett, I have been 
loved; id) toerbe geliebt toerben, I 
shall be loved. In the latter case 
the whole form in which toerben is 
used, is both, Passive and Future. 
So we see it twice. If an Auxiliary 
is required for toerben, then this is, 
either [ein, to be, or, toerben itself, 
or, both. For this use of toerben, 
those pupils for whose benefit this 
explanation is intended, will refer 
to the book itself. 


toidjtig, weighty, important, Adj. 
toiber, against, gov. Acc. 
toie, how, as Adv. 
toieber, again, Adv. 
toieberfyolen, to repeat, reg. v., accent 
on f)ofen. 

toiegen, to rock, reg. v. 

Will, will, Yerb having B. C., Imperf. 

tooftte, P. P. gerooQt. 
wifijt, from wotlen, Pres. Ind. will, I 
am willing, will. 

2Binf, wink, beck, hint, m. pi. 2. 

SBinb, wind, m. pi. 2. 

2Btnb|KC(e, quietness of the wind, 
calm, f. 

©inter, winter, m. pi. 4. 
roir, we, pron. 

rotrb, see tnerben; 3d Sing. Pres. Ind. 
©tpfel, top of trees, m. pi. 4. 
mo, where, Adv. 
mofier ? whence ? 

moljl, well (as it is likely, yon do), 
mobtn, whither, Adv. 
moljnen, to live, reside, reg. v. 

©olfe, cloud, f. pi. 6. 
to often, to be willing, Yerb having 
B. C. 

tooflt*, instead of tooftte; see tooftte. 
tooUte, would, Imperf. Ind. of will, 
Y. having both changes : Pres. Ind. 
will, Imperf. tooftte, P. P. getooUt. 
Pres. Inf. tooften, to be willing, 
tooran, wherein? in what? used as 
pron. 

©ort, word, n. pi. 2 (words in their 
meaning), or pi. 5 (words simply 
as words). 

©ortangabe, notation of (meaning of) 
words : ©ort-an-gab-e. In pro- 
nunciation, divide: ©ort-an-go-be. 
©orterbudj, dictionary, n. pi. 5. 
too’$, contracted from too e$, where it. 
©unfd), wish, m. pi. 1. 


217 


hmrbe, Imperf. Ind. of tverben. 
hmfjte, Imperf. Subj. of mtflen, to 
know, Yerb having B. 0. I should, 
could know. 

tou§ten, knew, Imperf. Ind. of miffen, 
to know. Verb having B. C. 
miifte, waste, Adj. 

8 - 

gafjlen, to pay, reg. v. 
gafylen, to count, to number, to reckon, 
reg. v. 

3afyne, sing. tooth, m. (pi. 1). 

gartlid), tenderly, Adv. & Adj. 
gef)n, ten, numeral. 

3eid)ett, sign, mark, n. pi. 4. 
geigen, to show, reg. v. 

3eile, line, f. pi. 6. 

3ett, time, f. pi. 6. 

3elroort, verb, n. pi. 5. 
gerrei§en, to tear, irreg. V., ei, i, {; to 
dissolve. 

gerfcbneiben, to cut to pieces; irreg. 
Yerb; like fcfjneiben, fdjnitt, gefdjnit* 
ten; no „ge»" in P. P., owing to the 
inseparable Prefix. 


gicfjen, to draw, irreg. Y., giefjen, gog, 
gegogen. 

gog, giefyen, to draw, wander, irreg. Y., 
gie^en, gog, gegogen. 

gogfl, Imperf. Ind. of giefjen, to draw, 
irreg. Y., gietyen, gog, gegogen. 
gu, at, to, Prep, governing Dat. 
3ufaII, accident, chance, m. pi. 1. 
gum, gur, contracted from gu bent, gu 
ber, to the; wirb gum, roirb gur, be- 
comes a. 

gur, contracted from, gu ber, to the, at 
the. 

gurutffe^ren, to return, reg. v. 
gufammengenontmen, compound from 
gufammen, together, and genommen, 
taken; see net) men, to take. 
3utrauen, confidence, trust, n. 
guweilen, sometimes, Adv. 
gmar, indeed, Adv. 

groei, two, numeral, sometimes declined 
like Def. Art. in Gen. and Dat. as 
Plur. 

gmeierlei, of two different sorts. 

groeite, second, Adj. 

gnnfcfyen, between, gov. Dat. & Acc. 


DICTIONARY. 

(English-German.) 


A. 

a, ein, eine, einen. 

Adam, 2lbam, Prop. Noun, 
air, Suft, f. (pi. drafts of air, 1). 
and, unb. 
alone, aflein. 

are, from to be, fein, see Diagr. 

B. 

be, to be, fein, see Diagr. 
beast, Ifyier, roilbe$ $f)ier, n. pi. 2. 
beautiful, fcfyon. 
bird, ©ogel, m. pi. 3. 


blot, to blot, auslofdjen, reg. 
book, ©ud), n. pi. 5. 
bought, to buy, faufen, reg. 
brother, ©ruber, m. pi. 3. 
brought, to bring, bringen, Yerb hav- 
ing B. Ch., and spec. : bringen, 
brattyte, gebradjt. 

c. 

call, to call, nennen, Yerb having B. 
Ch.; vowel a. 

can, to be able, fonnen, Pres, fonn, 
Yerb having B. Ch.; vowel a. 


218 


care, (Surge, f. pi. 6, ©orgfalt, f.; to 
take care, 21d)t (f.) fyaben, 2ld)t or 
2ld)tung (f.) geben; geben, irr. V., 
e, a, e; sec. ch. in i; take care, gib 
2ld)t or geben @ie 21d?t. 
child, ^inb, n. pi. 5. 
come, to come, fommen, Jam, gefont* 
men, irr. V., spec, 
count, to count, jal)Ien, r eg. 
creature, @efd)6pf, n. pi. 2. 

D. 

down, nieber. 
dress, $Ieib, n. pi. 5. 

E. 

earth, Srbe, f. pi. 6. 
every, jeber, jebe, jebeS. 

F. 

father, 33ater, m. pi. 3. 
field, gelb, n. pi. 5. 

flash, to flash, fprufyen, reg., glanjen, 
reg. 

fly, to fly, fliegen, irreg. Y., ie, o, o. 
for, fur, prep. gov. Acc. 
form, to form, bilben, reg. 
fowl, SSogel, m. pi. 3, ©efliigel, n. 

G. 

give, geben; geben, to give, irreg. Y., 
e, a, e; sec. ch. in i. 

go, to go, ge^en, ging, gegangen, spec. 
God, ©ott, m. (pi. 5). 
good, gut. 

great, grofj; Comp, grofjer, Sup. 
grb§ejlt. 

ground, ©runb, m., (Srbe, f. pi. 6. 

H. 

have, to have, tyaben, Imperf. tyatte; 

see Diagr. 
he, er. 

her, ibr, {tyre, tt)ren. 


help, ©efjulfe, m.; Qual. Noun, ©et>iil* 
ftn, f. pi. 6. 

him, to him, iljtti; him, Acc., ibn. 
history, ©ef$id)te, f. (pi., stories, 6) 
how ? rate? 

I. 

I, it*. 

in, in, Prep. gov. Dat. & Acc. 
ink, Xinte, f. pi. 6; spelled also, Dinte. 
into, in, gov. Dat. & Acc. 

Indian, 3nbianer, m. pi. 4. 

is, from to be; see Diagr. 

it, eg. 

its, fein, feine, feinen. 

K. 

kite, £)radje, m. pi. 6. 

L. 

lap, <Sdjoo§, m. pi. 2. 
leaf, 23latt, n. pi. 5. 
learn, to learn, lernett, reg. 
lesson, Section, f. pi. 6 (pronounce ti, 
here before the vowel, o, like ji). 
lest, bamit nid)t, bafj nid)t, fonft. 
let, to let, leave, kjfen, irreg. Y., a, 
ie, a; sec. ch. in a. 

lies, to lie, liegen, irreg. Y., ie, a, e. 
light, Sicfyt, n. pi. 5. 
living, lebenb, lebenbig. 

Lord, £err, m.; Qual. Noun. 

M. 

man, $tann, m. pi. 5; general : bet 
'OTenfd), m.; Qual. Noun, 
many, oiele, pi. (decl. like Def. Art.), 
make, to make, mad)en, reg. 
map, Sflappe, f. pi. 6, (Sanb*) $arte, f. 
me (to me), mir. [pi. 6. 

meet, pajfenb, fd^icffid). 
mother, Gutter, f. pi. 3. 
must, muffen, Pres. Ind. mufj; Yerb 
having B. Ch., vow’s u, it. 


219 


my, mein, nteine, meinen. 

N. 

name, 9famen, also Xiamen, m. 6; to 
have a name : fyeiffan, irreg. V., ei, 
ie, ei; my name is Charles, id) fyeifje 
Sari. 

nature, 91a tur, f. (pi. kinds of human 
nature, dispositions, 6). 
new, neu. 
not, nidfa. 
now, fajjt, nun. 

o. 

oh! o! a< f»! 

of, non, gov. Dat. 
of the, beg, ter. 

on, auf, Prep. gov. Dat. or Acc. 

out, aug, gov. Dat. 

over, nber, gov. Dat. '& Acc. 

P. 

paper, papier, n. (pi., writings, docu- 
ments, 2); blotting paper, £ofd)* 
papier. 

pen, geber, f. pi. 6. 
play, to play, fpielen, reg. 

R. 

rustle, to rustle, raufdjen, r eg. 

s. 

said, to say, fagen, reg. 
science, SBiffanfdjaft, f. pi. 6. 
see, to see, fel)en, irreg. Y., e, a, e; 
sec. ch. in ie. 

shall, fallen, molten, merben, Yerb 
found among those having B. Ch. 
shine, to shine, fafyeinen, irreg. Y., ei, 
ie, ie. 

should, from shall, fallen; also to be 
translated by the Subj. of the Yerb 
with which it stands, 
shown, to show, jeigen, reg. 
sing, to sing, fingen, irreg. Y., i, a, u. 


sit, to sit, fftjen, irreg. Y., ft^en, fafj, 
pefeffen, spec, 
spill, oerfcputten, reg. 
star, ©tern, m. pi. 2. 
steeple, £t)urm, m. pi. 1. 
suffuse, to suffuse, ufcergieffan, irreg. 
Y., ie, o, o; fiber is here used as in- 
separable prefix, so the accent is 
on gieffan. 

sun, ©onne, f. pi. 6. 

T. 

table, $ifd), m. pi. 2. 
take, to take, ncpmen, naljm, genom* 
men; sec. ch. in i; Imperat. nimm; 
2d and 3d Pers. Sing. : nimmft, 
nimmt (“spec.*’), 
the, ber, bie, bag, ben. 
that, bag, ben, bie, ber; also : biefer, 
biefe, biefeg, biefen. 
that, faner, fane, faneg, fanen. 
that, bafj, Conj. requiring 3d pos. 
them, fie. 

there, ba; there is, there are, eg gibt, 
eg ftnb beren (lit. of them), 
thereof, beffen, to be translated also 
by form of possess, pron. fain, faine, 
fain. 

thy, bein, beine, beinen. 
to, ju, um ju. 
too, JU. 

town, ©tabt, f. pi. 1; in town, in ber 
©tabt. 

u. 

United, $ereiruigt, from to unite, per* 
einigen, reg.; when part of a name, 
then with Capital 33, 33ereinigt 
(however still to be treated as and 
to be declined like an Adj.). States, 
©taaten, from state, ©taat, m. pi. 6. 
us, ung. 
unto, ju. 


220 


w. 

walk, ©pajiergang, m. pi. 1. 
was, war, Imperf. of felit, to be; see 
Diagr. 

way, SB eg, m. pi. 2. 

we, wtr. 

what, was, wfc. 

whatsoever, was, was Immer. 

where ? wo ? 

who ? wer I i 

whole, ganj. 

why ? warum ? 

will, wotlen, Pres. Inch will; Yerb 
having B. Ch.; vowel : o. 


willt, wtffjl, from w often, Pres. Ind. 

will, Yerb having B. Ch., vowel o. 
wind, S3tnb, m. pi. 2. 
with, mit, Prep. gov. Dat. 
wood, £olj, n. (pi. wood, sticks of 
wood, 5; kinds of wood, 2). 
would, will, woften, Y. having B. Ch.; 
to be translated also by Subj. 
Imperf. of werben, see Diagr. 

Y. 

yesterday, geftern. 
yet, nod), inbeffen. 
you, ©ie, (to) you, 3^nen* 


c. 

(.A. P P E 1ST D I S) 

University 

Test and Practising Courses. 

a. English, Practice. 































































I 


















































N 












































Address. 




225 


Gentlemen, 

The Instruction which the hoys received is sufficient for even these 
advanced readings. Not that I mean to say , that 1 would have put 
them to work at them , indeed , I would have put them to work at 
nothing , alone. But all that would have been required for that pur- 
pose is time to fix what you saw they knew. The knowledge which 
they had at the close of the course , compares to the knowledge which 
they ought to have , as a baby does to the man. The baby IS the 
man ; all that makes the difference is time and the experience and 
practice , which time naturally furnishes. Of course , this time is an 
item in itself; but it makes a vast difference how we fiart. If the 
ftudent fiarts with a full knowledge of the whole subject before him , 
then all his future progress will have greatly gained in speed , and 
also in character. 

Tour trust has been so perfect , your readiness so complete , that I 
thought I could not better fhow you my appreciation than by inscribing 
to you these courses , which , though they lie in form beyond the sphere 
of the line of that instruction , still are covered by it. 

With great respect , Gentlemen , and with sincere thanks for your 
generous action , 

I remain your obedient servant 

The Author. 


To 

Messrs. James Freeborn, 

Andrew Nebinger, M. D. 

John Shedcen, 

Thomas R. Davis, 

James S. Whitney. 

Committee on 

Boys Central High School \ Board of Public Education , 

First District of Pennsylvania. 


Philadelphia. 




• ✓ 



% 























































> 



































227 


UNIVERSITY TEST AND PRACTISING 
COURSES. 


Cut (“carve,” parse, analyze) and translate : 

1. THE “DESERT ISLAN D” 

(An allegorical Narration ) 

Last piece in Ahn’s Method. 

S t e to tt ft c 3E n f c L 

Sin reiser, gutt()dtiger 9Jtann mollte einen feinet ©flaoen glucfiid) mad)en: er 
fd)eitfte i^m bie greibeit unb lief U)m ein ©d)tff mit oielen foftlicben SBaaren 
augrufien. „©ef ),“ fagte er, „unb fegle barnit in etn frembeg Sanb; mucbere mit 
biefen SBaaren, unb afler ©eminn foil betn fein." — £)er ©flaoe reifte ab; aber 
faum mar er einige 3 ^it auf ber ©ee, alg ftc^ ein l)eftiger ©turm ert)ob unb bag 
©d)iff gegen eine $lippe marf,baf eg fdjeiterte. £)ie fbflid)en SCaarett oerfanfen 
im SDieer, able feine ©efdbrten famen um, unb er felbfl erreid)te mit genauer 9iott) 
bag Ufer einer 3 nfel. £ungrig, nadt unb ol)ne Jpiilfe, ging er tiefer in’g Sanb 
pinein, unb meinte tiber fein Unglttd, alg er oon fern eine grope ©tabt erblidte, 
aug ber ibm eine HJienge Sinmobner mit gropem ©efcbrei entgegen fam. „£eil 
unferm Jrlbnige!" riefen jte it)m ju, fepten ipn auf einen prad)tigen SBagen unb 
fiitjrten ibn in bie ©tabt. Sr fam in ben foniglicben fPalaft, mo man il)m einen 
fPurpurmantel anlegte, ein £)iabem um feine ©tirn baub unb ibn einen golbenen 
2d)ron befteigen Uef. £)ie S3ornet)men traten um ibit ber, ftelen »or if)nt nieber 
unb fdjmureit im -Jfamen beg ganjen SSolfeg ibm ben Sib ber $reue. 

©er ueue $bnig glaubte 2 lnfangg, aUe biefe £errlid)feit fei etn fdfoner Jraum, 
big bie gortbauer feineg ©liideg tt)rt nid)t met)r jmeifeln lief, bap bie munberbare 
23egebenl)eit mirflid) mat)r fei. — „3d) begreife nidjt," fprad) er bei fid) fclbft, „mag 
bie 2 lugen biefeg munberlicfyen SSolfeg bejaubert fjat, einen nadten gremoling $u 
feinem $onig $u mad>en. ©ie miffen nid)t, mer id) bin, fragen nicbt, mo id) 
berfontme, unb fepen mid) auf it)rert 2 ^bron! 2 Qag ip bag fur eine befonbere 
©itte in biefern Sanbe?" 

©o bad)te er unb murbe fo neugierig, bie Urfadfe feiner Srbebung 3 U miffen, bap 
er fid) entfd)(of, einen oon ben 53orne^men an feinem ipofe, ber ibm ein meifcr 
■Sftann jit fein fdjien, um bie 2 lufl 6 fung biefeg 9tatbfelg ju fragen. — „ 33 e 3 ier!“ 
rebete er ibn an, „marum ^af)t ibr mid) benn ju eurem $onige gemad)t? S3ie 
fonntet it)r miffen, bap id) auf eurer 3«fef angefommen fei? Unb mag mirb enblid) 
1 


228 


rnit mtr roerben?" — ,,-^err !'' antroortete ber SSejier, „biefe 3 «f^ roirboon ©eiftern 
beroobnt. ©ie bdben oor langen 3 eiten ben 2 ldmdd)tigen gebeten, ibnen ja^rlic^ 
einen ©obn Sloamg ju fenbett, bafj er fte regiere. £)er 2 ldmdd)tige bat ib re 5 Mtte 
angenommen, unb lafjt ade 3 ab«, an bem ndmlid)en Sage, einen 9J?enfd)en an 
ibrer 3 nfel lanben. SHe (Sinroobner eilen ib»t, rote bu gefeben baft, freubtg 
entgegen unb erfettnen it>rt fur i^ren Dberl)errn; aber feine Stegierung bauert nid)t 
langer alg ein 3^b r * 3ft biefe 3^it Perfloffen unb ber bejitmmte Sag roieber 
erfd)ienen, fo roirb er feiner SBtirbe entfe^t ; man beraubt ibn beg fbniglid)en 
©d)inudeg unb legt U)m fd)led)te Kleiber an. ©eine Sebtenten tragen ibn mit 
©eroalt ang Ufer unb legen il)n in ein befonberg ba 3 U gebauteg ©d)iff, bag ibn 
auf eine anbere 3nfel bringt. S)ie 3nfel ift roiift «nb obe; fener, ber nocb Por 
roenigen Sagen ein madjtiger ^bnig roar, fomrnt b^r nadt an unb ftnbet roeber 
Untertbanen nocb greunbe. -iftiemanb nimmt an feinem Unglude Sbeil, unb er 
mufj in biefem roiifien 2 anbe ein traurigeg unb fummeroodeg Seben fiibren, roenti 
er fein 3ab r nidjt Hug angeroenbet bat. 9tad) ber SSerbannung beg alien .ftonigg 
gebt bag 33olf bem neuen, ben ibm bie 33orfebuttg beg Sldmad)tigen jebeg 3abr obne 
Slugnabme fenbet, auf bie geroobnlidje SBeife entgegen unb nimmt ibn mit gleicber 
greube, roie ben oorigen, auf. ®ieg, #err! ijt bag eroige ©efej 3 biefeg 9teid)eg, 
bag fein -ftonig roabrenb feiner Siegierung aufbeben fann." — „©inb benn aucb 
meine 33organger," fragte ber $onig roeiter, „oon biefer furgen £)auer ibrer Jpobeit 
unterrid)tet geroefen?" — feinem oon ibnen," antroortete ber SSejier, roar biefem 
©efet) ber S3ergdnglid)feit unbefannt: aber (Sinige liefjen fid) oon bem ©lanje, ber 
ibren Sbron untgab, blenben; fie oergafjen bie traurige 3ufunft, Unb oerlebten ibr 
3 abr ol)ne roeife $u fein. Slnbere berau|d)ten ftcb in ber ©itfjigfeit tbreg ©ludeg; 
fie getrauten fid) niebt, an bie roujie 3 nfel $u benfett, aug gurebt, bie 2 lnnebmlid)feit 
beg gegenroartigen ©enuffeg ju oerbittern; fo taumeiten fie, roie Srunfene, aug 
einer greube in bie anbere, big ibre 3 elt urn roar unb fie in bag ©d)iff geroorfett 
rourben. SBenn ber ungludlid)e Sag fam, fo fittgen Side an, fid) ju beflagen unb 
ibre SSerblenbung 311 befeufjen; aber nun roar eg $u fpdt, unb fte rourben oi)ne 
©d)onung bem Gtlenbe ubergeben, bag fte erroartete unb bem fte burd) 2Beigl)eit 
nid)t batten oorbeugen rooden." 

Diefe Srjdbluttg beg ©eijteg erfudte ben ^bnig mit gunbt, er fdjauberte oor 
bem ©cbidfal bet oorigen Jtiinige jttriid unb roiinfcbte, ibrem Unglude ju entgeben. 
(Sr fal) mit ©d)redett, bafj febon einige £Bod)en oon biefem furjen 3 ab rc serflojfen 
roaren, unb ba^ er eilen mujjte, bie iibrtgen Sage feiner Stegierung bejto beffer ju 
«ttben. „ 2 Beifer SSejier!" fpracb er ju bem ©eifte, bu baft mir mein funftigeg 
©cbidfal unb bie furjeDauer meiner foniglicben SJiacbt entbedt ; aber id) Mtte bicb, 
fage tnir aucb, roag i^ tt)un mu§, roenn id) bag (SiettP meiner SSorgdnger oermeiben 
mid.'' — „@rinnere bicb, ^err!" antroortete ber ©eift, „bafj bu nadt auf unfere 
3 nfel gefommen btft; benn eben fo roirft bu roicber binauggeben unb niemalg 
juriidfebren. Sg ift alfo ttur ein einjigeg Vittel utoglid), bem Mangel oorjubeu* 
gen, ber in jenent Sanbe ber SSerbannung brol)t: roenn bu eg ndmlid) fruebtbar 
macbj^ unb mit Sinroobnern befe^eft. S)iep ift itacb unferen ©efetjen oergonnt 
2 


229 


unb betne UnterHjanen finb bir fo ooflfommen geborfam, bag fie Ijtngeben mo bu 
fie binfenbefl. ©d)ide alfo eine s D f ?eitge Slrbeitgleute t)in«ber unb lag bic mufiett 
Setber in frudftbare 2Ieder oermanbeln; baue ©tabte unb iBorratbgljaufer unb 
Oerforge fie mit alien notbbiirftigen ?ebengmitteln. SSJiit Sinein SH3ort : bereite bir 
ein neueg fftetdj, bejfen Sinmobner bid) nad) beiner iBetbannung mit ^reuben auf* 
negmen. 2lber etle, lag ieinen 2lugenblid ungenu^t ooriiber geben; benn bie 3eit 
ifl furj, unb fe mcf)r bu jum 2tnbau beiner fiinftigen 2Bol)nung ttyujl, befto gliidli* 
d)er mirb bein Slufentbalt bort fein. Denfe, bein 3abr ifl morgen fd)on unt, unb 
nu0e beine Sreibeit mie ein Huger Slud)tling, ber bem Serberben entgel)en mill. 
SBcnn bu meinen 9tatl) oerad)tefl ober jauberfi, fo biji bu oerloren, unb langeg 
Slenb ifl bein Soog.” 

2)er $6nig roar ein Huger SOlann, unb bie IHebe beg ©eifteg gab feiner Snt* 
fd)liegung unb feiner XI)atigfeit gliigel. Sr fanbte fogleid) eine Sftenge Unter* 
t(>anen ab : fie gingen mit greuben unb griffen bag 3Berf mit Sifer an. Die 3rifet 
ftng an fid) $u oerfcbonent, unb et>e fed)g 'SfJZonben oergangen marcn, flanben fdjon 
©tabte auf il)ren bliifyenben 2Iuen. Deffen ungead)tet lieg ber ^bnig in feinem 
Sifer nid)t nad): er fanbte immer mel)r Sinmobner btnitber; bie folgenben maren 
nod) freubiger alg bie erften, ba fie in ein fo mol)l angebauteg Sanb gingen, bag 
ib« S^eunbe unb Slnoermanbten bemobnten. 

Unterbeffen fam bag Sttbe beg 3<H)reg immer naber. Die oorigen ^ontge 
batten oor biefem Slugenblide gegxttert, biefer fab ibm mit @el)nfud)t entgegen; benn 
er ging in ein Sanb, mo er fid) burd) fetne Huge SgStigfeit eine bauernbe SBobnung 
gebaut batte. — Der bejltmmte Sag erfd)ien enblid). Der $onig murbe in feinem 
3>alafte ergriffen, feiner foniglicben ^leibung beraubt unb auf bag unoermeiblid)e 
<Sd)iff gebracbt, bag it>n nacb feinem 'Berbannunggorte fiibrte. ^aum mar er aber 
am Ufer ber neuen 3nfel gelanbet, alg il)m bie Sinmobner mit greuben entgegen 
eitten, ibn mit groger Sl)re empftngen, unb fein £aupt flatt jeneg Diabemg, beffen 
#errlid)feit nur ein 3ab r mcibrte, mit einem unoermelHidfen 93lumenfranje 
fcbmudten. Der Mmadjtige belobnte feine SBeigbeit: Sr gab it)m bie Unfierblid)* 
feit feiner Untertt)anen unb mad)te il)n ju U)rem emigen itbnige. 

* * 

* 

Der reidfe mobltbattge Sftattn ifl ©ott; ber @Haoe, ben fein #err fortfenbet, ifl 
ber Sftenfdf bet feiner ©eburt; bie 3nfel, mo er anlanbet, ifl bie SBelt; bie Sin*, 
mobner, bie ibm freubig entgegen fommen, finb bie SItern, bie fur ben nadten 
SBeinenben forgen. Der Better, ber tgn oon bem traurigen @d)idfal, bag ibm 
beoorjiebt, unterrid)tet, ifl bie SBeigbeit. Dag 3<*bt feiner Siegierung ifl bag 
ntenfd)lid)e Seben, unb bie miifte 3nfel, mobin er gefiibrt mirb, bie fitnftige SBelt. 
Die '2lrbeitgleute, bie er babin fenbet, finb bie guten SBerfe, bie er mabrenb fetneg 
Sebeng oerrid)tet. Die ^bnige aber, melcbe oor ibm babingegangen finb, obne 
itber bag Ungtiid, bag if)nen brobte, nacbjuoenfen, ftnb jene tbbri^ten 5Jienfdben, 
bie-ficb blog mit irbifc^en Jreufcen bef^dftigen, obne an ibr Seben nacb bem Sobe 
ju benfen; fte merben mit emigem Sienb beflraft, meti fie oor bem Sb r ^ne beg 
0 HImd(btigen mit £dnt>en erfcbienen, bie an guten SBerfen leer finb. 

3 


230 


(The first sentence, of the “Dsart Island,” analyzed and translated. “Position 
of the Verb,” noted on margin.) 

(Words in parenthesis are not declined.) 

Cstn retcftler flut|tftdt|tg|er 9ftanrt rt>oCI|te etn|ert fetn|er ©fta»|ett (Qual. 1 

A rich beneficient (charitable) man would one of his slaves 

Noun.) glutf|(tcft macft|en: er fc^ertflte tft|m t>t|e 5ret[ftett (unft) t te § 1 

happy make he presented to him the freedom and let 

{f)|m etrt ©cfttff (mtt) »tel|ctt fpFt|ttdft|eit ffiaare|ti au£|ruft|en. 

to him a ship with many cosily wares, goods . to fit out. 

(The last sentence, of the same piece, analyzed. Position of the Verb, noted on 

margin.) 

2)ie $5ntc||e (after), rcclcftje (»or) if)|m fca|fttn|ge|$rtnci|en [tub, 1 3 
(oftne) (uftcr) ba|3 Un^Iucf, tfttt|en fcroft|te, nacft|$u|benf|en, finb3(3) 
jen|e tftor|tcftt|eit 9)lenfcft|eit, (Qual. Noun.) t>t|e (ftcft) (ftlo3) (mft) 3 
trt>|tfdft|en greube|n fte|fd)dft|tg|en, (oftne) (an) t ft | r Seftcn (ncuft) be|m (3) 
Xob|e (ju) benf|en; fl|e roerb|en (nut) enng|em (Stent) ftc|jfraft, (roett) 1 3 
fi|e (oor) oe|m Xftron|e te|3 2ld|mrtd)tltg|en (mtt) £dnfte|rt er|fdftetn|en, 
bi|e (an) gut|en 3Bcrf[en leer ftnb. 3 

Groups , 

(given here merely as a hint for students.) 

a. SMc „t viifte" „3htfel," 

,,U)iiffe, // desert ; btc UBiifte, the desert; serwiijlen, to desolate; SSerttmfhntg (bie) 
devastation. Dag Earned ijt bag ©d)iff ber 2Bujie: the camel is the “ship of the 
desert.” „Dcr ©reuet ber 23ertmifhtng," the abomination of desolation. 

Translate: SBettit iljr nun febeit tocrbct bctt ©reuel ber 23cr»ujlutt ; t, baron gtfagt tfl burdlj 
ben ^ropbeten Daniel, ba§ er jlefte an ber Ijetltgen ©tdtte (toer bag liefet, ber merfe barauf !) 
alsbann fliefye auf-bt'e Serge, trer trn jubifdbett Sattbe ijt. — 

Uitb bie (Srbe tear toujte unb leer — and the earth was without form, and void . 
Translate : Die Dafen ftnb fitr bie SBiijle, toag bie 3nfe(n ftnb im 9J?ecr — ein fpiafc bei 
fRufte fur ben 2Banberer. — Slrnteeit gennufien ein Sattb, armies devastate a country. 

2 . „r etcher/' 

reidp, rich; 9fetcf)tf)um, riches; ftdjj bereicbertt, to enrich; er bereidjert ltd) ntit frembem 
©ut, he enriches himself with the goods of other people. Opp. arm, poor; 
Strmutl) (bie), poverty. 

3. 

£fjat, deed ; tfjurt, tftat, getftan, to do, to act ; betljattgen, to prove, take part ; tftaflog, 
inactive, idle, without results, of action ; untftatig, idle, inac ive, without efforts or 
activity to produce results. lXntbat, misdeed; Untt)dtigfeit, inactivity; »ol)ltf)dtig, 
SBoftlJtftdthg'feit, benevolent, benevolence; SBobUl'dtigfcitgbeftrcbun ;cn, benevolent en- 
terprises; ,,©ofjlitf)dt!igifettigibe!ffrebiung!en.'' 2Bol)ltf)dtigfcttgattfldten (benevolent, 
charitable institutions), 3n ber £t)at, indeed. 

4. a im/' 

mannltd), masculiue, male, manly; 9ttannl)ett (tie), manhood, virility; bemannen, to 
man, toeq iip; ^anmdjaft (bie), soldiers, troops; manntoaft, manly, stout valiant; 
9D?annft<tftigteit, manliness, manhood, vigour; ( s XR.trttt— t>aft -ig— feit ; grammatical divi- 
sion of the word). „9Jfamt fur SZauit/' each (man), and so all, 

4 



— 231 — 

(Last piece in Adler’s Progressive Reader.) 

2. $)ie 3*cfHmtmttt<) t>c3 ?Jicnfd)cit. 

“Destiny of Man.” 

SBir crblttfcit auper una etne 93erbtnbung, in metier feiner fur pdj felbp arbciten 
fann, obne fur aQe inhere ju arbeiten, ober fur ben Slnberen arbeiten, obne jugleid) 
fur pdj felbp ju arbeiten, inbent ber glitcflidte gortgang einea s ))?itgIiebeS gltidlidjer 
gortgang fur aUe ift; ein Slnblicf, ber fdjon burdj bie Jparmonie, bte wir in bent 
SlHermannigfaltigPen erblicfen, innig mobltbut, unb unfern ©eip madjtigP erbebt. 
©as Snterejfe fteigt, wenn man einen 331icf auf fid) felbp tfjut unb Pdj ala 9Jtitglieb 
biefer gropen innigen SSerbinbung betradjtet. ©as ©efiibl unfrer SBiirbe unb 
unfrer ^raft fteigt, menu wir una fagen, waa jeber unter una pd) fagen !ann : 
/UJtein ©afein ijt nidjt oergebenS unb jwedloa ; id) bin ein notbwenbigea ©Iieb 
ber grofjen ^ette, bie won ber ©ntwicfelung bea erften 9J?enfcben jum pollen 
S3ewuptfein feinea ©afeina bis in bie ©migfeit binauagebt. 

SlUea, mas jemala grop unb weife unb ebel unter ben Sttenfdjen mar, biefenigen 
SBobltbater bea s )Jtenfcbengefd)led)ta, beren stamen id) in ber 2Beltgefd)idjte aufge* 
jeidjnet ftnbe, unb bie mefyren, beren iOerbienfte obne ibre Seamen oorbanben 
ftrtb, — fte aUe ^aben fur midi) gearbeitet; id) bin in if)re ©rnbte gefonttnen; id) 
betrete auf ber Srbe, bie fte bemofynten, ibre ©egen oerbreitenben guppapfen. 3 d) 
fann, fobalb idj mitt, bie erljabene Slufgabe, bie fie fid) aufgegeben fatten, ergreifen, 
unfer gcmein'famea S3rubergefd)led)t immer weifer unb glitdlidjer 3 U madjen; id) 
fann ba fortbauen, wo fie aufboren mupten; idj fann ben l)errlic^en Sempel, ben 
fie unooUenbet laffen mupten, feiner 23olIenbung naber bringen. „9lber idj werbe 
aufboren ntuffen wie fie/' biirfte pd) 3 ewanb fagen. D, ea ift ber erljabenjte 
©ebanfe unter alien ; id) werbe, wenn id) Jene erljabene Slufgabe uberneljme, nte 
potlenbet Ijaben; idj fann alfo, fo gewip bie Uebernebmung berfelben meine S3 e* 
fiimmung ijt, id) fann nie aufboren ju wirfen, unb mitljin nie aufboren ju fein. 

©aa, waa man £ob nennt, fann mein SBerf nic^t abbrecben; benn mein SBerf 
foil oollenbet werben, mitbin ift meinem ©afein feine 3 eit bepimmt — unb id) bin 
ewig. 3 dj fy&bt mit ber Unternebmung jener gropen Slufgabe bie ©wigfeit an mid) 
gerijfen. 3 dj b^ e ntein £aupt fupn empor gu bem brobenben gelfengebirge, unb 
ju bem tobenben SBafferfturje unb gu ben fradjenben, in eittem geuermeer fdjwirn* 
menben SBolfen, unb fage: „3dj bin ewig, unb id) tro£e eurer 9Jtad)tl 33red)t aUe 
berab auf mid); unb bu ©rbe unb bu £immel, oermifdjt eud) int wilben Sumultel 
unb ibr ©lemente aUe, fd)aumet unb tobet, unb jerreibet im wilben ^ampfe baa 
le^te ©onnenftiiubcben bea ^brpera, ben icb ntetn nenne! mein SBitle aUein mit 
feinem fejten $Ian foil fitljn unb triumpbirenb iiber ben Jrummern bea SBeltallS 
fcbweben; benn icb nteine S3eftimmung ergriffen, unb bie ijt bauernber ala 
ibr; pe ip ewig, unb icb pe." 


5 


3 ob- © ottlieb gtd)te. 


232 


(The first sentence analyzed. The words italicized, are words covered by Analogy, 
between English and German : Position of the Verb noted on the margin.) 

DI\E BE|STlMM|UNGr JDF\S MENSCH|EN. (Quality Noun.) 
Wir er\blick\en (ausser) uns ein\e Ver\bind\ung (in') welch\er 1 3 
Kein|er (fur) (sich) (selbst) arbeit|en kann , (ohne) fur all\e (3) 
Ander\e (zu) arbeit]en, (oder) (fur) de\n Ander\en arbeit|en, 3 
(ohne) (zu|gleich) (fur) (sich) (selbst) (zu) arbeit|en, (in\dem) (3) 
de\r gluck\lich\e Fort\gang ein\es Mit|glied|es gluck\lich\er Fort\ - 3 

gang (fur) all\e ist ; ein An\blick , der (sckon) (durch) di\e Har- 3 
monie , di\e wir (in) de\m all\er\mannig\falt\ig\st\en er\blick\en , 3 

innig wohl\thut } (und) unsem Geist macht\ig\st er\heb\t. 3 


3. “DAS KREtJZ DES SUDENS” 

(HUMBOLDT.) 

(First Sentence analyzed and translated. Words printed in italics are covered by 
Analogy between English and German. Positions of the Verb, noted on margin. 

(Seit) wir (in) di\e heiss\e Zone ein\ge\tre\ten war\en , konn\t\en 3 
since (from the time that) we into the hot zone entered were . could 

wir jed|e Nacht di\e Schon|keit de\s sud\lich\en Himmel's (nicht) 2 

we each night the beauty of the southern sky not 

(genug\sam) be\wunder\n, welch\er (in) de\m Maasz (als) wir 3 3 

sufficiently admire which in the measure as we 

(nach) Siiden vor|riick|t|en, neu\e *$item|bild|er unser\n Auge\n 
to the South advanced new constellations to our eyes 
ent\falt\e\te. 
unfolded. 


&reu; fcce 0u&cit§. 

©eit wir in bie Ijeifje 3°ne eingetreten waren, fonnten wir {ebe Sftacbt tie 
©cbonbeit fees fublidjen £immelg nicbt gcnugfam bewunbent, welcber in bent s )Jtaa§, 
al3 wir nacb ©iiben ttorrudten, neue ©ternbilber unfern Slugen entfaltete. 9ftan 
bat ein wunberbar befannteS ©efiibl, wenn man bei ber 2tnnaljerung gegen ben 
Slequator unb befonberS, wenn man son ber einen £emifpbare in bie anbere liber* 
gebt, atlmablicb bie ©terne nieberer werben unb jule^t herfcbrotnben fiebt, welcbe 
man con feiner erflen ^inbbeit an fennt. 9Wd)t3 erinnert einen SReifenben lebbaf* 
ter an bie unermefjlicbe Sntfernung feines 23aterlanbe$ als ber 2lnblic! eineS neuen 
£immels. $)ie ©ruppirung ber grofjen ©terne, einige jerftreute fftebeljterne, welcbe 
an ©lan 3 mit bet SRilcbjtrafje wetteifern, unb Staume welcbe burcb eine aufjeror* 
bentlicbe ©cbwarje auPgejeicbnet finb, geben bem fiiblicben £immel eine eigentbiim* 
licbe ipbbtDgnomie. Diefe$ ©cbaufpiel fe£t felbft bie ®inbilt>ung$fraft berfenigen 
in SSewegung, welcbe, obne Unterricbt in ben bob*™ SBiffenfcbaften, bas £immels* 
6 


— 233 — 

getroI6c gent Betradjten, mie man eine fcbbne Sanbfdfaft ober cine majeftatifcbe 
5luSftc^t bemunbert. 9)?an but nid)t notbig 33otani!er gu fein, um bie beifje 3 one 
be( bem blofjen Slnblide ber Vegetation gu erfennen ; ofyne .ftenntnifj in ber Slftro* 
ttomie erlangt gu buben, obne mit ben £immelgcbarten oon glamfirab uttb (a Saille 
ttertraut gu fein, fiiblt man, bafj man nid)t in (Europa ift, menn man bag ungebeure 
©ternbilb beg ©d)iffg ober bie pbogpboregcirenben 2Bolfen ^agellang am £origont 
aufjteigen ftebt. Die (Erbe unb ber #immel, atleg nimmt in ber 2lequinoctial* 
©egenb einen erotifdjen (Ebarufter on. 

Die niebern ©egenben ber Suft maren feit einigen Xagen mit Dampfen ange* 
fcbmangert. 2Bir faben erft in ber 9tad)t Bom 4. gum 5. 3utiug, im 1G. ©rab ber 
©reite, bag .ftreug beg ©tibeng gum erften DE)?al beutlid); eg mar flarf geneigt unb 
erfcbien pon 3^it gu 3^it gmifd)en SBolfen, beren Siftittelpunft, pon bem ^Better* 
Ieud)ten gefurd)t, ein ftlberfarbeneg 2id)t guriidmarf. 2Bemt eg einem 9teifenben 
erlaubt ift, pon feinen perfonlicben 9tubrungeit gu reben, fo fe^e icb bi«?w, ba§ id) 
in biefer 9tacbt einen ber Xraume meiner erften 3ugenb in (Erfitflung geben fab. — 

Die 33efriebigung, meldfe mir bei ber (Entbedung biefeg ^reugeg beg ©iibeng 
empfanben, murbe lebbaft oon benjenigen ^erfonen Per ©cbipmannfcbaft getl)eilt, 
toelcbe bie ^olonien bemobnt fatten*. 3n ber (Einfamfeit ber 9Jieere griifit man 
einen ©tern mie einen $reunb, oon bem man lange 3eit getrennt mar. 33ei ben 
3?ortugiefen unb ©paniern fcbeinen nocb befonbere ©riinbe biefeg 3ntereffe gu 
permebren: ein religtofeg ©efiibl macbt ibnen ein ©ternbilb lieb, bepn gorrn 
ibnen bag 3cic^en beg ©iaubeng in’g ©ebad)tni§ ruft, melcbeg oon ibren 23or* 
eltern in ben ffiiijten ber neuen 3BeIt aufgepflangt murbe. 

Da bie beiben gro&en ©terne, melcbe bie ©pip unb ben guff beg $reu$eg 
fcegeicbnen, ungefabr bie namlid)e gerabe 2luffteigung buben, fo mu§ bag ©ternbilb 
in bem 9(ugenblid, mo eg burd) ben Weribian ge()t, beinabc fenlred)t fteben. Diefen 
Umftanb fennen atle Volfer, rceld)e fenfeitg beg 2Benbefreifeg ober in ber fiiolicben 
£emifpbare mobnen. Sftan but beobacbtet, um melcbe 3eit in ber -Jtacbt, in oer* 
fcbiebenen 3^^feggeiten, bag ^reut im ©iiben gerabe ober geneigt ift. (Eg ift bieg 
eine Ubr, meic^e gicmlicb regelmafjig, nabegu um oier 'idtinuten taglicb, oorriidt, unb 
fein anbereg ©ternbilb bietet bei bem blofjen Sinblid eine fo leicbt angupllenbe 
33eobad)tung ber 3eit bar. 253ie oft bbrten mir in ben ©aoanen oon Venezuela 
ober in ber V3ufle, meld)e fid) »on Sima nad) Xrurillo erftredt, unfern SBegmeifer 
fagent „9ftitternacbt ift oorbei, bag ^reug fangt an fidj gu neigeit." 2Bie oft buben 
biefe SBorte uitg bie riibrenbe ©cene in’g ©ebdd)tnifj gerufen, mo $aul unb Vir* 
> ginie, ftpnb an ber Quelle beg glujfeg, fid) gum lenten 5J?al unterbalten, unb mo 
ber ©reig, bei bem Slnblid beg $reugeg im ©iiben, fte erinnert, bafj eg 3eit ift gu 
fdjeibenl Sllepanber oon £umbolbt. 


7 


234 


4. BEGINNING OF GOETHE'S FAUST. 

(PROLOG IM HIMMEL.) 

• FIRST STROPHE. 

(The words in Italics are covered by Analogy between English and German.) 


“ PROLOG IM HIMMEL.” 

LIE DRE1 ERZENGEL TRETEN VOR. 

I. 9trtpl)rtd. 

Die Sonne tont nach alter Weise 
In Bruclersphdren Wettgesang, 

Und ihre vorgeschrieb'ne Reise 
Vollendel sie mit Donnergang. 

Ihr Anblick giebt den Engeln Starke , 

Wenn keiner sie ergrunden mag ; 

Die unbegreiflich hohen Werke 
Sind herrlich wie am ersten Tag A 


2. ©rt&rtcl. 

Unb fcfynefl uitb uttbegreifltcfy fcfjneUe 
®re^t jtd) umfyer her (Srbe ^Pradjtj 
@3 roecfyfelt $arabtefe3*£efle 
Sflit ttefer, fcfyauer&ofler 9ladjt; 

* The first four lines, indeed the first two lines, already introduce and fix the 
idea of the universe, in its fullness and completeness, both, as to time and 
space ; in its harmony, dependence, and perfect trust. How? Analyze them. 

Note 2. The poet first starts upon drawing effects and these in their fullest 
extent: the sun in motion, with other suns. (“Tont,” allusion to the “Har- 
mony of the Spheres”). Then, passing to the earth, first to the motions of the. 
earth, itself, then the great and obvious natural motions on its surface, he 
gradually, by this process of descent and individualization, brings his description 
close to man, whose sphere he' points at and leaves at the same time in “ the clasp 
of thunder.” 

At that same moment, and with the disappearance of these kinds of effects 
which, as such, are beyond man’s sphere of action, the impulse discloses itself ; 
the material world makes room for a spiritual, the unit of the world hitherto 
presented as a physical unit, changes into a moral unit, maintained as such, as it 
is understood, by the “messengers of the Lord.” 

8 


235 


©g fcfjaumt tag ecr in breiten ^uff en 
21m tiefen ©runt ter gelfen auf, 

Unt $elg unt 9fteer rnirb fortgeriffert 
3n eroig fdjneUem ©pfyarenlauf.* 


3. 2D?tcf><tc(. 

Unt (Stitrme brattfen urn tie 2Sette, 

23om s 3JZeer auf’g 2ant, tom Sant auf’g 'tO'feer, 
Unt bilten routbent einc $ette 
J)cr tiefjteu iBirfung rtttgg umber. 

©a flamrnt ein blijjenbeg 35erl)eeren 
J)em $fate tot beg Donnerfcbla^g ;** 

®od) beine 33oten, £err, serefyren 
J)ag fanfte SSantein tcineg Jagg. 


3« ®rei. 

J>cr 2Inblicf gtebt ten ©ttgeln <Starfe 
SBenn feiner bid) ergriinten mag, 

Unt atie teine bol)ett SDerfe 

©int ijerrlid) ttie am erficn Jag. 

* Observe here the beauty of the double, even threefold motion, at one and the 
same time : the motion of the sea against the base of the motionless rocks, as 
“broad currents” caused by the rotation of the earth, and the motion of this 
moving sea, together with these rocks, in the revolution of t 1 e earth, around the 
sun. The first motion is to some extent, at least as to its kind of issue („fcf)aumt") 
presented as voluntary ; the latter is involuntary — „fortgertjfen;" — both, rock and 
sea — friend and foe, are here involved in the greater sweep and motion of the 
earth around the sun— buried alive each singly (singular : ^ttirt/') to fight out 
their contest as it were underground. 

This sun itself is already understood, as in motion with other suns: around a 
final, central point and place, of rest, unseen yet, though hinted at or disclosed in 
the motion of the angels, in these, their songs of praise. So, all is motion, here, 
and also all, with the centre, and in it, is rest. 

** Position of „tor," see Note to “Fire Scene, Song of the Bell,” piece 
No. 8, end. 


9 


236 


5. UNIVERSITY TEST COURSE. 

(The following pieces were selected from certain books as “ each time the first 
sentence on the page” of the book, as noted by a number given at random by the 
class.) 

Parse, practise, and translate. 

“Gcethe” page *T00” : £bun ©ie eg mir gu Siebe, entfernen ©i e bag Silt?, 
nicbt aug 3b«m 2lnben!en, nicbt aug 3b«nt 3 immer » fa geben ©ie ibm ben 
fcbbnfien, ben fyetUgflen Drt 3bret 2Bo|nung : nur bon 31>rer 23ruft entfernen 
©ie etroag, beffen Slabe mtr, bietletcbt aug iibertriebener Slengjtiicbfeit, fo gefabr* 
Ii<b fcbeint. („D ie 2Babl»ermanbfcbafte n".) 


“Goethe”, page “200” : 3» feinen ©ebicbten fanb er mtr ein monotoneg 
©blbenmafj, in roelcbem, burcb einen armfeligen Steirn jufammengebalten, ganj 
getneine ©ebanfen unb Smpftnbungen fic^ ^inf^leppten ; unb fo benabm er ftd) 
aucb Jebe 2lugfid)t, jebe Sufi, bie ibn bon biefer ©eite nocf) aflettfaflg ^atte mteber 
aufricbten fonnen. („2CU^eIm SDleifterg Sebrjabre".) 


“Gcethe”, page “224” : ©ie fab ibm in bie Slugen, bie bon berbaltenen 
Sb^nen blinften, unb fntete mil #eftigfeit bor ibm nieber. („2Bilbe(m 
SJleifterg SebUctbte"*) 


“Gcethe”, Sum of the above pages “524”: Der (Sntfcbluf! rief icb aug: 
bag ifl mobt atleg fcbon unb gut. Sftan fann fid) entfcbiiefjen, man fann etmag 
befcbliefjejt ; aber einem 3roerglein biefe ©bttergejlalt gu geben, mie baben cure 
SBeifen bieg ju ©tanbe gebracfa? („2Bilbelm VR e i ft e r g SCanberjabre".) 


“Gcethe”, Average of Sum as above, “174” : Dag ©cbaufpiel bauerte 
febr lange. Die alte Barbara, trat einigemal an’g genfter unb borcfete, ob bie 
^utfcben nicbt raffeln mottten. („2BiIbeIm SCfteifterg Seb^jabre".) 


“Shakspeare”, page “64”. (Duchess of York speaking) : 

©ie roeint urn einen Sbuarb, unb irf> aucb; 

3cb mein’ urn etnen (Slarence, unb fie nicbt; 

Die ^inber treinen Clarence, unb icb aucb; 

3cb mein’ urn einen Sbuarb, unb fie nicbt. 

2icb, gie§t ibr brei auf micb breifacb gefcblagne 
211T eure Dbranen : SBarterin beg ©ramg 
2BiU icb ntit 3ammer reicblid) fan erncfaren. 

(King Richard the Third ; II. Act, 2d Scene.) 


10 


237 


“ Shakspeare”, page “350” : 

Gr boret nid)t, er regt fid) nid)t, er riibrt fid) nicbt. 

2)er 2ljf’ ift tobt; icb mu§ t^n roobl befdpooren. 

(Romeo and Juliet, II, Act, 2d Scene.) 


“Shakspeare”, page “225” : 

VRan ftebt nicbt an, beg 91eibe3 eud) gu geib’n, 

2lu0 gurd)t, bap feine Sugenb bod) tf)n b&be, 

£ieltet ifyr il)n entfernt : baO frdnft’ i^n fo, 

Dap er tm 2Bal)nftnn ftarb. 

(King Henry VIII., II. Act, 2d Scene.) 

“Shakspeare”, Sum of the above pages (exceeding the number in the book). 

Average, “213” : 

21 IT bie ©emetnen 

©inb if)m bon Bergen gram, nnb fdb’n U)n gem 
3ebn Jllafter tief: fo mie fte Sieb unb Jreu’ 

Dent #ergog fcbenften, ber ibr giit’ger 23udingbam 
S3ei i(;nen Ijeifjt, unb afler ©itte ©piegel. 

(King Henry VIIx., II. Act, 1st Scene.) 


“Adler’s Progressive Reader”, page “1” : Gin Gfel begegnete einem bung* 
rigen SBolfe. „£abe SJlitleiben mit miv,“ fagte ber gitternbe Gfel; „id) bin ein 
armeO, franfeS $lper; fteb’ nur, toa$ fur einen Dorn id) mir in ben gup gctreten 
babe!" — (©. G. Ceffing.) 


“Adler’s Progressive Reader’’, page “106” : liefer ©runb, bie Jannen 
unb bie oerfaliene £utte macbten mirflid) in ber beft fre H grunen Sanbfcbaft gegen 
bie toeipen £aufer be$ DorfeS unb gegen ba3 prdd)tige neue ©c^lo^ ben fonber* 
barften 2lbftid). — 2. Sled). 


“Adler’s Progressive Reader”, page “90” : Gr lonnte enblidj nur mit 
2D?ul)e meiter geben unb ntupte jeben 2lugenblid £alt mad)en; babei bviiiiten ibn 
bie ©teine gang erbdnnlid). (©ebriiber ©rimm.) 


“Adler’s Progressive Reader”, “Destiny of Man”. “Last page” : (See 
above). 

“Adler’s Progressive Reader”. Sum of the above pages [exceeding 
the number of pages in the book]. Average : “102”. . 3a, reiner, frommer 
©eijt, id) toerbe anberg merben ; nimm mid) mieber an! — 2ld) fonntejt Du ein 
3etd)en geben, bap Du mid) gel)drt baft!" — (3ean $aul 5* Jttcbter.)- 

11 


238 


6. LONG WORDS. 

(Cut, parse, and translate. — Example (translate) t 

Un|ab|§dng|tg|!ettl^|er|Har|ung (be|r 23er|etn|tg|le|n ©taat|en). 

1* 23ebenfiid)fetten — 2 . cergebltcfyere — 3. unau3fbre$ltcbes — 
4. oerfyaltntjimafig — 5* UnjufnebenfyettSduferungen — 6* 2Bag* 
f)aljtgfett — 7. unubcrtrefflid) — 8. ©elegenf)ett6gebtd)t — 9* Blub* 
frummungen — 10, ftromabroam — 11, ^amenSaufruf — 12. 
monbsbeleucbtung — 13. 2lbf)dngigfettSgeful)l — 14. (Uitabbangig* 
fettSerfldntng) — 15. ©$road)l)eit$embftnbungcn — 16. nad)brucf* 
Itd>ere — 17. 2luffaffttng$tt)etfe — 18. Unburcf)brtng(td)fett — 
19. aufetnanbergefydufteS — 20. ©ofyltfyattgfeitsbeftrebungen — 
21. UnternefymungSgetft — 22. ^ampfbereitfcbaft — 23. Bei'ftbrung^ 
tterfjeuge — 24. ©eroiffenfyaftigfett — 25. neuerung$fucbtig — 
26. $ortfcfyntt$ben>egimgen — 27. Slmtefymbarfett — 28. jufam* 
menbdngenb — 29. uncmtcbbar — 30. ubcretnartbergebogen — 
31. inetnanbergeavbeitct — 32. SBa^rfcbeinncbfettsrccbnung — 
33, @taat^ft^ulbenttIgung0caf[ecaffter — 34, SBreunmateriaUen* 
Ijanblungegefyulfe. 


7. TRANSPOSITIONS. 


a. Parts transposed. 

(Explain, parse, translate the following sentence, first, as it stands, and 
then, explain the change in its meaning in consequence of each transpo- 
sition of its parts. The letters added in parenthesis to each part of the 
sentence, as printed here, mean and indicate hereafter, that part Third, and 
where needed, second positions as such, we take where they occur, or must be 
given, each time as granted. Write out these sentences, now in English letters, 
afterwards in German Script). 

First Sentence in Goethe’s „2Bilf)elm ifiteifler’S SBanterjabre": 

„3m ©fatten eined mad)tigen gelfen (©<$> fafj SBilfyelm (W) an graufer, 
bebeutenber ©telle (b), wo fid) ter fteile ©ebirg$weg urn eine ©de benim fcfyneH 
ttad) ter Siefe raenbete («>)". 


1. ©d) — W — b — tt> 

2. W — b — n> — ©d) 

3. ©d) — b — n> — AY 

4. b — to — ©d ) — W 

5. b # — tt> — W — ©cfy 

12 


6. W — ©d) — b — n> 

7. tu — b — w — 

8* ©d) — to — b — W 

9. W — » — b — ©dji 

10, n? — b — ©<$ — W 


— 239 — 

b. Words transposed. 


Explain : 

„3d) gab tag ©ucb cjeflern Slbeitt tm Sbeater metnem ©ruber" 

These words noted, and afterwards, as transposed : 

3d) (I'M 0<*b (2) | tag 33ud) (3)|geflern Slbent (4)|im Sweater (5)|meinem 
©ruber (6). 

The numbers indicate the word or words to which they are added and afterwards 
stand for those words. 


TRANSPOSITIONS. 

Write out, first in English letters, afterwards in German Script, and explain : 


1) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 4 , 

. 5 . 

, 6 . 

3 

19) 

2 , 

. 1 , 

. 3 , 

. 5 , 

. 6 , 

. 4 

2) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 5 , 

. 4 . 

, 6 . 

3 

20) 

2 • 

1 . 

, 6 . 

. 3 , 

, 5 . 

, 4 

3) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 5 , 

. 4 , 

. 3 . 

, 6 

21) 

2 , 

, 1 , 

. 5 , 

. 6 . 

, 3 . 

, 4 

4) 

1 

. 2 

. 6 

. 3 , 

. 5 , 

. 4 

22) 

2 , 

. 1 

. 4 , 

. 3 , 

. 5 , 

. 6 

5) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 3 , 

. 4 . 

, 6 . 

, 5 

23) 

3 . 

. 2 , 

. 1 . 

. 4 , 

. 5 . 

. 6 

6) 

1 

2 

. 3 

• 5 

. 4 

. 6 

24) 

6 , 

. 2 , 

. 1 . 

. 4 , 

. 3 , 

. 5 

7) 

1 

. 2 

. 3 , 

. 4 

. 5 . 

. 6 

25) 

3 , 

. 2 , 

. 1 . 

. 5 , 

. 6 , 

. 4 

8) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 6 , 

. 3 , 

. 4 . 

. 5 

26) 

3 , 

. 2 

. 1 . 

, 6 . 

, 5 . 

. 4 

9) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 5 , 

. 3 . 

. 4 . 

. 6 

‘ 27) 

6 . 

. 2 , 

. 1 . 

. 3 , 

. 5 . 

. 4 

10) 

1 

2 

. 5 , 

. 3 , 

. 6 , 

. 4 

28) 

6 . 

, 2 , 

. 1 . 

. 4 , 

, 5 , 

. 3 

11) 

1 

. 2 . 

. 4 , 

. 3 , 

. 5 , 

. 6 

29) 

5 . 

, 2 . 

. 1 , 

. 6 , 

. 3 

. 4 

12) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 4 , 

. 5 , 

. 3 , 

. 6 

30) 

5 , 

. 2 . 

. 1 . 

, 4 , 

. 3 , 

. 6 

13) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 6 , 

. 3 , 

. 4 . 

. 5 

31) 

5 , 

. 2 

. 1 

. 3 

. 6 

. 4 

14) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 5 , 

. 6 , 

. 4 , 

. 3 

32) 

5 , 

. 2 . 

. 1 , 

, 4 , 

. 6 , 

. 3 

15) 

1 

. 2 , 

. 3 , 

. 6 , 

. 4 , 

. 5 

33) 

4 , 

. 2 , 

. 1 , 

. 3 , 

. 6 , 

. 5 

16) 

2 

. 1 

. 3 , 

. 6 , 

. 5 . 

. 4 

84) 

4 , 

. 2 , 

. 1 , 

. 5 

. 6 

. 3 

17) 

2 

. 1 

. 4 

. 6 , 

. 3 , 

. 5 

35) 

4 . 

. 5 , 

. 2 , 

. 1 , 

. 6 , 

. 3 

18) 

2 , 

. 1 . 

. 3 , 

. 4 , 

. 5 . 

, 6 

36) 

4 , 

. 5 , 

. 2 

, 1 , 

. 3 , 

. 6 


37) “that”, (doest thou not know, that) 
— 1.8. 4. 5. 6. 2 

38) — 1 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 3 . 2 

39) — 1 . 6 . 4 . 5 . 3 . 2 

40) — 1 . 3 . 6 . 4 . 5 . 2 

41) — 1 . 5 . 6 . 3 . 4 . 2 

42) — 1 . 6 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 2 


13 


240 


8 . RECONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE-SCENE ' 

SONG OF THE BELL (Schilleb). 

We have tried to keep in the English as close to the German, as possible. 

• Translate : 

“Beneficient (salutary) is fire’s power when man restrains (the basis of the 
word in German, is “tame”, “zahm”; that is, restrains like the fierceness of a 
wild beast), watches it (it emphatic, in German); and what he forms, what he 
creates (works out), that he thanks (owes) to this heaven-power. 

Yet fearful (formidable) becomes this heaven-power when it casts off the 
fetters violently (entraffen, sich, refl., reg. gov. Gen.), along- treads (einher- 
treten) on the (its) own track (path), the free daughter of nature. 

Alas, if, let loose, growing without resistance, through the people-enli- 
vened streets it rolls the immense conflagration ; for the elements hate the 
art-products (Gebild, n. here sing.) of man’s-hand. 

Out of the cloud comes (descends, like of springs, quellen, irreg., second 
change in i) the blessing, pours the rain ; out of the cloud, without (discrim- 
inating) choice quivers (zucken, reg.) the flash (as dart, Strahl, m). 

Hear you it wail high from the steeple ? That is alarm ! 

Red, like blood, is the heaven ; that is not day’s glow ! 

What throng, streets up ! Smoke (here, Dampf, steam, m.) rolls up ! 

Flaring (flickering, flackern, reg.) rises the fire’s column, through the 
streets’ long lines (passages, rows, Zeile, f.) grows it growing (fortwachsen, 
a, u, a, second change in a) with (the) wind’s precipitancy (haste). 

Boiling (steaming) like out of furnace’s jaw, glows the air (pi.), beams 
crash, supporting posts tumble, windows rattle, children lament, mothers run 
wildly about (irren, reg.), beasts are wailing (from) under ruins ; all is a run, 
a rescue, a flight (Verbs, in German; rennen, retten, fliichten; rennen, B. C., 
the others reg.), day-bright the night is lit-up (“lichten,” reg.) 

Through the hands’ long “chain” (line) in a vieing (with emulation — um 
die Wette — ) flies the bucket, high in a (“the”) arc squirt springs (streams, 
of) water-waves. Howling the storm comes “flown” (flying) which roaring 
seeks the flame. 

Rattling into the dry grain it (“she”) falls, into the spaces of the loft (gran- 
ary, Speicher, m.), into the rafters’ dry trunks (“trees”), and as if in its 
blowing it would the earth’s heavy bulk (as a heavy weight in motion) tear 
along with itself in tremendous chase (Flucht, f.)*, grows it into the heaven’s 
hights, giant-tall-and-towering. 

* For readers of the original : The idea of the verb, reiszen , is here not so much 
reiszen or fortreiszen, but : li der Erde Wucht ” mit sich fortreiszen, as something 
extraordinary, from the bulk of the earth ; so, by poetical license, to suit the 
form of expression to the meaning, the : der Erde Wucht, — is put between the 
fort and the reiszen, so as to bring : 1., the force of the fort (away) to bear directly 

14 


241 


Hopeless (shorn of hope) yields man to the superior (Gotter — ) strength; 
idle sees he his works and as an admiring spectator (bewundernd) perish (go 
down). 

Burnt-out (empty-burnt) is the place (as a place where formerly something 
stood, Statte, f.), of wild storms (the) rough couch ; 

in the empty, (void, appalling as by emptiness, flde) window-holes (..ca- 
verns”) dwells the horror (awe, Grauen, n.), and the heaven’s clouds look high 
(from their high place), in, “into” (what is left). 

upon the : der Erde Wucht , and 2., to give emphasis to the: der Erde Wucht, over 
the emphasis of the fort, as a prefix, in fact to change this: der Erde Wucht , into 
a kind of prefix to the verb reiszen and to give to it, as such, precedence in meaning 
over the fort and therefore the place nearer than “fort,” to the verb. To “ tear 
away,” (pulling violently) the bulk of the earth is here an idea inferior in weight 
to the idea of a tearing or pulling of the : earth’ weight or bulk, at all. An 
effect of a similar kind those readers who read to appreciate the beauties of a 
piece, will notice in Faust, Prolog, second strophe, 

“Da flammt ein blitzendes Verheeren dem Pfade vor des Donnerschlags 
m the “ vor ,” in its double meaning and the force of its position, being both a 
prefix and at the same time, a preposition, viz. : in the one case or direction, 
“dem pfade” vor-flammen, so as to show the path to the bolt, and, in the 
other, flammen, that is, as we see it, vor dem schlag. 


Closing Remark : — After all this we say : the knowledge of the Grammar of a 
language is, in itself, not the knowledge of the language, but equally : to study or 
attempt to study a language without learning its grammar, is child’s work, that 
is, the most impossible kind of work that may be imposed upon man. If you want 
me to learn a language like a child then give me the conditions of the child, the 
leisure, the direct interest a child has in each word and above all, the time, the 
time, and a household of people that talk to the child, if you mean its own language 
and then the child has yet to study the grammar of this its own language, for 
years. The best way and method to learn, at least a living tongue is to commence 
learning it when a child. But, when that has not been done, and to learn it like a 
child, can not be done now from want above all other things, of opportunity and 
time, then let us at least save time — even if we should not be able to make time 
as we decidedly do in this book — by condensation of practice, that is, rules, 
though these rules again we may learn like a child by constant practice and 
application. 

Five students enter with each individual student into the study of a language . 
student mind, student memory, student tongue , student ear, and the readiness of 
all to combine for action. 

To the fifth we here give the time saved from the time of the other students, to 
ear and tongue the middle of the book, to mind and memory the beginning, in 
fact the whole of the book ; though of these and all the students, none is under- 
stood to be entirely off duty in any part of the book. 

May it please the children . 


15 



Author’s Advertisement 

OF THE 

AMERICAN SYSTEM OF TEACHING: 

PHILOSOPHY OF 
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

1 Lecture, Abstract. 


PREPARED FROM PRINTED COPY. BY 

’ * 

TH. P. MATTHEWS, Esq., 


PHILADELPHIA. 


THE “WROUGHT”. LANGUAGE. 

INTRODUCTORY TO A COURSE OF LECTURES 

ON THE 

PHILOSOPHY’ OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE; 

OR, 

(gngUsIt (gxptahml on gviimplc amt Reduced to £Cau\ 

By Prof. C. C. SCHAEFFER, 

LATE PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF 
PENNSYLVANIA. 


[ABSTRACT.] 

Special Theme of English Part of Lecture. — By what gen- 
eral quality does English pronunciation differ from that of any 
other language? 


M Y friends, though we may not agree 
as to anything else, we certainly 
shall as to the magnitude of the task 
in the course before us. Yet, could you 
see the labors which underlie it, the 
Charts which have been made, large 
and small, then you would think if 
there are any results to be obtained by 
honest digging, they probably have 
been brought out here, though even 
then you might doubt whether they 
were at once in such a shape as to 
make them accessible to all. 

They were not so originally, but, 
thanks to the class-room, they are so 
now. 

Among these Charts, to which I 
have just referred, is one, the “ Square 
Inch,” or, representation of the or- 
dinary Latin, model verbs, showing 
every voice, mood, tense, number, and 
person of each and all of the follow- 
ing, viz., the common model verbs, 
Amo, Moneo , Rego, Audio, representing 
the four regular conjugations ; the four 
deponent verbs, Hortor, Tueor, Fruor, 
Molior ; the verb in “ io ” in third con- 
jugation, Capio ; the verb both depo- 


nent and in “io,” Patior, and the 
auxiliary “sum” — the whole being 
printed from type on the space of one 
inch square. 

If, on examination, the notation of 
any one form of any of these verbs 
should be found wanting on the 
“ Square Inch,” I would not press any 
further the claims of the system. But, 
if the Chart is complete, as it is, then 
I would beg to see in the saving of 
time effected by simplification in this 
one important item, which is but a 
type of many others of a similar kind, 
the prospect of new National schools, 
wherein the Classics can be taught and 
kept side by side, with the study of the 
so-called “exact” sciences. 

Who will plead the dropping of the 
“ classics ” from want of time, when, 
with a copy of the “Square Inch ” en- 
larged, one-half of the inflectional 
forms of Latin can be taught and 
learned in an hour or two ? 

Who will plead it, for convenience, 
that is money’s sake, where that want 
is supplied ? 

If we had the statue of Olympic Zeus, 


Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1875, by C. J. C. SCHAEFFER, in the Office of the Librarian 

of Congress, at Washington. 

244 2 


THE “WROUGHT" LANGUAGE. 


245 


which was made of gold and ivory, 
would you counsel the breaking up of 
the statue to enlarge with the gold 
pieces on the # nature of gold, or to 
illustrate with the ivory pieces a lec- 
ture on elephants? Gold was part, 
and ivory was part ; but the statue of 
the god, made in the image of man, 
was a whole; and man, made in the 
image of God, is a whole ; and in 
studying language, we study that whole. 

Will any one fight the “classics,” 
and with what? With the Natural 
Sciences ? 

But Language itself is a science — 
the chief of sciences — giving unity and 
a definition to all the others, and teach- 
ing, not the nature of stones, reptiles, 
insects, birds, but the nature of man. 

Let us, then, join in teaching the 
Natural Sciences with the Science of 
Language, as Logic incarnate, at their 
head. 

As this assertion of the scientific 
nature of Language is so novel that 
your minds naturally require some- 
thing more than a mere assertion to 
feel assured of its truth, it is my pur- 
pose now to show you some of the phil- 
osophical reasons or principles upon 
which all language is based, and by 
the use of these “keys” to unlock be- 
fore your eyes, vast and hitherto un- 
visited chambers of thought. 

It was as early as twelve years ago, 
that, in order to explain the “Umlaut,” 
or modification in German of the vowels 
a, o, u * into ii, o, ii, I presented for the 
first time, in public, a certain little dia- 
gram, showing the natural position of 
the vowels in the mouth in the moment 
of utterance. The explanation was 
afforded by a certain contrast of the 
vowels visible in this their position, 
such contrast consisting in the differ- 
ence of the direction of two lines which 
we are to regard as the lines of the 
vowels. 

* Pronounced as in the English words father, 
open, true. 


A, o, and u* were put in this order 
on a horizontal line ; e and if were put 
in this order on a line starting from 
the other line at the point “a”, more 
vertical than the first and yet follow- 
ing it in its general direction. A curve 
bending around a and enclosing the 
lines, indicated the cavity of the mouth, 
the throat being at the point “ a ; ” 
thus : 



Diagram showing the natural position of the 

vowels in the mouth, in the moment of utter- 
ance. 

This difference in the direction of 
the lines, along which the vowels are 
uttered, was explained as caused by a 
corresponding difference in the direc- 
tion of thought when engaged in the 
production of vowels. 

The a, o, u were explained as caused 
by an action of thought in the direction 
of the idea of the object, forward; the 
e and i by an action of thought in the 
direction, or axis, of the idea of the 
subject, upward. Just as in like case, 
hand and arm, to show these directions 
to the eye, either press forward 
or rise upward & I, so here lips and 
tongue to note these directions to the 
ear engage in movements the effect of 
which in one case, the lips protruding 
and the tongue yielding, is a pushing 
of the sound bodily forward, a, o, u; in 
the other, the tongue rising to press 
with its back towards the wall of the 
mouth — the lips yielding and reced- 
ing — is a raising of the place and 
narrowing of the space of emission of 


t Pronounced like ay in say, and ee in see. 


246 


THE “WROUGHT” LANGUAGE. 


sound, and thus a rise of sound, bodily 
upward, first e, then i. So that the 
idea of the object sounded is a, o, u ; 
that of the subject e, and i: the “a,” 
from its place and position at the point 
of deflection of the lines, being, in so 
far as they deflect, a neutral vowel, and 
as such in the classics neuter vowel, and 
in so far as they are lines, the mother 
vowel, and thus, in the classics again, 
the feminine vowel, though as far as 
a certain direction is a feature of the 
lines, it counts with the lower line. 
Personal pronouns of the first person 
singular may therefore be expected to 
show, as they do show, the upper 
vowels, those of the second person, the 
lower, and this is all brought about as 
naturally, simply, mechanically, and 
instinctively, as a form of notation by 
the muscles of the lips and tongue as 
is another form of notation, elsewhere, 
by those of the hand and arm. 

The a, o, u are, therefore, the objective 
vowels, the e and i the subjective ones. 

Further, as the line of the lower, ob- 
jective vowels a, o, u, the horizontal 
line, is at the same time the axis of 
the intent of speech, communication to 
others, the vowels located on that line 
we may consider the positive vowels, and 
those located on the line deflecting from 
this (to the exclusion therefore of the 
“a”) the negative ones. Moreover, as 
the vowels of the lower line, the a, o, u, 
are produced by an act of inflation, or 
accumulation of sound, we call them, 
as we find them to be, the heavy, sub- 
stantial vowels; whilst those located on 
the other line, effected by a process of 
compression, attenuation or diminu- 
tion of sound, we call, as we find them 
to be, the light, formal, accessory 
vowels. 

The “Umlaut” is a modification of 
the objective, positive, heavy vowels, by 
the subjective, negative, light ones ; and 
if the principles involved in the fore- 
going explanation are right, must occur 
wherever the meaning of the word is 


similarly modified. That this is actu- 
ally the case, we shall now proceed to 
demonstrate. 

In the first place, then, the “Um- 
laut,” as a form of grammatical inflec- 
tion, takes place in the Plural of mas- 
culine and neuter words, wherever in 
the meaning Individuality is lost in 
plurality; for example, Hut, hat, plural 
Hide. As the individuality of the 
single hat is lost in the mass of hats, 
so in German the positive vowel u, as 
the exponent of the individuality of 
the hat is modified in the notation of 
the mass of hats as a unit, by the 
addition of a vowel of negation, e.* 
But the names of objects, which, al- 
though we may conceive them in a 
plural, from natural laws exist only 
one at a time or place, in their plural 
form retain their vowel unimpaired, 
that is, reject the umlaut. 

Take, for instance, Mond, moon, in 
the sense of planet or satellite. We 
can speak of many planets or moons 
as a plural, but from the laws of space 
they can only exist one by one. So we 
say Mond, plural Monde, the character 
of the word continuing in the sound 
of the word. So, Tag, day. We can 
speak of a thousand days, but in these 
thousand days there is always but one 
day at a time. There can be no two 
days together as there are two or more 
hats. When one day is, the other has 
ceased to be or has not yet come, so we 
say: Tag, plural Tage. So the word 
Thron, throne, the seat of a king; 
plural “ Throne,” without the umlaut. 

A political earthquake may, by shak- 
ing the kings off, change their seats 
into chairs, which then as chairs, take 
the umlaut, Stuhl, Stiihle, but as long 
as they are “ thrones,” seats of kings, 
emblems of sovereignty vested in one, 
they preserve their separate individu- 
ality. So we say Thron, plural Throne. 
In such feminine words, however, as in 


* Strictly “ insertion” of e (i), into the u. 


THE “WROUGHT” LANGUAGE. 


247 


the singular are generic and general,, 
and represent the idea of mass, the um- 
laut is employed in the plural to negate 
and destroy the generality , and thereby 
create individuality. So Kunst, Art, plu- 
ral Kiinste. Art is general ; Arts are in- 
dividual : — so we use the umlaut. Arts 
are gained from art by a process of 
division; hats from hat by a process 
of multiplication. The Umlaut, then, 
as we see it here, is simply negation, of 
what is, like the pull of the bell in the 
case of a street car. If the car has 
stopped, the pull means go ; when it 
goes, the pull means stop. So the um- 
laut applied to words, in the case of 
genders of opposite meaning, produces 
opposite effects. Applied to masculine 
and neuter words, the character of 
which is individuality, it negates and 
destroys individuality, and creates gen- 
erality ; applied to feminine words, such 
as are generic in their meaning in the 
singular, it negates and destroys gener- 
ality and creates individuality. And 
the same is true in all forms of its 
action throughout the German gram- 
mar. 

Having seen in German what the 
vowels mean in their contrast, I asked 
myself, what do they mean in their 
relation, as vowels of the same line, 
that is, how do the a, o, u, on the one 
line refer to each other, and similarly 
how are the a, e, i on the other line 
related. A special and superior field 
for examination of such relationship 
was afforded by the Latin verb, where 
the vowels of the subjective line, a, e,i, 
are employed as the connecting vowels 
of the verb, forming its main classes. 
This led, first, to the analysis of the 
actions expressed by the verb, and here 
I found that all actions expressed by 
one and the same class of verbs are as 
much of one and the same character 
as actions, as the verbs composing that 
class are of one and the same character 
as verbs, and that the connecting vowel 
of the verb, corresponds in its char- 


acter as a vowel with the character of 
the action expressed by the verb. 

But what are then these classes of 
action? To arrive at this in the short- 
est way of illustration possible, let us 
analyze here the simple action to strike 
so as to stun, the parts of which action, 
are: 

1. The raising of the hand of A., 

2. The moving of the hand of A. 
toward B., 

3. The contact of the hand of A. 
with B., and 

4. The effect left on B., 

the first two of which we see on the 
side of the subject A., and may, there- 
fore, call them phases of subject-nota- 
tion; and the last two w r e see on the 
side of the object B., and may, there- 
fore, call them phases of object-notation: 
finally, the character of each phase in 
its turn and order we may designate as 
follows : 

1st Phase — Phase of impulse crea- 
ted; 

2d Phase — Phase of motion directed, 
these two being phases of subject-nota- 
tion; 

3 d Phase — Phase of contact effected, 
and 

ith Phase — Phase of effect left; these 
two being phases of object-notation. 

The character of the last of this 
series of phases, as the last phase in- 
tended, fixes the character of the whole 
action, to strike so as to stun, as an 
action of the fourth order, or action of 
object-notation, effect left. 

But, if the party A., instead of going 
the full length of the phases with his 
intent of action, had stopped short in 
the third phase, then we would have 
an action of the third order, of contact 
effected — an action of object-notation; 
for instance here, to hit. And if he 
had stopped short in the second phase, 
with his intent of action, then we would 
have an action of that order, action of 
motion directed, but of subject-notation, 
for instance, simply to move hand or 


248 


THE “WROUGHT” LANGUAGE. 


arm. And if the raising of the hand 
itself had been the action, for instance, 
to give a sign or warning by that mo- 
tion, then we would have an action of 
that order, an action of impulse created, 
and of subject-notation. So that we 
see : 

1. In whatever phase the movement 
and intent of the action is arrested, the 
character of that phase fixes the char- 
acter of the whole action as an action 
of the character of that phase ; and 

2. As we have phases of subject-nota- 
tion and phases of object-notation, so 
we must have actions of subject-nota- 
tion and actions of object - notation ; 
and 

3. That all actions must partake of 
the character of one of these phases, 
because they are the only forms of rela- 
tion possible between subject and object 
in action. 

Actions must be either of impulse 
created, of motion directed, of contact 
effected, or of effect left, the first two 
kinds being actions of subject- notation, 
the last two being actions of object- 
notation. 

Applying these phases of the idea 
of action to the action of lips and 
tongue in producing the voice, we find 
on the subjective line the “vowels of 
action,” that is, each of the subjective 
vowels is an exponent of the character 
of a phase. — 

It would be too tedious a task to 
review the numerous Latin verbs, and 
show that their distribution among the 
four conjugations exactly corresponds 
with the character of the actions they 
express ; but there is one important ap- 
plication of the foregoing principles, 
which I now proceed to illustrate. 

In the case of verbs which are syn- 
onymous in meaning, if they belong to 
different conjugations, we can clearly 
and exactly distinguish the meanings 
by considering in each case the char- 
acter of the conjugation. Take, for in- 
stance, the synonymous verbs, 


1, docere and erudire, to teach. 

2, ardere, urere, to burn. 

3, ligare, nectere, vincire, to bind. 

4, lavare, lavere, to wash. 

Upon the following diagram 


Actions of 

Actions of 

SUBJECT-NOTATION 

OBJ ECT-NOTATION. 

1 . 

2. 

3. 

4. 

IMPULSE. 

MOTION. 

CONTACT. 

EFFECT 

Examples. 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) ligare 

(4) lavare 

docere 

ardere 

urere 

nectere 

lavere 

LEFT. 

erudire 

vincire 


such of these words as belong to the 
first conjugation are placed in the first 
column, such as belong to the second 
conjugation, in the second column, and 
so on. 

The headings show the character of 
action expressed by each conjugation 
in accordance with the principles al- 
ready announced. At a glance, the dif- 
ference of meaning between these syn- 
onyms, now becomes apparent. Thus, 

(1.) Docere, to teach, action of 2d 
class, motion directed, sw6/ec<-notation, 
is to teach as far as the subject is con- 
cerned, motion of knowledge directed 
toward an object; 

Erudire, to teach, to instruct, action 
of 4th class, of effect left, object-nota- 
tion, is to teach as far as the object is 
concerned, effect left by teaching on 
the object, party taught. 

(2.) Ardere, 2d class, to burn, is to 
burn as far as the subject is concerned, 
motion of fire, “flame,” directed to- 
ward an object; the name of the act of 
setting fire, as a crime, concerning as 
such a crime the subject, is in English, 
therefore, derived from ardere, arson ; 

Urere, 3d class, to burn, is to burn 
as far as the object is concerned, effect 
of contact, of fire, with the thing burn- 
ing. The name of that effect, concern- 
ing as such the object, is in English, 
therefore, derived from mere, combustion. 

(3.) Ligare, to bind, 1st class, im- 
pulse created, sti£/ec£-notation, is to 
bind as far as the subject is con- 


THE “WROUGHT” LANGUAGE. 


249 


cerned: Impulse, attitude of binding. 
“Ligabamus in agro,” says, therefore, 
Joseph ; 

Nectere, 3d class, effect of contact, ob- 
ject-notation, is to bind as far as the 
object is concerned, effect of contact, 
of binding, with the object, thing 
bound ; 

Vincire, to bind, 4th class, effect left, 
o&/ec?-notation, is to bind as far as the 
object is concerned, effect left by bind- 
ing, or to leave bound, and so forth. 

In Greek, the character of these 
classes of verbs is found in the “ con- 
tract” verbs. 

Let us now consider, “ By what 
general quality the pronunciation of 
English differs from that of any other 
language.” 

I would say, that whilst all other 
languages are cast languages, that is, 
languages where each element of pro- 
nunciation is sounded separately, Eng- 
lish is a wrought language, that is, the 
elements of pronunciation, under the 
grasp of that energy which is in- 
herent in the English character, are 
not sounded singly as elements, but 
together as a unit of sound. The first 
question that presents itself here, is, 
whence this energy, and in such an 
abundance as to be a national charac- 
teristic? Of course it has not grown 
naturally on the soil of Old England. 
There is usually as great a variety of 
growth, in the crops, on the mental 
soil of a people as there is on the 
natural soil, and no such intensity of 
growth and excess in one particular 
direction as fairly to absorb or change 
the other. This excess of energy then 
was not produced organically, as growth 
from one people ; it was brought about 
mechanically, by a conflux of people. 
Those that, from impulses of their own, 
followed the current of events tending 
westward, and came sword in hand to 
England, were not the lazy ones from 
home. They already represented, in 
the fact of their coming and leaving 


home, an “excess” of energy over that 
of those who remained. These energies 
collected, had on the island no outlet, 
no way of development, by absorption 
externally ; so they had to develop 
themselves, by friction, internally, the 
result of which process was, that men 
lost those qualities in which they dif- 
fered, and maintained those in which 
they agreed. Thus, energy became the 
principal characteristic of the race. 
This energy, as shown in life, we call 
“ Individuality ; ” this individuality 
asserted for all, we call “Human 
Eights;” these human rights enacted 
in history, we call “Magna Charta.” 
And the same energy that enacted 
“Magna Charta” gave to the language 
its big, capital “I,” by which I mean 
the spelling of the personal pronoun 
of the first person singular with a 
capital, whilst the other pronouns have 
none, a feature occurring only in the 
English tongue. 

Having thus accounted for the pres- 
ence of this energy as a characteristic 
of the race, I shall proceed to show 
some of its effects upon the language. 

This big “I,” then, or this con- 
centrated energy having first created 
walled homes — “every man’s house his 
own castle” — created a walled language, 
fortified, at home, behind the teeth — 
as it is the common observance of all 
that study English in connection with 
French, that English is spoken more 
as if the party speaking would rather 
keep than issue this his bond, of 
speech, whilst French bodily, as in a 
raid, breaks through and rallies out- 
side of the “ ramparts” — this in keep- 
ing with the directions of the two kinds 
of mind, the one homeward bound, the 
other outward and abroad. 

Again, the big “I,” in vindication 
of its impulses, crushed the “genders.” 
For, whilst in other languages the 
gender is a form oPrelation in action, 
as, for instance, in German, where what 
is force is masculine, what is form is 


* external. 


250 


THE “WROUGHT” LANGUAGE. 


feminine, and what is neither is neuter, 
in English all things as devoid of will, 
are neuter, except where, by some gen- 
eral or special act of grace, in life, or 
poetry, they are endowed with will, 
when the particular kind of supposed 
will as read in the action, fixes the 
kind of gender, then as its notation. 
A horse running away and overturning 
in its career a lamp-post may be desig- 
nated as a “he,” though otherwise, un- 
der ordinary circumstances, it might 
appear in print as a “she,” or an “it.” 
The sun as the “ruler” of stars, thus, 
may he made masculine (though in 
German it is feminine), and the 
“moon,” from the softness of its light, 
may be made feminine, “she” (though 
in German it is masculine, “he”). To 
confound gender and sex, and say that 
in English, “simply” there is gender 
where there is sex, were to confuse the 
language, if languages ever could be 
confused from want of knowledge of 
their proper treatment, and to compel 
it to use, or introduce, “gender” deep 
down among the remotest things of 
creation to the lowest plants and an- 
imals, of which the language denies 
gender, although they certainly possess 
sex. 

Again, the big “I,” in defence of its 
motion, broke up the sentences. For 
whilst in other, transmitted and mon- 
archical, tongues the place of the part 
is fixed by the idea of the whole, in 
republican English the form of the 
whole is dependent upon the movements 
of the parts. The English, simple, “ re- 
publican” sentence: (1) I shall recon- 
sider the matter, (2) after having read 
the letters (3) which I have received, 
changed into a monarchical or military 
form, as in German, reads thus : (1) I 
shall the matter, (2) after I the letters 
(3) which I received (2) read have, (1) 
once more consider. 

And last, to prove its effects, this 
“capital” I, in its efforts of pronun- 
ciation, CRUSHED the words; that is, 


the elements, as has been said, are not 
sounded singly, but are changed under 
the grasp of mind into a unit of sound, 
the word. 

Take an example : here is the word 
“Sir.” Put these letters before any 
people that ever lived, and see whether 
in pronouncing they will get what you 
get. They will pronounce the s, the i, 
the r. Whatever they may get, they 
will never get your sound. Why? 
Theirs are cast languages. They pro- 
nounce the individual letters. Their 
sound of the word would be the sum 
of the sound of the letters, not their 
product, as in English. But now put 
these letters sir under the rollers of 
mind, sound them not as in a cast 
language, but as in a wrought lan- 
guage, and what happens? The liquid 
strong r is driven through the trans- 
parent feeble i; the word is sounded 
as if spelled SV. Now, put this before 
any people that ever lived, and see 
whether, when they sound it, it will be 
anything but your English Sir, the 
vowel sound supposed to exist here as 
an independent sound, being but the 
clash of the consonants in the energy 
of the pronunciation of the word as a 
unit. 

So it makes no material difference 
whether we have 

Sir, 

bird, 

turn, 

heard, 

work, 

herd, 

worth, 

her, 

or burn, 

all have the same sound, the same 
cause, producing the same effect, a 
language, cast iu its spelling for the 
eye, being changed for the ear, into a 
language “wrought.” 

You will now see, that in English 
pronunciation everything depends : 
Firstly, upon the character of the let- 


251 


THE “WROUGHT” LANGUAGE. 


ters, and not only upon their individual 
but also upon their social qualities, as 
in a wrought language a letter which 
might get along very well with another, 
might not get along at all with a third, 
or might show as neighbor of one let- 
ter qualities different from those it 
shows as the neighbor of another: and 
further, not only upon their open and 
obvious, but also upon their hidden or 
recondite qualities. Take for instance 
the sound of “all” in English. Whence 
this touch of an o sound in all? I found 
that the vocal element iu the sound of 
the liquid letters corresponds in the 
case of each liquid to one particular 
vowel sound. In the case of the l this 
is o. This “o” in the case of two l’s, 
or an 1 backed by a consonant, able to 
resist the loss of sound, in a wrought 
language is evolved in sufficient force 
or volume to be slightly audible, so 
that the letters a 1 1 are pronounced as 
if spelled with the part of an “o,” 
which “o” sound, as a representative 
of the word “all,” is maintained wdiere 
all is meant, as in 11 always,” though 
spelled with but a single 1. 

Secondly, upon the degree of energy 
of pronunciation involved, which may 
change with the meaning, use, or der- 
ivation of the word or its combination 
with other words or parts of words, etc., 
etc. 

Take, as an example, the word court, 
pronounced court when meaning the 
thing court itself, pronounced shorter 
in court' ier, when meaning court, not 
for its own sake, but as the notation of 
the character or office of a party living 
at court ; and pronounced very short in 
cowW'eous, when not court as form, but 
court as force is meant, meaning, in 
general, civil, and in the manner of 
courts, whether inside or outside of the 
thing court itself. And 


Thirdly, on the fact that in English 
a letter does not spend its force on its 
place in the word, but that the mode 
of uttering one particular letter may 
affect all . the others, as in a piece of 
wrought iron every part of the mass 
affects every other part (whilst in cast 
iron the force of every part is spent in 
its place as a part), so that in English 
a letter at the beginning may affect the 
pronunciation of a letter even at the 
end. 

The details of all this belong to the 
course. But enough has been said to 
show that English is a language unique 
in itself, that it has not its like, and 
probably never will have, as the con- 
ditions which produced it are not likely 
to occur again; that it swings as a 
language on its own axis, can be cut 
like diamond only by its own dust, 
measured as a language only by its own 
laws; how it must baffle and deride 
any efforts to catch it with “classical” 
rules, not made for English: how it 
will slip through here like an eel, or 
dash through there like a whale ; how 
truly cosmopolitan this language is in 
its power of naturalization of words by 
simply “stamping” them, and indelibly 
thereby changing their character ; that 
every English word has more specific 
gravity than a word of any other lan- 
guage, because in a smaller compass of 
sound it holds a greater meaning ; and 
finally, that this “English” tongue re- 
sembles more than any other knowu 
language that kind of speech of which 
the poet says : 

“ Wie ein Engel mocht’ ich sein, 

Ohne Korpershranke, 

Deren Unterredung ein 
Tonender Gedanke.” 

“ Like an angel I would be 

With these fleshly bonds unbound: 

In communings heavenly — 

Every thought a tuneful sound ! ” 


9 
























































































Prof.C.C. 

Sclav tier's, 

Ute Professor 
of the German 
Language in ths 


University of Pennsylvania, 


Series of 
Contributions 
to the Centennial 

Exhibition. 


CONTRIBUTION 

yv. No. 1. 

Latin, the Square Inch. 

LANGUAGE IN THE SIMPLICITY OF ITS STRUCTURE 

VINDICATED. 

The Classics SAVED *r»s9 in Schools. 

The American System.) (Latin, the Verb, the Reg. Verb. 

THE 


SQUARE INCH 


Perf. etc. Pass., with Sun. 
( Sum. ) 

Pres. Ind. Subj. 

I in perf. " »» 

Fut. 

Pree. Inf. 


Latin REG. Vert. 
TEN VERBS & Sum, 
Eleven Verbs iu all, 
eaoh Verb In full. 


1st. 8.) 

STEMS dr 

Pres. Ind. \ 

VOWELS gen' I, ( 
group, 6t Pr. Inf.( 

Import. fig- 
Fut.j lSin «' 

P,». S. 

Pr **iSubj. 


NOTES. 

II. 




lON-eo TU-3FRU-'4MOL- III. P. 
CAP-13REO-* : 

io, \ 4AUD-io- 
I. r P. 

(M 6 I 


“I 8upina 
2&“it|\ [a. urn > 


III. 


Part. 


( ifrs 8U.m"( 3C-t,fum irt 

X 0 ri* 

E*. )FUT-'uru». 

j m 1 fur 

"S. -- F.PEUi-0 

V * mur 

SU.) la 1 ndu* • 

{mini 

ES. 2el)nd»[-* 

Jntur 

8U. :3s 1 ) o,um 
4tei(nr I« • 

i gr-im|cram!E«fi<jm ti« 


er • “ IES->*| -r* 

U. *,!• u «-• 

it *. : I’ tot. I SI. 


• io ba 
K o| a id 

•Ibif! e io 

• if r 

•o ea; a in 

II. 

|Not DEP l ft v 
•CAP in 4 1 2 u 
F2S .-I 30* - x 

r« j,ifc> CAP; [4iv ..wn. !«.«•«• ■ | | •* . - 

3PuY3P iujFU- 1 ( i* ) %• |SU *to |«for. 
HffVowPrIA|,IICUP-|'PATi-IlPAS3 

Perf. Ind. | Subj.! Plup’f. 

• jFut. Perf. 

Active (Perf. Inf. 


Fut. Inf. 

Fut. Part. Act. 

APPENDIX. 
Fut. Part. Pas*. 

jGen.Dat. 
lAec. Abl. 


GerundJ', 


i«t« ' 

if 

■ mu. 

ittii 3Pu 
rrunt\Eii* 


|p,„. 


2 8 . 

2 A 38. 

)2 PI. 

3 PI. 


Hmperat. 


Every Voice. Mood. Tense, 
Number and Person of each 
and all those Verbs, given 
in full. 


ENDINGS, In which tho Conjugations agree- Italic ». 
T7'T7 , ‘V. 'Connect. Syllables in which the Conj. differ, ROMAN. 

I *|( CAPITALS. STEMS.) 

"Sum” and connections effected with "sum," in the MIDDLE. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1873, by C. J. C. Schaeffer, in 

the Ofllce of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


This page, when sent in, with twenty-five cents, directly to the 
publishers, will pay for copy of “ Verb Chart.” 

This page, when sent in, with fifty cents, directly to the publishers, 
will pay for copy of Verb Chart, and copy of “Umlaut, Centennial 
Sketch,” in English and German. Address the Publishers, 

CHARLES, BROTHER & CO., 
Prof. C. C. Schaeffer, Agent. Philadelphia. 


See Note on “Umlaut,” end of High School Course. 


253 







“HIGH SCHOOL PRIMER” 


(GEKMAN). 

(. Record of Prof. Schaeffer’s Philadelphia Boys’ Central High School Instruction Test Course , 

Four Hours and a half Through.) 


[PROM COPY OF PROF. SCHAEFFER’S ADDRESS TO THE PAPERS OF PHILADELPHIA.] 

“I have stated to the gentlemen composing the High School Committee that, by means of this 
system, German could be taught to all the children in the public schools of Philadelphia other than 
the High School, without additional expense, simply through my devoting one half-hour a week 
for twelve weeks to the instruction of the young lady pupils at the Girls’ High School. At the 
end of that time they would be competent to teach the book again on becoming themselves teachers 
in the Primary and Grammar Schools. Commencing with the children’s part of the book (pages 
139 to 220) in the Primary School, and continuing with the grammar part (pages 19 to 138) in the 
Grammar School, and employing but twenty minutes twice a week in the former, and thirty-five 
minutes once a week in the latter, the information thus early imparted, kept up and increased 
weekly and growing with the pupil’s growth, would amount to a considerable store of knowledge 
and practice, at an age when instruction now-a-days just commences — that is, at the age when the 
pupil enters the High School. To effect this desirable result, I would cheerfully give my services 
in teaching the young ladies at the Girls’ High School, free of charge to the city, and the authorities 

could make their own contracts as to the printing of the requisite book or books. 

“Should the want of time at the Girls’ High School for such an additional study be objected, 
since during the time of the instruction but little actual home study is required, I would take 
this objection as an additional argument in favor of giving the greatest scope and sway of applica- 
tion to a system which promises such reduction in time in others — their own proper studies in 

English. (See Abstract, ‘The Wrought Language,’ at end of book.)” 

I am, very respectfully, 

CH. C, SCHAEFFER. 

“ P. S. — As the High School Committee, so far as the introduction of German into the lower public 
schools is concerned, cannot act directly, I have thought best to mention what I suggested to those 
gentlemen to the people’s representatives, — the newspapers, — so as possibly to aid the efforts, should 
any be made in the direction pointed out above, namely, of teaching German in all the American 
Schools by means of the ‘American System.’ — S. 

Philadelphia, November 9, 1875.-’ 

[OVER.] 


POINTS IN THE SYSTEM 


1. Substitution of principles for arbitrary rules. 

2. Simplification of the subject-matter of Etymology, illustrated and fixed by diagrams. 

3. Methodical progress and utilization, at every new step, of the results obtained at every 
previous step. 


Those who read the book will be able better to understand, and to appreciate, the terms of 
expression used in the following: 


Preparatory Department of the P. E. Divinity School, 
Philadelphia, December 23, 1868. 


At the dose of a series of lectures delivered by Prof. C. C. Schaeffer before the First Class in 
this Institution, it gives me great pleasure to make the following statement of simple facts, going 
to establish the PRACTICAL value of a system whose scientific beauty and consistency must 
appear plain on inspection. 

The Class had reached, in Latin , the Verb, but had not begun its study. At this point the 
Professor took them, and in eight lessons he had familiarized them with the system of Latin 
inflections — verbs, adjectives, and nouns — to a degree which surprised and delighted me. I now 
consider them capable, in point of familiarity with the inflections, of reading a simple Latin 
author. 

In Greek, although the close of the term forbade the completion of the cotirse, the results ivere 
even more striking. 

It is difficult to express my gratification at this result. I must say, however , that as a 
remarkable economy of toil , as a j)hiloso2>hic yet lucid exposition of its subject-matter, I look on 
this system as one meriting universal support and adoption. 

R. FRANCIS COLTON, Head of Preparatory Department. 

Major R. S. Smith, late President of Girard College, writes as to Latin : 

“So complete and concise a conspectus of the whole structure of the language is displayed , 
and rendered easy of mastery, that in order to possess the whole field of Latin literature, very 
little labor is required betjond that necessary for the acquisition of the vocabulary .” 


LIST OF PUBLICATIONS 

CONNECTED WITH THE SYSTEM, IN PRESS OR IN PREPARATION. 


BOOK OE GERMAN. Grammar and Readers. Large. 
350 to 400 pages. 

LATIN CHARTS; Especially the Verb. Simplified. 
GREEK; The Yerb. Chart, with Text. 

HAMLET; Analysis of. With Diagram. 


ILIAD ; or, The Dawn of Day. A Song of Peace and 
Praise, in a Framework of War. 

THE KEYS TO ROME ; or, The Explanation of the 
Origin of the Latin Conjugations in the Laws 
of Action 


Address, as to either or all of them, the Publishers, 


CHARLES, BROTHER & CO., Philadelphia. 

frir As soon as the works are ready, jnotice will be sent to those 
who may have sent in their names. 


Send for Sample “High School Primer.’’ 


[OVER.] 


Synopsis of Contents of Book continued from First page of Cover. 

8. Children’s Part, Child’s Story Book, I. Child's Own; or. The Story of the 
Little Drop ; this first, as “story,” then as little drop, that is, first it is taught as story 
and then in a series of repetitions, employed to teach sounds, words, sentences, and so 
to do each time heavier work like the drop in the story (see story of the little drop 
in full, on one page, page 98, High School Course) until as visible drop and story it 
disappears in the river of connected speech, with its shore line of English words, that 
is (the river :) II. Live Strings of Words, a Series of German Readings, offered and 
translated as words and, with the river, is lost in the opeu sea, of practice, that is, 
(the “sea”:) III. Child's Readei % , German Text without English Words, or, the 
child now “at sea,” on the “little drop”; Compass : Dialionary , pages 141-220. 

.Note on story : A gem of a story, by Goethe, set for the child as a drop. 

C. Advanced Readings, “ University Test and Practising Courses" for adults, to try 
and so test the range of the rules given in the High School Course, consisting of 
selections from Goethe, Schiller, Shakespeare, Aim’s Method and Adler’s Progressive 
Reader (as “last pieces” in the case of these two books); with definitions of the 
aims of the course, in Address to High School Committee (page 225), see also Closing 
Remark (page 241), — pages 225 to 241. 

(Illustrations, as cuts, side notes, foot notes, also, reprint of the examples under the former heads of rules, 
for a review of either, and this in different types, for further ends, in various parts of the book). 

23 s * The diversity and variety of the text of the book as different courses, will ceriaiuly be found an advan- 
tage in its use, with classes. 

Time tables for schools will be furnished by the author, on application. 


“ Fly Leaves,” Sketches : Keys, to Germau, Latin (Greek), English, pages 244-251 y 
contents of “ Square Inch,” explained, page 244. 


Papers referring to Prof. S.’s courses (Latin and Greek) : 

Prepakatoky Department of the P. E. Divinitt School, 
Philadelphia, December 23, 1868. 

At the close of a series of lecture ? delivered by Prof. C. C. Schaeffer before the First Class in 
this Institution, it gives me great pleasure to make the following statement of simple facts, going 
to establish the PRACTICAL value of a system whose scientific beauty and consistency must 
appear plain on inspection. 

The Class had reached, in Latin, the Verb, but had not begun its study. At this point the 
Professor took them, and in eight lessons he had familiarized them with the system of Latin in- 
flections — verbs, adjectives, and nouns — to a degree which surprised and delighted me. I now 
consider them capable, in point of familiarity with the inflections, of reading a simple Latin 
author 

In Greek, although the close of the term forbade the completion of the course, the results were 
even more striking. 

It is difficult to express my gratification at this result. I must say, however, that as a remark- 
able economy of toil, as a philosophic yet lucid exposition of its subjeet-matter, I look on this 
system as one meriting universal support and adoption. 

R. FRANCIS COLTON, 1 lead of Preparatory Department . 

Maj >r R. S. Smith, late President of Girard College, writes as to Latin : 

“So complete and concise a cons»ectus of the whole structure of the language is displayed, and 
rendered easy of mastery, that in order to possess the whole field of Latin literature, very little 
labor is required begond that necessary for the acquisition of the vocabulary." 


Price of book, $1.75 ; to the trade, $1.00 ; in quantities, for schools, cloth, at the 
rate of $1.25 each copy. 

Sold for cash, only. 

Owing to the immense expense which this system has entailed upon its author, 
ranging over a long series of years in the shape of heavy advances made, iu time and 
money,” all orders for this book will and can be filled only on receipt, at the office of 
publication, with the order, of the amount. Remittances may be made by means of 
post office money orders, registered letters, drafts, to the publishers direct, or 
through the Messrs. Glaxton . Remsen Sf Haffelfinger. C oivperthwait Sf Co , I. Kohler, 
Messrs. Schafer ^ Koradi Q. Andre Co., Philadelphia. A specimen copy of this 
book will be sent, postage paid, on receipt of $1.00. 

Address, the Publishers, 

CHARLES, BROTHER & CO., 

Prof. C. C. SCHAEFFER, Philadelphia, P. O. Box 1995. 

Agent; 125 N. Seventeenth st., Phi la. 




























































* 






























































U AA. a a a 











